JP7789428B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Gaming machines that suppress the occurrence of malfunctions are known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such gaming machines, for example, the occurrence of malfunctions in random number values is suppressed and appropriate random number values are updated.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2023-128131

However, there are various types of malfunctions that can occur in gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in preventing malfunctions in gaming machines.

The present invention was made to solve the above-mentioned problems and aims to prevent malfunctions in gaming machines.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that reference symbols and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this section indicate correspondence with the embodiments described below to aid in understanding the present invention, and do not in any way limit the present invention.

[Application Example 1]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
A unit portion ( channel unit 270 ) attached to the front side of the game board;
A power supply board box (450) that houses a rectangular power supply board (162) attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board;
a game control board box (430) attached to the rear side of the game board and accommodating a rectangular game control board (80) on which a game control microprocessor (81) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted;
a presentation control board box (420) that is attached to the rear side of the game board at a position different from the game control board box and that houses a presentation control board (90) on which a presentation control microprocessor (91) that can control the progress of presentations based on commands from the game control board is implemented;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
On the front side of the front frame,
Frame lamp (66) in place
At least one
The light emission mode of the frame lamp is as follows:
A light-emitting mode for when power is restored that is emitted when no malfunction of the gaming machine occurs when power is restored (light-emitting patterns LPS1 and LPS2 in the initial operation of the light-emitting pattern determination table TL of the lamp 66, and light-emitting patterns LPS1 and LPS2A in the initial operation of the light-emitting pattern determination table TLA of the lamp 66);
A plurality of types of light-emitting modes for effects that are emitted during effects (light-emitting patterns LP1 to LP28 in the variable effects of the lamp 66 light-emitting pattern determination table TL and in the winning game, and light-emitting patterns LP1 to LP28 in the variable effects of the lamp 66 light-emitting pattern determination table TLA and in the winning game),
There is at least
The light-emitting mode for power recovery and the plurality of types of light-emitting modes for performance are different light-emitting modes,
The game control board includes:
A first electronic component mounting surface (mounting surface 80m) on which various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are mounted;
a first electronic component non-mounting surface (non-mounting surface 80u) on the opposite side of the first electronic component mounting surface, on which various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are not mounted;
A plurality of first electronic component through holes (electronic component through holes 80ta) through which lead wires of various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are inserted;
a solid ground on the first electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground of 80 mg on the mounting surface side);
a solid ground on the first electronic component non-mounting surface (solid ground 80ug on the non-mounting surface);
a plurality of first ground through holes (ground through holes 80tc) that electrically connect the solid ground of the first electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the first electronic component non-mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the game control board, lead wires of various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are inserted from the first electronic component mounting surface into the first electronic component through holes and protrude from the first electronic component non-mounting surface, and are soldered on the first electronic component non-mounting surface, and among the plurality of first ground through holes, some of the first ground through holes along a specific side of the outer edge of the game control board are not filled with solder, and the proportion of the first ground through holes that are filled with solder is higher than the proportion of the first ground through holes that are not filled with solder,
The power supply board includes:
a second electronic component mounting surface (mounting surface 162m) on which various electronic components are mounted;
a second electronic component non-mounting surface (non-mounting surface 162u) on the opposite side of the second electronic component mounting surface, on which various electronic components are not mounted;
a plurality of second electronic component through holes (electronic component through holes 162ta) through which lead wires of various electronic components are inserted;
a solid ground on the second electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground on the mounting surface side: 162 mg);
a solid ground on the second electronic component non-mounting surface (solid ground 162ug on the non-mounting surface);
a plurality of second ground through holes (ground through holes 162tc) that electrically connect the solid ground of the second electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the second electronic component non-mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the power supply board, lead wires of various electronic components are inserted from the second electronic component mounting surface into the second electronic component through holes and protrude from the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and are soldered on the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and among the plurality of second ground through holes, some of the second ground through holes along a specific side of the outer edge of the power supply board are not filled with solder, and the proportion of the second ground through holes that are filled with solder is higher than the proportion of the second ground through holes that are not filled with solder,
The performance control board includes:
A third electronic component mounting surface (MPU mounting surface 90m) on which a plurality of electronic component pads on which various electronic components including the performance control microprocessor are mounted are formed;
A fourth electronic component mounting surface (MPU non-mounting surface 90u) is a surface opposite to the third electronic component mounting surface, and has a plurality of electronic component pads on which various electronic components not including the performance control microprocessor are mounted.
a solid ground on the third electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground of 90 mg on the MPU mounting surface side);
a solid ground on the fourth electronic component mounting surface (solid ground 90ug on the non-MPU mounting surface side);
a plurality of third ground through holes (ground through holes 90tc) electrically connecting the solid ground of the third electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the fourth electronic component mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the performance control board, various electronic components including the performance control microprocessor are soldered on the third electronic component mounting surface while being placed on electronic component pads, and various electronic components not including the performance control microprocessor are soldered on the fourth electronic component mounting surface while being placed on electronic component pads, and a higher proportion of the third ground through holes are not filled with solder than are filled with solder,
The game board has a through hole (2ad) for attaching the unit part,
The unit part includes:
A flow-down surface ( 274c) through which the game balls can flow down and which does not have an entrance through which the game balls can enter ;
An inclined portion ( 274a) connecting the flow-down surface and the play area;
A through hole ( 274b) for inserting a screw (screw 201) at a predetermined position on the flow-down surface;
A protrusion (202) disposed near the through hole and protruding rearward from the rear side of the flow-down surface;
is formed,
The through hole and the protrusion are respectively arranged on the upstream side of the downflow surface and the downstream side of the downflow surface,
The protrusions on the upstream side of the downflow surface and the downstream side of the downflow surface are inserted into the corresponding mounting through holes, and the screws are inserted from the front side of the downflow surface into the through holes on the upstream side of the downflow surface and the downstream side of the downflow surface and screwed to the front side of the game board, thereby fixing the unit part to the game board, and game balls flowing down the downflow surface can come into contact with the heads (NH) of the screws on the upstream side of the downflow surface and the downstream side of the downflow surface .
A gaming machine characterized by:

This invention makes it possible to prevent malfunctions in gaming machines.

FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. 1 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining decision tables T1 to T4. An explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 when the time is not reduced. An explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 during time-saving mode. An explanatory diagram of the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a V-type opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. 10 is a flowchart of a main control process. 10 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the special diagram 2 pre-determination processing. This is a flowchart of the preliminary judgment processing of Special Figure 1. 10 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 10 is a flowchart of a special action process. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 10 is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. This is a first flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a second flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 10 is a flowchart of a game status management process. 10 is a flowchart of a game state reset process. 10 is a flowchart of special electric device processing. 10 is a flowchart of a V-type opening/closing member operation process. 10 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. 10 is a flowchart of a V-area sensor detection process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of reserved balls. 10 is a flowchart showing a sub-control main process. 10 is a flowchart of a sub-side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 10 is a flowchart of a pre-reading effect determination process. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a pre-determination information storage area. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51. 10 is a flowchart of the variable effect start processing. An explanatory diagram of the core performance pattern determination table T52. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. This is a flowchart of processing during variable performance. 10 is a flowchart of a display control process. An explanatory diagram illustrating the movement pattern of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the first movable part 14. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the second movable part 15. An explanatory diagram illustrating the second state of the frame movable device 69. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the display effects of the sub-display screen 64. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the position of a sensor. 10 is a flowchart of a power-on process. 10 is a flowchart of a power interruption monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart of a sub-side RAM clearing process. 10 is a flowchart of a sub-side power interruption recovery process. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the effects that occur when the RAM is cleared. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the effects that occur when power is restored after a power outage. 10 is a flowchart of a reel error cancellation process. This is a flowchart of the process of returning a movable device to its original position. This is a flowchart of the initial operation processing of movable props. This is a diagram to explain the movable prop origin return operation 1. This is a diagram to explain the movable device origin return operation 2. This is a diagram to explain the initial movement of the movable device. This is a diagram to explain the initial movements other than those of movable props. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a retry operation. This is a diagram to explain the changing effects during the initial operation of the movable device. 10 is a flowchart of an error monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart of an error notification process 1. 10 is a flowchart of an error notification process 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an error notification. A diagram to explain the LED effects of movable props. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing divisions for explaining the game area. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the upper structure of the center unit. A front view showing the prize slot unit and the lower left structure of the center unit. An oblique view showing the prize slot unit. An explanatory diagram showing a display for distinguishing the ball entrance of the prize entrance unit. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the left lower structure of the center unit. 1A is a front view showing the reinforcing unit, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 1A is a front view showing the transparent cover unit, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the flow path unit. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a flow path unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the shape of the obstacle nails. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board. 3A to 3C are schematic diagrams of a plan view, a cross-sectional view, and a bottom view of various through holes formed in the main control board. This is a schematic diagram showing a continuation of Figure 85. FIG. 85 is an enlarged view of area A in FIG. 84. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing an outline of the layout of various electronic components mounted on the MPU mounting surfaces of the sub-control board and the image control board. 3A to 3C are schematic diagrams of a plan view, a cross-sectional view, and a bottom view of various through holes formed in the sub-control board and the image control board. This is a schematic diagram showing a continuation of Figure 89. FIG. 89 is an enlarged view of area B in FIG. 88. FIG. 89 is an enlarged view of area C in FIG. 88. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface of a power supply board. 3A to 3C are schematic diagrams showing a plan view, a cross-sectional view, and a bottom view of various through holes formed in a power supply board. This is a schematic diagram showing a continuation of Figure 94. This is a diagram showing an overview of the arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface of the dispensing control board. A schematic diagram of a plan view, cross-sectional view, and bottom view of various through holes formed in the dispensing control board. This is a schematic diagram showing a continuation of Figure 97. FIG. 73 is a front right perspective view showing an enlarged view of area F in FIG. 72. 10 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a gaming machine frame 50. FIG. FIG. 101 is an enlarged and simplified front view of the H and I regions of FIG. 100. FIG. 101 is an enlarged and simplified front view of the J and K regions of FIG. 100. 4A and 4B are simplified views of the top and right side of a cover member 431 and the right side of a cover member 441, respectively. FIG. 101 is an enlarged and simplified front view of the L region of FIG. 100. 10 is a diagram for explaining a light emission pattern determination table TL of a lamp 66. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a light emission pattern determination table TLA of a lamp 66. FIG. 73 is an enlarged front view of the G region in FIG. 72, and a cross-sectional view of the gg section in the front view.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of the Gaming Machine Figure 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the following description, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as coinciding with the left-right direction as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires gaming balls based on the player's firing operation, and when a gaming ball lands on a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of gaming balls to the player based on the winning result. The gaming machine 1 comprises a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, with the gaming board 2 attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to a front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 comprises an outer frame 51 (base frame portion) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame 51. The outer frame 51 is fixed to a gaming island (not shown) in the gaming hall (hall). The inner frame 52 is attached to the front frame 53 in an openable and closable manner, and is also attached to the outer frame 51 in an openable and closable manner. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit located in front of the outer frame 51 and inner frame 52, and includes a handle 60, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62, an effect button 63, sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U), a sword member 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 69. An opening 54 is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the play area 3 of the game board 2 can be seen through the opening 54.

The handle 60 is located at the lower right end of the front frame 53 and launches game balls with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation angle. Movable frame movable bodies 69 (also called frame movable gadgets 69), which are movable gimmicks, are provided on the right and left sides of the handle 60. The frame movable bodies 69 are configured so that two members, located on the left and right sides of the handle 60, can move left and right in the left and right directions. Each of the two members is formed from a flexible, flat member, and its main surface is configured to move toward and away from the handle 60. The frame movable bodies 69 normally remain stationary in retracted positions (Figure 1) away from the handle 60 on the left and right sides, respectively. They can move (advance) from the retracted positions toward the handle 60 and come to rest in a position where they touch the handle 60. When in the advanced position, the frame movable bodies 69 come into contact with the handle 60 or the right hand of a player operating the handle 60.

The ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is located below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is located below the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The effect button 63 is an operating unit located near the ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and is operated (pressed) by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is located inside the effect button 63 and is configured to vibrate up, down, left, and right in response to effects, etc. The sword member 65 is an operating unit shaped like a sword and can be pressed downward by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation in which the entire sword member 65 is pressed downward, and a second operation in which the entire sword member 65 is pressed upward. The sub-display screen 64 is a screen of a liquid crystal display device and includes a right sub-display screen 64R, a left sub-display screen 64L, and an upper sub-display screen 64U. The right sub-display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub-display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub-display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub-display screen 64R and the left sub-display screen 64L are arranged in pairs across the game board 2. The upper sub-display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub-display screen 64R, the left sub-display screen 64L, and the upper sub-display screen 64U are arranged to surround the opening 54 of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamps 66 include a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and are positioned above the front frame 53 to provide light effects during play. The right frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element positioned between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonal light-emitting element positioned between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are composed of a left speaker 67a positioned in the upper left of the front frame 53 and a right speaker 67b positioned in the upper right, and provide sound effects during play.

The game board 2 includes a play area 3, rail members 4, board lamps 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, a fixed winning device (center hole) 19, a regular variable winning device (electric chute) 22, a gate (through chucker) 28, a first large winning device (first attacker) 31, a second large winning device (second attacker) 36, a large winning opening start port 17, a regular winning opening 27 (regular winning opening 27), an outlet 16, and indicators 40.

The play area 3 is composed of a transparent panel 2a, and is the area where game balls launched by operating the handle 60 flow down. It has multiple protruding game nails (also called "obstacle nails," hereinafter sometimes referred to as "obstacle nails") that guide the game balls. The rail member 4 is located at the left end of the play area 3 and guides game balls launched by operating the handle 60 toward the top of the play area 3. A collision stop member 4B is located at the top right of the play area 3, against which game balls rolling along the rail from the rail member 4 come into contact. The collision stop member 4B can suppress the movement speed of the game ball. The board lamp 5 is located on the rear side of the play area 3 and emits light from the rear side of the play area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and are configured to have a continuous shape and light emission.

The image display device 7 is located near the center of the play area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or other image display devices such as an organic EL display device, plasma display, projector, or dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a performance symbol display area in which performance symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also called variable display), a hold image display area in which hold images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a hold digestion image display area (the hold display area) in which a hold digestion image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images that represent a hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image that represents the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C, the hold icon 9C, the variable icon 9C, or the variable icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply referred to as the hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: left, center, and right. The left symbol display area displays a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L. The center symbol display area displays a center effect symbol (center decorative symbol) 8C. The right symbol display area displays a right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of multiple symbols representing the numbers "1" through "9," for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first and second special symbols, described below. By combining the effect symbols displayed in the left, center, and right symbol display areas, the image display device 7 can clearly display to the player the results of the variable display of the first and second special symbols, displayed by the first special symbol display device 41a and second special symbol display device 41b, described below (the jackpot lottery results).

For example, if a jackpot is won, a static display of a repeating number such as "777" will be displayed. If a loss occurs, a static display of a random number such as "637" will be displayed. This makes it easier for players to understand the progress of the game. Players can understand the results of the jackpot lottery from the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The variable display of the variable symbol may be a vertical scrolling display or another display. The combination of variable symbol symbols displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be set arbitrarily. Hereinafter, the display of the variable symbol symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be referred to as "variable symbol display," "variable decorative symbol display," or simply "variable display" or "variable display." Note that this decorative pattern variation effect counts the effect from when the special pattern starts to vary until it stops (also called the special pattern variation period) as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts to vary until it stops, the effect of that temporary stop is included in the decorative pattern variation effect.

In addition to the effect symbol change effect, the image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a jackpot effects that are performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), demo effects for waiting customers, and the like. In the effect symbol change effect, in addition to the effect symbol, effect images such as background images and character images may also be displayed. Furthermore, in addition to the effect symbol, the image display device 7 may display on the display screen 7a an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) that can indicate that a special symbol is changing or the result of a special symbol lottery. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light-emitting device such as an LED provided in the play area 3.

The reserved image display area includes a first reserved display area that displays reserved image 9A according to the number of reserved first special symbols (described below), and a second reserved display area that displays reserved image 9B according to the number of reserved second special symbols (described below). By displaying reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of reserved first special symbols (displayed on the reserved first special symbol display 43a) and the number of reserved second special symbols (displayed on the reserved second special symbol display 43b) can be clearly displayed to the player. The reserved consumption image display area includes a reserved consumption display area that displays reserved consumption image 9C. Reserve consumption image 9C corresponds to the effect symbol (effect symbol 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on display screen 7a or display screen 7b, and by displaying reserved consumption image 9C, it can be clearly displayed to the player that the reserved first or reserved second special symbol is being consumed ("reserved special symbol consumption" described below).

A first movable board 14 (also referred to as the first movable gadget 14), which is a movable gimmick, is provided on the left side of the image display device 7. The first movable gadget 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member that is movable left and right in front of the image display device 7. The first movable gadget 14 is normally stationary in a retracted position (Figure 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, and can move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right edge of the display screen 7a and stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable gadget 14 is formed to be approximately the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and in the advanced position it covers part of the image display device 7 from top to bottom.

A second movable board 15 (also called the second movable gadget 15), which is a movable gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable gadget 15 is configured with a rectangular member (decorative part) marked "OARO" that can move up and down. The second movable gadget 15 is normally stationary in a retracted position above the image display device 7 (Figure 1), and can move (advance) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest in an advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The second movable gadget 15 covers part of the image display device 7 when stopped in the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed below the image display device 7. The stage section 11 has a shape that allows it to guide game balls rolling on the top surface of the stage section 11 to the first starting hole 20, which will be described later. A warp section 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp section 12 has an entrance section through which game balls flow in and an exit section through which game balls flow out, and causes game balls that flow in from the entrance section to flow out from the exit section to the stage section 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is located below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and is equipped with a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball hole, fixed starting hole) 20, which always has the same ease of entry for game balls. The entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers a lottery for the first special symbol (jackpot lottery). In other words, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers the acquisition of a jackpot random number, etc., and the determination of a jackpot, etc.

The normal variable entry device (electric chute) 22 is located below the first start hole 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second start hole (second start entry hole, second ball entry hole, variable start hole) 21. Entry of a game ball into the second start hole 21 triggers a lottery for the second special symbol (jackpot lottery). The electric chute 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second start hole 21, which opens and closes the second start hole 21 by operating the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the second start hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open position. It is sufficient for the electric chute 22 to make it easier for a ball to enter the second start hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open position than when it is in the closed position; it may also be possible for a ball to enter the second start hole 21 when the movable member 23 is in the closed position.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is located above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the gaming area 3 and is configured to allow gaming balls to pass through. The passage of a gaming ball through the gate 28 triggers a normal symbol lottery that determines whether or not the electric chute 22 will open. In other words, the passage of a gaming ball through the gate 28 triggers the acquisition of a normal symbol random number (winning random number) and a win determination, etc.

Here, "special symbol lottery" refers to the process of obtaining a random number for determining the special symbol when a gaming ball enters the first starting slot 20 or the second starting slot 21, and comparing this obtained random number with a value corresponding to a predetermined "jackpot" to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won. The result of this "jackpot" lottery is not immediately notified to the player; rather, the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b (described below) displays a variable special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as a static display (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. The image display device 7 plays a pattern matching game in which the display of effect symbols changes in synchronization with the display of the variable special symbols, and this pattern matching game more effectively notifies the player of the jackpot lottery result.

Furthermore, "drawing a normal symbol" refers to the process of obtaining a random number for determining a normal symbol when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, and comparing this obtained random number with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win" to determine whether or not a win has occurred. The result of this normal symbol drawing is not immediately announced when the gaming ball passes through gate 28; rather, a fluctuating display of the normal symbol is performed on normal symbol display 42 (described below), and after a predetermined fluctuating time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the drawing result is displayed as a confirmed result (lit or extinguished), and the player is notified of the drawing result.

The first large prize device (first attacker, first special variable prize device) 31 is located above and to the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, and includes a first large prize hole (first special prize hole) 30, a V area 39, a non-V area 70, and a V-shaped opening/closing member 71. The first large prize hole 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special prize hole opening/closing member) 32 that swings open and close to allow or block the reception of game balls. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize hole solenoid 33 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the first large prize hole 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open position.

The first large prize winning device 31 is equipped internally with a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (Figure 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a (Figure 3), a first large prize winning opening sensor 30a (Figure 3), a V-opening/closing member 71, and a V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 (Figure 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas within the first large prize winning device 31 through which a gaming ball that has passed through the first large prize winning opening 30 can pass. The first large prize winning opening sensor 30a is positioned upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the entry of a gaming ball into the first large prize winning opening 30. The V area sensor 39a is positioned in the V area 39, and detects the passage of a gaming ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of a gaming ball into the non-V area 70. The V-opening/closing member 71 distributes gaming balls that have passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-opening/closing member 71. The V-opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise relative to the gaming board 2), and when the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to enter a first state (rotating state) in which it distributes gaming balls to the V area 39. When the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it enters a second state (stopped state) in which it is located at the origin and distributes gaming balls to the non-V area 70. The V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have any function other than distributing game balls passing through the first large prize opening 30 to either the V-zone 39 or the non-V-zone 70. For example, it may be configured to move left and right relative to the game board 2. That is, when the V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it enters a retreat state (first state) in which game balls are distributed to the V-zone 39. When the V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 is deenergized, it enters an advance state (second state) in which game balls are distributed to the non-V-zone 70. In the gaming machine 1, the passage of a game ball into the V-zone 39 triggers a transition to the high-probability state described below. In other words, the V-zone 39 is a probability variable activation port. On the other hand, the non-V-zone 70 is not a probability variable activation port. The first large prize opening 31 of this embodiment further includes a first large prize opening discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first large prize opening 31. The first big prize device discharge sensor is located at the point where the V area 39 and non-V area 70 join downstream, and counts the number of game balls that pass through the V area sensor 39a or non-V area sensor 70a.

The second large prize device (second attacker, second special variable prize device) 36 is located above and to the right of the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3, and includes a second large prize opening (second special prize opening) 35. The second large prize opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special prize opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that blocks or allows the reception of game balls with a swing-type opening/closing action. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second large prize opening solenoid 38 (Figure 3). Game balls can enter the second large prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open position.

The large prize opening start port 17 is located above the first large prize opening 30 in the gaming area 3, and the first large prize opening 30 opens when a gaming ball passes through. However, the gaming machine 1 does not necessarily have to be equipped with the large prize opening start port 17.

The general winning opening 27 is located at the bottom of the play area 3. The outlet 16 is located at the bottom of the play area 3 and ejects game balls that do not enter any of the winning openings out of the play area 3. The indicators 40 are located near the center of the right side of the play board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the bottom right of the play area 3, adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The gaming area 3 has a left gaming area 3A to the left of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right gaming area 3B to the right. Shooting a gaming ball so that it flows down through the left gaming area 3A is called a "left hit." On the other hand, shooting a gaming ball so that it flows down through the right gaming area 3B is called a "right hit." The gaming machine 1 is configured so that a left hit allows a player to aim for a win at the first starting gate 20. On the other hand, a right hit allows a player to aim for passing through the gate 28 and winning at the second starting gate 21, the first large winning gate 30, and the second large winning gate 35.

Figure 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserve display 43a, a second special symbol reserve display 43b, and a normal symbol reserve display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special symbol reserve display 43a displays the number of reserved activations (first special symbol reserves) stored in the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reserve display 43b displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol reserves) stored in the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reserve indicator 44 displays the number of reserved activations (normal symbol reserves) stored in the normal symbol indicator 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbols." Furthermore, the first special symbol indicator 41a and the second special symbol indicator 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol indicator 41." Furthermore, the first special symbol reserve indicator 43a and the second special symbol reserve indicator 43b are collectively referred to as "special symbol reserve indicator 43."

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (changing display) and then displays it in a stopped state, thereby announcing the results of a lottery (special symbol winning lottery, jackpot lottery) based on a win at the first start slot 20 or the second start slot 21. The special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) that is stopped is one special symbol selected from multiple types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, a special game (jackpot game) is played in which the first large prize slot 30 or the second large prize slot 35 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that is won). The opening patterns of the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30 and second large prize slot 35) in the special game are described below.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight horizontally arranged LEDs, whose illumination patterns display special symbols corresponding to the results of the special symbol lottery. For example, in the event of a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), a jackpot symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, such as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). In the event of a loss, a losing symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, such as "●●●●●●●○." A losing symbol may be displayed with all LEDs turned off. Before the special symbol is statically displayed, a variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is displayed for a predetermined variable period. The variable display pattern may be, for example, such that each LED lights up in a repeated flow of light from left to right. The variable display pattern is not limited to the above pattern and can be any illumination pattern as long as each LED is not statically displayed (illuminated in a specific pattern). For example, all LEDs may flash simultaneously.

In the gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers, such as the jackpot random number, obtained for that entry are temporarily stored in the special symbol reserve memory area 85 (Figure 5). Specifically, if the game ball enters the first start hole 20, it is stored as a first special symbol reserve in the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a (Figure 5), and if the game ball enters the second start hole 21, it is stored as a second special symbol reserve in the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b (Figure 5). There is a limit to the number of special symbol reserves that can be stored in each special symbol reserve memory area 85, and in this embodiment, the limit is four for both the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a and the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b. The special symbol reserves stored in the special symbol reserve memory area 85 are consumed when variable display of the special symbol based on that special symbol reserve becomes possible. "Consuming a reserved special symbol" refers to determining the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to that reserved special symbol and executing a variable display of a special symbol to indicate the result of the determination. Therefore, in gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of a special symbol based on a winning game ball entering first start slot 20 or second start slot 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning ball enters the game, i.e., even if a winning ball is entered while the variable display of special symbols is being executed or a special game is being executed, the right to enter a jackpot lottery for that winning ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved special symbols is displayed on special symbol reserve indicator 43. First special symbol reserve indicator 43a and second special symbol reserve indicator 43b each consist of, for example, four LEDs. Each special symbol reserve indicator 43 displays the number of reserved special symbols by lighting up the LEDs equal to the number of reserved special symbols.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of a gaming ball through gate 28. After variably displaying (variably displaying) the normal symbol, normal symbol display device 42 displays it in a static state, thereby announcing the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the gaming ball through gate 28. The statically displayed normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from multiple types of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the normal symbol stop symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (a normal symbol with a predetermined stop pattern, i.e., a normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state. The opening pattern of second start hole 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery by changing the lighting pattern of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit is displayed, as in "○○" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing symbol with only the right LED lit is displayed, as in "●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off may also be used to indicate a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbol is displayed as a static symbol, a variable display of the normal symbol is displayed for a predetermined variable time. The variable display pattern may, for example, be such that both LEDs are lit alternately. The variable display pattern is not limited to the above patterns and can be any lighting pattern as long as each LED is not displayed as a static symbol (a lit display in a specific pattern). For example, the variable display pattern may be such that all LEDs flash simultaneously.

In gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball passes through gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) obtained for that passage is temporarily stored as a normal symbol reserve in normal symbol reserve memory area 86 (Figure 5). There is an upper limit to the number of normal symbol reserves that can be stored in normal symbol reserve memory area 86, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is four. The normal symbol reserves stored in normal symbol reserve memory area 86 are consumed when it becomes possible to variable display the normal symbol based on that normal symbol reserve. Consumption of a normal symbol reserve refers to determining the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to that normal symbol reserve and executing variable display of the normal symbol to indicate the result of that determination. Therefore, in gaming machine 1, even if variable display of the normal symbol based on the gaming ball's passage through gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, i.e., even if a prize is won while variable display of the normal symbol is being executed or while an auxiliary game is being executed, the right to draw a normal symbol for that passage can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of reserved general maps is displayed on the reserved general map display 44. The reserved general map display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of reserved general maps by lighting up the LEDs equal to the number of reserved general maps.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 3 and 4. Figure 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine 1. Figure 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (Figure 3), a sub-control board 90 (Figure 4), an image control board 100 (Figure 4), a lamp control board 107 (Figure 4), a sound control board 106 (Figure 4), and a payout control board 110 (Figure 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery draws and game state transitions, and constitutes the main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls effects executed as the game progresses, and constitutes the sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, lamp control board 107, and sound control board 106. The sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 is equipped with a game control microcomputer 81, which is a game control microprocessor, and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of play on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of play, a main RAM 84 used as work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 sends and receives data to and from other boards, etc., via an input/output circuit (I/O port unit) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. Examples of sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the large prize opening start gate sensor 17a, the first start gate sensor 20a, the second start gate sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize gate sensor 30a, the second large prize gate sensor 35a, the V-area sensor 39a, the non-V-area sensor 70a, and the regular prize gate sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chute solenoid 24, the first large prize gate solenoid 33, the second large prize gate solenoid 38, and the V-opening/closing member solenoid 73. The large prize opening start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large prize opening start opening 17 and detects game balls that have entered the large prize opening start opening 17. The first start opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first start opening 20 and detects game balls that have entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is provided inside the second start opening 21 and detects game balls that have entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects game balls that have passed through the gate 28. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 30. The second large prize opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 35. The V-area sensor 39a is provided in the V-area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have passed through the V-area 39. The non-V-area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V-area 70 inside the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have passed through the non-V-area 70. The regular prize opening sensor 27a is provided inside the regular prize opening 27 and detects game balls that have entered the regular prize opening 27. The regular prize opening sensor 29a detects game balls that have passed through the regular prize opening 29. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36. The V-shaped opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 of the first big prize device 31. The magnetic sensor 151a is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2 and detects the generation of magnetism near the magnetic sensor 151a. The radio wave sensor 152a is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2 and detects the generation of radio waves near the radio wave sensor 152a. The supply ball shortage sensor 153a is provided in the ball tank 400 provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1 and detects a shortage of supply balls.

Displays 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 controls the display of the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, the normal symbol display 42, the first special symbol reserve display 43a, the second special symbol reserve display 43b, and the normal symbol reserve display 44.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 sends various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120, the loan ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135, and is also connected to the launching device 112 via a launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 109, which is a payout control microprocessor, and an input/output circuit. The payout control microcomputer 109 is a one-chip microcomputer implemented on the payout control board 110, and drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out prize balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be dispensed are detected by a prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball dispenser 130 dispenses the balls. The dispenser control board 110 drives the ball dispenser motor 131 of the ball dispenser 130 to dispense the balls based on a signal from a card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1. The dispensed balls are detected by a ball dispenser sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is located adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information about ball loans based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 ( FIG. 1 ), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launcher 112 detects contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. The launch motor 113 is then driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the magnitude of the detection signal from the launch volume 115.

The sub-control board 90 (Figure 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that only allows signals to be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (e.g., a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting communication direction.

A disconnection monitoring device 155 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 inputs a signal (disconnection signal) from the disconnection monitoring device 155 and determines whether the signal line being monitored by the disconnection monitoring device 155 is disconnected. The disconnection monitoring device 155 monitors the signal line connected to the relay board 88. Note that the disconnection monitoring device 155 may monitor not only the signal line connected to the relay board 88, but also the signal line connected to the main control board 80.

The power supply board 162 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 inputs a signal from the power switch 163 on the power supply board 162 and determines whether the power switch 163 is turned on.

The main control board 80 is equipped with a RAM clear switch 161. When resetting the information stored in the main RAM 84, the RAM clear switch 161 is pressed. When resetting the information stored in the main RAM 84, the RAM clear switch 161 is pressed and the power switch 163 provided on the power supply board is turned ON. When the power switch 163 is turned ON, if the RAM clear switch 161 is pressed, the main control board 80 resets the information stored in the main RAM 84, but if the RAM clear switch 161 is not pressed, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is not reset.

The sub-control board 90 is equipped with a presentation control microcomputer 91, which is a presentation control microprocessor, and an input/output circuit 95. The presentation control microcomputer 91 is implemented on the sub-control board 90 and controls the presentation of games on the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The presentation control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling presentations as games progress, a sub-RAM 94 used as work memory, and a sub-CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub-ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The presentation control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards, etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the presentation control microcomputer 91. The sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, relay board 108, and air-cooling fan 172 via an input/output circuit 95. The performance control microcomputer 91 may also be a one-chip microcomputer.

Image control board 100 includes image control microcomputer 101, input circuit 105a, and output circuit 105b. Image control microcomputer 101, an image control microprocessor, is implemented on image control board 100 and controls the display of image display device 7 and sub-display screen 64 according to a program. Image control microcomputer 101 includes CPU 102, ROM 103, and RAM 104. ROM 103 stores programs for display control as well as still image data and video data to be displayed on image display device 7 and sub-display screen 64, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect designs) and background images. RAM 104 is used as memory for expanding image data. CPU 102 executes the programs stored in ROM 103. Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub-display screen 64. Based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from ROM 103 and controls the display based on the read image data. Note that the image control microcomputer 101 may also be a one-chip microcomputer.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. The audio control board 106 may also have a CPU implemented, and the CPU may be caused to execute audio control based on commands. The audio control board 106 may also have a ROM implemented, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to execute audio control. The audio data may also be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The lamp control board 107 is connected to and controls the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the frame movable role element 69. The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates lighting pattern data (data determining on/off status, light color, etc., also known as lamp data) that determines the lighting mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 according to the lighting pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the lighting pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the frame movable role element 69 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the frame movable role element 69, and controls the operation of the first movable role element 14, the second movable role element 15, and the frame movable role element 69 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub-ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be configured to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable role elements 14 and 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data related to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

Connected to the relay board 108 are the effect button detection switch 63a, the select button detection switch 68a, the first movable role 14 detection sensor 14a, the second movable role 15 detection sensor 15a, and the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (Figure 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. In addition, a vibration motor is attached to the effect button detection switch 63a, which can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the effect button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. The first movable role 14 detection sensor 14a detects that the first movable role 14 is present in the origin area. The second movable device 15 detection sensor 15a detects that the second movable device 15 is in the origin area. The gaming machine frame open sensor 50a detects that the gaming machine frame 50 is open. The gaming machine frame 50 being open means that the front frame (front frame portion) 53 is separated from the gaming board 2. It may also mean that the gaming board 2 is separated from the gaming machine outer frame 51. In addition, a sword component detection switch that detects when the sword component 65 is inserted is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. Data Structure of the Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 5 and 6. Figure 5(A) is a diagram illustrating tables stored in the main ROM 83. Figure 5(B) is a diagram illustrating storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. Figure 6(A) is a diagram illustrating tables stored in the sub ROM 93. Figure 6(B) is a diagram illustrating storage areas provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (Figure 5(A)) stores a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol change pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, a change pattern determination table T6, an electric chute opening pattern determination table T7, a large prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V-shaped opening member opening pattern determination table T9. These determination tables are referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described below) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (Figure 5(B)) is provided with a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special action status set area 84d, a special symbol reserve memory area 85, and a normal symbol reserve memory area 86. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit are set during the main control main processing (described below), and is set with commands such as a pre-determination command, reserved ball count command, variable start command, variable stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V pass command, and customer waiting standby command. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the state of the gaming machine and game state are set during the main control main processing (described below), and is set with a jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first prize flag, second prize flag, ceiling flag, V flag, probability change flag, and time-saving flag. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in the main control processing (described later) are set, such as a random number counter, round counter, ceiling counter, probability variable counter, and time-saving counter. The special action status set area 84d is an area where statuses in the special action processing (described later) are set. The special symbol reserve memory area 85 includes a first special symbol reserve memory area 85a in which the first special symbol reserve is stored, and a second special symbol reserve memory area 85b in which the second special symbol reserve is stored. The first special symbol reserve memory area 85a is provided with a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random value groups (reserved information) such as special symbol winning random numbers corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth first special symbol reserves, respectively. The second special symbol reserved memory area 85b has a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth reserved second special symbols, respectively. The normal symbol reserved memory area 86 has a first memory area, a second memory area, a third memory area, and a fourth memory area for storing random number groups (reserved information) such as normal symbol random numbers (winning random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth reserved normal symbols, respectively. In addition to the above areas, the main RAM 84 also has a winning type set buffer in which special symbol stop symbol data is set, and a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the movable gimmicks 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600 is set. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the gaming machine 1 is turned on or off and remains unchanged. In other words, the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and pending information do not change state even when the power is turned ON or OFF, and the information is maintained. Meanwhile, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flags. Furthermore, the ceiling counter is set to "500" and the other counters are set to "0" as the initial state of the counters.

The sub-ROM 93 (Figure 6(A)) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. These determination tables are referenced by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main processing (described below) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (Figure 6(B)) is provided with a command memory area 94a, a display command set area 94b, a pre-determination information memory area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command memory area 94a is an area (input buffer) where commands input from the main control unit during the sub-control main processing (described below) are stored, and includes pre-determination commands, reserved ball count commands, fluctuation start commands, fluctuation stop commands, opening commands, round designation commands, ending commands, game state designation commands, V-pass commands, and customer waiting commands. The display command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, audio control board 106, lamp control board 107, and relay board 108 during the sub-control main processing (described below) are set, and includes a fluctuation display start command, a pre-fluctuation end command, a fluctuation display end command, an opening display start command, a round display start command, and an ending display start command. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area where counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reserved effect counter, a second special symbol reserved effect counter, a normal symbol reserved effect counter, a ceiling effect counter, an overnight effect counter, a probability variable effect counter, and a time-saving effect counter. Of the information stored in the sub-RAM 94, all but the overnight effect counter are maintained and not cleared even when the gaming machine 1 is turned on or off. In other words, the above commands, counters other than the overnight effect counter, and pre-determination information are maintained and their status is not changed even when the gaming machine 1 is turned on or off. The overnight effect counter is reset by turning the gaming machine 1 on or off, and is set to 0 as its initial state. The information stored in the sub-RAM 94 is reset by clearing the RAM of the gaming machine 1. When reset, the ceiling effect counter is set to 500 as the initial state of the counters, and the other counters are set to 0.

Figure 7 is a diagram explaining the various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. Figure 7 (A) shows the random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and Figure 7 (B) shows the random numbers acquired by the presentation control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control unit side. The game control microcomputer 81 is configured to acquire a "jackpot random number," a "jackpot type random number," a "reach random number," a "variable pattern random number," and a "normal pattern random number (win random number)" at the timing described below. The "jackpot random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred (jackpot determination), and takes on a value ranging from 0 to 65,535. The "jackpot type random number" is a random number used in the lottery to determine the type of jackpot that has been won (jackpot type determination), and takes on a value ranging from 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not a reach occurs in the symbol variation effect that indicates a jackpot result when the jackpot determination is a miss. It ranges from 0 to 127. A reach refers to a state in which only one of the multiple display symbols (decorative symbols) remains, and depending on which of the display symbols freezes, a combination of symbols indicating a jackpot win (e.g., a "7↓7" state) may result. Note that the display symbol frozen in the reach state may appear to fluctuate within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine the variation pattern, including the variation time. It ranges from 0 to 127. The "normal symbol random number (win random number)" is used in the lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play the auxiliary game that opens the electric chute 22. The normal symbol random number ranges from 0 to 255. "Jackpot random number," "jackpot type random number," "reach random number," and "variation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the start port (first start port 20 or second start port 21). A group of random numbers obtained based on the ball entering the first start port 20 is stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a, and a group of random numbers obtained based on the ball entering the second start port 21 is stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b. "Normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is obtained based on passing through gate 28. The obtained normal symbol random number value is stored in the normal symbol reserve memory area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "pre-reading performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at the timing described below. The "pre-reading performance random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-reading performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during a variable performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-reading performance random number" is acquired based on the output of a pre-determination command from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random number group is stored in sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on the output of a variation start command from the main control unit to the sub-control unit. The acquired random number value is stored in sub-RAM 94.

Figure 8 is a diagram explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. Figure 8(A) shows a diagram explaining the jackpot determination table T1, Figure 8(B) shows a diagram explaining the reach determination table T2, Figure 8(C) shows a diagram explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and Figure 8(D) shows a diagram explaining the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired jackpot random number value (any value between 0 and 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "miss." Figure 8 (A) shows that in the "normal probability state," if the jackpot random number value is between 0 and 164, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number value is a number other than 0 and 164 (165 to 65535), it is determined to be a "miss." It also shows that in the "high probability state," if the jackpot random number value is between 0 and 649, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if the jackpot random number value is a number other than 0 and 649 (650 to 65535), it is determined to be a "miss." The details of the "normal probability state" and "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired reach random number value (any value between 0 and 127) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach." Figure 8 (B) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," a reach random number value between 0 and 13 is determined to be "reach," while a reach random number value other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127) is determined to be "no reach." Also, in the "time-saving state," a reach random number value between 0 and 5 is determined to be "reach," while a reach random number value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127) is determined to be "no reach." The details of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" are described below. In the reach determination table T2, a reach is less likely to occur when a miss occurs in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because when in time-saving mode, more no-reach misses with short fluctuation times are selected, speeding up the consumption of reserved special charts.

The normal symbol win determination table T3 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine whether the acquired normal symbol random number value (any value between 0 and 255) corresponds to a "win" or a "lose." Figure 8 (C) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is between 0 and 2, it is determined to be a "win," and if the normal symbol random number value is a "number other than 0 and 2 (3 to 255)," it is determined to be a "lose." It also shows that in the "time-saving state," if the normal symbol random number value is between 0 and 254, it is determined to be a "win," and if the normal symbol random number value is a "number other than 0 and 254 (255)," it is determined to be a "lose."

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is a table that the game control microcomputer 81 references during the main control main processing (described below) to determine how many seconds the normal symbol fluctuation time is depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 8 (D) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "30 seconds," and in the "time-saving state," the normal symbol fluctuation time is determined to be "1 second."

Figure 9 is a diagram illustrating the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main process (described below) to determine the "jackpot type" and "special symbol type" according to the acquired jackpot type random number value (any value between 0 and 127). In Figure 9, when a first special symbol (special symbol 1) is selected in the lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is between 0 and 24, the jackpot type is determined to be a "16RV passing jackpot," and the special symbol 1 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1." If the jackpot type random number value is between 25 and 49, the jackpot type is determined to be a "16RV passing jackpot," and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2." When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 15R) V-scheduled passing jackpot", and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled passing jackpot", and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 13R) V-scheduled non-passing jackpot", and the special symbol stopping pattern is determined to be "jackpot pattern 5". On the other hand, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is selected, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 82," the jackpot type is determined to be a "16RV scheduled passing jackpot," and the special symbol 2 stopping symbol (special symbol stopping symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1." If the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127," the jackpot type is determined to be a "16R (effectively 13R) V scheduled non-passing jackpot," and the special symbol stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5." By referencing the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stopping symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stopping symbol, as well as the "opening (OP) command," "round designation command," and "ending (ED) command" of the special game can also be identified. The specific details of the "16RV scheduled to pass jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V not scheduled to pass jackpot" will be discussed later.

Figure 10 is a diagram illustrating the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 when the time-saving mode is not active. Figure 11 is a diagram illustrating the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 when the time-saving mode is active. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described below) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random number value (0 to 127). Figure 10 shows, for example, that when the first starting hole 20 is won when the time-saving mode is not active, the jackpot determination table T1 determines it as a "miss," the reach determination table T2 determines it as a "reach," the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2," and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 60," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7." FIG. 11 shows, for example, that when a ball enters the second starting slot 21 during time-saving mode, the jackpot determination table T1 determines a "jackpot," the jackpot type determination table T5 determines a "jackpot expected to pass 16RV," and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0-10," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61." As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Furthermore, when a reach occurs, whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach) is also determined. A super reach is a reach effect with a longer fluctuation time after the reach than a normal reach. Five types of super reaches (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, and SP5) with different fluctuation times are set. SP1 to SP3 are executed in a progressive manner after a normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-consecutive combination.

Figure 12 is a diagram illustrating the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 depending on the game state (non-time-saving state or time-saving state). Figure 12 (A) shows that in the "non-time-saving state," the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11," and in the "time-saving state," the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12." Figure 12 (B) shows the contents of opening pattern 11 and opening pattern 12. In opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In opening pattern 12, the electric chute 22 is opened three times, with an opening time of 2.0 seconds per opening, and an interval (opening interval) of 1.0 seconds. However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (maximum of 10), the electric chute 22 will close even if there is still time left to open it.

Figure 13 is a diagram illustrating the large prize opening pattern determination table T8. The large prize opening pattern determination table T8 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control process (described below) to determine the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 according to the special symbol stop symbol data (Figure 9). Figure 13 (A) shows that when the special symbol stop symbol data is "11H," "12H," or "21H," the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 is determined to be "Opening Pattern 21." When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H," "15H," or "22H," the opening pattern is determined to be "Opening Pattern 22." When the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H," the opening pattern is determined to be "Opening Pattern 23." Figure 13 (B) shows the contents of Opening Pattern 21, Opening Pattern 22, and Opening Pattern 23. In opening pattern 21, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13 and 15, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 14 and 16. In opening pattern 22, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in rounds 14 and 16, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in round 15. In opening pattern 23, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in rounds 1 to 13 and 15, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening) in round 14, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened once for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) in round 16. However, if a predetermined number of game balls have won (the specified number of winning balls, up to 9), the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 will be closed even if there is remaining opening time.

Figure 14 is a diagram illustrating the V-opening/closing member release pattern determination table T9. The V-opening/closing member release pattern determination table T9 is a table referenced by the game control microcomputer 81 during the main control main processing (described below) to determine the release pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 according to the special symbol stop pattern data (Figure 9). Figure 14 (A) shows that when the special symbol stop pattern data is "11H," "12H," or "21H," the release pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "release pattern 31." When the special symbol stop pattern data is "13H," the release pattern is determined to be "release pattern 32." When the special symbol stop pattern data is "14H," the release pattern is determined to be "release pattern 33." When the special symbol stop pattern data is "15H" or "22H," the release pattern is determined to be "release pattern 34." 14(B) shows the details of opening pattern 31, opening pattern 32, opening pattern 33, and opening pattern 34. In opening pattern 31, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the tenth and twelfth rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long time of up to 31.5 seconds. In opening pattern 32, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 in the second, fourth, sixth, and twelfth rounds, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short time of 0.1 seconds. In the 8th and 10th races, when the first prize is won in the first major prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short mode with an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long mode with an opening time of up to 31.5 seconds. In opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th races, when the first prize is won in the first major prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short mode with an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a long mode with an opening time of up to 31.5 seconds. In the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th races, when the first prize is won in the first major prize opening 30, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short mode with an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In opening pattern 34, when the first prize is won in the first large prize opening 30 on rounds 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12, the V-shaped opening member 71 is short-opened for an opening time of 0.1 seconds.

4. Explanation of Jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as the results of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of a "jackpot," a "jackpot symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "loss," a "loss symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30 and second large prize slot 35) are opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that is displayed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple rounds of play (unit opening games), an opening (OP) before the first round of play begins, and an ending (ED) after the final round of play ends. Each round of play begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round of play and ends with the start of the next round of play. The time (interval time) during which the big prize opening is closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are shown in Figure 9. Here, jackpots are broadly divided into two types: "V-passing jackpots" and "V-non-passing jackpots." A "V-passing jackpot" is a jackpot that activates the opening/closing members 32, 37, and 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass into the V-zone 39 during the jackpot play. Here, a jackpot with special symbol stop data of 11H to 14H or 21H corresponds to a "V-passing jackpot (probable jackpot)." When the opening pattern of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in Figure 13 is combined with the opening pattern of the V-opening member 71 shown in Figure 14 as (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), the game ball can pass into the V-zone 39 during the jackpot play. A "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a jackpot that activates the opening/closing members 32, 37, and 71 in an opening pattern (a V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) that prevents the game ball from passing through the V area 39 during the jackpot play. Here, a jackpot with special stop symbol data of 15H or 22H corresponds to a "V non-passing scheduled jackpot." When the opening pattern of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 shown in FIG. 13 is combined with the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot play. As described above, opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing members 32 and 37 serves as both a V passing scheduled opening pattern and a V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

"V Passing Jackpot" includes "16RV Passing Jackpot," "16R (Actually 13R) V Passing Jackpot," and "16R (Actually 15R) V Passing Jackpot." A "16RV Passing Jackpot" has a total effective number of rounds of 16R. Rounds 1 through 13 and Round 15 open the first large prize opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per Round. Rounds 14 and 16 open the second large prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per Round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 21). Rounds 10 and 12 open the V-opening member 71 for a long time (Figure 14: Opening Pattern 31), allowing easy passage to the V-zone 39 within the first large prize opening 30.

In a "16R (effectively 13R) V-Passing Jackpot," the total number of rounds is 16, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13, the first major prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 15, the first major prize slot 30 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round, and in rounds 14 and 16, the second major prize slot 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 13R) V-Passing Jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot is extremely short from round 14 to round 16, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, a "16R (effectively 13R) V-Passing Jackpot" is effectively a 13R jackpot. In rounds 2 and 6, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is fully opened (Figure 14: opening pattern 33), allowing easy passage into the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

In a "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing Jackpot," the total number of rounds is 16, but the actual total number of rounds is 15. In other words, from R1 to R13 and R15, the first major prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, and in R16, the second major prize slot 35 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per R, but in R14, the second major prize slot 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per R (Figure 13: Opening Pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing Jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot is extremely short in R14, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected to be awarded. In other words, a "16R (effectively 15R) V-Passing Jackpot" is effectively a 15R jackpot. In rounds 8 and 10, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is fully opened (Figure 14: opening pattern 32), allowing easy passage into the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large winning opening 30.

A "V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" with opening pattern 22, which has a total number of rounds of 16, but an effective total of 13 rounds. In other words, from rounds 1 to 13, the first major prize slot 30 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round, but in round 15, the first major prize slot 30 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round, and in rounds 14 and 16, the second major prize slot 35 is only open for 0.1 seconds per round (Figure 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot," the opening time of the major prize slot is extremely short from rounds 14 to 16, making it a round in which no prize balls are expected. In other words, a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" is effectively a 13R jackpot. At 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened, but the opening is a short opening (Figure 14: opening pattern 34), making it nearly impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-shaped area 39 inside the first large prize opening 30.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (effectively 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" have the same opening pattern (opening pattern 22) for the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 (opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37), with only the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 differing (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be explained later, the "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" and the "16R (effectively 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" are designed to involve a time-saving game (100 times in this example) after the jackpot game ends. In other words, with the "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot," it is nearly impossible for the game ball to pass through the V-zone 39 in the first large prize opening 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability high base state). On the other hand, a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" allows the game ball to easily pass through the V area 39 in the first large prize slot 30, and the game state after the jackpot becomes a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability, high-base state). This makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot" and a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot," making it difficult to determine whether the game state after the jackpot will become a low-probability time-saving state (low-probability, high-base state) or a high-probability time-saving state (high-probability, high-base state). Furthermore, after the time-saving game ends, the game state becomes a low-probability, low-base state (normal state) in the "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot," while the game state becomes a seemingly normal high-probability, low-base state in the "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot." That is, in the "16R (actually 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first large prize slot 30, when the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state becomes a latent state (latent probability change state) in which the high probability is hidden despite being in a high probability low base state, and this latent probability change state is difficult for the player to distinguish. In other words, the low-probability time-saving state (low-probability, high-base state) after the jackpot play of a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and a "16R (effectively 13R) V passing jackpot", the high-probability time-saving state (high-probability, high-base state) after the jackpot play of a "16R (effectively 13R) V passing jackpot", and the low-probability, low-base state after the time-saving play of a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and the high-probability, low-base state after the time-saving play of a "16R (effectively 13R) V non-passing jackpot" end are performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

Also, as shown in Figure 9, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for V-passing jackpots and 60/128 (approximately 47%) for V-non-passing jackpots. In contrast, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is 83/128 (approximately 64.8%) for V-passing jackpots and 45/128 (approximately 35.2%) for V-non-passing jackpots. In this way, the gaming machine 1 is set up so that the jackpot lottery (lottery for the second special symbol) held when a gaming ball enters the second start slot 21 is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot lottery (lottery for the first special symbol) held when a gaming ball enters the first start slot 20.

5. Description of Game States The game states of the gaming machine 1 will now be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is performing probability fluctuation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as the "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variable state)," and the state in which probability fluctuation control is not performed is simply referred to as the "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)." The game control microcomputer 81 achieves the high probability state by determining a jackpot using a jackpot determination table ( FIG. 8(A) ) in which the number of jackpot random number values determined as a jackpot is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the special pattern of the special pattern display 41, the probability that the display result (stop pattern) of the variable display of the special pattern by the special pattern display 41 will be a jackpot pattern is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed.

The state in which the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the time-shortening of the special symbol on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as the "time-shortening state," while the state in which the time-shortening control is not controlled is simply referred to as the "non-time-shortening state." In the time-shortening state, the special symbol's time of fluctuation (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derived display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time-shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figures 10 and 11), which is determined so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is selected more frequently in the time-shortening state than in the non-time-shortening state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is controlling the time-shortening of the special symbol on the special symbol display 41, a short fluctuation time is more likely to be selected as the fluctuation time for the variable display of the special symbol compared to when the time-shortening control is not being executed. As a result, in the time-shortening state, the pace of consumption of reserved special symbols is accelerated, making it more likely that a valid win (a win that can be stored as a reserved special symbol) will occur in the starting slot. This allows players to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. Note that the game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols in the time-shortened state, but does not execute them in the non-time-shortened state. As the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols, the game control microcomputer 81 performs hit determination (determination of the normal symbol) using a normal symbol hit determination table T3 (Figure 8 (C)), in which the number of normal symbol random number values (win random number values) determined to be a hit is higher in the time-shortened state than in the non-time-shortened state. Therefore, in the time-shortened state, the probability of a hit is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 42, the probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable normal symbol display by the normal symbol display device 42 will be a winning symbol is higher than when the probability fluctuation control is not being executed. In the time-saving state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but 1 second in the time-saving state ( FIG. 8 (D) ). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chute 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state ( FIG. 12 ). In other words, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening time extension control on the electric chute 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chute 22 opens in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state ( FIG. 12 ). In other words, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing opening number increase control on the electric chute 22. When the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 42, as well as control to extend the opening time and increase the number of openings for the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 opens more frequently, and game balls land more frequently in the second starting hole 21 than when these controls are not being executed. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of balls fired, becomes higher. Therefore, a state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state," and a state in which they are not executed is called a "low base state." In the high base state, players can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing their available game balls. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports the electric chute 22 in landing in the second starting hole 21) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not necessarily require the execution of all of the above controls. In other words, by executing one or more of the following controls: probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, opening time extension control for the electric chute 22, and opening count increase control for the electric chute 22, it is sufficient if the electric chute 22 is made more likely to open than when that control is not being executed. Also, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time-saving state.

In gaming machine 1, the game state after a jackpot game resulting from winning a V-passing jackpot is a high-probability state, a time-saving state, and a high-base state if passage to V area 39 occurs during that jackpot game. This game state is specifically referred to as a "high-probability, high-base state" or a "high-probability, time-saving state." Specifically, the jackpots that result in a high-probability, high-base state after a jackpot game are the "16RV-passing jackpot," "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," and "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing jackpot" jackpots shown in Figure 9. For the "16RV-passing jackpot" and "16R (effectively 15R) V-passing jackpot," the high-probability, high-base state ends when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. In the case of a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot," the high-probability, high-base state ends when, after a jackpot game, the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), resulting in a high-probability, low-base state (latent probability variable state), or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and that jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, the game state after a jackpot game resulting from a win of a non-V-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (a non-high probability state, i.e., a low probability state), a time-saving state, and a high-base state, unless the V region 39 is passed during that jackpot game (which is almost never the case). These game states are specifically referred to as a "low-probability, high-base state" and a "low-probability, time-saving state." Specifically, the jackpot that results in a low-probability, high-base state after a jackpot game is a "16R (effectively 13R) V-nonpassing scheduled jackpot," among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9 . During this jackpot, the low-probability, high-base state ends when the special symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game, or when the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and that jackpot game is executed. When playing gaming machine 1 for the first time, the game state after powering on is a normal probability state, a non-time-saving state, and a low-base state (non-electric support control state). This game state is specifically referred to as the "low-probability, low-base state." The low-probability, low-base state is sometimes referred to as the "normal game state" or the "low-probability, non-time-saving state (also simply referred to as the non-time-saving state)." The state during which a special game (jackpot game) is being executed is sometimes referred to as the "special game state (jackpot game state)." Furthermore, the state controlled to at least one of the high-probability state and the high-base state is sometimes referred to as a "specific game state."

In a high-base state, such as a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state, hitting with the right to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (Figure 1) can be advantageously played. This is because the electric support control makes the electric chute 22 more likely to open than in a low-base state, making it easier to win in the second start hole 21 than in the first start hole 20. For this reason, in a high-base state, hitting with the right is performed to allow the game ball to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery. This allows for more start wins (winning in the start hole) than hitting with the left. Note that with gaming machine 1, play is performed with the right even during jackpot play. On the other hand, in a low-base state, hitting with the left to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (Figure 1) can be advantageously played. Because electric support control is not being executed, the electric chute 22 is less likely to open than in the high base state, making it easier to win in the first start hole 20 than in the second start hole 21. For this reason, in the low base state, you hit the ball to the left in order to get the game ball to win in the first start hole 20. This allows you to get more start wins than if you hit it to the right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (Fig. 3) will be explained based on Figs. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the win/loss determination means (Fig. 23) and the win/loss advance determination means (Figs. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control process from the main ROM 83. In the main control process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). The initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, etc. The initial value of a flag is "1" (i.e., "ON") for the ceiling flag, and "0" (i.e., "OFF") for the other flags. The initial value of a status is "1." The initial value of a counter is "500" for the ceiling counter, and "0" for the other counters. Note that the initial settings are performed only once after the power is turned on and are not performed thereafter.

After the initial settings, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the power-on process (step S006). During the power-on process, it determines whether to clear the RAM or perform a power-off recovery, and performs the corresponding process. Details will be provided later in the power-on process.

After the power-on process, the game control microcomputer 81 disables interrupt processing (step S002) and performs the normal and special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values (jackpot random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value, normal symbol random number value) shown in Figure 7 (A) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches its set upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Furthermore, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

After the normal and special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S004). While the interrupt is allowed, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 4 msec). In other words, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (e.g., every 4 msec). Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process and the start of the next main timer interrupt process, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 when the interrupt is disabled, the main timer interrupt process does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is allowed.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update process of the various random number counter values is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process).

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs input processing (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and sets payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning slot in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting slot sensor 20a, the second starting slot sensor 21a, the first large winning slot sensor 30a, the second large winning slot sensor 35a, the regular winning slot sensor 27a, and the regular winning slot sensor 29a (Figure 3).

After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 sequentially executes the start hole sensor detection process (step S103), normal operation process (step S104), special operation process (step S105), V-area sensor detection process (step S106), and reserved ball count process (step S107). Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball count process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands, etc., set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub-control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 executes other processes (step S109). In other processes, for example, based on the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 described below, the second special symbol reserved indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode indicating that number, and based on the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the first special symbol reserved indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating that number.

After other processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs error monitoring processing (step S110). Details will be described later in the section on error monitoring processing. After the error monitoring processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs power interruption monitoring processing (step S111). Details will be described later in the section on power interruption monitoring processing.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start gate sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a. If a game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. If a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of reserved balls for normal symbols is the number of reserved normal symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved normal symbols. If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of reserved normal symbol balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved normal symbol balls (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label-TRND-H), and stores the acquired random number value in a memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved normal symbol balls among the first to fourth memory areas of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 21. This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a. If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (step S205: NO), processing skips to step S210. If a game ball has entered (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is the number of reserved second symbol symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved second symbol symbols. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), processing skips to step S210. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 (step S207), and then a special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-RC), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 among the first to fourth memory areas of the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (retains) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) different from the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b for the special symbol 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described below. After the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special symbol 2 pre-determination process (step S209). The special symbol 2 pre-determination process will be described in detail later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 20. This determination is made based on whether a game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 20a. If a game ball has not entered the first start hole 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. If a game ball has entered the first start hole 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "4 (upper limit)" (step S211). The number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this process ends. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 (step S212), and then a special symbol 1-related random number acquisition process is performed (step S213). Here, similar to the special symbol 2-related random number acquisition process (step S208) described above, the values of the jackpot random number counter, the jackpot type random number counter, the reach random number counter, and the variation pattern random number counter are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in a memory area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 among the first to fourth memory areas of the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores (retains) the acquired random number group in a buffer (pre-determination buffer) separate from the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a for the special symbol 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described below. After the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special chart 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Details of the special chart 1 pre-determination process will be described later.

[Special diagram 2 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S301). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. In other words, if the probability variable flag is OFF, no pre-determination is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the referenced jackpot determination table T1 ( FIG. 8 ) and the jackpot random number value to make a preliminary determination of whether or not a jackpot has occurred. Because the high probability state (the probability variable flag is ON) is being assumed here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1 to make a preliminary determination of whether or not a jackpot has occurred. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649," a "jackpot" is preliminarily determined, and when the value is any other value, a "miss" is preliminarily determined. Note that in this embodiment, the preliminary determination is made using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process ( FIG. 23 ) described later. However, in other embodiments, the preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "miss" (step S304: NO), processing skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type (step S305). In the pre-determination of the jackpot type, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (Figure 17: step S208). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (Figure 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127," the pre-determination is a "16RV passing jackpot." In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is made using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described below, but in other embodiments, the preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot type determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot type determination table T5.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value and the reach random number value as judgment values temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Next, since the time-shortened state (the time-shortened flag is ON) is in effect, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-shortened state (FIG. 11) and identifies the fluctuation pattern from the jackpot preliminary determination result of step S304, the reach preliminary determination result obtained from the reach random number value, and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Note that in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the selected fluctuation pattern may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that could be selected depending on the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, if a reach or miss is determined in advance based on the jackpot advance determination result and the reach/no-reach advance determination result, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "60," the game control microcomputer 81 selects two patterns: fluctuation pattern "P64," which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "1 to 2," and fluctuation pattern "P68," which is selected if the number of reserved balls is "3 to 4." In this embodiment, the advance determination is made using fluctuation pattern determination table T6, which is used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described below. However, in other embodiments, the advance determination may be made using a fluctuation pattern determination table for advance determination that is different from fluctuation pattern determination table T6.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-determination command includes the jackpot pre-determination result (in the case of a win, the jackpot type pre-determination result) and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308) and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-Determination Processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the special symbol 2 pre-determination process described above, if the probability variable flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is terminated. That is, if the probability variable flag is ON, no pre-determination is performed. On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Next, since the normal probability state (the probability variable flag is OFF) is in effect, the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value: "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1. That is, a "jackpot" is pre-determined when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164," and a "miss" is pre-determined when the value is any other value. Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a pre-determination jackpot determination table different from the jackpot determination table T1. The following steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 in the special chart 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described above, and therefore will not be described here.

[Normal operation processing]
20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chute 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chute 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), the process ends. If the number of reserved balls is one or more (step S503: NO), the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is decremented by one (step S504). Therefore, if a gaming ball passes through gate 28 while the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is "0," the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is temporarily set to "1" in step S203 of the start gate sensor detection process (FIG. 17). Then, the reserved balls are consumed in step S504, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols immediately becomes "0." The same applies to the number of reserved balls for special symbols. That is, in steps S207 and S212 of the start gate sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls for special symbols is temporarily set to "1." Then, in steps S1404 and S1410 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), the reserved balls are consumed and the number of reserved balls for special symbols becomes "0." Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a win has occurred by referring to the normal symbol win determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the normal symbol random number value (win random number value) stored in the first memory area (corresponding to the first normal symbol reserved) of the normal symbol reserved memory area 86 as a determination value. Then, it determines whether or not a win has occurred by using the normal symbol random number value, the game state (whether or not the time-saving state is active), and the normal symbol win determination table T3. For example, in the non-time-saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is between "0" and "2," it is determined to be a "win," and if the normal symbol random number value is anything other than that, it is determined to be a "lose" (see FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (Figure 8 (D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and then selects the normal symbol variation time as a normal symbol variation pattern using the game state determination result and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4. Here, when it is not in a time-saving state, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "30 seconds," and when it is in a time-saving state, the normal symbol variation time is determined to be "1 second" (see Figure 8 (D)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern, thereby starting the normal symbol variation display (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see Figure 8 (D)). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation display continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) results in a "miss" (step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned hit determination results in a "win" (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chute opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is selected by referring to the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7 (Figure 12 (A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in a time-saving state), and selects the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 using the game state determination result and the electric chute opening pattern determination table T7. Here, when it is not in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when it is in a time-saving state, "opening pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts operating the electric chute in accordance with the selected opening pattern (step S512) and ends this processing.

If the electric chute 22 is in operation in step S501 described above (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chute 22 is met (step S520). The closing condition here is met when either the number of winning balls in the electric chute 22 reaches a specified maximum number of winning balls (e.g., six balls), or the operation time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed and it is time to close the electric chute 22. The operation time of the electric chute 22 is the operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition for the electric chute 22 is not met (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chute 22 is met (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chute 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and ends this processing.

[Special Action Processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the process for the special symbol display 41 and the special prize device (first special prize device 31 and second special prize device 36) is divided into four stages, each of which is referred to as a "special operation status" of "1,""2,""3," and "4." When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, a jackpot determination and a variation pattern selection are performed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), a special symbol variation process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol variation process, a variation stop command is output after the variation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), a special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an opening command is output when a jackpot occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), a special electric device process is performed (step S1308). In the special electric device process, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is initially set to "1".

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401). If the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), i.e., if the second special symbol reserved memory area 85b does not store a random number group acquired as a result of winning the second starting hole 21, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is "1" or greater (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a variable pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variable pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the reserved information (various random number values) stored in the first through fourth storage areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b from their current locations toward the read side, and clears the reserved information stored in the location farthest from the read side in the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b (step S1405). For example, if reserved information is stored in the first through third storage areas, the reserved information stored in the third storage area is cleared; if reserved information is stored in the first through fourth storage areas, the reserved information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through these steps, the reserved second symbols are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b (the leftmost reserved image 9B of the four reserved images 9B) is shifted toward the reserved consumption image display area and displayed as the reserved consumption image 9C. Additionally, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special symbol reserved storage area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) are each shifted one position to the left (Figure 1). This allows the player to recognize that one reserved second special symbol has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 2 variation start processing (step S1406). In the special symbol 2 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, which starts the display of the second special symbol variation and sets the variation time timer. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. Additionally, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2." In addition, the fluctuation start command (special chart 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 2 fluctuation start process includes information regarding the special chart stop pattern data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information regarding the fluctuation time).

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407). If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, if the first special symbol reserved memory area 85a does not store a random number group obtained as a result of winning at the first starting hole 20, processing proceeds to step S1413. If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "1" or greater (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random number values stored in the first through fourth memory areas of the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a by one position from their current positions toward the read side, and clears the reserved information stored in the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a in the location farthest from the read side (step S1411). Through these steps, the first reserved symbols are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first memory area of the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a (the rightmost reserved image 9A of the four reserved images 9A) shifts toward the reserved consumption image display area and is displayed as reserved consumption image 9C. Furthermore, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second through fourth memory areas of the first special symbol reservation memory area 85a (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left of the four reserved images 9A) each shift one position to the right (Figure 1). This allows the player to recognize that one reserved first symbol has been consumed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol 1 variation start processing (step S1412). In the special symbol 1 variation start processing, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the display of the first special symbol variation is started, and a variation time timer is set. The variation time timer is set to a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection processing. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). Note that the variation start command set in the special symbol 1 variation start processing (special symbol 1 variation start command) includes information related to the special symbol stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination processing (step S1408) and information related to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection processing (step S1409) (including information related to the variation time).

If the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is "0" in step S1407 (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). A standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may make this determination, for example, by checking the ON/OFF status of a demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If the screen is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, sets a standby command for displaying the standby screen in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1414), and then ends this process. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved first special symbol is executed only when the reserved second special symbol is "0." In other words, the consumption of the second special symbol reservation is executed before the consumption of the first special symbol reservation. Also, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of this embodiment, a lottery based on the second special symbol reservation makes it easier for the player to win a jackpot (a jackpot scheduled to pass through V) that is more profitable for the player than a lottery based on the first special symbol reservation.

[Jackpot detection process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process for special symbol 2 (step S1402) and the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1 (step S1408) follow similar processing flows, so they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability variable flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines a jackpot by referencing the high-probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special symbol 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved second symbol) of the second reserved symbol storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first reserved first symbol) of the first special symbol storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value it references. Here, since the high probability state (probability variable flag is ON) is in effect, the jackpot determination is determined based on the table for the high probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1.

In step S1501, if the probability variable flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (Figure 8) (step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value using the same method as in step S1502. Next, because the normal probability state is being reached (the probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special symbol 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special symbol 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read out jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (Figure 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination in step S1503 or step S1505 is a "miss," the special stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the miss symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process for special chart 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process for special chart 1 (step S1409) have similar processing flows, so they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600). The determination of whether the game state is in a time-saving state is made by whether the time-saving flag is ON. If the game state is in a time-saving state (step S1600: YES), processing proceeds to step S1612. If the game state is not in a time-saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), processing proceeds to step S1607. If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot is a special symbol 2 or not (step S1603). If the jackpot is a special symbol 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always a V-passing jackpot, so processing skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is a special symbol 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot or not (step S1604). The determination of the jackpot type is made based on the special symbol stop pattern data set in the main RAM 84.

If the jackpot type is a V-pass scheduled jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referencing the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for a non-time-saving V-pass scheduled jackpot (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random number value as a determination value. For example, in the fluctuation pattern selection process for special symbol 2, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b (corresponding to the first reserved second symbol). In the fluctuation pattern selection process for special symbol 1, the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a (corresponding to the first reserved first symbol). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for non-time-saving state V-pass scheduled jackpots, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-saving states shown in FIG. 10 that corresponds to V-pass scheduled jackpots (the portion with fluctuation patterns "P1" to "P3" in Special Chart 1, and the portion with fluctuation patterns "P21" to "P23" in Special Chart 2) is referenced (the address is set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern for Special Chart 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" is selected for Special Chart 2.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for a non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) to select a fluctuation pattern (step S1606). Here, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the portion "P4" to "P6"). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In step S1602, if the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number value is a reach-established random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process for special symbol 2, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area of the second special symbol reserve memory area 85b (corresponding to the first second special symbol reserve) is read. In the variation pattern selection process for special symbol 1, the reach random number value stored in the first memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area 85a (corresponding to the first first special symbol reserve). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a reach is established using the reach determination table T2 (Figure 8 (B)) and the reach random number value. In this case, since the time-saving state is not in effect, the presence or absence of a reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the portion of the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) between "0" and "13") in the reach determination table T2.

If the reach random number value is a reach-established random number value (step S1607: YES), i.e., if there is a reach but not a miss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for reach but not a miss in the non-time-saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10). Here, as the table for reach but not a miss in the non-time-saving state, the section of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to reach but not a miss (the section with fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" for special chart 1, and the section with fluctuation patterns "P24" to "P31" for special chart 2) is referenced. In special chart 1, one of the fluctuation patterns "P7" to "P14" is selected as the fluctuation pattern based on the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of balls reserved for special chart 1 (1 to 4). For Special Chart 2, one of the fluctuation patterns "P24" to "P31" is selected based on the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1 to 4). Because the selected fluctuation pattern changes depending on the number of reserved balls, a shortened fluctuation function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, for both Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times are selected more frequently than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". This allows for faster consumption of reserved special charts when there are a large number of reserved balls.

If the reach random number value is not a reach-established random number value (step S1607: NO), i.e., if there is a miss without a reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern by referring to the table for non-time-saving state, no-reach misses in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (Figure 10) (step S1609). Here, as the table for non-time-saving state, no-reach misses, the section of the non-time-saving state fluctuation pattern determination table T6 shown in Figure 10 that corresponds to a no-reach miss (the section with fluctuation patterns "P15" to "P16" for special chart 1, and the section with fluctuation patterns "P32" to "P33" for special chart 2) is referenced. For special chart 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern based on the read fluctuation pattern random number value and the current number of balls reserved for special chart 1 (1 to 4). For Special Chart 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern based on the read variation pattern random number value and the current number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 (1-4). Here too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so a shortened variation function is activated according to the number of reserved balls.

If it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is in the time-shortened state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (Figure 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, and therefore explanations will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referenced in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619 is different from that of the previously described steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referenced, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing jackpot (the portion with the fluctuation pattern "P41" to "P43" in special chart 1, and the portion with the fluctuation pattern "P61" to "P63" in special chart 2) is referenced. From the read-out fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the fluctuation pattern in special chart 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in special chart 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the section of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for time-saving mode shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the section "P44" to "P46") is referenced. From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information about the set variation pattern is included in a variation start command and sent to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (Figure 16: step S108). This starts the variable display of the special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The special symbol fluctuation time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection processing (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing is terminated. That is, the special symbol fluctuation display started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby processing (FIG. 22) continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702) and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). The game control microcomputer 81 also performs other processing associated with the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game status management process (step S1801). The game status management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time-saving cycles, and its details will be described later. After the game status management process, it determines whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game does not start, and the process moves to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, where a jackpot determination for the next reserved jackpot is performed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the large prize opening and the V-shaped opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the large prize opening opening pattern determination table T8 (Figure 13), determines the opening pattern of the large prize opening from the special symbol stopping pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, if the special symbol stopping pattern data is "11H," "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large prize opening. The game control microcomputer 81 also refers to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (Figure 14), determines the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 from the special symbol stopping pattern data, and sets the determined opening pattern. For example, if the special symbol stopping pattern data is "11H," "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71. In conjunction with setting the opening pattern of the jackpot opening and V-shaped opening/closing member, the round counter value is set to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot won. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. In this example, the round counter is set to "16" (Figure 13 (B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game status reset process (step S1804). The game status reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and time-saving flag, and its details will be described later. After the game status reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and opening begins (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process ends.

[Game Status Management Processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game status management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the variable probability flag is ON (step S2001). If the variable probability flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), processing skips to step S2010. If the variable probability flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the variable probability counter value is decremented by one (step S2002). The variable probability counter counts the number of special symbol variations executed during the high probability state. In this case, the variable probability counter is set to "100" upon transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 then determines whether the variable probability counter value has become "0" after decrementing it by one (step S2003). If the variable probability counter value is not "0" (step S2003: NO), processing skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), processing skips to step S2009. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time-saving counter counts the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state. Here, when the game transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving counter is set to "100". The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time-saving counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), processing skips to step S2009. If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 and ends this process. The game state designation command contains information about the current game state that has been set (whether the ceiling flag is ON or not, the ceiling counter value, whether or not the game is in a special mode, the special mode counter value, whether or not the game is in a time-saving mode, the time-saving counter value, etc.).

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), processing skips to step S2005. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter counts the specified number of spins until the b time reduction (Yu-time) is reached, and counts the number of times the special pattern changes when the ceiling flag is ON (during the low probability state). In this case, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified number of spins. The game control microcomputer 81 then determines whether the counter value has become "0" as a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by 1 (step S2012). In other words, it determines whether the specified number of spins until the b time reduction (Yu-time) is reached has been reached. If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), processing skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time-saving flag is switched ON (step S2013), and the time-saving count (number of times awarded) is set to "700". Then, the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2015). Then, processing of step S2009 is executed.

[Game status reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game status reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability variable flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the probability variable flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probability variable flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variable flag is switched OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time-saving flag is ON or not. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to step S2105. If the time-saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time-saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON or not. If the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process is terminated. If the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched OFF (step S2106). In other words, during execution of a jackpot game, the ceiling flag is OFF in a non-high probability state and a non-time-saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since the low base state is always established when the non-time-saving state is established, the low base state is established during execution of a jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric device processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all of the large prize winning devices (first large prize winning device 31 and second large prize winning device 36) have been opened based on the opening pattern during the ongoing jackpot game. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), processing proceeds to step S2230. If the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V-opening member operation processing is performed to activate the V-opening member 71 (step S2201). In this embodiment, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first large prize opening 30. In the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time when a predetermined number of game balls enters the first large prize opening 30 according to the V-shaped opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Details of the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process will be described later. After the V-shaped opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the large prize openings (first large prize opening 30 and second large prize opening 35) are open (step S2202). If they are open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

If the special prize opening is not currently open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the special prize opening (step S2203). The time to open the special prize opening includes, for example, when the opening time for the special prize opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening for the first round of play, or when the interval time (closure time) until the special prize opening is temporarily closed after opening has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the special prize opening (step S2203: NO), processing proceeds to step S2220.

If it is time (timing) to open the special prize opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special prize opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the special prize opening (first special prize opening 30 or second special prize opening 35) according to an opening pattern (Figure 13) corresponding to the type of special prize. After the special prize opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the special prize game currently being played, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. Note that in this embodiment, the special prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round of play. However, in another embodiment, if the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 may determine whether the large prize opening is the first opening in one round, and set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this process ends.

If the special prize opening is open in step S2202 (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special prize opening closure condition is met (step S2210). The closure condition here is met when either the number of prizes won by the special prize opening during that round of play reaches a specified maximum number of prizes (e.g., nine prizes per round), or the time to close the special prize opening has arrived (i.e., a predetermined opening time (Figure 13) has elapsed since the special prize opening was opened). If the special prize opening closure condition is not met (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this processing. On the other hand, if the special prize opening closure condition is met (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the special prize opening (step S2211).

If it is not the time (timing) to open the special prize opening in step S2203 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends a predetermined time (here, two seconds) after the special prize opening is closed. As described above, the time (interval time) for the special prize opening to be closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended based on whether the predetermined interval time has passed since the special prize opening was closed. If the round of play has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 terminates this processing.

If the round of play has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the round counter value by 1 (step S2221) and determines whether the round counter value is "0" (step S2226). If the round counter value is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of rounds of play have not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round of play. On the other hand, if the round counter value is "0," the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot play. In this embodiment, the ending time (e.g., 18 seconds) when the gaming ball passes through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is the same length as the ending time when the gaming ball does not pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot." This allows the player to recognize that the gaming ball did not pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-non-passing scheduled jackpot," even if the gaming ball did pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot." Note that the ending time when the gaming ball does not pass through the V region 39 in a "16R (effectively 13R) V-passing scheduled jackpot" is also the same length. After the jackpot ending begins, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing ends.

If the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2200 (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, and the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the jackpot end flag OFF (step S2231), turns the jackpot flag OFF (step S2232), and sets the special operation status to "1" (step S2233). As a result, the special symbol standby processing (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation processing. After that, the game status setting processing (step S2234) described below is executed, and this processing ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round of play (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V-opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds correspond to the opening rounds of the V-opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that the round is an opening round when the round counter value is "15,""13,""11,""9,""7," or "5." If the round is not the opening round of the V-opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V-opening/closing member 71 in the relevant round.

If it is the round in which the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball has won the first large winning slot 30 in that round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), processing proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), a determination is made as to whether the first winning ball has been detected (step S2503). If the first winning ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), processing ends. This is because there has not yet been a winning ball in the first large winning slot 30 in that round, and there is no need to operate the V-shaped opening/closing member 71.

If the first ball is detected as having won (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V-opening/closing element 71 and performs the V-valid period setting process (step S2504). The V-opening/closing element 71 is short-opened to execute a short-opening (here, 0.1 seconds) when the first ball wins, regardless of whether the V-opening/closing element 71 opening pattern (Figure 14(B)) is "short-open" or "long-open." Note that with the short-opening of the V-opening/closing element 71, the opening time of the V-opening/closing element 71 is very short, so the first game ball that enters the first large prize opening 30 passes through the non-V region 70 without passing through the V region 39. In the V-valid period setting process, the period during which the V-opening/closing element 71 is open and for several seconds after the V-opening/closing element 71 is closed is set as the V-valid period during which game ball detection by the V-region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V-opening/closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V-opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and sets the V-effective period to the period during which the V-opening/closing member 71 is open and 1 second after it is closed. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the period outside the V-effective period (including when a jackpot game is not being played) as the V-invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a to be valid" means turning on the V flag based on detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a (see the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 33) described below). Also, "determining detection of a game ball by the V-area sensor 39a to be invalid" means not turning on the V flag even if a game ball is detected by the V-area sensor 39a. The V valid period includes several seconds (ball clearance period) after the V-opening/closing member 71 closes. This is because there is a physical distance between the V-opening/closing member 71 and the V-area sensor 39a, and it takes into account the time until the V-area sensor 39a detects the game ball that entered the V-area 39 immediately before the V-opening/closing member 71 closes. In other words, the V flag is turned ON only when a V passage (a game ball passing into the V-area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is not turned ON when a V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). When the V flag is ON, the probability variable flag is turned ON, i.e., the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described below). This prevents the V flag from being turned ON and the high probability state from being set based on a V passage due to fraudulent behavior. After the V-opening member 71 is short-circuited and the V-validity period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, i.e., if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON (step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first large winning opening 30 if the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 for that round is a long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), processing proceeds to step S2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the opening pattern of the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 for that round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long opening (step S2521: NO), i.e., if it is a short opening, processing proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, if the opening is long (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a winning ball has been detected for the second ball (step S2522). If a winning ball for the second ball has not been detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

If a second ball wins (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V-opening/closing element 71 for a long time and performs a V-validity period setting process (step S2523). The V-opening/closing element 71 is opened for a long time because, in the "long opening" pattern of the V-opening/closing element 71 (Figure 14(B)), a long opening (maximum of 31.5 seconds) is executed when the second ball wins. Note that the maximum play time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large prize opening: 29.5 seconds + interval closing time: 2 seconds). Therefore, the time from the second ball winning to the end of the round is generally shorter than 31.5 seconds. As described below, the V-opening/closing element 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V-opening/closing element 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V-opening/closing member 71 is configured so that, because the V-opening/closing member 71 is kept open for a relatively long time, at least a portion of the second and subsequent game balls that enter the first large winning opening 30 pass through the V region 39. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the period while the V-opening/closing member 71 is open as the V valid period, and sets the V invalid period when the V-opening/closing member 71 closes at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V-opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open. If the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2550). As previously mentioned, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round of play has ended based on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the big prize opening was closed.

If the round of play has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551) and performs the V-opening/closing member closing process and the V-invalid period setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round of play, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V-opening/closing member 71, and sets the V-invalid period several seconds (here, 1 second) after the V-opening/closing member 71 is closed, and then ends this process.

If the round of play has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 is met (step S2560). For example, in the case of a short open, the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 may be that a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the V opening/closing member 71 was opened. If the closing condition is met (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process ends. If the closing condition is not met (step S2560: NO), this process ends with the V opening/closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, if the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V-shaped opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round of play has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572) and ends this processing. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), it ends this processing.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time-saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time-saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the current jackpot game becomes a "non-high probability state," a "time-saving state," and a "high base state" (i.e., low probability, high base). This low probability, high base state ends when either the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the probability variable flag ON (step S2304), sets the probability variable counter to "100" (step S2305), and turns the V flag OFF (step S2306). The game control microcomputer 81 also turns the time-saving flag ON (step S2307) and sets the time-saving counter to "100" (step S2308). As a result, the game state after this jackpot game becomes a "high probability state," a "time-saving state," and a "high base state" (i.e., a high probability, high base). This high probability, high base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the next jackpot is won.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns the ceiling flag ON and sets the ceiling counter to "500" as the specified number of spins until b time reduction (Yu-time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, if the probability variable flag is OFF after a jackpot game, the game will enter b time reduction (Yu-time) after 500 spins. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 and ends this processing. The game state designation command contains information regarding the set game state (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability variable flag, probability variable counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V-area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601). If a game ball has not been detected by the V-area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if a game ball has been detected (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V-effective period is in progress (step S2602). The V-effective period is the period set by the V-effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V-opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V-effective period is set to a few seconds (ball sweep period) after the V-opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. If the V valid period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the V valid period is in progress (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process.

[Reserved ball processing]
Figure 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball count processing (Figure 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbols stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a reserved ball count command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved ball count command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbols. After setting the reserved ball count command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

7. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be explained based on Figures 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the power supply of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out a program for executing the sub-control main processing from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, the sub-CPU 92 is set, and various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0" (i.e., "OFF"), the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization processing is executed only once after the power supply is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the performance control microcomputer 91 disables interrupt processing (step S4015) and performs random number update processing (step S4020). In this random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in Figure 7 (B) by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches a set upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of incrementing the random number value by 1, it may also be configured to increment by 2 or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the performance control microcomputer 91 allows the interrupt process to be interrupted (step S4025). While the interrupt is allowed, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub-CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. In other words, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at each predetermined cycle. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The presentation control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a variable presentation process (step S4305). The variable presentation process sets a pre-variation command at a specific timing during the variable presentation to execute a specific display effect on the display screen 7a. Details will be described later. After the variable presentation process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the presentation button detection switch 63a. After the switch process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 transmits the various commands set in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 during the received command analysis process, etc., to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108. Upon receiving the various commands, the image control board 100 uses the image display device 7 to execute display performances according to the received commands. Furthermore, upon receiving the various commands, the audio control board 106 executes audio performances by outputting audio from the speaker 67 according to the received commands. Upon receiving the various commands, the lamp control board 107 executes lamp performances by controlling the illumination of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320).

After other processing, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a sub-side RAM clear process (step S4325). The sub-side RAM clear process is the process that the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that a RAM clear should be performed. Details of the sub-side RAM clear process will be described later. After the sub-side RAM clear process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a sub-side power failure recovery process (step S4330). The sub-side power failure recovery process is the process that the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that a power failure recovery should be performed. Details of the sub-side power failure recovery process will be described later. After the sub-side power failure recovery process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs an error notification process 1 (step S4335). In error notification process 1, the presentation control microcomputer 91 manages the error state and performs a process to determine whether or not to notify an error. Details of error notification process 1 will be described later. After the error notification process 1, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs the error notification process 2 (step S4340). In the error notification process 2, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to issue an error notification for an error for which the game control microcomputer 81 manages the error state. The details of the error notification process 2 will be described later.
After the error notification process 2, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a reel error cancellation process (step S4345). In the reel error cancellation process, when a reel error state occurs when a predetermined condition is met, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a process to determine whether or not to cancel the reel error state. Details of the reel error cancellation process will be described later. After the reel error cancellation process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a movable reel scenario execution process (step S4350). In the movable reel scenario execution process, the performance control microcomputer 91 operates the movable reel according to the scenario data of the movable reel. The scenario data of the movable reel is data for performing a predetermined operation of the movable reel. The performance control microcomputer 91 is stored in the sub-ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. After the movable reel scenario execution process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a movable reel origin return process (step S4355). In the movable reel origin return processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing to set scenario data for moving the movable reel to the origin area. Furthermore, if the scenario for moving it to the origin area is executed but the movable reel cannot be moved to the origin area, the microcomputer 91 performs processing to put the reel into an error state. Details of the movable reel origin return processing will be described later. After the movable reel origin return processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs movable reel initial operation processing (step S4360). In the movable reel initial operation processing, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing to set scenario data for performing an initial operation on the movable reel. The initial operation performed by the movable reel is an operation to check whether the movable reel is operating normally. Details of the movable reel initial operation processing will be described later. After the movable reel initial operation processing is performed, this processing ends.

[Received command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If a pre-determination command has been received (step S4415: YES), a pre-reading performance determination process is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading performance determination process" is a process that determines whether or not a pre-reading performance will be executed, and if so, the pre-reading performance pattern. Details of the pre-reading performance determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if a pre-determination command has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading performance determination process is skipped. The pre-reading performance is a performance that suggests that the newly stored reserved information in the special chart reserved memory area 85 is likely to contain a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a reserved ball count command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If so (step S4445: YES), it performs reserved ball display processing (step S4450). In the reserved ball display processing, the values of the first special symbol reserved effect counter, second special symbol reserved effect counter, and regular symbol reserved effect counter, which are provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94, are updated based on the information contained in the reserved ball count command regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of reserved balls for regular symbol. This allows information on the number of reserved balls to be retained not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the reserved images 9A and 9B displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special symbol reserved effect counter, second special symbol reserved effect counter, and regular symbol reserved effect counter. On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the reserved ball display process described above is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If a fluctuation start command has been received (step S4455: YES), the fluctuation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "fluctuation effect start process" is a process for selecting the fluctuation effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the special pattern fluctuation. Details of the fluctuation effect start process will be described later. On the other hand, if a fluctuation start command has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect start process is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If a fluctuation stop command has been received (step S4465: YES), a fluctuation effect end process is performed (step S4470). The "fluctuation effect end process" is a process for stopping the fluctuation effect executed while the special symbol is fluctuating. In the fluctuation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation effect end command to end the fluctuation effect. This causes the decorative symbol corresponding to the currently fluctuating special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 to be displayed frozen. The effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the pre-determination information shift process (Figure 39), which will be described later. Note that if a fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end process is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If so (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process for selecting the opening effect pattern (contents) to be executed when the special game (jackpot game) starts. In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command and sets information contained in the opening command regarding the special symbol stop pattern data set when the jackpot win was determined in the sub-RAM 94. Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects a preset opening effect pattern corresponding to the type of win indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets an opening effect start command to start the selected opening effect in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a specified opening effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that if an opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

The presentation control microcomputer 91 then determines whether a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If a round designation command has been received (step S4485: YES), a round designation pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round designation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an open game designation pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the jackpot opening or during the interval between openings during a special game (jackpot game). In the round designation pattern determination process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command and sets information about the special symbol stop pattern data and the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. The presentation control microcomputer 91 then selects a pre-defined round designation pattern corresponding to the type of win and the number of rounds indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets a round designation start command to start the selected round designation in the designation command setting area 94b of the sub-RAM 94. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a specified round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if a round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If so (step S4495: YES), an ending presentation pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending presentation pattern determination process" is a process for selecting the ending presentation pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (a big win game or a small win game). In the ending presentation pattern determination process, the presentation control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data contained in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, it selects an ending presentation pattern according to the type of win indicated by the special symbol stop pattern data, and sets an ending presentation start command to start the selected ending presentation in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a specified ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If no ending command has been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designation command, it stores information about the game state included in the game state designation command (such as a time-saving flag, time-saving counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, and ceiling counter) in the sub-RAM 94. Specifically, based on the information included in the game state designation command, the values of the time-saving effect counter, probability change effect counter, and ceiling effect counter stored in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 are updated. For example, the remaining number of variations (number of games) during the time-saving effect is set in the time-saving effect counter, the remaining number of variations during the probability change is set in the probability change effect counter, and the remaining number of variations until the ceiling is reached is set in the ceiling effect counter. This allows information about the number of time-saving effects, the number of probability change effects, and the ceiling number to be stored not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub-control board 90 side. Furthermore, when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a V-pass command, it stores the V-pass information in the sub-RAM 94. The performance control microcomputer 91 also performs processing based on commands other than those described above (such as a customer waiting standby command or a RAM clear notification command), and then ends this processing. Note that in this embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a customer waiting command and sets the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to a standby screen, which is a demo screen for waiting for customers. However, if no command is received from the main control board 80 after a predetermined period of time has passed, it may determine that the device is in a customer waiting standby state and control the display screen 7a to display the standby screen.

[Pre-reading performance decision processing]
38 is a flowchart of the pre-reading effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a pre-determination information rewrite process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 stores the jackpot pre-determination result (jackpot determination information), the jackpot type pre-determination result (jackpot type information), and the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information) contained in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80 in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

Figure 39 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores the jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information described above, as well as predictive display pattern information. The predictive display pattern information indicates the content of the predictive display executed during the variation display and is selected in step S4604, described below. Figure 39(A) shows a state in which the jackpot determination information "Miss" and variation pattern information "P72" and "P73" are stored in the first to third storage areas as pre-determination results corresponding to the first to third reserved special symbol 2 symbols, respectively, and the pre-determination results corresponding to the variations are stored in the corresponding areas. Figure 39(B) shows a state in which, from the state shown in Figure 39(A), a special symbol 2 symbol wins, and the pre-determination information included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80 is stored in the fourth storage area corresponding to the fourth reserved special symbol 2 symbol. Here, the pre-determination information stored includes the jackpot determination information "Jackpot," the jackpot type information "21H," and the variation pattern information "P61." Additionally, "Pattern A" is set as pre-reading effect pattern information in the first through fourth storage areas corresponding to the first through fourth reserved special chart 2 symbols and in the corresponding area. Figure 39(C) shows the state after the variation has ended and the pre-determination information shift process has been executed from the state shown in Figure 39(B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the corresponding area, the pre-determination information stored in the second through fourth storage areas is shifted to the first through third storage areas, and the pre-determination information in the fourth storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed during the variation effect end process (Figure 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this processing is terminated. In other words, if pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the relevant area or any of the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c, no new pre-reading effect pattern information is selected and stored. On the other hand, if pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603). Whether the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the result of the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination (fluctuation pattern information). If the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "miss with no reach" (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 terminates this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, if the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is a "jackpot" or a "miss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a look-ahead effect execution determination to determine whether to perform a look-ahead effect and selects a look-ahead effect pattern (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the look-ahead effect random number counter and, by referencing the obtained random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93, determines whether to perform a look-ahead effect and, if a look-ahead effect is to be performed, the look-ahead effect pattern.

Figure 40 is a diagram illustrating the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-determination result is "jackpot" and the look-ahead effect random number value is "0-55," the look-ahead effect will be "none." If the look-ahead effect random number value is "56-67," "Pattern A" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. If the look-ahead effect random number value is "68-127," "Pattern B" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. Also, if the pre-determination result is "reach with miss" and the look-ahead effect random number value is "0-107," the look-ahead effect will be "none." If the look-ahead effect random number value is "108-114," "Pattern A" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. If the look-ahead effect random number value is "115-127," "Pattern B" will be selected as the look-ahead effect. The type, content, and range of random number values selected for the look-ahead effect pattern can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that a look-ahead effect will be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, the look-ahead effect pattern is stored not only in the storage area corresponding to the received look-ahead command among the first to fourth storage areas, but also in the storage area before the corresponding storage area and in that area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), not only is "Pattern A" set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received look-ahead command, but "Pattern A" is also set in the first to third storage areas and that area. As a result, look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (the variable effect corresponding to that area and the first to third storage areas). Note that whether or not a look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to that area depends on the progress of that variable effect. In other words, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed in the variable effect, the look-ahead effect will not be executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it will be executed at that time. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), processing ends.

[Variable performance start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable effect start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets information about the special symbol stop symbol data included in the variable effect start command and information about the variable pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current game status and symbol information indicating the symbol as the result of the hit determination process for special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. The game status information and symbol information acquired here can be referenced by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The core effect pattern determination process is a process for determining the basic configuration of the variable effect (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display and movement of specified characters, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67, and the lighting control of lamps). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effects and pre-reading effects on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern by referencing the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 42 is a diagram illustrating the core effect pattern determination table T52. In Figure 42, multiple types of core effect patterns that produce normal reach effects, multiple types of core effect patterns that produce SP1 effects, multiple types of core effect patterns that produce SP2 effects, multiple types of core effect patterns that produce SP3 effects, and multiple types of core effect patterns that produce no-reach, miss effects are set. The type of core effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", a core effect pattern that produces an SP1 effect is selected. Also, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", a core effect pattern that produces a no-reach, miss effect is selected.

Returning to Figure 41, after determining the core effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining additional effects to be superimposed on the variable effects. The effect control microcomputer 91 obtains the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the obtained random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

Figure 43 is a diagram illustrating the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of special chart 1 when the time-saving mode is not active is shown. In other words, Figure 43 shows the chance-up effect patterns that are executed when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1" to "P16." Note that the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 may or may not include a portion that determines the chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation pattern is "P21" to "P33," "P41" to "P56," or "61" to "73."

In Figure 43, the chance-up effect patterns set are "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO". These chance effect patterns correspond to the various chance-up effects described below.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs count effect pattern determination processing (step S5016). Here, the count effect pattern determination processing is processing for displaying on the display screen 7a the remaining number of fluctuations (number of games) during the special mode, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time-saving mode, the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, the number of fluctuations since the power was turned on, the number of fluctuations since the jackpot game was played, etc. During the special mode, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of fluctuations on the display screen 7a based on the value of the special mode effect counter. Furthermore, during the time-saving mode, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the remaining number of fluctuations based on the value of the time-saving effect counter.

The effect control microcomputer 91 can also execute various effects based on the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the overnight effect counter. The ceiling effect counter stores the number of remaining variations until the ceiling is reached, and the overnight effect counter records the number of variations since power-on. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 can set the number of variations since power-on by incrementing the overnight effect counter each time it receives a variable effect end command from the main control board 80. When the value of the overnight effect counter is TH1 (e.g., TH1 = 10), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2 (e.g., TH2 = 200). If the value of the ceiling effect counter is less than or equal to TH2, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is greater than TH2, the chance image is not displayed. This allows a player who sees the chance image to recognize that the gaming machine 1 is carrying over the number of games played from the previous day and that RAM has not been cleared. The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH3 (e.g., TH3 = 50). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also erase the display or chance image indicating the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH4 (e.g., TH4 = 100). The performance control microcomputer 91 may also display the value of the ceiling performance counter when the value of the overnight performance counter is TH5 (e.g., TH5 = 200). The performance control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling performance counter based on the value of the overnight performance counter, as described above, or may also determine the same based on the value of the ceiling performance counter. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH6 (e.g., TH6 = 100), may turn off the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH7 (e.g., TH7 = 70), and may display the value of the ceiling effect counter again when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (e.g., TH8 = 50).

After the count effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 may refer to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 to determine the combination of effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed as stopped symbols. This determines the type of effect to be used as a variable effect.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5016 above is realized (step S5020). When the variable performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is sent to the image control board 100 in the command sending process (Figure 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the variable performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the variable performance timer (step S5030) and ends this process. The variable performance timer is set to a variable time (Figure 42) corresponding to the variable performance pattern included in the variable performance start command. For example, when the variable performance pattern is "P1," the variable performance timer is set to "40 seconds."

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the processing during the variable effect (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable effect is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not a variable effect is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable effect timer has reached zero. If a variable effect is not in progress (step S4701: NO), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a variable effect is in progress (step S4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set a pre-variation end command in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 uses to notify the image control board 100 and other devices that a specific timing has occurred during the variable effect. Upon receiving the pre-variation end command, the image control board 100 switches the effect content, displays a specific image, or performs other actions according to the information contained in the pre-variation end command.

If it is not the time to set a pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the time to set a pre-variation end command (step S4702: YES), a determination is made as to whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command not including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the corresponding area, a pre-variation end command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the corresponding variation effect. The image control microcomputer 101 then starts a preview effect that displays a preview effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no preview effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect that fades the preview image.

8. Operation of the Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The buffers and other components mentioned in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from ROM 103, and after CPU initialization processing, the display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control processing, the image control microcomputer 101 first determines whether a variable effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If a variable effect start command has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variable effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command, and displays it on the image display device 7. On the other hand, if the command has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Next, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If a pre-variation end command has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the pre-reading effect display (step S5004). On the other hand, if a pre-variation end command has not been received (step S5003: NO), the image control microcomputer 101 skips the above-mentioned processing.

Next, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether a variable effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If a variable effect end command has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads from ROM 103 an image that displays the variable effect as stopped, and displays the stopped variable effect on the image display device 7 (step S5006). On the other hand, if a variable effect end command has not been received (step S5005: NO), the image control microcomputer 101 skips the above-mentioned processing.

Next, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In other processing, the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from ROM 103 predetermined images specified in various commands, in addition to the commands described above, and displays them on the image display device 7. For example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives an opening performance start command, it reads out from ROM 103 the predetermined opening performance image specified in the opening performance start command and displays it on the image display device 7. Furthermore, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives a round performance start command, it reads out from ROM 103 the predetermined round performance image specified in the round performance start command and displays it on the image display device 7. Furthermore, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives an ending performance start command, it reads out from ROM 103 the predetermined ending performance image specified in the ending performance start command and displays it on the image display device 7, thereby ending this processing.

9. Operation of Movable Body and Display Performance of Sub-Display Screen 64 Using Figures 46 to 50, the operation of the board movable body (first movable role device 14, second movable role device 15), the operation of the frame movable body (frame movable role device 69), and the display performance of the sub-display screen 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U) will be described. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable role device 14, second movable role device 15, and frame movable role device 69 during game performance (display performance) and in initial operation when powered on. The performance control microcomputer 91 also performs display performance to display a specific image on the sub-display screen 64 during game performance (display performance) and in initial operation when powered on.

Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement mode of the first movable part 14. Figure 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the first movable part 14. The first movable part 14 is a vertically elongated rod-shaped member, with its upper end located near the upper end of the image display device 7 and its lower end located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper and lower ends of the first movable part 14 are difficult to see, while the central portion is visible in front of the image display device 7. As shown in Figure 1, the first movable part 14 can be stationary in a retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first mode). In the retracted position, only a portion of the first movable part 14 may be retracted, leaving the remainder visible, or the entire part may be retracted, making it difficult to see. As shown in Figure 46, the first movable part 14 is configured to be movable left and right in front of the image display device 7. The first movable prop 14 is configured to move (advance) from a retracted position toward the right edge of the display screen 7a and move left and right in front of the display screen 7a. It can also stop at any advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement pattern of the first movable prop 14 can be set arbitrarily. As shown in Figure 47, the first movable prop 14 can move to the right edge of the display screen 7a and stop at that position (second pattern). At least a portion of the first movable prop 14 may be formed with a decorative part, or may be transparent.

Figure 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second mode of the second movable part 15. The second movable part 15 has a rectangular decorative part marked "OARO" and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in Figure 1, the second movable part 15 can be stopped in a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a portion of the second movable part 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable part 15 can move downward from the state shown in Figure 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and can be stopped in the extended position (deployed position) shown in Figure 48 (second mode). In this second mode, the decorative part stops in front of the image display device 7, covering the center of the display screen 7a. By moving upward (retracting) from the extended position shown in Figure 48, the second movable part 15 can move to the retracted position shown in Figure 1 and stop there.

Figure 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second mode of the movable frame device 69. The movable frame device 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-shaped members arranged on both the left and right sides of the handle 60, each of which is configured to be movable left and right. The two members are made of flexible material, and one main surface of each member is configured to move toward and away from the handle 60. As shown in Figure 1, the two members of the movable frame device 69 normally remain stationary in retracted positions (home positions) on the left and right sides of the handle 60, respectively, away from the handle 60 (first mode). As shown in Figure 49, the two members of the movable frame device 69 can move (advance) from their retracted positions toward the handle 60, i.e., move toward each other, and can each remain stationary in a position that touches the handle 60 (second mode). When in the advanced position, the movable frame device 69 comes into contact with the handle 60 or the player's right hand while operating the handle 60. The movable frame accessory 69 can move in the direction in which the two components move away from each other, so that it changes from the second position to the first position.

Figure 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating display effects on the sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U). The right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and upper sub-display screen 64U can each display images independently. They can also display effects linked to the images on the display screen 7a.

[Sensor position]
51 is a diagram for explaining the position of the sensors. The first movable role 14 detection sensor 14a is positioned so that the signal of the first movable role 14 detection sensor 14a is ON when the first movable role 14 is present in the origin area. The first movable role 14 detection sensor 14a detects that the first movable role 14 is present in the origin area. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the first movable role 14 is present in the origin area based on the signal of the first movable role 14 detection sensor 14a.

The origin area of a movable prop is the area that includes the storage position (origin position) of the movable prop and can be detected by the movable prop's detection sensor. Since the origin area is the entire area that the movable prop's detection sensor can detect, the movable prop's detection sensor will detect both the boundary of the detectable area and the position moved from the boundary of the detectable area in the direction that the detection sensor can detect. Therefore, even if the movable prop's detection sensor detects it, the movable prop may not be in the same position.

The second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a is positioned so that when the second movable part 15 is in the origin area, the signal from the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a is ON. The second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a detects that the second movable part 15 is in the origin area. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the second movable part 15 is in the origin area based on the signal from the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a.

The gaming machine frame open sensor 50a detects whether the gaming machine frame 50 is open. When the gaming machine frame 50 is open, the signal from the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a turns ON. The gaming machine frame open sensor 50a is positioned between the front frame (front frame portion) 53 and the gaming board 2. The gaming machine frame 50 is said to be open when the front frame 53 is separated from the gaming board 2. The gaming machine frame open sensor 50a detects when the front frame 53 is separated from the gaming board 2. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the gaming machine frame 50 is open based on the signal from the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a.

The gaming machine frame open sensor 50a may also detect a state in which the gaming board 2 is separated from the outer frame of the gaming machine. In this case, the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a is disposed between the gaming board 2 and the outer frame of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a may detect both a state in which the front frame 53 is separated from the gaming board 2 and a state in which the gaming board 2 is separated from the outer frame of the gaming machine. In this case, the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a is disposed between the front frame 53 and the gaming board 2 and between the gaming board 2 and the outer frame of the gaming machine. The signals for a state in which the front frame 53 is separated from the gaming board 2 and a state in which the gaming board 2 is separated from the outer frame of the gaming machine may be the same, or different signals may be used to detect each state.

The magnetic sensor 151a detects magnetism and detects the presence of a magnet near the gaming machine 1. When the magnetic sensor 151a detects magnetism, the signal from the magnetic sensor 151a turns ON. The magnetic sensor 151a detects that a magnet has been brought close to the gaming machine 1. The magnetic sensor 151a is positioned in a location where cheating is likely to occur. In the gaming machine 1, the magnetic sensor 151a is positioned close to the V area 39 and the non-V area 70. The magnetic sensor 151a may also be positioned close to the first start hole 20, the second start hole 21, and the first large winning hole 30. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a magnet is present near the gaming machine 1 based on the signal from the magnetic sensor 151a.

The radio wave sensor 152a detects radio waves. When the radio wave sensor 152a detects magnetism, the signal from the radio wave sensor 152a turns ON. The radio wave sensor 152a is placed in a location where cheating is likely to occur. In the gaming machine 1, it is placed in a location close to the first start hole 20 and the second start hole 21. The radio wave sensor 152a may also be placed in a location close to the first large winning hole 30. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether radio waves are being generated near the gaming machine 1 based on the signal from the radio wave sensor 152a.

The supply ball shortage sensor 153a detects a shortage of supply balls. The supply ball shortage sensor 153a is located in the ball tank 400 provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1. When game balls have not accumulated in the ball tank 400 provided on the back side of the gaming machine 1 up to the position where the supply ball shortage sensor 153a is located, the signal from the supply ball shortage sensor 153a turns ON. The gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not there is a shortage of supply balls based on the signal from the supply ball shortage sensor 153a.

[Power-on process]
52 is a flowchart of the power-on process (FIG. 15: step S006). When the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether to clear the RAM or to restore power, and performs the appropriate process for each case.

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the RAM clear switch 161 is ON (step S601). The RAM clear switch 161 is provided on the main control board 80, and when pressed, a RAM clear button press signal to the main control board 80 turns ON. The game control microcomputer 81 makes its determination based on the RAM clear button press signal.

When the RAM clear switch 161 is ON (step S601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S608. When the RAM clear switch 161 is OFF (step S601: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 creates a sum value (step S602). This sum value is the sum of the RAM values of the game control microcomputer 81. If the sum value created when the power was turned on matches the sum value created when the power was turned off, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the RAM values are normal. If the RAM values of the game control microcomputer 81 are normal, recovery from power outage is possible. If the sum value created when the power was turned on does not match the sum value created when the power was turned off, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the RAM values are abnormal. In this case, recovery from the power outage state is not possible, so the game control microcomputer 81 clears the RAM without performing power outage recovery. Clearing the RAM means clearing (resetting) the information stored in the main RAM 84. The main RAM 84 stores information such as the game status controlled by the game control microcomputer 81.

The gaming control microcomputer 81 compares the created sum value with the stored sum value created at the time of power outage (step S603). If the sum values do not match (step S604: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S608. If the sum values match (step S604: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines to perform a power outage recovery. The gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a power outage recovery command to send to the presentation control microcomputer 91 (step S605). The gaming control microcomputer 81 outputs the set command to the sub-control board 90 during the output process (S108 in Figure 16). The power outage recovery command contains information on the gaming state in which power outage recovery will be performed.

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the game state to be restored after power outage is a customer waiting state (step S606). If the game state to be restored after power outage is not a customer waiting state (step S606: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. If the game state to be restored after power outage is a customer waiting state (step S606: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer waiting state command (step S607) and ends this processing.

In step S608, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the value of its RAM to "0" or the initial value in order to reset the gaming state to the initial state (step S608). The gaming control microcomputer 81 sets RAM clear command 1 in order to send RAM clear command 1 to the presentation control microcomputer 91 (step S609). RAM clear command 1 is a command sent when the gaming machine 1 transitions to the state before transitioning to the gaming state (ball entrance operation confirmation state). When the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives RAM clear command 1, it displays an image of the ball entrance operation confirmation state on the display screen 7a. The image of the ball entrance operation confirmation state will be described later.

After setting RAM clear command 1, the game control microcomputer 81 transitions to the ball entry port operation confirmation state and checks the operation of the movable objects related to ball entry into the gaming machine 1 (step S610). Specifically, it repeatedly opens and closes the movable objects that open the ball entry port, such as the first large prize device 31 (first attacker), the second large prize device (second attacker) 36, and the normal variable prize device (electric chute) 22, to check their operation. The opening and closing times are, for example, one second each. This ball entry port operation confirmation state continues until the RAM clear switch 161 is pressed. Note that the ball entry port operation confirmation state may also continue until a certain period of time has elapsed.

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the RAM clear switch 161 is ON (step S611). When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the RAM clear switch 161 is not ON (step S611: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 again determines whether the RAM clear switch 161 is ON (step S611), and repeats this determination until it determines that the RAM clear switch 161 is ON.

When the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines that the RAM clear switch 161 is ON (step S611: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 transitions the state to the initial operation check state (step S612). The gaming control microcomputer 81 then sets RAM clear command 2 to send it to the presentation control microcomputer 91 (step S613). RAM clear command 2 is a command sent when the gaming machine 1 transitions to the initial operation check state. Upon receiving RAM clear command 2, the presentation control microcomputer 91 displays an image of the initial operation check state on the display screen 7a. The image of the initial operation check state will be described later. The presentation control microcomputer 91 then terminates this processing. Note that, although the present embodiment is described as performing a ball inlet operation check, it is also possible to transition to the gaming state without performing a ball inlet operation check and skipping steps S608 to S611. Additionally, although this embodiment transitions to the initial operation check state, it is also possible to transition to the game state without transitioning to the initial operation check state.

[Power off monitoring process]
53 is a flowchart of the power-off monitoring process (FIG. 16: step S111). Here, when the power switch 163 on the power supply board 162 is turned OFF, the game control microcomputer 81 prepares for a power-off. Preparing for a power-off involves creating and storing information to determine whether the RAM values of the game control microcomputer 81 are normal when the power switch 163 is turned ON after a power-off.

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the power switch 163 on the power supply board 162 is OFF (step S701). When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the power switch 163 is not OFF (step S701: NO), it ends this process. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the power switch 163 is OFF (step S701: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 creates a sum value (step S702). The game control microcomputer 81 adds up the values in the RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 and uses the last two digits as the sum value. Note that the sum value may be the last one digit, or the last three or four digits.

The gaming control microcomputer 81 then stores the sum value (step S703). The stored sum value is referenced when the power is turned on to determine whether or not to perform a power recovery. After that, the gaming control microcomputer 81 will not execute any processing until the power switch 163 is turned ON again. Note that a certain amount of power is still supplied to the main control board 80 of the gaming machine 1 even during a power outage, and it is highly likely that the RAM values will be maintained during the power outage.

[Sub-side RAM clear processing]
54 is a flowchart of the sub-side RAM clearing process (FIG. 36: step S4325). Here, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the RAM should be cleared, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a process to produce a presentation corresponding to the RAM clearing.

The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether RAM clear command 1 has been received (step S6001). If the performance control microcomputer 91 has not received RAM clear command 1 (step S6001: NO), processing proceeds to step S6003. If the performance control microcomputer 91 has received RAM clear command 1 (step S6001: YES), it sets the screen display command for checking the ball entrance operation (step S6002), and processing proceeds to step S6003.

The set command for image display control is sent by the performance control microcomputer 91 to the image control microcomputer 101 in the command sending process (S4315 in Figure 36). Note that if the command is for controlling the lighting of an LED, it is sent to the lamp control board 107. If the command is for audio control, it is sent to the audio control board 106. When the ball entrance operation confirmation screen is displayed, the game board 2 is checking the operation of movable objects related to ball entry. Note that although in this embodiment, ball entrance operation confirmation is performed, it is also possible not to perform ball entrance operation confirmation.

In step S6003, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received RAM clear command 2. If it has not received RAM clear command 2 (step S6003: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 terminates this processing. When it receives RAM clear command 2 (step S6003: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the left decorative pattern to "1", the middle decorative pattern to "2", and the right decorative pattern to "3" (step S6004). In this embodiment, the decorative patterns set when RAM clear command 2 is received are different from those set when a power failure recovery command is received, but they may also be the same.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets decorative pattern designation commands for the left decorative pattern to "1", the middle decorative pattern to "2", and the right decorative pattern to "3" (step S6005). When this command is sent to the image control microcomputer 101, when the image control microcomputer 101 displays decorative patterns, the decorative patterns displayed will be "1" for the left decorative pattern, "2" for the middle decorative pattern, and "3" for the right decorative pattern.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets an initial screen display command (step S6006). When this command is sent to the image control microcomputer 101, an image indicating that operation is being checked is displayed on the display screen 7a.

An image indicating that operation is being checked is displayed on the display screen 7a, but after a certain amount of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the image indicating operation is being checked, or when the change starts or the operating means is operated, the game background is displayed. The game background is switched to when the performance control microcomputer 91 sends a command to the image control microcomputer 101. The decorative patterns here are "1" for the left decorative pattern, "2" for the center decorative pattern, and "3" for the right decorative pattern. The background displayed when the RAM is cleared is predetermined, and the predetermined background image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the image indicating that this operation is being checked is displayed, the initial operation of the lamp LED, speaker, and movable props, which will be described later, will be carried out.

In this embodiment, an image indicating that operation is being checked is displayed, but it is also possible to display a game background instead of an image indicating that operation is being checked.

In this embodiment, an image indicating that the ball entrance operation is being checked and that the operation is being checked is displayed, but it is also possible not to display an image indicating that the ball entrance operation is being checked and that the operation is being checked.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 turns on the lamp initial operation flag (step S6007). When the lamp initial operation flag is turned on, the lamp LED's initial operation is performed. The lamp LED's initial operation will be described later.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 turns on the speaker initial operation flag (step S6008). When the speaker initial operation flag is turned on, the speaker performs initial operation. The speaker initial operation will be described later.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 turns on the movable role initial operation flag (step S6009). When the movable role initial operation flag is turned on, the initial operation of the movable role is performed. The initial operation of the movable role will be described later. The performance control microcomputer 91 then ends this processing.

[Sub-side power failure recovery process]
55 is a flowchart of the sub-side power recovery process (FIG. 36: step S4330). When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the power will be restored, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs a process to create a presentation corresponding to the power recovery.

The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether a power failure recovery command has been received (step S6201). If the performance control microcomputer 91 has not received a power failure recovery command (step S6201: NO), it terminates this processing. If the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a power failure recovery command (step S6201: YES), it sets the left decorative pattern to "1", the middle decorative pattern to "2", and the right decorative pattern to "3" (step S6203).

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols displayed when the RAM is cleared and when the power is restored after a power outage are different, but they may also be the same. For example, the left decorative symbol may be "7", the middle decorative symbol may be "8", and the right decorative symbol may be "9" for both when the RAM is cleared and when the power is restored after a power outage. Alternatively, the decorative symbols displayed when the RAM is cleared and when the power is restored may be rearranged. For example, the decorative symbols displayed when the RAM is cleared may be set to "1" for the left decorative symbol, "2" for the middle decorative symbol, and "3" for the right decorative symbol, and the decorative symbols displayed when the power is restored after a power outage may be set to "3" for the left decorative symbol, "2" for the middle decorative symbol, and "1" for the right decorative symbol.

The performance control microcomputer 91 also sets decorative pattern designation commands for the left decorative pattern to "7", the middle decorative pattern to "8", and the right decorative pattern to "9" (step S6203). The performance control microcomputer 91 also sets a power failure recovery screen display command (step S6204). When the power failure recovery screen display command is sent to the image control microcomputer 101, an image indicating that power has been restored from the power failure is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The image indicating that power has been restored from the power failure will be described later.

Then, the performance control microcomputer 91 turns on the movable role initial operation flag (step S6205). When the movable role initial operation flag is turned on, the initial operation of the movable role is performed. The initial operation of the movable role will be described later.

Then, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the machine is in a right-hit state (step S6206). The determination of whether or not the machine is in a right-hit state is made using a power-off recovery command. The power-off recovery command is a command that indicates the game state to be restored. If the machine is not in a right-hit state (step S6206: NO), the presentation control microcomputer 91 ends this process. If the machine is in a right-hit state (step S6206: YES), the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets a right-hit suggestion display command (step S6207). By sending the right-hit suggestion display command to the image control microcomputer 101, a right-hit suggestion image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the machine is in a right-hit state and the power is restored, an image indicating that the power has been restored and the right-hit suggestion image are displayed together. The presentation control microcomputer 91 then ends this process.

[RAM clear effect]
56 is a diagram for explaining the effects when the RAM is cleared. Here, the display contents of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on, the operation of the movable objects related to the ball entry on the game board 2 (normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22, first large winning device (first attacker) 31, second large winning device (second attacker) 36), the initial operation of the lamp LED, the initial operation of the speaker, and the initial operation of the movable role device are explained. When the RAM is cleared, the game state is the normal waiting state for customers.

Figure 56 (A) shows the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 before the power switch 163 of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON. Figure 56 (B) shows the image control microcomputer 101 displaying an image TSO indicating that the power has been turned on on the display screen 7a. By displaying the image TSO indicating that the power has been turned on on the display screen 7a, the image control microcomputer 101 indicates that it has started up normally. The image TSO indicating that the power has been turned on is a text image that reads "Please wait a moment."

In Figure 56 (C), the image control microcomputer 101 displays on the display screen 7a an image NKK indicating that the ball entry port is operating and an image TRO prompting the user to press the RAM clear button. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 repeatedly opens and closes the normal variable entry device (electric chute) 22, the first large entry device (first attacker) 31, and the second large entry device (second attacker) 36 to check the operation of the movable objects related to ball entry on the gaming board 2. The gaming machine 1 is in a ball entry port operation check state. The display screen 7a displays an image indicating the ball entry port operation check state (image NKK indicating that the ball entry port is operating and an image TRO prompting the user to press the RAM clear button). This opening and closing occurs at regular time intervals. For example, the opening is performed for one second, followed by closing for one second, followed by opening for one second, and this operation is repeated. The opening and closing of each movable object related to the ball's entry on each game board 2 may be done simultaneously or with a time lag. For example, when the first large prize device (first attacker) 31 is open, the second large prize device (second attacker) 36 may be closed, and when the first large prize device (first attacker) 31 is closed, the second large prize device (second attacker) 36 may be open.

The image NKK showing the entrance gate in operation is a text image that reads "Checking entrance gate." The image TRO prompting the user to press the RAM clear button is a text image that reads "Please press the RAM clear button." The image NKK showing the entrance gate in operation and the image TRO prompting the user to press the RAM clear button are displayed when the image control microcomputer 101 receives a command to display the entrance gate operation confirmation screen.

In Figure 56 (D), the image control microcomputer 101 displays an image DKK indicating that the operation of the lamp LED, speaker, and movable role device is being checked. At this time, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs the initial operation of the lamp LED, speaker, and movable role device. The gaming machine 1 is in the initial operation check state. The display screen 7a displays an image of the initial operation check state (image DKK indicating that the operation of the lamp LED, speaker, and movable role device is being checked). These initial operations are performed until the predetermined operations are completed. Even if fluctuations begin, the initial operations of the movable role device continue until the predetermined operations are completed. The initial operation of the lamp LED, speaker, and movable role device will be described later. The image DKK indicating that operation checks are being performed is a text image that reads "Operation Checking." The image DKK indicating that operation checks are being performed is displayed for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) until fluctuations begin and the operation means is operated, after which the game background is displayed.

Note that while the image DKK indicating that operation is being checked is displayed, the operation of the effect button 63 and select button 68 may also be checked. The operation of the effect button 63 and select button 68 may be checked by having the gaming machine 1 emit a sound when they are pressed.

In Figure 56 (E), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the game background SMH when the RAM is cleared, the display MH indicating the presentation mode of the character image "Sun Mode," and decorative symbols (left decorative symbol "1," middle decorative symbol "2," and right decorative symbol "3"). The presentation control microcomputer 91 also continues to perform the initial operation of the lamp LED, the initial operation of the speaker, and the initial operation of the movable role element. These initial operations are performed until the predetermined operation is completed. Even if a change is initiated, the initial operation of the movable role element continues until the predetermined operation is completed. The game background displayed when the RAM is cleared is predetermined, and in this embodiment, when the RAM is cleared, the mode becomes Sun Mode, and the background image SMH is displayed as the background. The decorative symbols displayed when the RAM is cleared are also predetermined, and in this embodiment, when the RAM is cleared, the left decorative symbol "1," middle decorative symbol "2," and right decorative symbol "3" are displayed.

In this embodiment, after the operation in FIG. 56(B), the operation in FIG. 56(C) is performed, then the operation in FIG. 56(D) is performed, and then the operation in FIG. 56(E) is performed. However, after the operation in FIG. 56(B), the operation in FIG. 56(C) and the operation in FIG. 56(D) may not be performed, and instead the operation in FIG. 56(E) may be performed. Also, after the operation in FIG. 56(C), the operation in FIG. 56(D) may not be performed, and instead the operation in FIG. 56(E) may be performed.

[Power off/recovery animation]
Figure 57 is a diagram for explaining the effects when power is restored after a power outage. Here, the display contents of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when power is restored after power is turned on, the operation of the normal variable winning device (electric chute) 22, the first big winning device (first attacker) 31, and the second big winning device (second attacker) 36, and the initial operation of the movable role are explained. Figures 57(A) to 57(D) explain the effects of power restoration when the game state at the time of power outage was in the normal state, Figures 57(E) to 57(G) explain the effects of power restoration when the game state at the time of power outage was fluctuating in the time-shortening state, and Figures 57(H) to 57(J) explain the effects of power restoration when the game state at the time of power outage was in the jackpot game state.

Figure 57 (A) shows the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 before the power switch 163 of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON. Figure 57 (B) shows the image control microcomputer 101 displaying an image TSO indicating that the power has been turned on on the display screen 7a. By displaying the image TSO indicating that the power has been turned on on the display screen 7a, the image control microcomputer 101 indicates that it has started up normally. The image TSO indicating that the power has been turned on is a text image that reads "Please wait a moment."

In Figure 57 (C), the image control microcomputer 101 displays an image THJ indicating that the power has been restored on the display screen 7a. When the image control microcomputer 101 receives a power restoration screen display command, it displays an image THJ indicating that the power has been restored on the display screen 7a. The image THJ indicating that the power has been restored is a text image that reads "Preparing to restore."

In Figure 57 (D), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the game background MMH when power is restored after a power outage in the normal state, the display MH indicating the presentation mode of the text image "Moon Mode," and decorative symbols (left decorative symbol "7," center decorative symbol "8," and right decorative symbol "9"). By receiving a customer waiting command in the normal state, the image control microcomputer 101 displays the game background MMH in the normal state, the display MH indicating the presentation mode of the text image "Moon Mode," and decorative symbols (left decorative symbol "7," center decorative symbol "8," and right decorative symbol "9"). The presentation control microcomputer 91 also performs the initial operation of the movable device. This initial operation continues until the predetermined operation is completed. Even if fluctuations begin, the initial operation of the movable device continues until the predetermined operation is completed.

In this embodiment, the presentation mode when power is restored from a normal power outage is different from the presentation mode when the RAM is cleared, but they may be the same. Also, the decorative patterns when power is restored from a power outage and the decorative patterns when the RAM is cleared are different, but they may be the same. The decorative patterns when power is restored from a power outage and the decorative patterns when the RAM is cleared may be the same but in a different order. For example, the decorative patterns when the RAM is cleared may be a left decorative pattern "9", a middle decorative pattern "8", and a right decorative pattern "7", and the decorative patterns when power is restored from a power outage may be a left decorative pattern "7", a middle decorative pattern "8", and a right decorative pattern "9". Also, in this embodiment, the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs the initial operation of the movable reel in the state shown in Figure 57 (D), but the initial operation of the movable reel may be performed from the state shown in Figure 57 (C).

Figure 57 (E) shows the image control microcomputer 101 displaying an image THJ on the display screen 7a indicating that power has been restored. Figures 57 (E) to 57 (G) explain the presentation of power restoration when the game state at the time of power loss is fluctuating between time-shortened states. When the image control microcomputer 101 receives a power restoration screen display command, it displays an image THJ on the display screen 7a indicating that power has been restored. The image THJ indicating that power has been restored is a text image that reads "Preparing to restore."

Figure 57 (F) displays an image THJ indicating that power has been restored and a right-hit suggestion image MUS. Because the game state at the time of power loss was in the time-saving state and right-hit state, the image control microcomputer 101 receives a right-hit suggestion display command and displays the right-hit suggestion image MUS. Furthermore, if the electric chute 22 was open or scheduled to open when the power was lost, the electric chute 22 will open. The electric chute 22 will open before the game background is displayed. The image control microcomputer 101 displays the image THJ indicating that power has been restored until the variation has ended and a confirmation command is received. The image control microcomputer 101 may display the image THJ indicating that power has been restored until a variation start command is received. The image control microcomputer 101 may also display the image THJ indicating that power has been restored until a customer wait command is received.

In Figure 57 (G), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the right-hit suggestion image MUS, the game background TMH for when the power is restored after a power outage in the time-saving state, the display MH indicating the presentation mode of the character image "Star Mode", and decorative patterns (left decorative pattern "7", middle decorative pattern "8", right decorative pattern "9"). Upon receiving the confirmation command, the image control microcomputer 101 displays the game background TMH for when the power is restored after a power outage in the time-saving state, the display MH indicating the presentation mode of the character image "Star Mode", and decorative patterns (left decorative pattern "7", middle decorative pattern "8", right decorative pattern "9").

Figure 57 (H) shows the image control microcomputer 101 displaying an image THJ on the display screen 7a indicating that the power has been restored. Figures 57 (H) to 57 (J) explain the power restoration effect when the gaming state at the time of the power outage is a jackpot gaming state. When the image control microcomputer 101 receives a power restoration screen display command, it displays an image THJ on the display screen 7a indicating that the power has been restored. The image THJ indicating that the power has been restored is a text image that reads "Preparing to restore."

Figure 57 (F) displays an image THJ indicating that the power has been restored and a right-hit suggestion image MUS. Because the game state at the time of the power cut was a jackpot game state and a right-hit state, the image control microcontroller 101 receives a right-hit suggestion display command and displays the right-hit suggestion image MUS. Furthermore, if an attacker (first attacker 31 or second attacker 36) was open when the power was cut, that attacker is opened. The attacker is opened before the background of the jackpot game is displayed. The image control microcontroller 101 displays the image THJ indicating that the power has been restored until it receives an attacker close command or the like. The image control microcontroller 101 may display the image THJ indicating that the power has been restored until the jackpot game ends and a fluctuation start command is received. The image control microcontroller 101 may also display the image THJ indicating that the power has been restored until the jackpot game ends and a customer wait command is received. Additionally, the image control microcomputer 101 may display an image THJ indicating that power has been restored until an ending command is received.

In Figure 57 (J), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the background OAH during a jackpot game and the round number image RH of the image "3R" indicating the number of rounds. Upon receiving an attacker close command, the image control microcomputer 101 displays the background OAH during a jackpot game and the round number image RH of the image "3R" indicating the number of rounds. Note that upon receiving an attacker open command, the image control microcomputer 101 may display the background OAH during a jackpot game and the round number image RH of the image "3R" indicating the number of rounds.

[Power off/recovery effect]
Previously, when the power was restored after a power outage, even if the state at the time of power restoration was in a right-hit state (the electric chute was open or was scheduled to open, and the attacker was open or was scheduled to open), which was advantageous for the player, the right-hit suggestion image was not displayed until the game background was displayed. As a result, even if the electric chute or attacker was open when the power was restored, the player could not fire the game ball and could not get the game ball to enter the electric chute or attacker. This caused losses for the player, and the game's enjoyment was impaired.

In this embodiment, if the state after power recovery is a right-hit state, which is advantageous for the player, a right-hit suggestion image is displayed even before the game background is displayed. Therefore, the player is prompted by the right-hit suggestion image to fire the game ball, allowing the game ball to enter the electric chute or attacker, without the player suffering a loss. As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

[Effects of RAM clearing and power recovery]
Previously, the outcome of the decorative symbols when the power was turned on was not fixed. The outcome of each decorative symbol was set by the value of the RAM when the power was turned on. Therefore, it was impossible to know whether the state was after the power was turned on and play was started or before the power was turned on and play was started. It was not possible to select a gaming machine that was turned on and no one was playing.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbol number displayed when the power is turned on is fixed. This allows the player to see the state before the power is turned on and no one is playing, and select a gaming machine that has been turned on but no one is playing. This increases the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbol roll when the RAM is cleared is different from the decorative symbol roll when the power is restored. This allows you to tell whether the game has been played after the RAM has been cleared or after the power has been restored, and you can select a gaming machine after the RAM has been cleared or a gaming machine after the power has been restored. This increases the player's interest.

[Technical philosophy 1]
The performance control unit (91)
When the power supply is started in the first operation procedure (S6003: YES), the image display unit displays a display to be displayed during the recovery of the gaming machine, and then displays a decorative symbol with a predetermined first number roll (S6004, S6005).
When the power supply is started by the second operation procedure (S6021: YES), the image display unit displays the display that is displayed while the gaming machine is being restored, and then displays the decorative pattern with the first number rolled, or with a second number rolled that is different from the predetermined first number rolled (S6202, S6203).

Conventionally, decorative symbols were displayed with a random number roll regardless of whether power supply was started with the first operating procedure or the second operating procedure. According to this technical concept, when power supply was started with the first operating procedure, the effect control unit displays the decorative symbols with a predetermined first number roll on the image display unit after displaying the symbol that is displayed during recovery of the gaming machine, and when power supply was started with the second operating procedure, the effect control unit displays the decorative symbols with a predetermined first number roll on the image display unit after displaying the symbol that is displayed during recovery of the gaming machine, or displays the decorative symbols with a predetermined second number roll that is different from the first number roll.

Therefore, by displaying the first result whether power supply is started by the first operation procedure or the second operation procedure, it becomes difficult to tell which operation procedure started the power supply. This increases the fun of guessing which operation procedure started the power supply, making the game more interesting.

On the other hand, if the first number is displayed when power supply is started in the first operating procedure, and the second number is displayed when power supply is started in the second operating procedure, it becomes easier to understand which operating procedure started the power supply. This makes it easier to select a gaming machine and increases the enjoyment of playing.

[Technical philosophy 2]
As described above, the following configurations are possible for a gaming machine in which the contents of the decorative patterns displayed in the demo image differ when the RAM is cleared and when power is restored after a power outage.
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The game machine includes a first game area (3A) and a second game area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
The demo image displays a static decorative pattern,
On the display screen,
After the initial display, the demo image can be displayed;
The content of the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the demo image displayed after the initial display differs between when power supply is started in a state where the first operation unit is operated and when power supply is started in a state where the first operation unit is not operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Conventionally, the decorative symbols displayed in demo images were completely random, regardless of circumstances such as when the RAM was cleared or when power was restored after a power outage. In such cases, staff at the gaming machine parlor where the gaming machine was in operation could not confirm whether the RAM had been cleared, and could not smoothly perform the operation to power on the gaming machine. In contrast, with gaming machines in which the decorative symbols displayed in demo images differ between when the RAM was cleared and when power was restored after a power outage, staff at the gaming machine parlor can immediately recognize whether the RAM had been cleared and can smoothly perform the operation to power on the gaming machine.

In addition, unlike the above, in gaming machines where the decorative patterns displayed in the demo image are the same when the RAM is cleared and when power is restored, the player cannot confirm whether or not the RAM has been cleared, and will begin playing without knowing the state of the gaming machine, which increases the likelihood of exciting the player and increasing their interest in the game.

[Removal of special error processing]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the reel error release process (FIG. 36: step S4345). Here, when a predetermined condition is met, the performance control microcomputer 91 turns off the reel error flag and resets the retry count. When the reel error flag is on, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the movable reel is in an error state and does not operate the movable reel. The error state of each movable reel may be individually set to an error state, and when that movable reel is in an error state, only that movable reel may not be operated. Alternatively, when any movable reel is in an error state, all movable reels may not be operated. The retry count is the number of times the origin return process for the movable reel is repeated. When this number reaches a predetermined number, the performance control microcomputer 91 does not perform the origin return process for the movable reel.

The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether a predetermined condition has been met (step S6801). The predetermined condition may be, for example, a transition to a customer waiting state, the passage of a certain amount of time (e.g., 20 seconds) since the transition to the customer waiting state, or the pressing of a specific button. If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the predetermined condition has not been met (step S6801: NO), it terminates this processing.

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the predetermined condition is met (step S6801: YES), it determines whether or not a reel error is occurring (step S6802). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a reel error is occurring based on whether or not the reel error flag is ON. If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that a reel error is not occurring (step S6802: NO), it ends this processing.

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that a reel error is occurring (step S6802: YES), it turns off the reel error flag (step S6803). When the reel error flag turns off, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the movable reel is not in an error state and operates the movable reel in accordance with the scenario data for the movable reel. The scenario data for the movable reel is data for performing a predetermined operation of the movable reel. The performance control microcomputer 91 then resets the value of the number of retries to 0 (step S6804).

[Movable object origin return processing]
59 is a flowchart of the movable role returning process (FIG. 36: step S4355). Here, when the movable role is not present in the origin area, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets the origin return scenario and moves the movable role to the origin area. Also, if the movable role does not move to the origin area even after executing the scenario for moving the movable role to the origin area a predetermined number of times, the performance control microcomputer 91 turns on the role error flag, and performs processing to prevent the movable role from operating until a predetermined condition is met.

The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether a reel error is occurring (step S7001). If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that a reel error is occurring (step S7001: YES), it ends this processing.

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that there is no reel error (step S7001: NO), it determines whether the scenario of the scenario data for the movable reel has just ended (step S7002). If the scenario of the scenario data for the movable reel has not just ended (step S7002: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process.

If the scenario of the scenario data for the movable role has just ended (step S7002: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the movable role is in the origin area (step S7003). Whether the movable role is in the origin area is determined by the movable role detection sensor. When the signal from the movable role detection sensor is ON, the movable role is in the origin area. An example of a movable role is the first movable role 14. An example of a movable role detection sensor is the first movable role 14 detection sensor 14a.

If the movable role object is in the origin area (step S7003: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process. If the movable role object is not in the origin area (step S7003: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 checks the value of the number of retries and determines whether the retry operation has been performed a predetermined number of times (step S7004). A retry operation is an operation to return to the origin that is performed again when the movable role object cannot move to the origin area even after executing a scenario to return to the origin.

If the performance control microcomputer 91 checks the value of the retry count and determines that the retry operation has been performed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 5 times) (step S7004: YES), it turns on the reel error flag (step S7007) and does not operate the movable reel until a predetermined condition is met. If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the value of the retry count has not reached the predetermined number (step S7004: NO), it sets the origin return scenario data again (step S7005). In this case, the scenario data may be such that the retry operation starts after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed. In this embodiment, if the movable reel executes the origin return scenario but the movable reel fails to move to the origin area, the retry operation starts again immediately or after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed. However, the retry operation may start again within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after it is determined that the movable reel failed to move to the origin area.

Once the origin return scenario data is set, the performance control microcomputer 91 operates the movable role object according to the origin return scenario data in the movable role object scenario execution process (S4350 in Figure 36), and moves the movable role object to the origin area. The performance control microcomputer 91 then adds 1 to the value of the number of retries (step S7006). The performance control microcomputer 91 then ends this process.

[Movable accessory initial operation processing]
Figure 60 is a flowchart of the movable role initial operation processing (Figure 36: step S4360). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 operates the movable role for the initial operation. This makes it possible to check whether there is a malfunction in the movable role. This initial operation is performed after it has been confirmed that the movable role is in the origin area. Since the initial operation is performed after it has been confirmed that the movable role is in the origin area, the initial operation is a predetermined, fixed operation.

The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether a reel error is occurring (step S7201). If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that a reel error is occurring (step S7201: YES), it ends this processing.

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that there is no reel error (step S7201: NO), it determines whether the movable reel initial operation flag is ON (step S7202). The movable reel initial operation flag is turned ON when the gaming machine 1 is powered on. The movable reel initial operation flag is turned ON during the sub-side RAM clear process (Figure 54) and the sub-side power interruption recovery process (Figure 55).

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the movable role initial operation flag is not ON (step S7202: NO), it terminates this processing. If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the movable role initial operation flag is ON (step S7202: YES), it determines whether the movable role return scenario is currently being executed (step S7201). If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the movable role return scenario is currently being executed (step S7203: YES), it terminates this processing.

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the origin return scenario for the movable role is not currently being executed (step S7203: NO), it determines whether the movable role is present in the origin area (step S7204). Whether the movable role is present in the origin area is determined by the movable role detection sensor. When the signal from the movable role detection sensor is ON, the movable role is present in the origin area. If the origin return scenario for the movable role is not currently being executed but the movable role is not present in the origin area, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the origin return scenario for the movable role. When the movable role is present in the origin area, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs the initial operation of the movable role.

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the movable role object is not present in the origin area (step S7204: NO), it sets origin return scenario data to execute a scenario for returning the movable role object to its origin (step S7207). The performance control microcomputer 91 then ends this process. If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the movable role object is present in the origin area (step S7204: YES), it sets initial operation scenario data to perform the initial operation of the movable role object (step S7205). The performance control microcomputer 91 then turns off the movable role object initial operation flag (step S7206) and ends this process.

[Movable accessory origin return operations 1 and 2]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the movable reel's origin return operation 1. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the movable reel's origin return operation 2. FIGS. 61(A) to (D) explain the origin return operation of the first movable reel 14, FIGS. 61(E) to (H) explain the origin return operation of the second movable reel 15, and FIG. 62 explains the origin return operation when the first movable reel 14 and the second movable reel 15 are located outside the origin area. The movable reel operates according to the movable reel's scenario data. The movable reel's scenario describes the operation from the movable reel's origin position (storage position). The movable reel can perform a predetermined operation by operating according to the movable reel's scenario data from the time it is located at the origin position.

In Figure 61 (A), the first movable part 14 is located in a position that is not in the origin area. Figures 61 (A) to (D) explain the origin return operation of the first movable part 14. If the power is turned off while the movable part is in operation, this situation occurs when the power is restored. The performance control microcomputer 91 executes an origin return scenario for the first movable part 14 to move the first movable part 14 to the origin. In this embodiment, the origin return scenario data for the first movable part 14 contains data for moving the first movable part 14 to the left a distance sufficient for the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a to detect the first movable part 14, and data for moving the first movable part 14 to the origin position after the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a detects it. The origin area refers to the area that can be detected by the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a, and the origin position refers to the storage position of the first movable part 14.

In Figure 61 (B), the first movable part 14 is moving toward the origin area in accordance with the scenario data. The first movable part 14 is not in a position where it can be detected by the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a, and therefore is not detected by the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a.

In Figure 61 (C), the first movable part 14 is moving toward the origin area. The first movable part 14 is in a position where it can be detected by the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a, so it is detected by the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a, and the first movable part 14 is moving toward the origin position within the origin area in accordance with the scenario data.

In Figure 61 (D), the first movable device 14 is stopped at the origin position. The first movable device 14 operates according to the scenario data, completes the execution of the scenario data, and stops at the storage position.

In Figure 61 (E), the second movable part 15 is located in a position that is not in the origin area. Figures 61 (E) to (H) explain the origin return operation of the second movable part 15. If the power is turned off while the movable part is in operation, this situation occurs when the power is restored. The performance control microcomputer 91 executes an origin return scenario for the second movable part 15 to move the second movable part 15 to the origin. In this embodiment, the origin return scenario data for the second movable part 15 contains data for moving the second movable part 15 upward a distance sufficient for the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a to detect the second movable part 15, and data for moving the second movable part 15 to the origin position after detection by the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a. The origin area refers to the area that can be detected by the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a, and the origin position refers to the storage position of the second movable part 15.

In Figure 61 (F), the second movable part 15 is moving toward the origin area in accordance with the scenario data. The second movable part 15 is not in a position where it can be detected by the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a, so it is not detected by the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a.

In Figure 61 (G), the second movable part 15 is moving toward the origin area. The second movable part 15 is in a position where it can be detected by the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a, so it is detected by the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a, and the second movable part 15 is moving toward the origin position within the origin area in accordance with the scenario data.

In Figure 61 (H), the second movable device 15 is stopped at the origin position. The second movable device 15 operates according to the scenario data, completes the execution of the scenario data, and stops at the storage position.

In Figure 62 (A), the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are located outside the origin area. Figure 62 explains the origin return operation when the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are located outside the origin area. Because there is a possibility that the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 may collide if they are operated simultaneously, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are not operated simultaneously, but are operated sequentially. When the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are located outside the origin area, the second movable part 15 is operated first. If the first movable part 14 is operated first, there is a possibility that it will collide with the second movable part 15. The performance control microcomputer 91 first executes the origin return scenario for the second movable part 15 to move the second movable part 15 to the origin. In this case, the first movable part 14 is not operated.

In Figure 62 (B), the second movable part 15 is moving toward the origin area in accordance with the scenario data. The second movable part 15 is not in a position where it can be detected by the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a, and therefore is not detected by the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a. In this case, the first movable part 14 is not operated.

In Figure 62 (C), the second movable part 15 operates according to the scenario data, completes the execution of the scenario data, and stops in the stored position. In this state, even if the first movable part 14 is operated, the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 will not collide. After this, the first movable part 14 is operated.

In Figure 62 (D), the first movable part 14 is moving toward the origin area in accordance with the scenario data. The first movable part 14 is not in a position where it can be detected by the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a, and therefore is not detected by the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a.

In Figure 62 (E), the first movable part 14 is stopped at the origin position. The first movable part 14 operates according to the scenario data, completes execution of the scenario data, and stops at the storage position. In this embodiment, the first movable part 14 is moved after execution of the scenario data for the second movable part 15 is completed, but the first movable part 14 may also be operated when the second movable part 15 is in the origin area (a position where the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a is detected). Furthermore, if other movable parts that do not collide with the first movable part 14 and second movable part 15 are installed, the other movable parts may perform their origin return operation simultaneously with the first movable part 14 and second movable part 15, or may perform their origin return operation after the origin return operations of the first movable part 14 and second movable part 15 are completed.

[Initial movement of moving parts]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the initial operation of movable parts. Here, the initial operation of the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 is explained. By operating the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15, it is confirmed whether the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are normal. The initial operation of the movable part is performed when the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared and when the power is restored after a power outage). The movable part operates according to the scenario data for the initial operation of the movable part when the power is turned on. If a movable part collides with another movable part, the performance control microcomputer 91 completes the initial operation of one movable part before starting the initial operation of the other movable part. Before performing the initial operation of the movable part, the performance control microcomputer 91 checks whether the movable part is located in the origin area, and if it is located in the origin area, performs the initial operation of the movable part. If it is not located in the origin area, it performs a return-to-origin operation before performing the initial operation of the movable part. When a collision occurs with another movable part, the performance control microcomputer 91 confirms that the other movable part is at the origin position before performing the initial operation of the movable part.

In Figure 63 (A), the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are located in the origin area. Whether the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are located in the origin area is determined by the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a and the second movable part 15 detection sensor 15a.

In Figure 63 (B), the performance control microcomputer 91 confirms that the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are in the origin area, and performs the initial operation of the first movable part 14. The first movable part 14 is moving to the right. The second movable part 15 is not operating.

Figure 63 (C) shows the initial operation of the first movable part 14. The first movable part 14 has moved to the right edge of its range. The second movable part 15 is not operating.

Figure 63 (D) shows the initial operation of the first movable part 14. The first movable part 14 is moving to the left. The second movable part 15 is not operating.

In Figure 63 (E), the initial operation of the first movable part 14 has been completed, and the first movable part 14 is located at the origin position. With the initial operation of the first movable part 14 completed, the initial operation of the second movable part 15 is initiated. The performance control microcomputer 91 confirms that the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are located in the origin area, and initiates the initial operation of the second movable part 15. The second movable part 15 begins to move downward.

Figure 63 (F) shows the initial operation of the second movable part 15. The second movable part 15 has moved to the lowest possible position. The first movable part 14 is not operating.

Figure 63 (G) shows the initial operation of the second movable part 15. The second movable part 15 is moving upward. The first movable part 14 is not operating.

In Figure 63 (H), the initial operation of the second movable part 15 has been completed, and the second movable part 15 is in the origin position. In this embodiment, the initial operation of the movable part is performed when the power is turned on after clearing the RAM and when the power is turned on after recovery from a power outage, but the initial operation of the movable part may be performed only when the power is turned on after clearing the RAM, or only when the power is turned on after recovery from a power outage. Furthermore, the power-on operation when the power is turned on after clearing the RAM and when the power is turned on after recovery from a power outage may be performed if a specified condition (for example, pressing a button) is met.

[Effect 1 of initial movement of movable accessories]
In the past, when there were multiple movable parts and the movable parts collided with each other, the initial movements of each movable part were performed while they were colliding. Or, the initial movements of the movable parts that collided were not performed. In this case, there were many games with malfunctioning movable parts, which impaired the playability.

In this embodiment, there are multiple movable parts, and if the movable parts collide with each other, they perform their initial actions in order, so all of the movable parts can perform their initial actions without colliding. This reduces the number of times players play with malfunctioning movable parts, which increases the fun factor.

[Effect 2 of initial movement of movable parts]
Conventionally, the initial action of a movable device starts from the position of the movable device when the initial action is performed. Therefore, the starting position of the initial action may be different, resulting in a different initial action. It is difficult to find a defective movable device, and players may end up playing with a defective movable device, which impairs the gameplay.

In this embodiment, before the initial action is performed, the initial action is moved to the origin position, so the starting position of the initial action is always the origin position, and the initial action is the same every time. This makes it easier to determine whether the movable part is normal, allows for the replacement of defective movable parts, and reduces the need to play with defective movable parts. As a result, the game can be more entertaining.

[Initial movements other than those of moving parts]
Figure 64 is a diagram for explaining the initial operation of components other than movable props. Here, the initial operation of the lamp LED, speaker, illumination panel, and vibration motor is explained. By operating the lamp LED, speaker, illumination panel, and vibration motor, it is possible to check whether the lamp LED, speaker, illumination panel, and vibration motor are normal. These initial operations are performed when the power is turned on after clearing the RAM. These initial operations are performed in parallel. Note that the initial operations of the lamp LED, speaker, illumination panel, and vibration motor are performed only when the power is turned on after clearing the RAM, and are not performed during subsequent variable effects, etc. The initial operations of the lamp LED, speaker, illumination panel, and vibration motor may also be performed when the power is turned on after a power outage. In this embodiment, the lamp LED refers to the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66. The speakers refer to the left speaker 67a and the right speaker 67b.

Figure 64 (A) is a diagram explaining the initial operation of the lamp LED. The presentation control microcomputer 91 performs the initial operation of the lamp LED when the power is turned on after clearing the RAM. The lamp LED's initial operation is to light up in all lighting colors used during gameplay. Note that the lamp LED's initial operation may also light up in a lighting color not used during gameplay. When the lamp LED lights up in a single color, it repeatedly turns on, off, and on. The ON and OFF lighting times are a fixed time, for example, one second. After one second has passed, it transitions from ON to OFF, and after another second, it transitions from OFF to ON. When the lamp LED lights up in full color, it repeatedly transitions from red, green, blue, yellow, light blue, purple, white, and red. The lighting time is a fixed time, for example, one second. After one second has passed, it transitions from red to green, and after another second, it transitions from green to blue, with the transitions continuing in order every second.

Figure 64 (B) is a diagram explaining the initial operation of the speakers. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs the initial operation of the speakers 67 when the power is turned on after clearing the RAM. The performance control microcomputer 91 generates sound from the left speaker 67a and mutes the sound from the right speaker 67b (Figure 64 (B1)). After that, the performance control microcomputer 91 mutes the sound from the left speaker 67a and generates sound from the right speaker 67b (Figure 64 (B2)). After that, the performance control microcomputer 91 mutes the sound from the left speaker 67a and mutes the sound from the right speaker 67b (Figure 64 (B3)). The sound generated by each speaker lasts for a fixed period of time, for example, one second. After one second has passed, the state in Figure 64 (B1) will transition to the state in Figure 64 (B2), and after another second has passed, the state in Figure 64 (B2) will transition to the state in Figure 64 (B3).

Figure 64 (C) is a diagram for explaining the initial operation of the illumination panel. In this embodiment, the illumination panel is not described in the gaming machine 1, but the gaming machine 1 may be equipped with an illumination panel. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs the initial operation of the illumination panel when the power is turned on after clearing the RAM. The illumination panel is repeatedly turned ON, OFF, ON. The ON and OFF times are a fixed time, for example, one second. After one second has passed, the illumination changes from ON to OFF, and after another second has passed, the illumination changes from OFF to ON.

Figure 64 (D) is a diagram explaining the initial operation of the vibration motor provided inside the effect button 63. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs the initial operation of the vibration motor when the power is turned on after clearing the RAM. The vibration motor is repeatedly turned ON, OFF, ON. The ON and OFF times are fixed, for example, one second. After one second has passed, it transitions from ON to OFF, and after another second has passed, it transitions from OFF to ON.

In this embodiment, the initial operations of the lamp LED, speaker, illumination panel, and vibration motor have been described, but as an alternative, a specific sound may be generated when the effect button is pressed until a certain time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since power was turned on, as a confirmation of its operation. Note that in this embodiment, the initial operations of the lamp LED, speaker, illumination panel, and vibration motor are performed when power is turned on after RAM is cleared, but the initial operations of the lamp LED, speaker, illumination panel, and vibration motor may also be performed when power is turned on after power is restored after a power outage. Furthermore, the initial operations of the lamp LED, speaker, illumination panel, and vibration motor may be performed by pressing a specific button when power is turned on.

[Effects of initial movements of movable parts and initial movements of non-movable parts]
In the past, the operation of moving parts, LED lamps, speakers, etc. was not checked. Therefore, even if there was a malfunction in these parts, players continued playing without noticing. If there was a malfunction, the presentation was impaired and the gameplay was impaired.

In this embodiment, the operation of movable parts, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. can be checked, and any malfunctioning movable parts can be replaced, reducing the need to play with malfunctioning movable parts. As a result, the game can be more entertaining.

The movable part initial operation process of step S4360 described above is executed when the power is turned on, and is not executed once the movable part initial operation process has been completed. In other words, even if the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are not operating after power is restored, if the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are not waiting in the retracted position, the movable part origin return process of step S4355 described above will execute a return operation to return the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 to the retracted position. However, since the movable part initial operation process of step S4360 described above is not executed, the operation check of the first movable part 14 and the operation check of the second movable part 15 will not be executed.

In this embodiment, the game board 3 is provided with an image display device 7 capable of displaying multiple types of images, and a first movable role device 14 and a second movable role device 15 that can move back and forth from a retracted position to a predetermined position (advance position) in front of the image display device 7. The performance control microprocessor (MPU) 91 performs a return operation to return the first movable role device 14 and the second movable role device 15 to their retracted positions when the first movable role device 14 and the second movable role device 15 are waiting in their retracted positions upon power restoration, or when the first movable role device 14 and the second movable role device 15 are not waiting in their retracted positions upon power restoration, thereby confirming the operation of the first movable role device 14 when the first movable role device 14 and the second movable role device 15 are waiting in their retracted positions. The system is capable of executing at least the movable part origin return process of step S4355 and the movable part initial operation process of step S4360, which are first return operation control means for executing operation confirmation of the second movable part 15, and the movable part origin return process of step S4355 and the movable part initial operation process of step S4360, which are second return operation control means for executing return operations for returning the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 to the retracted positions when the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15 are not in operation after power is restored but are not waiting in the retracted positions, but not executing operation confirmation of the first movable part 14 or the second movable part 15. When the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15, which are movable bodies, are operated, there is a high probability of winning, so players are interested in the operation of the movable bodies. This means that if the operation of the moving body is checked while the player is playing, the player may mistakenly believe that the movement of the moving body has increased the likelihood of winning. Therefore, by limiting the operation check of the moving body to the period when power is restored, this prevents the player from being confused.

[Technical philosophy 1]
As described above, the following configurations are possible for gaming machines in which movable devices perform initial operations after returning to their origin.
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
If the first movable part is stopped at a position different from the first origin position when power supply starts, the first movable part is moved to the first origin position and then the initial operation is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Conventionally, if a movable device was in a position other than its home position when power was first applied to a gaming machine, the initial operation of that movable device would not be performed, or it would perform its initial operation from the position where it was stopped. In this case, it was possible that the movable device would interfere with the initial operation of other movable devices and be damaged, or that the correct initial operation could not be performed, making it impossible to detect a malfunction. In contrast, with gaming machines in which movable devices perform their initial operation after returning to their home position, the correct initial operation is performed without interfering with the initial operation of other movable devices and being damaged, which can lead to the prevention of malfunctions and early detection.

[Technical philosophy 2]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
A power supply board box (450) that houses a power supply board (162) attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board;
a game control board box (430) attached to the rear side of the game board and accommodating a game control board (80) on which a game control microprocessor (81) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted;
a presentation control board box (420) that is attached to the rear side of the game board at a position different from the game control board box and that houses a presentation control board (90) on which a presentation control microprocessor (91) capable of controlling the progress of presentations based on commands from the game control board is implemented;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
The game board has:
a display means (image display device 7) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A movable body (first movable device 14, second movable device 15) that can move back and forth from a retracted position to a predetermined position in front of the display means;
is established,
The performance control microprocessor
a first return operation control means (a movable part origin return process in step S4355 and a movable part initial operation process in step S4360) for checking the operation of the movable part when the movable part is waiting at the retracted position upon power restoration, or when the movable part is not waiting at the retracted position upon power restoration and a return operation is performed to return the movable part to the retracted position, causing the movable part to wait at the retracted position;
A second return operation control means (a movable role object origin return process in step S4355 and a movable role object initial operation process in step S4360) that executes a return operation to return the movable body to the retracted position when the movable body is not in standby at the retracted position even though the movable body has not been operated after power is restored, but does not check the operation of the movable body;
At least it is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Gaming machines have been proposed in the past that have a movable body on the gaming board and execute effects by moving the movable body (for example, JP 2017-093835 A). However, when the operation of the movable body is checked during play, the player may mistakenly believe that their chances of winning have increased. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 2 above, when the operation of the movable body is checked while the player is playing, the player may mistakenly believe that their chances of winning have increased due to the movement of the movable body. Therefore, by limiting the operation check of the movable body to the period when power is restored, this prevents the player from being confused.

[Retry operation]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the retry operation. Here, the retry operation of the first movable role 14 will be explained. The retry operation is also installed in movable roles other than the first movable role 14. The retry operation of the first movable role 14 is performed when the performance control microcomputer 91 completes the execution of the scenario of the movable role and the first movable role 14 does not exist in the origin area.
By setting a home return scenario for the first movable device 14, a retry operation of the first movable device 14 is performed.

In Figure 65 (A), the first movable device 14 is in operation. The performance control microcomputer 91 is operating the first movable device 14 according to scenario data that matches the super reach performance. The first movable device 14 is broken.

In Figure 65 (B), the first movable role element 14 is in operation. The Super Reach performance has ended, and the performance control microcomputer 91 is operating the first movable role element 14 in accordance with the scenario data, attempting to move it to the origin position. Because the first movable role element 14 is broken, it cannot move to a position where it can be detected by the first movable role element 14 detection sensor 14a, and is therefore not detected by the first movable role element 14 detection sensor 14a.

In Figure 65 (C), the execution of the scenario for the first movable role 14 has been completed. Because the first movable role 14 detection sensor 14a has not detected anything, a return-to-origin scenario for the first movable role 14 is set as a retry operation. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable role 14 in accordance with the scenario data. The retry operation may be initiated after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed.

Figure 65 (D) shows the execution of a scenario for returning the first movable part 14 to its original position. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable part 14 according to the scenario data. Because the first movable part 14 is broken, it cannot move to a position where it can be detected by the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a, and is therefore not detected by the first movable part 14 detection sensor 14a.

In Figure 65 (E), the execution of the scenario for the first movable reel 14 is complete. Because the first movable reel 14 detection sensor 14a is not detecting anything, a return-to-origin scenario for the first movable reel 14 is set as the retry operation until the number of retry operations reaches a predetermined number (e.g., five times). When the return-to-origin scenario for the first movable reel 14 is set as the retry operation, the performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable reel 14 according to the scenario data. If the retry operation has been performed a predetermined number of times, the reel error flag is turned ON to enter a reel error state. In this case, the reel error state is not released until a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed since the transition to the customer waiting state. The performance control microcomputer 91 does not operate the first movable reel 14 when in a reel error state. In a reel error state, it is possible to prevent operation of only the movable reel that caused the error state, or to prevent operation of all movable reels. Additionally, it may be possible to disable only the movable parts that collide with the movable part that caused the error.

Figure 65 (F) shows the state after a predetermined time has passed since the transition to the customer waiting state. The customer waiting demonstration image KDG is displayed on the display screen 7a. Because the predetermined condition (a predetermined time has passed since the transition to the customer waiting state) has been met, the performance control microcomputer 91 turns the reel error flag OFF to cancel the reel error state. As the reel error flag turns OFF, a return-to-origin scenario for the first movable reel 14 is set, and the performance control microcomputer 91 attempts to move the first movable reel 14 to the origin position again.

In this embodiment, the retry operation is illustrated as being performed using the first movable device 14 provided on the gaming board 2, but the retry operation may also be performed using a movable device provided on the gaming machine frame instead of the gaming board 2.

[Effect of retry operation]
In the past, there was no set number of retry attempts, and if a malfunction occurred in which the movable device could not move to the origin area, the retry attempt would continue until the power was turned off. In this case, the retry attempt would interfere with the gameplay, reducing the game's enjoyment.

In this embodiment, a number of retry operations is set, and even if a malfunction occurs in which the movable device cannot move to the origin area, the movable device is stopped after a predetermined number of retry operations. Even if a malfunction occurs in which the movable device cannot move to the origin area, the retry operation does not interfere with the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Variable effects during initial operation of movable parts]
Figure 66 is a diagram for explaining the variable performance during the initial operation of a movable role. Here, we will explain the performance when a variable performance in which a movable role operates is performed during the initial operation of the movable role. When a variable performance in which a movable role operates is performed during the initial operation of the movable role, the initial operation of the movable role takes priority. Figures 66(A) to 66(C) explain the variable performance in which a movable role operates when the movable role is not in the initial operation of the movable role. Figures 66(D) to 66(G) explain the variable performance in which a movable role operates when the movable role is in the initial operation of the movable role.

Figure 66 (A) shows the state before the start of the variable performance in which the movable role device operates. The initial operation of the movable role device has already been performed. At this time, the movable role device is not in the initial operation state. Figures 66 (A) to 66 (C) explain the variable performance in which the movable role device operates when the movable role device is not in the initial operation state.

Figure 66 (B) shows the state when the moving device has begun to move and change the effect. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the first moving device 14 moves from left to right together with the effect image TEF and the ally character CRA.

Figure 66 (C) shows a state in which the variable effect is being changed as the movable part operates. The first movable part 14 moves to the center of the display device 7, and the effect image TEF is displayed around the first movable part 14, with the ally character CRA displayed to the right of the first movable part 14 and the enemy character CRB displayed to the left of the first movable part 14. The effect image TEF, ally character CRA, and enemy character CRB are displayed in accordance with the position of the first movable part 14.

Figure 66 (D) shows the state before the start of the change in the variable performance in which the movable part operates. During this change, the initial operation of the movable part is performed. Figures 66 (D) to 66 (G) explain the variable performance in which the movable part operates when the movable part is in the initial operation. At this time, the initial operation of the movable part is being performed. The second movable part 15 is moving downward.

Figure 66 (E) shows the state when the change in the variable effect in which the movable role device operates has begun. The initial operation of the movable role device is being performed, and the second movable role device 15 has moved to the lowest possible position. As a variable effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the effect image TEF and ally character CRA associated with the first movable role device 14 are also displayed. The ally character CRA and effect image TEF move from left to right, but the first movable role device 14 does not move because the initial operation of the movable role device is being performed.

Figure 66 (F) shows a state in which the variable effect in which the movable part operates is changing. The initial operation of the movable part is being performed, and the second movable part 15 is moving upward as far as it can go. As part of the variable effect, the effect image TEF, ally character CRA, and enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, but the first movable part 14 is not moving, so the first movable part 14 and the effect displayed on the display screen 7a do not match. The first movable part 14 does not move because the initial operation of the movable part is being performed.

Figure 66 (G) shows a state in which the variable effect in which the movable part operates is changing. The initial operation of the movable part is being performed, and the second movable part 15 has moved to the origin position. The initial operation of the second movable part 15 is being performed, and the movable part does not move in accordance with the variable effect. As a variable effect, the effect image TEF, ally character CRA, and enemy character CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, but because the first movable part 14 is not moving, the first movable part 14 and the effect displayed on the display screen 7a do not match.

In this embodiment, the initial operation of the movable props is prioritized over the operation associated with the variable effects, but the initial operation of the lamp LEDs may also be prioritized over the operation associated with the variable effects. Furthermore, the initial operation of the speakers may also be prioritized over the operation associated with the variable effects.

[Effect of variable effects during initial operation of movable parts]
Previously, when a variable effect involving the movement of a movable device was being performed while the initial movement of the movable device was being performed, the initial movement of the movable device was stopped, and the movable device was made to perform the movement associated with the variable effect from that position. As a result, an action that would not normally be performed could sometimes be thought of as a premium effect. This caused the game to be perceived as a premium effect even though the variation was a miss, resulting in a loss of playability.

In this embodiment, even if a variable effect involving the movement of a movable device is performed while the initial movement of the movable device is being performed, the initial movement continues, preventing it from being perceived as a premium effect. As a result, interest can be increased.

[Error monitoring process]
67 is a flowchart of the power-on process (FIG. 16: step S110). Here, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the gaming machine 1 is in an error state. If an error state occurs, it sends a corresponding error command to the presentation control microcomputer 91 to notify the user of the error. If the error state is resolved, it sends a corresponding no-error command to the presentation control microcomputer 91 to erase the error notification. Note that the error notification is not erased for magnetic errors and radio wave errors. For these errors, the presentation control microcomputer 91 does not send a no-error command.

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a supply ball shortage error is occurring (step S651). Whether or not a supply ball shortage error is occurring is determined by whether the supply ball shortage error flag is ON or OFF. When a supply ball shortage error is occurring, the supply ball shortage error flag is ON, and when a supply ball shortage error is not occurring, the supply ball shortage error flag is OFF. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that a supply ball shortage error is not occurring (step S651: NO), processing proceeds to step S654.

When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that a supply ball shortage error is occurring (step S651: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the signal from the supply ball shortage sensor 153a is ON (step S652). When the signal from the supply ball shortage sensor 153a is ON, there is a supply ball shortage and a supply ball shortage error is occurring. When the signal from the supply ball shortage sensor 153a is OFF, there is no supply ball shortage and the game is not experiencing a supply ball shortage error.

When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the signal from the supply ball shortage sensor 153a is ON (step S652: YES), processing proceeds to step S661. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the signal from the supply ball shortage sensor 153a is not ON (step S652: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the supply ball shortage error flag OFF, and sets a supply ball shortage no error command to send a supply ball shortage no error command to the presentation control microcomputer 91 (step S653). When the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives the supply ball shortage no error command, it erases the supply ball shortage error display. Processing then proceeds to step S661.

In step S654, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the signal from the supply ball shortage sensor 153a is ON. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the signal from the supply ball shortage sensor 153a is not ON (step S654: NO), processing proceeds to step S661. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the signal from the supply ball shortage sensor 153a is ON (step S654: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the supply ball shortage error flag ON, and sets a supply ball shortage error command to send a supply ball shortage error command to the presentation control microcomputer 91 (step S655). When the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives the supply ball shortage error command, it displays a supply ball shortage error message. Processing then proceeds to step S661.

In step S661, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a disconnection error is occurring. Whether or not a disconnection error is occurring is determined by whether the disconnection error flag is ON or OFF. When a disconnection error is occurring, the disconnection error flag is ON; when a disconnection error is not occurring, the disconnection error flag is OFF. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that a disconnection error is not occurring (step S661: NO), processing proceeds to step S664.

When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that a disconnection error is occurring (step S661: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the signal (disconnection signal) from the disconnection monitoring device 155 is ON (step S662). When the disconnection signal is ON, one of the signal lines connected to the relay board 88 is disconnected, and the system is in a disconnected state. When the disconnection signal is OFF, none of the signal lines connected to the relay board 88 is disconnected, and the system is in a disconnected state.

When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the open circuit signal is ON (step S662: YES), processing proceeds to step S671. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the open circuit signal is not ON (step S662: NO), it turns the open circuit error flag OFF and sets a no-open circuit error command to send to the presentation control microcomputer 91 (step S663). When the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives the no-open circuit error command, it erases the open circuit error display. Processing then proceeds to step S671.

In step S664, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the open circuit signal is ON. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the open circuit signal is not ON (step S664: NO), processing proceeds to step S671. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the open circuit signal is ON (step S664: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the open circuit error flag ON, and sets a open circuit error command to send a command indicating an open circuit error to the presentation control microcomputer 91 (step S665). When the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives the command indicating an open circuit error, it displays a display indicating an open circuit error. Processing then proceeds to step S671.

In step S671, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a magnetic error is occurring. Whether or not a magnetic error is occurring is determined by whether the magnetic error flag is ON or OFF. When a magnetic error is occurring, the magnetic error flag is ON; when a magnetic error is not occurring, the magnetic error flag is OFF. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that a magnetic error is occurring (step S671: YES), processing proceeds to step S681.

When the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines that a magnetic error is not occurring (step S671: NO), it determines whether the signal from the magnetic sensor 151a (magnetic sensor signal) is ON. When the magnetic sensor signal is ON, a magnetic force is being generated near the gaming machine 1. When the magnetic sensor signal is OFF, a magnetic force is not being generated near the gaming machine 1. If a magnetic force is being generated near the gaming machine 1, there is a possibility that someone is cheating using a magnet. The magnetic sensor 151a is provided to prevent this cheating.

When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the magnetic sensor signal is not ON (step S674: NO), processing proceeds to step S681. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the magnetic sensor signal is ON (step S674: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the magnetic error flag ON, and sets a magnetic error command to send a magnetic error command to the presentation control microcomputer 91 (step S675). When the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives the magnetic error command, it displays a magnetic error message. Processing then proceeds to step S681.

In step S681, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a radio wave error is occurring. Whether or not a radio wave error is occurring is determined by whether the radio wave error flag is ON or OFF. When a radio wave error is occurring, the radio wave error flag is ON; when a radio wave error is not occurring, the radio wave error flag is OFF. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that a radio wave error is occurring (step S681: YES), it ends this processing.

When the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines that there is no radio wave error (step S681: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the signal from the radio wave sensor 152a (radio wave sensor signal) is ON. When the radio wave sensor signal is ON, radio waves are being generated near the gaming machine 1. When the radio wave sensor signal is OFF, radio waves are not being generated near the gaming machine 1. If radio waves are being generated near the gaming machine 1, there is a possibility that someone is manipulating the radio waves and cheating. The radio wave sensor 152a is provided to prevent this cheating.

When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the radio wave sensor signal is not ON (step S684: NO), it terminates this processing. When the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the radio wave sensor signal is ON (step S684: YES), it turns the radio wave error flag ON, and sets a radio wave error command to send a radio wave error command to the presentation control microcomputer 91 (step S685). When the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives the radio wave error command, it displays a radio wave error message. The presentation control microcomputer 91 then terminates this processing.

In this embodiment, once an error notification is issued for magnetic errors and radio wave errors, the error notification will not stop even if the error is no longer present. However, like a disconnection error, magnetic errors and radio wave errors may also be configured to stop the error notification once the error is no longer present. In this case, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the magnetic error and radio wave error are in an error state, just like a disconnection error, and if an error is present, turns off the error flag and sends a no-error command to the presentation control microcomputer 91.

The game control microcomputer 81 may also stop play if a specific error flag (for example, a magnetic error or radio wave error) is turned ON. Stopping play means that the main control process stops and play becomes impossible. For example, even if a game ball enters the start hole, the ball does not change. Even if a ball enters, no prize ball is awarded. The big prize hole does not open even during a big win.

[Error notification process 1]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart of error notification process 1 (FIG. 36: step S4335). Here, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether the door of the gaming machine 1 is open, and if it is open, performs a process to notify an error. If it is not open, performs a process not to notify an error. The door of the gaming machine 1 being open means that the front frame 53 is separated from the gaming board 2. Note that the door of the gaming machine 1 being open may also mean that the gaming board 2 is separated from the outer frame of the gaming machine. The door of the gaming machine 1 being open may also mean that the front frame 53 is separated from the gaming board 2 or that the gaming board 2 is separated from the outer frame of the gaming machine.

The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a door opening error is occurring (step S6401). Whether or not a door opening error is occurring is determined by whether the door opening error flag is ON or OFF. When a door opening error is occurring, the door opening error flag is ON; when a door opening error is not occurring, the door opening error flag is OFF. When the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that a door opening error is not occurring (step S6401: NO), processing proceeds to step S6405.

When the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines that a door open error is occurring (step S6401: YES), the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether the signal from the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a is ON (step S6402). When the signal from the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a is ON, the door is open. When the signal from the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a is OFF, the door is not open.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the signal from the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a is ON (step S6402: YES), it terminates this processing. When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the signal from the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a is not ON (step S6402: NO), it turns off the door open error flag (step S6403). In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a door open error clear command to send the door open error clear command to the image control microcomputer 101 (step S6404). Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 91 terminates this processing.

When the image control microcontroller 101 receives the door open error clear command, it clears the door open error display. Note that when the image control microcontroller 101 receives the door open error clear command, it may clear the door open error display after a certain period of time has elapsed. For example, it may clear the door open error display 20 seconds after receiving the door open error clear command.

In step S6405, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether the signal from the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a is ON. If the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines that the signal from the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a is not ON (step S6405: NO), it ends this processing.

When the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the signal from the gaming machine frame open sensor 50a is ON (step S6405: YES), it sets the door open error flag to ON (step S6406). The effect control microcomputer 91 also sets a door open error display command to send a door open error display command to the image control microcomputer 101 (step S6407). The effect control microcomputer 91 then terminates this processing. Upon receiving the door open error display command, the image control microcomputer 101 displays a door open error message.

When the door open error flag is turned ON, the performance control microcomputer 91 sends a door open error LED turn-on command to the lamp control board 107, and when the door open error flag is turned OFF, it sends a door open error LED turn-off command to the lamp control board 107. When the lamp control board 107 receives the door open error LED turn-on command, it lights or flashes the LED installed on the gaming machine 1 in a color (e.g., red) that indicates a door open error. Furthermore, when the lamp control board 107 receives the door open error LED turn-off command, it turns off the LED that was turned on or flashed in response to receiving the door open error LED turn-on command.

In addition, when the lamp control board 107 receives the door open error LED turn off command, it may turn off the LED that turned on or flashed in response to the reception of the door open error LED turn on command after a certain period of time has elapsed. For example, it may turn off the LED that turned on or flashed in response to the reception of the door open error LED turn on command 20 seconds after receiving the door open error LED turn off command.

[Error notification process 2]
69 is a flowchart of the error notification process 2 (FIG. 36: step S4340). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing when it receives an error command or a non-error command sent by the game control microcomputer 81.

The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a supply ball shortage error command has been received (step S6601). If the performance control microcomputer 91 has not received a supply ball shortage error command (step S6601: NO), it proceeds to step S6603. If the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a supply ball shortage error command (step S6601: YES), it sets a supply ball shortage error display command to send a supply ball shortage error display command to the image control microcomputer 101 (step S6602). It then proceeds to step S6603. When the image control microcomputer 101 receives the supply ball shortage error display command, it displays a supply ball shortage error display on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In step S6603, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a no-refill-ball-lack error command. If the performance control microcomputer 91 has not received a no-refill-ball-lack error command (step S6603: NO), it proceeds to step S6605. If the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a no-refill-ball-lack error command (step S6603: YES), it sets a no-refill-ball-lack error clear command to send to the image control microcomputer 101 (step S6604). It then proceeds to step S6605. When the image control microcomputer 101 receives the no-refill-ball-lack error clear command, it clears the no-refill-ball-lack error display.

In step S6605, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a disconnection error command. If it has not received a disconnection error command (step S6605: NO), it proceeds to step S6607. If it has received a disconnection error command (step S6605: YES), it sets a disconnection error display command to send to the image control microcomputer 101 (step S6606). It then proceeds to step S6607. If it receives the disconnection error display command, the image control microcomputer 101 displays a disconnection error message.

In step S6607, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a no-disconnection-error command. If the performance control microcomputer 91 has not received a no-disconnection-error command (step S6607: NO), it proceeds to step S6609. If the performance control microcomputer 91 has received a no-disconnection-error command (step S6607: YES), it sets a disconnection-error erasure command to send to the image control microcomputer 101 (step S6608). Then, it proceeds to step S6609. When the image control microcomputer 101 receives the disconnection-error erasure command, it erases the disconnection error display.

In step S6609, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a magnetic error command has been received. If the performance control microcomputer 91 has not received a magnetic error command (step S6609: NO), it proceeds to step S6613. If the performance control microcomputer 91 has received a magnetic error command (step S6609: YES), it sets a magnetic error display command to send a magnetic error display command to the image control microcomputer 101 (step S6610). Then, it proceeds to step S6613. When the image control microcomputer 101 receives the magnetic error display command, it displays a magnetic error display.

In step S6613, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a radio wave error command has been received. If the performance control microcomputer 91 has not received a radio wave error command (step S6613: NO), it terminates this process. If the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a radio wave error command (step S6613: YES), it sets a radio wave error display command to send a radio wave error display command to the image control microcomputer 101 (step S6614). Then, it terminates this process. If the image control microcomputer 101 receives the radio wave error display command, it displays a radio wave error display.

In this embodiment, with regard to magnetic errors and radio wave errors, the presentation control microcomputer 91 does not send a command to erase the magnetic error or radio wave error, and when the image control microcomputer 101 receives a command to display the magnetic error or radio wave error, the display of that error is not erased. However, the presentation control microcomputer 91 may also send an erase command to erase magnetic errors and radio wave errors, just like a supply ball shortage error or a broken wire error. In this case, the game control microcomputer 81 sends an erase command for the magnetic error and radio wave error.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 receives each error command, it sends each error LED turn-on command to the lamp control board 107, and when it receives each no-error command, it sends each error LED turn-off command to the lamp control board 107. When the lamp control board 107 receives each error LED turn-on command, it lights or blinks the LEDs installed on the gaming machine 1 in the color indicating the error. Furthermore, when the lamp control board 107 receives each error LED turn-off command, it turns off the LEDs that were lit or blinking in response to receiving each error LED turn-on command.

In addition, when the lamp control board 107 receives each error LED turn-off command, it may turn off the LED that turned on or blinked in response to the reception of each error LED turn-on command after a certain period of time has elapsed. For example, it may turn off the LED that turned on or blinked in response to the reception of the disconnection error LED turn-on command 20 seconds after receiving the disconnection error LED turn-off command.

[Error notification]
70 is a diagram for explaining error notification. Here, methods for notifying disconnection errors, insufficient ball supply errors, open door errors, magnetic errors, and radio wave errors will be explained.

In Figure 70 (A), a disconnection error is being notified. Normal play is being played on the display screen 7a, and the sun mode background SMH is displayed. Also displayed are the left decorative symbol 8L "1", the center decorative symbol 8C "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R "3". Because a disconnection error has occurred, the image control microcomputer 101 displays the disconnection error display DS. The disconnection error display is displayed overlapping the decorative symbols.

When the image control microcomputer 101 receives a disconnection error display command from the performance control microcomputer 91, it displays the disconnection error display, and when it receives a disconnection error clear command, it clears the disconnection error display. The performance control microcomputer 91 sends the disconnection error display command when an open circuit error state occurs, and sends the disconnection error clear command when the open circuit error state is resolved. In other words, as shown in the time chart in Figure 70 (A), when an open circuit error state occurs, the open circuit error display is displayed, and when the open circuit error state is resolved, the open circuit error display is cleared.

In Figure 70 (B), a supply ball shortage error is being notified. Normal gameplay is being played on the display screen 7a, with the sun mode background SMH displayed. Also displayed are the left decorative pattern 8L "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R "3". Because a supply ball shortage error has occurred, the image control microcomputer 101 displays the supply ball shortage error display HH. The supply ball shortage error display is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns.

When the image control microcomputer 101 receives a command to display a supply ball shortage error from the performance control microcomputer 91, it displays the supply ball shortage error display, and when it receives a command to erase the supply ball shortage error, it erases the supply ball shortage error display. The performance control microcomputer 91 sends a command to display a supply ball shortage error when a supply ball shortage error state occurs, and sends a command to erase the supply ball shortage error when the supply ball shortage error state is resolved. In other words, as shown in the time chart in Figure 70 (B), when a supply ball shortage error state occurs, the supply ball shortage error display is displayed, and when the supply ball shortage error state is resolved, the supply ball shortage error display is erased.

In Figure 70 (C), a door open error is being notified. Normal play is being played on the display screen 7a, and the sun mode background SMH is displayed. Also displayed are the left decorative pattern 8L "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R "3". Because a door open error has occurred, the image control microcomputer 101 displays the door open error display TK. The door open error display is displayed without overlapping with the decorative patterns.

When the image control microcontroller 101 receives a door open error display command from the performance control microcontroller 91, it displays a door open error display, and when it receives a door open error clear command, it clears the door open error display after a certain period of time (e.g., 20 seconds) has elapsed. The performance control microcontroller 91 sends a door open error display command when a door open error state occurs, and sends a door open error clear command when the door open error state is resolved. In other words, as shown in the time chart in Figure 70 (B), when a door open error state occurs, the door open error display is displayed, and after a certain period of time has elapsed after the door open error state is resolved, the door open error display is cleared.

In this embodiment, the image control microcomputer 101 erases the door open error display after a certain period of time has elapsed when it receives a door open error erase command from the performance control microcomputer 91. However, the performance control microcomputer 91 may send the door open error erase command after a certain period of time has elapsed since the door open error state is no longer present, and the image control microcomputer 101 may erase the door open error display when it receives the door open error erase command.

Figure 70 (D) shows a door open error, a supply ball shortage error, and a door open error. The error display is displayed without overlapping with other error displays.

In Figure 70 (E), a magnetic error is reported. The background ERH accompanying the magnetic error report is displayed in the background of the display screen 7a, and the text image TJE reading "Magnetic Error" is displayed alongside this image. When a magnetic error is reported, the background and decorative patterns become invisible during gameplay. Furthermore, since there is no trigger to erase the magnetic error, as shown in the time chart in Figure 70 (E), once a magnetic error is reported, the magnetic error will not be erased until the gaming machine is powered off. The image control microcomputer 101 displays a magnetic error display when it receives a magnetic error display command from the presentation control microcomputer 91. The presentation control microcomputer 91 sends a magnetic error display command when a magnetic error state occurs. The presentation control microcomputer 91 does not send a magnetic error erase command even if the magnetic error state is resolved.

Figure 70 (F) shows a radio wave error being reported. The background ERH associated with the radio wave error notification is displayed in the background of the display screen 7a, and the text image TDE reading "Radio Wave Error" is displayed along with that image. When a radio wave error is reported, the background and decorative symbols during gameplay become invisible. Furthermore, since there is no trigger to erase the radio wave error, once a magnetic error is reported, the radio wave error is not erased until the gaming machine is turned off, as shown in the time chart of Figure 70 (F). The image control microcomputer 101 displays a radio wave error display when it receives a radio wave error display command from the presentation control microcomputer 91. The presentation control microcomputer 91 transmits the radio wave error display command when a radio wave error state occurs. The presentation control microcomputer 91 does not transmit a radio wave error erase command even when the radio wave error state is resolved. In this embodiment, an error display is displayed on the display screen 7a during an error state. However, instead of displaying an error display on the display screen 7a during an error state, the LED lamp on the gaming machine 1 may light up or flash to indicate an error state. Also, during an error state, instead of an error display being displayed on the display screen 7a, a sound indicating the error state may be emitted from the speaker 67 of the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, during an error state, an error display may be displayed on the display screen 7a, the lamp LED of the gaming machine 1 may light up or flash to indicate the error state, and a sound indicating the error state may be emitted from the speaker 67 of the gaming machine 1. During an error state, an error display may be displayed on the display screen 7a, the lamp LED of the gaming machine 1 may light up or flash to indicate the error state, and a sound indicating the error state may be emitted from the speaker 67 of the gaming machine 1, in any appropriate combination.

[Effect of Error Notification]
Previously, once the error state was cleared, the error notification would immediately disappear, making it difficult to detect cheating. This made cheating easier.

In this embodiment, for some errors, the error notification continues even after the error state is cleared, making it easier to detect cheating. This makes cheating more difficult to detect. For other errors, the error notification continues as before, depending on the error state, and error notifications are not issued more than necessary, so the gameplay is not compromised. As a result, the game's enjoyment can be improved.

[Technical philosophy 1]
The performance control unit (91)
In the case of the first error state (S6601: YES, S6605: YES), the first error notification is executed (S6602, S6606).
If the second error state occurs (S6405: YES), a second error notification is executed (S6407).
If the third error state occurs (S6609: YES, S6613: YES), a third error notification is executed (S6610, S6614).
If the first error state is resolved while the first error notification is being executed (S6603: YES, S6607: YES), the first error notification is terminated at the point in time when the first error state is resolved (S6604, S6608).
If the second error state is resolved while the second error notification is being executed (S6402: NO), the second error notification is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second error state was resolved (S6404).
If the third error state is resolved while the third error notification is being executed, the third error notification is not terminated until the power supply is cut off.

The presentation control unit executes a first error notification in the first error state, executes a second error notification in the second error state, and executes a third error notification in the third error state. If the first error state is resolved while the first error notification is being executed, the presentation control unit terminates the first error notification at the time the first error state is resolved. If the second error state is resolved while the second error notification is being executed, the presentation control unit terminates the second error notification a predetermined time after the second error state is resolved. If the third error state is resolved while the third error notification is being executed, the presentation control unit does not terminate the third error notification until the power supply is cut off. This ensures an appropriate error notification period, allowing for fairer gameplay and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[LED effects for moving parts]
71 is a diagram for explaining the LED effects of the movable role piece. Here, the LED effects of the first movable role piece 14 and the second movable role piece 15 will be explained.

Figure 71 (A) shows the LEDs provided on the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15. The first movable part 14 is provided with LED 181a, LED 181b, LED 181c, and LED 181d. The second movable part 15 is provided with LED 182a, LED 182b, LED 182c, and LED 182d. Each LED lights up in accordance with the changing effects, etc.

Figure 71 (B1) shows the state in which the LED provided on the first movable part 14 is lit in accordance with the change effect when the first movable part 14 is in the origin position. As the LED lights up, the effect TEF is displayed on the display screen 7a. When the LED lights up, an effect is created that suggests the first movable part 14 appears from the left side.

When the first movable device 14 is in the origin position, the warp section 12, game board 2, first movable device 14, and display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are arranged in this order from the front of the player. The warp section 12 and game board 2 are transparent. The upper part of the first movable device 14 is opaque (first movable device upper part 141), and the lower part is transparent (first movable device lower part 142).

When a player views the overlapping area of the warp section 12, game board 2, first movable device upper portion 141, and display screen 7a, they will view the first movable device upper portion 141 through the warp section 12 and game board 2. Furthermore, when a player views the overlapping area of the warp section 12, game board 2, first movable device lower portion 142, and display screen 7a, they will view the display screen 7a through the warp section 12, game board 2, and first movable device upper portion 141. This allows the aforementioned effect of encouraging the first movable device 14 to appear from the left side to be produced in an integrated manner using the LEDs (LEDs 181a-181d) provided on the first movable device upper portion 141, first movable device lower portion 142, and first movable device 14, and the effect TEF displayed on the display screen 7a.

Figure 71 (B2) shows the state in which the LEDs on the first movable device 14 are lit in accordance with the change effect when the first movable device 14 moves from the origin position. As the LEDs light up, the effect TEF is displayed on the display screen 7a. By lighting up the LEDs, the effect of the friendly character CRA facing off against the enemy character CRB can be produced in an integrated manner by the LEDs (LEDs 181a-181d) on the first movable device upper part 141, the first movable device lower part 142, and the first movable device 14, and the effect TEF displayed on the display screen 7a.

Figure 71 (C1) shows the state in which the LED provided on the second movable part 15 is lit when the second movable part 15 is in the origin position. The part of the second movable part 15 other than the letter part is opaque (second movable part non-letter part 151), and the letter part is transparent (second movable part letter part 152).

Figure 71 (C2) shows the state in which the LEDs on the second movable device 15 are lit when the second movable device 15 moves from its origin position to the center of the display screen 7a. An effect image MEF is displayed on the display screen 7a with the second movable device 15 at its center. The LEDs are lit in accordance with the effects on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, because the second movable device text portion 152 is transparent, the effects on the display screen 7a can be seen in the transparent portion, allowing for an integrated effect to be produced by the second movable device 15, the LEDs (LEDs 182a-182d) on the second movable device 15, and the effect image MEF displayed on the display screen 7a.

[LED effects of moving parts]
In the past, the components that make up gaming machines were not transparent. Therefore, when components overlapped, the player could not see the component at the back, and it was not possible to create effects using the component at the back. This limited the area in which effects could be created.

In this embodiment, some of the components are transparent, allowing the player to see the components behind those components. This expands the range of possible effects and increases the game's appeal.

[Center unit upper structure]
The structure of region A in FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIG.
Figure 73 shows the upper structure of the game area. Figure 73(A) is a front view showing the upper part of the center unit 210. Figure 73(B) is a perspective view showing the upper part of the center unit 210.

The center unit 210 is screwed onto the transparent panel 2a. The transparent panel 2a is located on the front side of the game board 2 and forms the game area 3. An opening corresponding to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is formed in the center of the transparent panel 2a. The center unit 210 is screwed onto the transparent panel 2a, aligning with the opening.

The upper part of the center unit 210 has a wall portion 211 that extends left and right across the top of the play area 3 and protrudes forward from the transparent panel 2a. The wall portion 211 has a first rail portion 212, a second rail portion 213, a third rail portion 214, a fourth rail portion 215, a fifth rail portion 216, and a sixth rail portion 217.

The first rail portion 212 is slightly inclined to the left, allowing the gaming ball to be guided into the left gaming area 3A. A sixth rail portion 217, which has a steeper incline than the first rail portion 212, is connected to the left end of the first rail portion 212.

The second rail portion 213 is slightly inclined to the left, at approximately the same inclination as the first rail portion 212. The second rail portion 213 is capable of guiding the gaming ball to the left gaming area 3A. At the connection between the first rail portion 212 and the second rail portion 213, a first protrusion (first step portion) 218 is formed to prevent the gaming ball from moving to the right.

The third rail portion 214 is arc-shaped, with a slope that becomes steeper the further to the right it goes, allowing the gaming ball to be guided into the right gaming area 3B. At the connection between the second rail portion 213 and the third rail portion 214, a second protrusion (second step portion) 219 is formed to prevent the gaming ball from moving to the right.

Connected to the right end of the third rail section 214 is a fourth rail section 215, which has a steeper slope than the right end of the third rail section 214. Connected to the right end of the fourth rail section 215 is a fifth rail section 216, which has a steeper slope than the fourth rail section 215 and an inclination angle that is approximately vertical. With this configuration, the gaming ball rolling on the third rail section 214 gradually increases its rolling speed due to the arc-shaped third rail section 214, and its moving speed increases further when it approaches the fourth rail section 215 and fifth rail section 216. This makes it possible to change the rolling speed of the gaming ball, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A fitting wall portion 225 is formed behind the first rail portion 212 and the sixth rail portion 217 of the center unit 210. When the center unit 210 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a, the fitting wall portion 225 fits into the outer edge of an opening formed in the center of the transparent panel 2a that corresponds to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

A plate-shaped mounting portion 220 extending upward parallel to the transparent panel 2a is formed at the base end of the second rail portion 213. An inclined portion 220a is formed around the periphery of the mounting portion 220. As shown in Figure 73 (C), a through hole 220b is formed in the mounting portion 220 for inserting a screw 201. A through hole 2ac is formed in the transparent panel 2a for inserting the screw 201. Therefore, the center unit 210 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a by the screw 201 inserted through the through holes 220b and 2ac. A protrusion 202 protruding rearward is formed on the back surface of the mounting portion 220 near the through hole 220b. Inserting this protrusion 202 into the through hole 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a facilitates positioning of the center unit 210.

The mounting portion 220 has a third protrusion 221 and a fourth protrusion 222 that protrude forward. The third protrusion 221 and the fourth protrusion 222 restrict the movement of the game ball to the right. This ensures that a game ball that is launched with enough force to pass over the third protrusion 221 and the fourth protrusion 222 will reach the game area 3B on the right side.

A plate-shaped mounting portion 223 extending downward and to the right parallel to the transparent panel 2a is formed at the base end of the fourth rail portion 215 and the fifth rail portion 216. A sloped portion 223a is formed around the periphery of the mounting portion 223. As shown in Figure 73 (C), a through hole 223b is formed in the mounting portion 223 for inserting a screw 201. A through hole 2ac is formed in the transparent panel 2a for inserting the screw 201. Therefore, the center unit 210 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a by the screw 201 inserted through the through holes 223b and 2ac. A protrusion 202 protruding rearward is formed on the back surface of the mounting portion 223 near the through hole 223b. Inserting this protrusion 202 into the through hole 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a facilitates positioning of the center unit 210.

The mounting portion 223 has a plate-shaped abutment portion 224 against which the game ball abuts. The abutment portion 224 protrudes forward from the right end of the mounting portion 223. As a result, the flow speed of a game ball that is shot with enough force to pass over the third protrusion 221 and the fourth protrusion 222 is appropriately suppressed by the synergistic effect of the impact stopper 4B and the abutment portion 224.

The front surfaces of the mounting portions 220 and 223 form the flow surfaces 220c and 223c for the game balls, and the space in front of the mounting portions 220 and 223 forms a flow path through which the game balls can pass. Specifically, in the mounting portion 220, game balls can pass below the third protrusion 221 and the fourth protrusion 222 and between the third protrusion 221 and the fourth protrusion 222. The inclined portions 220a and 223a connect the transparent panel 2a (play area 3) to the flow surfaces 220c and 223c. At this time, as shown in Figure 73 (C), the head of the screw 201 (indicated by the symbol NH) protrudes forward from the flow surfaces 220c and 223c and can come into contact with the game ball. Therefore, friction with the head of the screw 201 can suppress the game ball's movement speed or cause the game ball to move irregularly. Additionally, the inclined portions 220a and 223a allow the game ball to move smoothly and also suppress the game ball's movement speed.

The structure of the mounting parts 220 and 223 shown in Figure 73 (C) is the same below. Specifically, this applies to the mounting part 241 in the lower left structure of the center unit 210, the mounting part 274 of the flow path unit 270 to the left of the center unit 210, the mounting parts 232 and 233 of the prize opening unit 230, and the mounting parts 257 and 258 of the reinforcement unit 250.

The center unit 210 is formed with flow-down surfaces 220c, 223c, 241c through which game balls can flow down, inclined portions 220a, 223a, 241a connecting the flow-down surfaces 220c, 223c, 241c to the game area 3, and through holes 220b, 223b, 241b through which screws 201 are inserted at predetermined positions on the flow-down surfaces 220c, 223c, 241c. The center unit 210 is fixed to the game board 2 (front surface 2aa of transparent panel 2a) by inserting screws 220b, 223b, 241b from the front side of screws 223c, 241c into through-holes 220b, 223b, 241b and screwing them into the front side of the game board 2 (front surface 2aa of transparent panel 2a), so that game balls flowing down the flow-down surfaces 220c, 223c, 241c can come into contact with the heads NH of the screws 201. This allows the friction between the game balls and the heads NH of the screws 201 to slow down the game ball's movement speed, or to cause the game balls to move irregularly due to the friction between the game balls and the heads NH of the screws 201. This can increase the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by connecting the flow-down surfaces 220c, 223c, and 241c of the center unit 210 to the playing area 3 of the game board 2 with the inclined portions 220a, 223a, and 241a, collisions of game balls at the connecting portions between the flow-down surfaces 220a, 223a, and 241c of the center unit 210 and the playing area 3 of the game board 2 can be weakened, thereby preventing defects such as damage or cracks on the flow-down surfaces 220a, 223a, and 241c of the center unit 210. Furthermore, game balls flowing down the flow-down surfaces 220a, 223a, and 241c of the center unit 210 come into contact with the heads NH of the screws 201, causing the game balls to bounce and change momentum, contributing to increased interest in the rolling of the game balls.

The game area 3 is comprised of a left game area 3A where game balls can flow down the left side of the game area 3 when viewed from the front of the game machine 1, a right game area 3B where game balls can flow down the right side of the game area 3 when viewed from the front of the game machine 1, a first protrusion 218 that prevents game balls launched by the launching device 112 when the launch strength of the game ball has not reached a certain strength (a launch strength that exceeds the second protrusion 219) from flowing down into the right game area 3B and allows them to flow down into the left game area 3A, and a second protrusion 219 that prevents game balls launched by the launching device 112 when the launch strength of the game ball has not reached a certain strength (a launch strength that exceeds the second protrusion 219). and a second protrusion 219 that prevents a game ball launched before reaching a certain strength (a launch strength that exceeds the second protrusion 219) from flowing down to the right-side game area 3B and allows it to flow down to the left-side game area 3A if the first protrusion 218 is unable to block the game ball, so that a game ball launched by the launching device 112 when the launch strength of the game ball has reached a certain strength (a launch strength that exceeds the second protrusion 219) can flow down to the right-side game area 3B without being blocked by the first protrusion 218 and the second protrusion 219. In this way, even if the first protrusion 218 cannot block a game ball that attempts to flow down to the right-side game area 3B when the game ball is launched before reaching a certain strength (a launch strength that exceeds the second protrusion 219), the second protrusion 219 can block the game ball that attempts to flow down to the right-side game area 3B. As a result, only game balls that are launched with enough strength to exceed the second step portion 219 will reach the right game area 3B, preventing a game ball from accidentally reaching the right game area 3B on the right side even when the game is in a state where hitting from the left is recommended, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The technical concept of the upper structure of the center unit 210 will be explained below.
[Technical philosophy 1]
A gaming machine (1),
An outer frame (51) that forms an outer shell;
an inner frame (52) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame;
A game board (2) attached to the inner frame to form a game area (3, transparent panel 2a);
a front frame attached to the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame in an openable and closable manner, and having an opening formed therein into which a glass unit (57) is fitted so as to make the playing area of the game board visible;
a launching device (112) for launching game balls into the game area;
an image display unit (7) for displaying an image;
a game control unit (81) for executing game control;
a performance control unit (91) that executes performance control based on a command from a game control unit;
a unit portion (210) attached to the play area;
Equipped with
The unit part comprises:
When viewed from the front, a first rail portion (212) is arranged in the upper left of the game area and can guide game balls to a left game area (3A) on the left side of the game area;
A first step portion (218) that is disposed continuously to the right of the first rail portion when viewed from the front and restricts the movement of the game ball from left to right along the first rail portion;
When viewed from the front, a second rail portion (213) is arranged continuously to the right of the first step portion and can guide the game ball to the left game area;
A second step portion (219) that is arranged continuously to the right of the second rail portion when viewed from the front and restricts the movement of the game ball from left to right along the second rail portion;
a third rail portion (214) that is disposed continuously to the right of the second step portion when viewed from the front, and that guides the game ball that is launched by the launching device and has passed over the second step portion to a right game area (3B) on the right side of the game area;
and a fourth rail portion (215) arranged continuously with the third rail portion and having a larger inclination angle than the third rail portion.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Conventionally, when the launch strength of a game ball becomes large enough, the game ball may mistakenly reach the right-side right game area 3B, even when the game is in a state where hitting from the left is recommended. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 1, only game balls launched with a launch strength that exceeds the second step portion 219 reach the right game area 3B, thereby preventing the game ball from mistakenly reaching the right-side right game area 3B, even when the game is in a state where hitting from the left is recommended, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Technical philosophy 2]
The unit part (210) is
Mounting portions (220, 223) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
a through hole (220b, 223b) provided in the mounting portion and through which a screw (201) is inserted;
a protrusion (202) provided on the mounting portion, protruding in the direction in which the screw is inserted near the through hole, and inserted into the corresponding through hole (2ad);
A gaming machine characterized by:

When attempting to screw the center unit 210 to the transparent panel 2a, it is thought that positioning for screwing would be difficult. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 2, a protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward is formed near the through-holes 220b, 223b on the back surface of the mounting portions 220, 223. This protrusion 202 is inserted into the through-hole 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a, making it easier to position the center unit 210.

[Technical philosophy 3]
The unit part (210) is
Mounting portions (220, 223) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
and a through hole (220b, 223b) provided in the mounting portion and through which a screw (201) is inserted,
The front surface of the mounting part is the flow surface (220c, 223c) of the game balls, and the space in front of the mounting part is the flow path of the game balls, so that when the unit part is screwed into the game area by the screw, game balls passing through the flow path can come into contact with the head of the screw.

In the past, a method of forming a flow path for game balls was to line up obstacle nails, but this posed the problem of increasing the number of obstacle nails and making the installation of the obstacle nails more complicated. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 3, the front surfaces of the mounting parts 220 and 223 form the flow surfaces 220c and 223c for the game balls, and the space in front of the mounting parts 220 and 223 forms a flow path through which the game balls can pass. This reduces the number of obstacle nails and eliminates the need for complicated installation of the obstacle nails. Furthermore, the heads of the screws 201 protrude forward from the surfaces of the mounting parts 220 and 223, making them capable of coming into contact with the game balls. Therefore, friction with the heads of the screws 201 can slow the game ball's movement speed or cause the game ball to move irregularly.

[Technical philosophy 4]
The unit part (210) is
Mounting portions (220, 223) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
It is provided on the peripheral portion of the mounting portion, and when the front surface of the mounting portion is the flow surface (220c, 223c) of the game ball, it has at least an inclined portion (223a) that connects the flow surface and the game area.

In the past, a method of forming a flow path for game balls was to line up obstacle nails, but this posed the problem of increasing the number of obstacle nails and making the installation of the obstacle nails more complicated. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 4, the front surfaces of the mounting parts 220 and 223 serve as the flow-down surfaces 220c and 223c for game balls, and the space in front of the mounting parts 220 and 223 forms a flow path through which game balls can pass. This reduces the number of obstacle nails and eliminates the need for complicated installation of the obstacle nails. Furthermore, the peripheral edges of the mounting parts 220 and 223 are provided with inclined portions 220a and 223a that connect the flow-down surfaces 220c and 223c to the play area 3. Therefore, the inclined portions 220a and 223a enable smooth movement of game balls and also suppress the speed at which the game balls move.

[Technical philosophy 5]
As a gaming machine having two protrusions on the top of the center unit as described above, the following configuration is conceivable.
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
The game area includes a first guide path (212, 213) that guides game balls to the first game area, and a second guide path (214, 215) that guides game balls to the second game area,
In a region where the first guideway and the second guideway branch off, a first convex portion (218) and a second convex portion (219) are provided.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the past, even in a gaming state where left-handed play is recommended, if the strength of the game ball launched by operating the handle exceeds a predetermined strength, the intended left-handed hit could result in a right-handed hit. In contrast, in a gaming machine equipped with two protrusions (stepped portions) on the top of the center unit, only game balls launched with a launch strength that exceeds the two stepped portions reach the right-hand play area (resulting in a right-handed hit). This prevents game balls from accidentally reaching the right-hand play area even in a gaming state where left-handed play is recommended, prevents players from losing game balls, and increases the enjoyment of the game.

[Technical philosophy 6]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
a launching device (112) attached to the inner frame below the game board and capable of launching game balls toward the game area;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
The game area includes:
A left side game area (3A) in which game balls can flow down the left side of the game area when viewed from the front of the game machine;
A right-side gaming area (3B) in which gaming balls can flow down the right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine;
a first protrusion (218) that prevents game balls launched by the launching device when the launch strength of the game balls does not reach a certain strength (a launch strength that exceeds the second protrusion (219)) from flowing down to the right game area and allows the game balls to flow down to the left game area;
a second protrusion (219) that prevents a game ball from flowing down to the right-side game area and allows the game ball to flow down to the left-side game area when the game ball is not blocked by the first protrusion when the game ball is launched by the launching device with a launch strength that does not reach the certain strength;
is established,
When the launching strength of the game ball by the launching device reaches the certain strength, the game ball launched flows down to the right game area without being blocked by the first protrusion and the second protrusion.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Gaming machines that allow play by left-handed or right-handed hitting have been proposed in the past (for example, JP 2023-124739 A). However, even when the game state is such that play by left-handed hitting is recommended, there have been cases where the game ball has mistakenly reached the right game area. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 6 above, only game balls that are launched with a launch strength that exceeds the second step portion reach the right game area, thereby preventing the game ball from mistakenly reaching the right game area even when the game state is such that play by left-handed hitting is recommended, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Winning slot unit, lower left structure of center unit]
The structure of region B in FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Figure 74 is a front view showing the structure of the lower left corner of the prize opening unit 230 and the center unit 210. Figure 75 is a perspective view of the prize opening unit 230. Figure 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display on the front of the prize opening unit 230. Figure 77 is a perspective view showing the structure of the lower left corner of the center unit 210, with Figure 77(A) being a perspective view of the front side and Figure 77(B) being a perspective view of the back side.

[Prize entry unit]
The winning opening unit 230 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a. The transparent panel 2a is disposed on the front side of the game board 2 and forms the game area 3. The winning opening unit 230 is disposed below the left game area 3A.

As shown in Figures 74 and 75, the winning port unit 230 has a main body 231 and mounting portions 232 and 233. The main body 231 has a front panel 235 located on the front side, and a back panel 236 located at a distance slightly wider than the width of one game ball from the front panel 235. The front panel 235 and the back panel 236 are plate-shaped, and the peripheral edge on the side where the game balls flow down has a cloud-like design with continuous arcs. Three winning ports (general winning port 27, outlet port 16, general winning port 27 from the top) are provided to correspond to the arc-shaped protruding portions. The back panel 236 has three pass-through holes 237 through which winning game balls can pass, corresponding to the three winning ports. Between the front plate portion 235 and the back plate portion 236, there are provided a contact portion 234 and multiple partition portions 238 that guide winning game balls to the corresponding passage holes 237.

The abutment portion 234 is located above the winning opening, and the inclination angle of its upper surface 234a is smaller than the inclination angle of the peripheral portion K of the play area 3, and is approximately horizontal. This makes it possible to suppress the movement speed of game balls flowing down from above toward the winning opening unit 230. The front plate portion 235 and rear plate portion 236 are connected as a single unit by the abutment portion 234 and the partition portion 238.

The mounting portion 232 is formed to extend upward from the upper end of the rear plate portion 236, and has the same thickness as the rear plate portion 236, so that it is parallel to the transparent panel 2a when screwed in. The mounting portion 233 is formed to extend downward from the lower end of the rear plate portion 236, and has the same thickness as the rear plate portion 236, so that it is parallel to the transparent panel 2a when screwed in.

A sloped portion 232a is formed on the periphery of the mounting portion 232. A through hole 232b is formed in the mounting portion 232 for inserting the screw 201. A sloped portion 233a is formed on the periphery of the mounting portion 233. A through hole 233b is formed in the mounting portion 233 for inserting the screw 201. A through hole 2ac is formed in the transparent panel 2a for inserting the screw 201. Therefore, the winning opening unit 230 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a by the screw 201 inserted through the through holes 232b, 233b, and 2ac. A protrusion 202 protruding rearward is formed on the back surface of the mounting portion 232 near the through hole 232b. A protrusion 202 protruding rearward is formed on the back surface of the mounting portion 233 near the through hole 233b. The protrusion 202 is inserted into the through-hole 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a, making it easy to position the winning slot unit 230.

The front surface of the mounting portion 232 forms the flow-down surface 232c for game balls, and the space in front of the mounting portion 232 allows game balls to pass through. The inclined portion 232a connects the transparent panel 2a (game area 3) to the flow-down surface 232c. At this time, as described above, the screw head of the screw 201 protrudes forward from the flow-down surface 232c and can come into contact with the game ball. Therefore, friction with the head of the screw 201 can suppress the movement speed of the game ball or cause the game ball to move irregularly. Furthermore, the inclined portions 220a and 223a enable the game ball to move smoothly while also suppressing its movement speed.

[Display on the prize slot unit]
Figure 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display for distinguishing between winning slots (whether it is the general winning slot 27 or the outlet slot 16).
In Figure 76 (A), the word "OUT" (indicated by symbol D) is painted on the front panel 235 of the main body 231 of the winning port unit 230 to correspond to the outlet 16. This makes it possible to distinguish between the winning ports.
In FIG. 76(B), the word "OUT" (indicated by symbol D) is painted on the transparent panel 2a to correspond to the outlet 16. This makes it possible to distinguish between the winning outlets.

In this example, the word "OUT" is painted, but in addition to or instead of such painting, the surface of the front panel 235 of the main body 231 of the winning opening unit 230 may be processed to write the letters. Alternatively, in addition to or instead of such painting, the surface of the transparent panel 2a may be processed to write the letters.
Furthermore, the word "OUT" may be printed on a sticker attached to the surface of the front panel 235 of the main body 231 of the winning opening unit 230. When the main body 231 of the winning opening unit 230 is decorated with a sticker (for example, decorated with a floral pattern), it is conceivable to print the word "OUT" on the sticker. Similarly, the word "OUT" may be printed on a sticker attached to the transparent panel 2a. When the transparent panel 2a is decorated with a sticker (for example, decorated with a floral pattern), it is conceivable to print the word "OUT" on the sticker.
When attaching a sticker to the front panel 235 of the main body 231 of the prize opening unit 230, it may be attached to either the front or back surface. When attaching a sticker to the transparent panel 2a, it may be attached to either the front or back surface.

[Center unit left lower structure]
The center unit 210 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a. The transparent panel 2a is disposed on the front side of the game board 2 and forms the game area 3. An opening corresponding to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is formed in the center of the transparent panel 2a. The center unit 210 is screwed to fit into the opening of the transparent panel 2a.

The lower left portion of the center unit 210 is provided with a wall portion 240 that protrudes forward from the transparent panel 2a while being screwed in place. An attachment portion 241 is formed extending downward from the base end of the wall portion 240 along the wall portion 240. The wall portion 240 has a first wall portion 242, a second wall portion 243, a third wall portion 244, a fourth wall portion 245, and a fifth wall portion 246.

The first wall portion 242 protrudes approximately vertically. The second wall portion 243 connects to the lower end of the first wall portion 242 and extends diagonally downward to the right. The third wall portion 244 connects to the right end of the second wall portion and is formed to extend approximately vertically downward. The fourth wall portion 245 connects to the lower end of the third wall portion 244 and extends diagonally downward to the right at a slightly greater inclination than the second wall portion 243. The fifth wall portion 246 connects to the right end of the fourth wall portion 245 and is formed to extend approximately horizontally.

A sloped portion 241a is formed on the periphery of the mounting portion 241. Two through holes 241b are formed in the mounting portion 241 for inserting screws 201. A through hole 2ac is formed in the transparent panel 2a for inserting screws 201. One of the through holes 241b is formed below the second wall portion 243 and to the left of the third wall portion 244. The other through hole 241b is formed below the fifth wall portion 246. The center unit 210 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a by screws 201 that pass through the through holes 241b and 2ac.

Protrusions 202 that protrude rearward are formed on the back surface of the mounting portion 241 near each through-hole 241b. Inserting these protrusions 202 into the through-holes 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a makes it easy to position the center unit 210.

The mounting portion 241 has a linear peripheral portion 241d with the same inclination angle as the fourth wall portion 245. Below this linear peripheral portion 241d, obstacle nails SK1 are driven into a line along the linear peripheral portion 241d. This allows the space between the wall portion 240 and the obstacle nails SK1, i.e., the space in front of the mounting portion 241, to function as a flow path for the game ball (indicated by the arrow RU). The front surface of the mounting portion 241 forms the flow-down surface 241c. The screw head of the screw 201 protrudes forward from the flow-down surface 241c and can come into contact with the game ball. Therefore, friction with the head of the screw 201 can slow the movement speed of the game ball or cause it to move irregularly. Furthermore, the inclined portion 241a allows the game ball to move smoothly while also slowing its movement speed. In addition, a flow path RU for game balls is created above the obstacle pin SK1, and a flow path RD for game balls is created below the obstacle pin SK1.

The winning opening unit 230 is formed with a flow-down surface 232c along which game balls can flow, an inclined portion 232a connecting the flow-down surface 232c to the game area 3, and a through-hole 232b through which a screw 201 is inserted at a predetermined position on the flow-down surface 232c. The winning opening unit 230 is fixed to the game board 2 (front surface 2aa of transparent panel 2a) by inserting the screw 201 from the front side of the flow-down surface 232c into the through-hole 232b and screwing it into the front side of the game board 2 (front surface 2aa of transparent panel 2a). Game balls flowing down the flow-down surface 232c can come into contact with the head NH of the screw 201. This allows friction between the game ball and the head NH of the screw 201 to slow the game ball's movement, or to cause the game ball to move irregularly. This increases the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by connecting the flow-down surface 232c of the winning opening unit 230 and the playing area 3 of the playing board 2 with the inclined portion 232a, collisions of game balls at the connection between the flow-down surface 232c of the winning opening unit 230 and the playing area 3 of the playing board 2 can be weakened, thereby preventing problems such as damage or cracks to the flow-down surface 232c of the winning opening unit 230. Furthermore, when a game ball flowing down the flow-down surface 232c of the winning opening unit 230 comes into contact with the head NH of the screw 201, the game ball bounces and changes its momentum, contributing to an increase in the enjoyment of the rolling game ball.

The technical concept behind the winning slot unit 230 and the lower left structure of the center unit 210 will be explained below.
[Technical philosophy 1]
A gaming machine (1),
An outer frame (51) that forms an outer shell;
an inner frame (52) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame;
A game board (2) attached to the inner frame to form a game area (3, transparent panel 2a);
a front frame attached to the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame in an openable and closable manner, and having an opening formed therein into which a glass unit (57) is fitted so as to make the playing area of the game board visible;
a launching device (112) for launching game balls into the game area;
an image display unit (7) for displaying an image;
a game control unit (81) for executing game control;
a performance control unit (91) that executes performance control based on a command from a game control unit;
a unit portion (230) attached to the play area;
Equipped with
The unit part comprises:
General prize slots (27) and
An outlet (16),
A contact portion (234) that contacts a game ball flowing down at an upstream portion of the unit portion when the game area is viewed from the front, and suppresses the moving speed of the game ball;
and
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the past, even when a general winning port was provided, it was difficult to win, which could reduce interest in the game. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 1, the unit section 230 has at least a general winning port 27, an outlet 16, and an abutment section 234 upstream of the unit section 230 when viewing the game area 3 from the front, which the game ball contacts as it flows downstream, thereby slowing down the movement speed of the game ball. As a result, the abutment section 234 slows down the movement speed of the game ball, making it relatively easy for the game ball to win at the general winning port 27. Furthermore, the provision of the outlet 16 keeps the player interested in which port the ball will land, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Technical philosophy 2]
The device is provided with a display section (D) that displays the general winning slot (27) and the out slot (16) in a distinguishable manner.
According to Technical Concept 2, it becomes easier to distinguish between the general winning slot 27 and the outlet slot 16, which can increase the interest in the game.

[Technical philosophy 3]
The unit section (230, 210) is
Mounting portions (232, 233, 241) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
through holes (232b, 233b, 241b) provided in the mounting portion and through which the screws (201) are inserted;
The mounting portion has at least a protrusion (202) that protrudes in the direction in which the screw is inserted near the through hole and is inserted into the corresponding through hole (2ad).

When attempting to screw the prize opening unit 230 and center unit 210 into the transparent panel 2a, it is thought that positioning for screwing would be difficult. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 3, a protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward is formed near the through-holes 232b, 233b, and 241b on the back surface of the mounting portions 232, 233, and 241. This protrusion 202 is inserted into the through-hole 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a, making it easy to position the prize opening unit 230 and center unit 210.

[Technical philosophy 4]
The unit section (230, 210) is
Mounting portions (232, 241) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
and a through hole (232b, 241b) provided in the mounting portion and through which the screw (201) is inserted,
The front surface of the mounting part is the flow surface (232c, 241c) of the game balls, and the space in front of the mounting part is the flow path of the game balls, so that when the unit part is screwed into the game area by the screw, game balls passing through the flow path can come into contact with the head of the screw.

In the past, a method of forming a flow path for game balls was to line up obstacle nails, but this posed the problem of increasing the number of obstacle nails and making the installation of the obstacle nails more complicated. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 4, the front surfaces of the mounting parts 232 and 241 serve as the flow-down surfaces 232c and 241c for game balls, and the space in front of the mounting parts 232 and 241 forms a flow path through which game balls can pass. This reduces the number of obstacle nails and eliminates the need for complicated installation of the obstacle nails. Furthermore, the heads of the screws 201 protrude forward from the surfaces of the mounting parts 232 and 241, making them capable of coming into contact with the game balls. Therefore, friction with the heads of the screws 201 can slow the game ball's movement speed or cause the game ball to move irregularly.

[Technical philosophy 5]
The unit section (230, 210) is
Mounting portions (232, 241) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
It is provided on the peripheral portion of the mounting portion, and when the front surface of the mounting portion is the flow surface (232c, 241c) of the game ball, it has at least an inclined portion (232a, 241a) that connects the flow surface and the game area.

In the past, a method of forming a flow path for game balls was to line up obstacle nails, but this posed the problem of increasing the number of obstacle nails and making the installation of the obstacle nails more complicated. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 5, the front surfaces of the mounting parts 232 and 241 serve as the flow surfaces 232c and 241c for game balls, and the space in front of the mounting parts 232 and 241 serves as a flow path through which game balls can pass. This reduces the number of obstacle nails required and eliminates the need for complicated installation of the obstacle nails. Furthermore, the peripheral edges of the mounting parts 232 and 241 are provided with inclined portions 232a and 241a that connect the flow surfaces 232c and 241c to the play area 3. Therefore, the inclined portions 232a and 241a enable smooth movement of game balls and also suppress the speed at which the game balls move.

[Reinforcement unit]
The structure of region C in FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIG.
78A and 78B are diagrams for explaining the reinforcement unit 250, FIG. 6A is a front view of the reinforcement unit 350, and FIG. 6B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 6A.

The reinforcement unit 250 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a. The transparent panel 2a is located on the front side of the game board 2 and forms the game area 3. The reinforcement unit 250 is located to the left of the right game area 3B.

As shown in FIG. 78, the reinforcement unit 250 has a main body 251 and mounting portions 257 and 258. The main body 251 has a first wall portion 252, a second wall portion 253, a third wall portion 254, a fourth wall portion 255, and a fifth wall portion 256 that are screwed together and protrude forward from a base portion 251a that is parallel to the transparent panel 2a. The first wall portion 252 is formed at the left end of the base 251a and extends approximately vertically (up and down). The second wall portion 253 is formed at the upper end of the base 251a and extends approximately horizontally (left and right) from the upper end of the first wall portion 252. The third wall portion 254 is formed at the right end of the base 251a and extends diagonally downward to the right from the right end of the second wall portion 253. The fourth wall portion 255 is formed at the right end of the base portion 251a and extends diagonally downward to the left from the lower end of the third wall portion 254. The fifth wall portion 256 is formed at the lower end of the base portion 251a and extends to connect the lower end of the fourth wall portion 255 and the lower end of the first wall portion 252.

The mounting portion 257 is formed to extend upward from the upper end of the base 251a, with a thickness smaller than that of the base 251a, so that it is parallel to the transparent panel 2a when screwed in. The mounting portion 258 is formed to extend downward from the lower end of the base 251a, with a thickness smaller than that of the base 251a, so that it is parallel to the transparent panel 2a when screwed in. The mounting portion 258 is formed to extend downward a predetermined width along the lower end of the base 251a.

A sloped portion 257a is formed on the periphery of the mounting portion 257. A through hole 257b is formed in the mounting portion 257 for inserting the screw 201. A sloped portion 258a is formed on the periphery of the mounting portion 258. A through hole 258b is formed in the mounting portion 258 for inserting the screw 201. A through hole 2ac is formed in the transparent panel 2a for inserting the screw 201. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 250 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a by the screw 201 inserted through the through holes 257b, 258b, and 2ac. A protrusion 202 protruding rearward is formed on the back surface of the mounting portion 257 near the through hole 257b. A protrusion 202 protruding rearward is formed on the back surface of the mounting portion 258 near the through hole 258b. The protrusion 202 is inserted into the through-hole 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a, making it easy to position the reinforcement unit 250.

The front surface of the mounting portion 258 forms the flow surface 258c for the gaming balls, and the space in front of the mounting portion 258 forms the flow path R through which the gaming balls can pass. The inclined portion 258a connects the transparent panel 2a (play area 3) to the flow surface 258c. At this time, as described above, the head of the screw 201 protrudes forward from the flow surface 258c and can come into contact with the gaming balls. Therefore, friction with the head of the screw 201 can slow the movement speed of the gaming ball or cause the gaming ball to move irregularly. Furthermore, the inclined portion 258a allows the gaming ball to move smoothly while also slowing its movement speed.

As shown in Figure 78 (B), in the reinforcement unit 250 screwed to the transparent panel 2a, the first to fifth wall portions 252 to 256 protruding from the base portion 251a are interposed between the transparent panel 2a and the glass unit 57 when the front frame 53 is closed. This prevents damage to the glass unit 57, and ultimately to the gaming machine 1, even when a force is applied in the forward or backward direction to the glass unit 57 of the gaming machine 1.

The base 251a of the main body 251 and the first to fifth wall portions 252 to 256 form a ball retention space. Therefore, the base 251a and the first to fifth wall portions 252 to 256 can be considered retention space forming portions. Under normal game conditions, balls do not enter the retention space. However, if the front frame 53 is opened due to a ball jam or other reason, a ball that falls from the play area 3 may strike the back of a store attendant's hand and enter the retention space. If the front frame 53 is closed without noticing the ball entering the retention space, the ball will remain in the retention space. Even in this case, the glass unit 57 attached to the front frame 53 covers the retention space from the front side of the reinforcement unit 250, so the ball is confined in the retention space, preventing it from entering the flow path and interfering with the balls flowing down the flow path.

In addition, at least a portion of the walls 252-256 may be formed with obstacle nails. In this case, the obstacle nails should be installed at intervals that prevent the game ball from passing through the walls 252-256. For example, in Figure 74, obstacle nail SK2 creates a stopping space TA to the left of the winning slot unit 230.

Also, while wall sections 252-256 are continuous, they may be configured so that there are gaps between the connecting sections. In this case, the walls should be spaced apart so that the gaming ball does not create additional gaps in the walls.

The reinforcement unit 250 is formed with a flow-down surface 258c along which game balls can flow, an inclined portion 258a connecting the flow-down surface 258c to the play area 3, and a through-hole 258b through which a screw 201 is inserted at a predetermined position on the flow-down surface 258c. The screw 201 is inserted from the front side of the flow-down surface 258c into the through-hole 258b and screwed into the front side of the game board 2 (the front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a), thereby fixing the reinforcement unit 250 to the game board 2 (the front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a). Game balls flowing down the flow-down surface 258c can come into contact with the head NH of the screw 201. This allows friction between the game ball and the head NH of the screw 201 to slow the game ball's movement or to cause the game ball to move irregularly, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by connecting the downflow surface 258c of the reinforcing unit 250 and the playing area 3 of the playing board 2 with the inclined portion 258a, collisions of game balls at the connection between the downflow surface 258c of the reinforcing unit 250 and the playing area 3 of the playing board 2 can be weakened, preventing problems such as damage or cracks on the downflow surface 258c of the reinforcing unit 250. Furthermore, when a game ball flowing down the downflow surface 258c of the reinforcing unit 250 comes into contact with the head NH of the screw 201, the game ball can bounce and change momentum, contributing to increased interest in the rolling of the game ball.

The technical concept of the reinforcing unit 250 will be described below.
[Technical philosophy 1]
A gaming machine (1),
An outer frame (51) that forms an outer shell;
an inner frame (52) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame;
A game board (2) attached to the inner frame to form a game area (3, transparent panel 2a);
a front frame attached to the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame in an openable and closable manner, and having an opening formed therein into which a glass unit (57) is fitted so as to make the playing area of the game board visible;
a launching device (112) for launching game balls into the game area;
an image display unit (7) for displaying an image;
a game control unit (81) for executing game control;
a performance control unit (91) that executes performance control based on a command from a game control unit;
a unit portion (250) attached to the play area;
Equipped with
The unit part comprises:
A plate-shaped base (251a),
A first wall portion (256) provided to protrude forward from the base portion so as to form a flow path for game balls in the game area;
a second wall portion (252, 253, 254, 255) provided separately from the first wall portion so as to protrude forward from the base portion;
A stopping space forming section (251a, 252 to 256) that forms a stopping space in which game balls can stop by at least one of the first wall section, the second wall section, and obstacle nails driven into the game area;
and
The stopping space forming section forms a space for confining the game balls together with the glass unit of the front frame so that the game balls stopped in the stopping space do not move from the stopping space to a flow path of the game balls when the front frame is closed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the past, when the front frame 53 was opened due to a ball jam or other reason, a game ball that had fallen from the play area 3 would hit the back of a store employee's hand and enter the parking space. If the front frame 53 were closed without allowing the game ball to enter the parking space, the game ball would remain in the parking space. Even in this case, the glass unit 57 attached to the front frame 53 covers the parking space from the front side of the reinforcement unit 250, so the game ball is trapped in the parking space, preventing it from entering the flow path and interfering with game balls flowing down the flow path. As a result, fair play can be achieved.

[Technical philosophy 2]
The unit part (250) is
Mounting portions (257, 258) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
through holes (257b, 258b) provided in the mounting portion and through which the screws (201) are inserted;
The mounting portion has at least a protrusion (202) that protrudes in the direction in which the screw is inserted near the through hole and is inserted into the corresponding through hole (2ad).

When attempting to screw the reinforcing unit 250 to the transparent panel 2a, it is thought that positioning for screwing would be difficult. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 2, a protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward is formed near the through-holes 257b, 258b on the back surface of the mounting portions 257, 258. This protrusion 202 is inserted into the through-hole 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a, making it easy to position the reinforcing unit 250.

[Technical philosophy 3]
The unit part (250) is
An attachment portion (258) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
and a through hole (258b) provided in the mounting portion and through which the screw (201) is inserted,
The front surface of the mounting part is the flow surface (258c) of the game balls, and the space in front of the mounting part is the flow path for the game balls, so that when the unit part is screwed into the game area by the screw, game balls passing through the flow path can come into contact with the head of the screw.

In the past, a method of forming a flow path for game balls was to line up obstacle nails, but this posed the problem of increasing the number of obstacle nails and making the installation of the obstacle nails more complicated. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 3, the front surface of the mounting portion 258 serves as the flow surface 258c for game balls, and the space in front of the mounting portion 258 serves as a flow path R through which game balls can pass. This reduces the number of obstacle nails and eliminates the need for complicated installation of the obstacle nails. In addition, the head of the screw 201 protrudes forward from the surface of the mounting portion 258, making it possible to come into contact with the game ball. Therefore, friction with the head of the screw 201 can slow the game ball's movement speed or cause the game ball to move irregularly.

[Technical philosophy 4]
The unit part (250) is
An attachment portion (258) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
It is provided on the peripheral portion of the mounting portion, and when the front surface of the mounting portion is the flow-down surface (258c) of the game ball, it has at least an inclined portion (258a) that connects the flow-down surface and the game area.

In the past, a method of forming a flow path for gaming balls was to line up obstacle nails, but this posed the problem of increasing the number of obstacle nails and making the installation of the obstacle nails more complicated. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 4, the front surface of the mounting portion 258 serves as the flow-down surface 258c for gaming balls, and the space in front of the mounting portion 258 serves as a flow path through which gaming balls can pass. This reduces the number of obstacle nails required and eliminates the need for complicated installation of the obstacle nails. In addition, the peripheral edge of the mounting portion 258 is provided with an inclined portion 258a that connects the flow-down surface 258c with the playing area 3. Therefore, the inclined portion 258a allows for smooth movement of gaming balls and also suppresses the speed at which the gaming balls move.

[Technical philosophy 5]
As described above, the following configurations are possible for a gaming machine having a stopping space that is an enclosed space in the gaming area.
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
The game area has a first area formed by at least one of a first wall portion, a second wall portion, and a game nail, and in which a game ball can stay;
When the front frame is closed, a closed space for confining the game balls is formed by at least one of the first wall portion, the second wall portion, and the game nails that form the first area, and the transparent plate, so that the game balls that have stopped in the first area do not flow into a game ball flow path.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Previously, if a malfunction occurred during play and the front frame 53 was released, a game ball flowing down the play area 3 would accidentally move into the stopping space. If the front frame 53 were then closed, the game ball that moved into this stopping space could enter the flow path of the play area 3, hindering the flow of other game balls and potentially causing a disadvantage to the player. In contrast, by making the stopping space a closed space, game balls that move into the stopping space cannot enter the flow path of the play area 3, reducing the possibility of the player being disadvantaged and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Transparent cover structure]
The structure of region D in FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIG.
79A and 79B are diagrams for explaining the transparent cover structure, in which FIG. 7A is a front view of the transparent cover structure, and FIG. 7B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 7A.

The transparent cover structure is such that the transparent cover unit 260 covers the gate 28 and the first large winning opening 30. The transparent cover unit 260 is screwed onto the transparent panel 2a. The transparent panel 2a is positioned on the front side of the game board 2 and forms the game area 3. The transparent cover unit 260 is positioned below the right game area 3B.

As shown in Figure 79, the transparent cover unit 260 has a cover portion 261, two wall portions 262 and 263 that protrude rearward from part of the periphery of the cover portion, and mounting portions 267 and 268 (shown with diagonal lines in Figure 79). The portion of the cover portion 261 that covers the gate 28 has a crown-like design, and its lower portion is horizontally elongated and roughly rectangular, covering the first large prize opening 30. One wall portion 262 is located at the lower right end of the cover portion 261, and the other wall portion 263 is located at the left end of the cover portion 261. One mounting portion 267 is threadedly attached to the end of one wall portion 262 and extends downward parallel to the transparent panel 2a. The other mounting portion 268 is threadedly attached to the end of the other wall portion 263 and extends leftward parallel to the transparent panel 2a.

A decorative left sticker 264, a lower sticker 265, and a right sticker 266 are affixed to the cover portion 261 of the transparent cover unit 260. The left sticker 264 is located to the left of the first large prize opening 30 when viewed from the front, the lower sticker 265 is located below the first large prize opening 30 when viewed from the front, and the right sticker 266 is located to the right of the first large prize opening 30 when viewed from the front. A cutout portion 266a is formed in the right sticker 266, and the portion corresponding to this cutout portion 266a is the transparent portion T. Note that instead of the cutout portion 266a, a non-decorative transparent sticker portion may be created in part of the right sticker 266.

A sloped portion 267a is formed on the periphery of the mounting portion 267. A through hole 267b is formed in the mounting portion 267 for inserting the screw 201. A sloped portion 268a is formed on the periphery of the mounting portion 268. A through hole 268b is formed in the mounting portion 268 for inserting the screw 201. A through hole 2ac is formed in the transparent panel 2a for inserting the screw 201. Therefore, the transparent cover unit 260 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a by the screw 201 inserted through the through holes 267b, 268b, and 2ac. A protrusion 202 protruding rearward is formed on the back surface of the mounting portion 267 near the through hole 267b. A protrusion 202 protruding rearward is formed on the back surface of the mounting portion 268 near the through hole 268b. The protrusion 202 is inserted into the through-hole 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a, making it easy to position the transparent cover unit 260.

The front surface of the mounting portion 268 forms the flow-down surface 268c for the gaming balls, and the space in front of the mounting portion 268 forms a flow path through which the gaming balls can pass. The inclined portion 268a connects the transparent panel 2a (play area 3) to the flow-down surface 268c. At this time, as described above, the head of the screw 201 protrudes forward from the flow-down surface 268c and can come into contact with the gaming balls. Therefore, friction with the head of the screw 201 can slow the movement speed of the gaming ball or cause the gaming ball to move irregularly. Furthermore, the inclined portion 268a allows the gaming ball to move smoothly while also slowing its movement speed.

The transparent cover unit 260 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a with screws (not shown). The first large prize opening solenoid 33 is located behind the transparent panel 2a. The first large prize opening 30 is equipped with an opening/closing member 32 that swings open and close to allow or block the reception of game balls. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first large prize opening solenoid 33. Specifically, when electricity is applied to the first large prize opening solenoid 33, the plunger 33a moves to the right, and the opening/closing member 32 is opened by the arm 33b. Game balls can enter the first large prize opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is open (the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state in Figure 79).

When the transparent cover unit 260 is viewed from the front, the operation of part of the first large prize opening solenoid 33 can be seen through the transparent portion T of the cover portion 261 and the transparent panel 2a. The operation of part of the first large prize opening solenoid 33 includes the operation of parts driven by the first large prize opening solenoid 33, such as the operation of the plunger 33a and the operation of the arm 33b.

The transparent cover unit 260 is formed with a flow-down surface 268c along which game balls can flow, an inclined portion 268a connecting the flow-down surface 268c to the play area 3, and a through-hole 268b through which a screw 201 is inserted at a predetermined position on the flow-down surface 268c. The transparent cover unit 260 is fixed to the game board 2 (front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a) by inserting the screw 201 from the front side of the flow-down surface 268c into the through-hole 268b and screwing it into the front side of the game board 2 (front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a). Game balls flowing down the flow-down surface 268c can come into contact with the head NH of the screw 201. This allows friction between the game ball and the head NH of the screw 201 to slow the game ball's movement or to cause the game ball to move irregularly, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by connecting the flow-down surface 268c of the transparent cover unit 260 and the playing area 3 of the playing board 2 with the sloped portion 268a, collisions of game balls at the connection between the flow-down surface 268c of the transparent cover unit 260 and the playing area 3 of the playing board 2 are weakened, thereby preventing defects such as damage or cracks to the flow-down surface 268c of the transparent cover unit 260. Furthermore, when a game ball flowing down the flow-down surface 268c of the transparent cover unit 260 comes into contact with the head NH of the screw 201, the game ball bounces and changes its momentum, contributing to increased interest in the rolling of the game ball.

In this embodiment, the game board 2 is formed with through holes 2ad, which are mounting through holes for attaching the center unit 210, the prize opening unit 230, the reinforcement unit 250, and the transparent cover unit 260. The center unit 210, the prize opening unit 230, the reinforcement unit 250, and the transparent cover unit 260 are provided with protrusions 202, which are protruding parts that protrude rearward from the rear side of the center unit 210, the prize opening unit 230, the reinforcement unit 250, and the transparent cover unit 260, at positions corresponding to the through holes 2ad, which are mounting through holes, and through holes 22, which are screw through holes that are positioned near the protrusions 202, and through holes 22, which are screw through holes through which screws 201 are inserted. 3b, 232b, 233b, 241b, 257b, 258b, 267b, and 268b are formed, and by inserting the protrusion 202 into the through-hole 2ad and inserting the screw 20 from the front side of the center unit 210, the prize opening unit 230, the reinforcement unit 250, and the transparent cover unit 260 into the through-holes 223b, 232b, 233b, 241b, 257b, 258b, 267b, and 268b, and screwing them into the front side of the game board 2 (front side surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a), the center unit 210, the prize opening unit 230, the reinforcement unit 250, and the transparent cover unit 260 are fixed to the game board 2 (front side surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2). This allows unit parts such as the center unit 210, prize slot unit 230, reinforcement unit 250, and transparent cover unit 260 to be positioned in the front of the game board in the correct position, so the unit parts are not fixed to the game board in an awkward position and no undue force is applied to the unit parts, preventing malfunctions of the unit parts such as cracks or deformation.

The following describes the technical concept behind the transparent cover structure and the like.
[Technical philosophy 1]
A gaming machine (1),
An outer frame (51) that forms an outer shell;
an inner frame (52) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame;
A game board (2) attached to the inner frame to form a game area (3, transparent panel 2a);
a front frame attached to the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame in an openable and closable manner, and having an opening formed therein into which a glass unit (57) is fitted so as to make the playing area of the game board visible;
a launching device (112) for launching game balls into the game area;
an image display unit (7) for displaying an image;
a game control unit (81) for executing game control;
a performance control unit (91) that executes performance control based on a command from a game control unit;
a unit portion (260) attached to the play area;
Equipped with
The unit part comprises:
The ball entrance (30) is changed between a difficult state and an easy state by a solenoid (33), and the ball entrance (30) has at least a cover (261) for covering the ball entrance (30) from the front side.
The cover portion (261) is configured so that the operation of a part of the solenoid can be seen through a transparent portion (T) formed in the cover portion.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Conventionally, the first major prize opening solenoid 33 was located behind a panel and was not visible. This made it difficult to detect any malfunctions (such as breakdowns) in the first major prize opening solenoid 33, which could result in losses for the player. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 1, the operation of part of the first major prize opening solenoid 33 is visible through the transparent portion T formed in the cover portion 261, making it easier to detect any malfunctions (such as breakdowns) in the first major prize opening solenoid 33 and preventing players from suffering losses.

[Technical philosophy 2]
The unit part (260) is
Mounting portions (267, 268) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
through holes (267b, 268b) provided in the mounting portion and through which the screws (201) are inserted;
The mounting portion has at least a protrusion (202) that protrudes in the direction in which the screw is inserted near the through hole and is inserted into the corresponding through hole (2ad).

When attempting to screw the transparent cover unit 260 to the transparent panel 2a, it is thought that positioning for screwing would be difficult. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 2, a protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward is formed near the through-holes 267b and 268b on the back surface of the mounting portions 267 and 268. This protrusion 202 is inserted into the through-hole 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a, making it easy to position the transparent cover unit 260.

[Technical philosophy 3]
The unit part (260) is
An attachment portion (268) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
and a through hole (268b) provided in the mounting portion and through which the screw (201) is inserted.
The front surface of the mounting part is the flow surface (268c) of the game balls, and the space in front of the mounting part is the flow path for the game balls, so that when the unit part is screwed into the game area by the screw, game balls passing through the flow path can come into contact with the head of the screw.

In the past, a method of forming a flow path for game balls was to line up obstacle nails, but this posed the problem of increasing the number of obstacle nails and making the installation of the obstacle nails more complicated. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 3, the front surface of the mounting portion 268 serves as the flow-down surface 268c for game balls, and the space in front of the mounting portion 268 serves as a flow path through which game balls can pass. This reduces the number of obstacle nails required and eliminates the need for complicated installation of the obstacle nails. Furthermore, the head of the screw 201 protrudes forward from the flow-down surface 268c, which is the surface of the mounting portion 268, and can come into contact with the game ball. Therefore, friction with the head of the screw 201 can slow the game ball's movement speed or cause the game ball to move irregularly.

[Technical philosophy 4]
The unit part (260) is
An attachment portion (268) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
It is provided on the peripheral portion of the mounting portion, and when the front surface of the mounting portion is the flow-down surface (268c) of the game ball, it has at least an inclined portion (268a) that connects the flow-down surface and the game area.

In the past, a method of forming a flow path for gaming balls was to line up obstacle nails, but this posed the problem of increasing the number of obstacle nails and making the installation of the obstacle nails more complicated. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 4, the front surface of the mounting portion 268 serves as the flow-down surface 268c for gaming balls, and the space in front of the mounting portion 268 serves as a flow path through which gaming balls can pass. This reduces the number of obstacle nails required and eliminates the need for complicated installation of the obstacle nails. In addition, the peripheral edge of the mounting portion 268 is provided with an inclined portion 268a that connects the flow-down surface 268c with the playing area 3. Therefore, the inclined portion 268a allows for smooth movement of gaming balls and also suppresses the speed at which the gaming balls move.

[Technical philosophy 5]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
Unit parts (a center unit 210, a prize winning slot unit 230, a reinforcement unit 250, a transparent cover unit 260) attached to the front side of the game board;
a launching device (112) attached to the inner frame below the game board and capable of launching game balls toward the game area;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
The unit part includes:
A downstream surface (220c, 223c, 232c, 241c, 258c, 268c) on which the game ball can flow down;
An inclined portion (220a, 223a, 232a, 241a, 258a, 268a) connecting the flow-down surface and the play area;
through holes (220b, 223b, 232b, 233b, 241b, 258b, 268b) for inserting screws (screws 201) at predetermined positions on the flow-down surface;
is formed,
The unit part is fixed to the game board by inserting the screw from the front side of the flow-down surface into the through hole and screwing it to the front side of the game board, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down surface can come into contact with the head (NH) of the screw.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed that have various unit parts, such as a center gadget, attached to the play area of the gaming board (for example, JP 2017-051742 A). However, the unit parts were unable to impart irregular movement to the gaming ball. In contrast, Technical Concept 5 above makes it possible to impart irregular movement to the gaming ball through friction between the gaming ball and the head of the screw, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Technical philosophy 6]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
Unit parts (a center unit 210, a prize winning slot unit 230, a reinforcement unit 250, a transparent cover unit 260) attached to the front side of the game board;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
The game board further has a through hole (2ad) for mounting the unit part,
The unit part includes:
a protrusion (protrusion 202) protruding rearward from the rear side of the unit portion at a position corresponding to the mounting through hole;
screw through holes (223b, 232b, 233b, 241b, 257b, 258b, 267b, 268b) arranged near the protrusion and through which a screw (screw 201) is inserted;
is formed,
The unit part is fixed to the game board by inserting the protrusion part into the mounting through hole, and inserting the screw from the front side of the unit part into the screw through hole and screwing it to the front side of the game board.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed in which various unit parts, such as center gadgets, are attached to the play area of the gaming board (for example, JP 2017-051742 A). However, when the unit parts are fixed to the gaming board in an unnatural position, excessive force is applied to the unit parts, causing malfunctions such as cracks and deformation. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 6 above, by being able to position the unit parts in the front of the gaming board in the correct position, the unit parts are not fixed to the gaming board in an unnatural position, and excessive force is not applied to the unit parts, thereby preventing malfunctions such as cracks and deformation.

[Effect of transparent cover structure]
Conventionally, the game board 2 was made of an opaque material, so the member that opens and closes the electric chute 22 could not be seen from the game board 2 side of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, if there was a defect in the member that opens and closes the electric chute 22 and the electric chute 22 could not be opened or closed, it could go unnoticed. If the electric chute 22 did not open, the ball could not be placed in the second starting hole 21, which interfered with the game.

In this embodiment, the game board 2 is made of a transparent material, and the member that opens and closes the electric chute 22 can be seen from the game board 2 side of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, if there is a visible defect in the member that opens and closes the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 can be replaced and the ball can be placed into the second starting hole 21. This allows the player to play with greater peace of mind, which in turn increases the player's interest.

[Structure of the flow path unit]
The structure of region E in FIG. 72 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. FIG.
Fig. 80 is a front view showing the structure of the flow path unit 270. Fig. 81 is a perspective view of the flow path unit 270, Fig. 81(A) is a perspective view of the front side, and Fig. 81(B) is a perspective view of the rear side.

The flow path unit 270 is integrally provided to the left of the center unit 210 and is screwed onto the transparent panel 2a. The transparent panel 2a is located on the front side of the game board 2 and forms the game area 3. An opening corresponding to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is formed in the center of the transparent panel 2a. The center unit 210 is screwed onto the transparent panel 2a to fit into the opening.

The flow path unit 270 has a first wall portion 271 extending from the lower end of the sixth rail portion 217 of the center unit 210. The first wall portion 271 is a wall portion that forms the flow path for the game balls, and is arc-shaped and bulges to the left when viewed from the front. An attachment portion 274 is formed on the outside (left side) of the first wall portion 271, extending leftward from the base end of the first wall portion 271 along the first wall portion 271. When screwed in, the attachment portion 274 is formed so as to be parallel to the transparent panel 2a.

A second wall portion 272 is provided on the outside (left) of the first wall portion 271, with a predetermined distance between it and the first wall portion 271. The second wall portion 272 protrudes forward from the mounting portion 274. A third wall portion 273 is provided on the outside (left) of the second wall portion 272, with a predetermined distance between it and the second wall portion 272. The third wall portion 273 protrudes forward from the mounting portion 274. The first wall portion 271 and the second wall portion 272 form a flow path RR for the gaming ball. The second wall portion 272 and the third wall portion 273 form a flow path RL for the gaming ball. The two flow paths RR and RL are gently arc-shaped and are formed approximately parallel to each other.

Protrusions 275 extending in the front-to-rear direction are formed at predetermined intervals along the flow path on the outside (flow path RR side) of the first wall portion 271, the inside (flow path RR side) and outside (flow path RL side) of the second wall portion 272, and the inside (flow path RL side) of the third wall portion 273. This makes it possible to suppress the movement speed of the game ball.

Sloped portions 274a are formed at the upper and lower ends of the mounting portion 274. Two through holes 274b are formed in the mounting portion 274 for inserting screws 201. Through holes 2ac are formed in the transparent panel 2a for inserting screws 201. One of the through holes 274b is formed at the lower end of the flow path RR, between the first wall portion 271 and the second wall portion 272. The other through hole 274b is formed at the upper end of the flow path RL, between the second wall portion 272 and the third wall portion 273. The flow path unit 270 is screwed to the transparent panel 2a by screws 201 inserted through the through holes 274b and 2ac.

Protrusions 202 that protrude rearward are formed on the back surface of the mounting portion 274 near each through-hole 274b. Inserting these protrusions 202 into the through-holes 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a facilitates positioning of the flow path unit 270.

The space in front of the mounting portion 274 functions as flow paths RR and RL for the gaming ball. The front surface of the mounting portion 274 forms the flow-down surface 274c. The screw head of the screw 201 protrudes forward from the flow-down surface 274c and can come into contact with the gaming ball. Therefore, friction with the head of the screw 201 can slow the movement speed of the gaming ball or cause the gaming ball to move irregularly. In addition, the inclined portion 274a connects the play area 3 (transparent panel 2) and the flow-down surface 274c. The inclined portion 274a allows the gaming ball to move smoothly and can also slow its movement speed.

The technical concept of the flow path unit 270 will be described below.
[Technical philosophy 1]
A gaming machine (1),
An outer frame (51) that forms an outer shell;
an inner frame (52) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame;
A game board (2) attached to the inner frame to form a game area (3, transparent panel 2a);
a front frame attached to the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame in an openable and closable manner, and having an opening formed therein into which a glass unit (57) is fitted so as to make the playing area of the game board visible;
a launching device (112) for launching game balls into the game area;
an image display unit (7) for displaying an image;
a game control unit (81) for executing game control;
a performance control unit (91) that executes performance control based on a command from a game control unit;
a unit portion (270) attached to the play area;
Equipped with
The unit part comprises:
An attachment portion (274) for screwing onto the play area (3, transparent panel 2a);
The housing has at least a first wall portion (271), a second wall portion (272), and a third wall portion (273) that protrude forward from the mounting portion,
A first game ball flow path (RR) is formed by the mounting portion, the first wall portion, and the second wall portion, and a second game ball flow path (RL) parallel to the first game ball flow path is formed by the mounting portion, the second wall portion, and the third wall portion.
A gaming machine characterized by:

By arranging obstacle nails, it is conceivable to form adjacent parallel flow paths for game balls. However, if the obstacle nails are bent even slightly, there is a concern that the game balls may become clogged in the flow path. According to Technical Concept 1, the first game ball flow path RR and the second game ball flow path RL are formed as flow path units 270, which eliminates the problems that occur when flow paths are formed using obstacle nails, prevents game balls from becoming clogged in the flow path, and increases the enjoyment of the game.

[Technical philosophy 2]
The unit part (270) is
a through hole (274b) provided in the mounting portion and through which a screw (201) is inserted;
The mounting portion has at least a protrusion (202) that protrudes in the direction in which the screw is inserted near the through hole and is inserted into the corresponding through hole (2ad).

When attempting to screw the flow path unit 270 to the transparent panel 2a, it is thought that positioning for screwing would be difficult. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 2, a protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward is formed near the through-hole 274b on the back surface of the mounting portion 274. This protrusion 202 is inserted into the through-hole 2ad formed in the transparent panel 2a, making it easier to position the flow path unit 270.

[Technical philosophy 3]
The unit part (270) is
The mounting portion has at least a through hole (274b) through which a screw (201) is inserted,
The front surface of the mounting part is the flow surface (274c) of the game balls, and the space in front of the mounting part is the flow path for the game balls, so that when the unit part is screwed into the game area by the screw, game balls passing through the flow path can come into contact with the head of the screw.

According to Technical Concept 3, the head of the screw 201 protrudes forward from the downward flow surface 274c, which is the surface of the mounting portion 274, and is able to come into contact with the gaming ball. Therefore, friction with the head of the screw 201 can slow the gaming ball's movement speed or impart irregular movement to the gaming ball, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Technical philosophy 4]
The unit part (270) is
It is provided at the upper and lower ends of the mounting portion, and when the front surface of the mounting portion is the flow-down surface (274c) of the game balls, it has at least an inclined portion (274a) that connects the flow-down surface and the game area.

According to Technical Concept 4, the upper and lower ends of the mounting portion 274 are provided with inclined portions 274a that connect the flow-down surface 274c to the play area 3. Therefore, the inclined portions 274a enable the game ball to move smoothly and also suppress the speed at which the game ball moves, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Technical philosophy 5]
The unit part (270) is
The first wall portion and the second wall portion have a protrusion (275) extending in the front-to-rear direction on the first game ball flow path side, and the second wall portion and the third wall portion have a protrusion (275) on the second game ball flow path side.

According to Technical Concept 5, the first wall portion 271, the second wall portion 272, and the third wall portion 273 have protrusions 275 extending in the front-to-rear direction, which can suppress the movement speed of the game ball and increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Shape of obstacle nails and prepared holes]
Here, the obstacle nails 45 planted on the front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a constituting the game board 2 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 82. Figure 82 is an explanatory diagram showing the shape of the obstacle nail (A), a cross section of the pilot hole shape 1 (B), a cross section of the pilot hole shape 2 (C), and the state in which the obstacle nails are planted (D). Here, the obstacle nails will be described first, followed by the shapes of the pilot holes and the state in which the obstacle nails are planted.

[Bug Nail]
First, the obstacle nail will be described. As shown in Figure 82 (A), the obstacle nail 45 has a head 45a, a body 45b, and a tip 45c, with the head 45a formed at one end of the body 45b and the tip 45c formed at the other end of the body 45b. The body 45b is shaped like a cylinder with a diameter d0 (hereinafter, "diameter" will be referred to as "diameter"). The head 45a is shaped like a round head that is larger than the diameter d0 of the body 45b. The diameter of the tip 45c decreases toward the tip, and the outer periphery of the tip 45c is machined into a spiral shape. The tip 45c is the part that is to be planted into the front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a.

If the tip 45c is driven into the front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a without drilling a pilot hole in the transparent panel 2a, a crack will form in the driven portion of the transparent panel 2a. Therefore, to prevent cracks from forming, it is necessary to drill a pilot hole in the transparent panel 2a in the area where the obstacle nail 45 will be installed.

However, while conventionally, by drilling pilot holes in the game board 2, it was possible to plant the obstacle nails 45 without causing cracks, it was difficult to easily determine whether the tip 45c was firmly fixed in the pilot hole.

[Pre-hole shape]
Therefore, in this embodiment, a through hole 2ac is provided in the transparent panel 2a as a pilot hole, and a first color region MCR having a predetermined length from the front side surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a toward the rear side surface 2ab, and a second color region UCR different from the first color region MCR having a length to the remaining rear side surface are provided around the inner periphery of the through hole 2ac.

Specifically, there are two types of pilot holes: Shape 1 and Shape 2. In Shape 1, as shown in FIG. 82(B), the diameter d1 of the through hole 2ac is smaller than the diameter d0 of the body 45b of the obstruction nail 45 (for example, the diameter d1 of the through hole 2ac is approximately 88% to 90% of the diameter d0 of the body 45b of the obstruction nail 45). The length UL of the first color region MCR is approximately three-quarters of the thickness PT of the transparent panel 2a from the front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a, and the length of the second color region UCR (thickness PT of the transparent panel 2a - length UL of the first color region MCR) is approximately one-quarter of the thickness PT of the transparent panel 2a from the rear surface 2ab of the transparent panel 2a. The first color region MCR is painted with white paint, and the second color region UCR is colorless, so the first color region MCR and the second color region UCR are different colors.

In pilot hole shape 2, as shown in Figure 82(C), the through hole 2ac is machined into a stepped shape, and the diameter of the hole formed on the front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a is narrowed compared to the diameter of the hole formed on the rear surface 2ab of the transparent panel 2a. The diameter of the through hole 2ac in the second color region UCR is the same as the diameter d1 shown in Figure 82(B), and in the first color region MCR, it is narrowed to diameter d2, which is smaller than diameter d1 (for example, diameter d2 of the through hole 2ac is approximately 85% to 87% of the diameter d0 of the body portion 45b of the obstacle nail 45). The length UL of the first color region MCR is approximately three-quarters of the thickness PT of the transparent panel 2a from the front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a, and the length of the second color region UCR (thickness PT of the transparent panel 2a - length UL of the first color region MCR) is approximately one-quarter of the thickness PT of the transparent panel 2a from the rear surface 2ab of the transparent panel 2a. The first color region MCR is painted white, and the second color region UCR is colorless, so the first color region MCR and the second color region UCR are different colors.

[The state where the obstacle nail is planted]
Next, the state of the nail 45 after it has been planted will be described. In both pilot hole shape 1 and pilot hole shape 2, when the nail 45 is inserted from the front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a into the pilot hole (through hole 2ac) and planted, as the tip 45c of the nail 45 advances toward the rear surface 2ab of the transparent panel 2a, the spiral portion formed on the tip 45c of the nail 45 rotates in the first color region MCR of the through hole 2ac, and the spiral portion formed on the tip 45c pushes the inner periphery of the through hole 2ac outward, thereby becoming embedded. Once the nail 45 has been planted, as shown in Figure 82 (D), the embedded state of the spiral portion formed on the tip 45c of the nail 45 can be easily determined by the first color region MCR and the second color region UCR of the through hole 2ac, making it easy to determine whether the tip 45c is firmly fixed in the pilot hole. As a result, when a worker who installs the obstacle nails 45 or an attendant such as a game center clerk performs maintenance, if there is an obstacle nail 45 whose tip 45c is not firmly fixed in the pilot hole, the obstacle nail 45 can be re-installed, thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem such as the obstacle nail 45 becoming detached from the transparent panel 2a, making it easier for game balls to flow down toward a specific area and resulting in a high rate of balls entering the starting hole.

In this embodiment, pilot hole shape 1 was used. However, even if pilot hole shape 2 was used as described above, as shown in Figure 82 (D), the state of engagement of the spiral portion formed on the tip 45c of the obstacle peg 45 can be easily determined by the first color region MCR and the second color region UCR in the through hole 2ac, making it possible to easily determine whether the tip 45c is firmly fixed in the pilot hole. This allows a worker installing the obstacle pegs 45, or an amusement center staff member or other attendant performing maintenance, to re-install any obstacle pegs 45 whose tip 45c is not firmly fixed in the pilot hole. This prevents the obstacle peg 45 from coming loose from the transparent panel 2a, which could cause game balls to flow more easily toward a specific area and result in a high rate of balls landing in the starting hole.

In this embodiment, the first color region MCR is painted white, and the second color region UCR is colorless. However, the second color region MCR can be any color different from the first color region MCR, and may be light blue, yellow, purple, or red, for example. Also, while the first color region MCR is painted white, it may be gray, blue, or the like instead of white. In other words, it is sufficient that the color combinations of the first color region MCR and the second color region UCR are different.

The following provides a detailed explanation of the technical concepts behind the various components placed on the rear side of the inner frame and the various components placed on the rear side of the game board attached to the inner frame.

[Technical philosophy 1]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
In the game board, through holes (2ac) are formed as pilot holes at positions where obstacle nails are to be planted,
The through hole has
a first color region (MCR);
a region of a second color (UCR) different from the first color;
There is,
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the past, gaming machines have been proposed in which the resin material that makes up the gaming board contains an elastic resin material, preventing cracks from occurring even when nails are planted in the gaming board (for example, JP 2017-051742 A). However, because the gaming board is made of a transparent resin, it was difficult to determine whether or not a nail was fixed in the board. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 1 above, it is possible to determine whether or not a nail is fixed in a through hole based on the first color area and the second color area in the through hole.

[Technical philosophy 2]
In the first color region, a spiral portion (45c) formed on the outer periphery of the implanted interference nail is made visible.

In the past, gaming machines have been proposed in which the resin material that makes up the gaming board contains an elastic resin material, preventing cracks from occurring when nails are planted into the gaming board (for example, JP 2017-051742 A). However, because the gaming board is made of a transparent resin, it was difficult to determine whether or not a nail was fixed in place. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 2 above, the spiral portion formed on the outer periphery of the nail can be seen in the first color area of the through-hole, making it possible to determine whether or not a nail is fixed in the through-hole.

[Configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine]
Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 83. Figure 83 is a rear view of the gaming machine 1. As described above, the gaming machine 1 includes the outer frame 51 fixed to a gaming island (not shown), the front frame 53 attached to the outer frame 51 so as to be able to open and close and provided with an opening 54, and the inner frame 52 attached to the front frame 53 so as to be able to open and close and also attached to the outer frame 51 so as to be able to open and close.

The game board 2 can be attached to the inner frame 52 from the front to the rear, and can also be removed from the inner frame 52. In other words, the game board 2 is detachably attached to the inner frame 52. The game board 2 has a game area 3 formed therein where game balls launched (shot) from the launching device 112 roll (flow down). The game area 3 of the game board 2 attached to the inner frame 52 can be seen through the opening 54 in the front frame 53.

Various units such as the center unit 210 and prize slot unit are attached to the front side of the game board 2 (the front surface 2aa of the transparent panel 2a).

Here, we will first explain the various components arranged on the rear side of the inner frame 52, and then explain in order the various components arranged on the rear side of the game board 2 attached to the inner frame 52.

[Various components placed behind the inner frame]
First, we will explain the various components arranged on the rear side of the inner frame 52. As shown in Figure 83, the various components arranged on the rear side of the inner frame 52 include the ball tank 400, tank rail 405, ball guiding unit 410, prize ball payout device 120, power supply board box 450, and payout control board box 440. Here, we will explain the arrangement of the ball tank 400, tank rail 405, ball guiding unit 410, and prize ball payout device 120, and then we will explain the arrangement of the power supply board box 450 and the payout control board box 440 in that order.

[Arrangement of ball tank, tank rail, ball guide unit 410 and prize ball payout device 120]
A ball tank 400 capable of storing a large amount of gaming balls supplied from the equipment of an amusement island (not shown) is attached to the rear side of the inner frame 52, from the upper center to the left side when viewed from the rear of the gaming machine 1. A tank rail 405, which slopes downward from the left side to the right side and is positioned below the ball tank 400 when viewed from the rear of the gaming machine 1, is attached to the rear side of the inner frame 52. The tank rail 405 aligns the gaming balls stored in the ball tank 400 along the downward sloping rail and guides them downstream.

When viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear, the underside of the tank rail 405, on the near side (the rear side when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the front), has a number of horizontally elongated cutouts 405a that are long in the left-right direction. Rolling game balls rub against each other on the downward sloping rail of the tank rail 405, causing iron powder to fall and dust to accumulate. Such iron and dust may fall through (pass) the cutouts 405a due to the vibrations of the rolling game balls and the vibrations caused by the operation of movable bodies such as the gaming board 2.

When an attendant such as an amusement facility staff member (hall staff member) opens the inner frame 52 from the outer frame 51 to perform maintenance such as cleaning of the gaming machine 1, they can insert a cotton swab into the cutout portion 405a to remove iron powder and dust from the rail on the downward sloping surface of the tank rail 405.

When looking at the gaming machine 1 from the rear, a ball guide unit 410 is attached to the rear of the inner frame 52, from the upper right to the center right, which receives gaming balls from the tank rail 405 and guides them to the prize ball payout device 120 located downstream. When looking at the gaming machine 1 from the rear, a prize ball payout device 120 is attached to the rear of the inner frame 52, from the center right to the lower right, which pays out gaming balls toward the upper tray 61 of the front frame 53. The payout of the prize ball payout device 120 is controlled by the payout control board 110 based on commands from the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, or based on the player pressing a ball lending button (not shown) on the front frame 53.

[Power supply board box placement]
With the game board 2 attached to the inner frame 52, a power supply board box 450 in the shape of a horizontally long box is attached to the rear side of the inner frame 52, located below the game board 2 and the prize ball payout device 120 when the game machine 1 is viewed from the rear, and extending from the left side of the lower center to the right side.

The power supply board box 450 is composed of a power supply board box cover member 451 with an opening and a power supply board box base member 452 that covers the opening of the power supply board box cover member 451, and houses the power supply board 162. The power supply board box cover member 451 and the power supply board box base member 452 are both made of a colorless, transparent synthetic resin. This makes it possible to check for any unauthorized tampering with the power supply board 162 through the power supply board box cover member 451 and the power supply board box base member 452, even when the power supply board 162 is housed in the power supply board box 450. The power supply board box 450 is attached to the rear side of the inner frame 52 so that the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451 is horizontal.

The surface of the power supply board 162 on which the various electronic components are mounted (mounting surface) can be seen through the power supply board box cover member 451, whether the power supply board box 450 is attached to the inner frame 52 or whether the power supply board box 450 is removed from the inner frame 52. On the other hand, the surface of the power supply board 162 opposite the surface on which the various electronic components are mounted, that is, the surface on which the various electronic components are not mounted (non-mounting surface), can be seen through the power supply board box base member 452 by removing the power supply board box 450 from the inner frame 52.

The various connectors and power switch 163 mounted on the upper side of the mounting surface of the power supply board 162 are not covered by the power supply board box cover member 451 and are exposed from the power supply board box cover member 451.

The power supply board 162 is an important board that generates and supplies the various DC power supplies required for the gaming machine 1 from the 24V AC power supplied from the gaming island, and generating various DC power supplies generates heat. Therefore, in this embodiment, the power supply board box 450 has multiple slits formed in it to allow the air inside the power supply board box 450 to escape to the air outside the power supply board box 450.

Specifically, when the power supply board box 450 is attached to the inner frame 52, a plurality of rectangular slits 451a that are long in the front-to-rear direction are formed on the top and bottom surfaces of the power supply board box cover member 451, and are arranged in a row in the left-to-right direction at predetermined intervals (e.g., 15 mm) apart. The left-to-right distance between the slits 451a is approximately 5 mm. Note that in addition to being formed on the top and bottom surfaces as described above, the slits 451a may also be formed on either or both the left and right side surfaces.

When the power supply board box 450 is attached to the inner frame 52, the cover body surface opposite the opening formed in the power supply board box cover member 451 when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear is formed with a rectangular first sticker affixing area 451b toward the right of the center on the right side, where a colorless, transparent first sticker is affixed, a rectangular second sticker affixing area 451e, which is a different area from the first sticker affixing area 451b and is located below and to the right of the first sticker affixing area 451b, where a colored, opaque second sticker is affixed, and in the area excluding the first sticker affixing area 451b and the second sticker affixing area 451b, a plurality of air vents 451c, which are through-holes with diameters the same as or smaller than the left-right distance dimension of the slits 451a, and a plurality of elongated holes that are long in the vertical direction and have left-right distance dimensions the same as or smaller than the left-right distance dimension of the slits 451a.

The colorless and transparent first seal attached to the first seal attachment area 451b is, for example, painted white and has the rating, company name, precautions, etc. printed on it. For example, the rating may be "Voltage AC 24V ± 2V," "Fuse 15A," the company name may be "XXXXX Co., Ltd.", and the precautions may be "Caution: Do not open the case. Turn off the power before inserting or removing the connector."

The colored, opaque second sticker attached to the second sticker attachment area 451e is a QR code (registered trademark) printed in black on a white background, and contains, for example, coded information related to the power supply board 162.

When the power supply board box 450 is attached to the inner frame 52, the top and bottom surfaces of the power supply board box cover member 451 are formed with a plurality of rectangular slits 451a that are long in the front-to-rear direction and aligned in a row in the left-to-right direction at predetermined intervals (e.g., 15 mm) apart, as described above. However, as described above, iron powder and accumulated dust that have fallen onto the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 may fall through the cutouts 405a formed in the tank rail 405 due to vibrations from rolling game balls and vibrations caused by the operation of movable bodies such as the game board 2. In other words, if iron powder and accumulated dust on the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 fall through the cutouts 405a, there is a risk that the falling iron powder and dust will enter the power supply board box 450 through the slits 451a formed on the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451 and accumulate therein.

The gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island, which is equipped with various devices. When the power is turned on to the gaming island, some of the devices move within the gaming island, creating an environment in which dust and dirt (dust) are floating around. However, when dust is floating around within the gaming island, it can enter the power supply board box 450 through the multiple slits 451a and adhere to and accumulate on the power supply board 162.

The power supply board 165, which will be described in detail later, is a mixed-mount board that combines DIP (short for Dual Inline Package) type electronic components and lead-type electronic components, whose lead wires are inserted into through-holes and soldered, with SMD (short for Surface Mount Device) type electronic components, whose leads are soldered on the mounting surface without being inserted into through-holes.

Because SMD-type electronic components are miniaturized, the lead spacing (terminal spacing) is shorter than that of DIP-type electronic components. Therefore, if iron powder or accumulated dust on the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 falls through the cutout 405a, the falling iron powder or dust may enter the power supply board box 450 through the slit 451a formed on the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451 and come into contact with the SMD-type electronic components, potentially causing a short circuit, so measures must be taken. This point will be explained in more detail below.

The power supply board 165 has multiple through-holes formed therein, and multiple through-holes are filled with solder. By filling the through-holes with solder, dust is prevented from accumulating within the through-holes, and moisture from accumulating in the accumulated dust prevents corrosion of the inner walls of the through-holes, thereby minimizing damage to the through-holes. This point will be explained in more detail later.

[Dispense control board box placement]
With the game board 2 attached to the inner frame 52, when the game machine 1 is viewed from the rear, a payout control board box 440 is attached which is positioned below the game board 2 and the prize ball payout device 120 and to the left of the power supply board box 450, and is a long, horizontally elongated box extending from the lower center left side to the left side at the rear of the inner frame 52.

The dispensing control board box 440 is composed of a dispensing control board box cover member 441 with an opening and a dispensing control board box base member 442 that covers the opening of the dispensing control board box cover member 441, and houses the dispensing control board 110. The dispensing control board box cover member 441 and the dispensing control board box base member 442 are both made of a colorless, transparent synthetic resin. This makes it possible to check for any unauthorized tampering with the dispensing control board 110 through the dispensing control board box cover member 441 and the dispensing control board box base member 442, even when the dispensing control board 110 is housed in the dispensing control board box 440. The dispensing control board box 440 is attached to the rear side of the inner frame 52 so that the top surface of the dispensing control board box cover member 441 is horizontal.

The surface (mounting surface) of the dispensing control board 110 on which various electronic components such as the dispensing control microcomputer 109, which is a dispensing control microprocessor (MPU: Micro Processor Unit), are mounted can be seen through the dispensing control board box cover member 441, whether the dispensing control board box 440 is attached to the inner frame 52 or when the dispensing control board box 440 is removed from the inner frame 52. On the other hand, the surface (non-mounting surface) on which various electronic components are not mounted, which is the surface opposite the surface on which the various electronic components are mounted, can be seen through the dispensing control board box base member 442 by removing the dispensing control board box 440 from the inner frame 52.

In addition, the various connectors mounted on the upper side of the mounting surface of the dispensing control board 110 are not covered by the dispensing control board box cover member 441, and are exposed from the dispensing control board box cover member 441.

When the payout control board box 440 is attached to the inner frame 52, the top, right, bottom, and left side of the payout control board box cover member 441 do not have any slits like the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450. Furthermore, when the power supply board box 450 is attached to the inner frame 52, the cover body surface opposite the opening formed in the power supply board box cover member 451 when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear does not have any ventilation holes (vent holes) or elongated holes (long holes) like the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450.

This is a measure to prevent cheaters from inserting thin, illicit tools, such as wire, between the front frame 53 and the inner frame 52, or between the inner frame 52 and the outer frame 51, from the front side of the gaming machine 1. Even if a cheater inserts a thin, illicit tool, such as wire, between the front frame 53 and the inner frame 52, or between the inner frame 52 and the outer frame 51, from the front side of the gaming machine 1, the tool can be deflected by abutting against the top, right, bottom, or left side of the payout control board box cover member 441. Even if the cheater's tool deflects toward the cover body, it can be deflected again by abutting against the cover body, preventing the cheater from coming into contact with the payout control board 110 inside the payout control board box cover member 441. This prevents the cheater from obtaining illicit balls by causing an electrical malfunction in the payout control board 110, a critical board that dispenses game balls.

When the payout control board box 440 is attached to the inner frame 52, a rectangular sticker attachment area 441b is formed in the center of the cover body surface opposite the opening formed in the payout control board box cover member 441 when looking at the gaming machine 1 from the rear.

The colorless, transparent sticker affixed to sticker attachment area 441b is, for example, white paint, with a dispensing error message and warnings printed on it. For example, dispensing error messages include "Dispensing stopped," "Bulb out error," "Ball jam error," "Communication error," and "Front frame/inner frame open," while warning messages include "Caution: Do not open the case. Turn off the power before inserting or removing the connector." The warning messages include an area with a black QR code (registered trademark) printed on a white background. This QR code (registered trademark) contains, for example, coded information related to the dispensing control board 110.

The gaming island, where multiple gaming machines 1 are lined up back-to-back, is sealed off, and heat builds up inside due to the operation of each gaming machine, as well as heat from the gaming balls being polished by the island's equipment and heat from the gaming balls rubbing against each other as they roll around the island. As a result, the temperature inside the gaming island is higher than the room temperature inside the arcade. For this reason, the various components located behind the gaming machines 1 are in a harsh thermal environment.

In this embodiment, the space within the payout control board box 440 is made large by ensuring a long distance between the payout control board box cover member 441 and the payout control board box when the payout control board box 440 is attached to the inner frame 52. This allows the payout control board 110 to operate stably even when affected by heat, such as heat from the operation of each gaming machine, heat from gaming balls being polished on the island equipment, and heat from gaming balls rubbing against each other as they roll within the gaming island.

Even if a fraudster inserts a thin fraudulent tool such as a wire, the fraudulent tool's direction of travel can be changed by abutting against the top, right, bottom, or left side of the dispensing control board box cover member 441. Even if the fraudulent tool changes direction and heads toward the cover body surface, multiple ventilation holes (ventilation holes) that are through-holes may be formed in the safe area, excluding the sticker affixed area 441b, where it is not expected to come into contact with the cover body surface. In this way, air heated inside the dispensing control board box 440 by the heat generated by the operation of the dispensing control board 110 can be released outside the dispensing control board box 440 via the multiple ventilation holes (ventilation holes).

When the payout control board box 440 is attached to the inner frame 52, the top, right, bottom, and left side of the payout control board box cover member 441 do not have any slits like those of the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450, as described above. Furthermore, as described above, iron powder and accumulated dust that have fallen onto the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 may fall through the cutout portion 405a formed in the tank rail 405 due to vibrations from rolling game balls and vibrations caused by the operation of movable bodies such as the game board 2. In other words, even if iron powder and accumulated dust on the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 fall through the cutout portion 405a, since no slits are formed on the top side of the payout control board box cover member 441, they can be received by the top side of the payout control board box cover member 441, preventing the falling iron powder and dust from entering the payout control board box 440.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island, which is equipped with various devices. When the gaming island is powered on, some of the devices move within the gaming island, creating an environment in which dust and dirt (dust) are floating around. Even if dust flies around within the gaming island, no slits are formed on the top, right, bottom, or left side of the payout control board box cover member 441. Furthermore, when the payout control board box 440 is attached to the inner frame 52, the cover body surface opposite the opening formed in the payout control board box cover member 441 when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear does not have any ventilation holes (vent holes) or elongated holes (long holes) like those of the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450. This prevents dust from entering the payout control board box 440.

The dispensing control board 110, which will be described in detail later, is a board on which DIP (short for Dual Inline Package) type electronic components and lead-type electronic components, whose lead wires are inserted into through holes and soldered, are mounted.

Of the power supply board box 450 and payout control board box 440 attached to the inner frame 52, a colorless and transparent first seal is attached to the first seal attachment area 451b formed on the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450, and has a rating indication (e.g., "Voltage AC 24V ± 2V," "Fuse 15A") printed on it. This allows the power supply board box 450 and payout control board box 440 attached to the inner frame 52 to know at a glance the rating required to safely operate the gaming machine 1.

The dispensing control board 110 has multiple through-holes formed therein, and multiple through-holes are filled with solder. By filling the through-holes with solder, dust is prevented from accumulating within the through-holes, and moisture is prevented from collecting in the accumulated dust, which corrodes the inner walls of the through-holes, thereby reducing damage to the through-holes. This point will be explained in more detail later.

[Various components arranged on the rear side of the game board attached to the inner frame]
Next, we will explain the various components arranged on the rear side of the gaming board 2 attached to the inner frame 52. As shown in Fig. 83, the various components arranged on the rear side of the gaming board 2 attached to the inner frame 52 include a performance control board box 420 and a game control board box 430. Here, we will explain the arrangement of the performance control board box 420, and then we will explain the arrangement of the game control board box 430.

[Placement of the performance control board box]
An image display device 7 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction is arranged on the rear side of the game board 2 attached to the inner frame 52, from the center upward when viewed from the rear of the gaming machine 1, and a horizontally long box-shaped presentation control board box 420 is attached to the center of the front side of the image display device 7 (the rear side of the image display device 7 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 1). The housing of the image display device 7 is protected by a cover member made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the presentation control board box 420 is attached to this cover member. When the game board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, the presentation control board box 420 is positioned below the tank rail 405 attached to the inner frame 52.

The effect control board box 420 is composed of an effect control board box cover member 421 with an opening and an effect control board box base member 422 that covers the opening of the effect control board box cover member 421. It houses the sub-control board 90, which is a effect control board, and the image control board 100, which is connected to the sub-control board 90 by a connector. The effect control board box cover member 421 and the effect control board box base member 422 are both made of a colorless, transparent synthetic resin. This makes it possible to check for any unauthorized tampering with the sub-control board 90 or the image control board 100 through the effect control board box cover member 421 and the effect control board box base member 422, even when the sub-control board 90 and the image control board 100 are housed in the effect control board box 420. The effect control board box 420 is attached to the rear of the game board 2 so that the top surface of the effect control board box cover member 421 is horizontal.

The surface of the sub-control board 90 on which various electronic components such as the presentation control microcomputer 91, which is a presentation control microprocessor (MPU: Micro Processor Unit), are mounted (MPU first mounting surface) can be seen through the presentation control board box cover member 421, whether the presentation control board box 420 is attached to the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2 or when the presentation control board box 420 is detached from the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2. On the other hand, the surface of the sub-control board 90 opposite the surface on which various electronic components are mounted, which does not include the presentation control microcomputer 91, which is a presentation control microprocessor (MPU), can be seen through the presentation control board box base member 422 by detaching the presentation control board box 420 from the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2.

As mentioned above, the effect control board box 420 also houses the image control board 100, which is connected by a connector to the sub-control board 90, which is the effect control board. The surface of the image control board 100 (the MPU mounting surface) on which various electronic components such as the image control microcomputer 101, which is an image control microprocessor (MPU: Micro Processor Unit), are mounted can be seen through (or passing through) the effect control board box cover member 421, whether the effect control board box 420 is attached to the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2 or removed from the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2. On the other hand, the surface of the image control board 100 opposite the surface on which the various electronic components are mounted, which is the surface on which the various electronic components are mounted (the surface on which the MPU is not mounted) and which does not include the image control microcomputer 101, which is an image control microprocessor (MPU), can be viewed through (or via) the base member 422 for the effect control board box by removing the effect control board box 420 from the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2.

The various connectors and volume switch 171 mounted below the MPU mounting surface of the sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board, are not covered by the performance control board box cover member 421 and are exposed from the performance control board box cover member 421.

When the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the effect control board box 420 is attached to the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2, the upper surface of the effect control board box cover member 421 does not have any slits like the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450. As described above, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, the effect control board box 420 is positioned below the tank rail 405 attached to the inner frame 52. Therefore, even if iron powder or accumulated dust falls onto the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 due to the vibrations of the rolling gaming balls or the vibrations caused by the operation of movable bodies such as the gaming board 2 and falls through the cutout portion 405a formed in the tank rail 405, the iron powder or dust is received by the upper surface of the effect control board box 420, preventing the iron powder or dust from entering the effect control board box 420.

The sub-CPU 92 of the presentation control microcomputer 91, which is a presentation control microprocessor (MPU) mounted on the sub-control board 90, which is a presentation control board, needs to perform high-speed calculations to control the progress of the presentation, and it is therefore necessary to suppress the temperature rise of the sub-CPU 92. Therefore, the sub-CPU 92 is attached to the MPU mounting surface of the sub-control board 90 with a heat sink 92a attached to the MPU mounting surface of the sub-control board 90, with a highly thermally conductive grease applied to the surface (the front surface of the sub-CPU 92 when looking at the gaming machine 1 from the rear) of the sub-control board 90. The heat sink 92a absorbs heat from the sub-CPU 92 and dissipates it into the air (heat radiation), cooling the sub-CPU 92.

The cover member 421 for the effect control board box has an air-cooling fan housing 421a that houses the air-cooling fan 172 at a position corresponding to the heat sink 92a attached to the MPU mounting surface of the sub-control board 90. This housing protrudes forward (rearward when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 1) from the cover body surface that is opposite the opening formed in the cover member 421 for the effect control board box when viewed from the rear of the gaming machine 1 with the gaming board 2 attached to the inner frame 52 and the effect control board box 420 attached to the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2. The air-cooling fan housing 421a has a ventilation opening 421aa that allows air from the air-cooling fan 172 to pass through. The air-cooling fan 172 is not attached from the outside of the cover member 421 for the effect control board box, but from the inside of the cover member 421, and is housed in the effect control board box 420.

When the air-cooled fan 172 rotates at high speed, the air inside the effect control board box 420 is forced through the ventilation opening 421aa and expelled out of the effect control board box 420 (to the outside air) (in other words, the air inside the effect control board box 420 is forced through the ventilation opening 421aa and expelled to the rear (rearward direction) of the gaming machine 1), thereby cooling the heat sink 92a and the sub-CPU 92.

The sub-control board 90, which is the presentation control board, controls the progress of the presentation based on commands from the main control board 80, which is the game control board that controls the progress of the game, and is not a board that can change the winning or losing lottery results of the main control board 80. Furthermore, the sub-CPU 92 of the presentation control microcomputer 91, which is the presentation control microprocessor (MPU) implemented on the sub-control board 90, needs to perform high-speed calculations to control the progress of the presentation, and it is therefore necessary to suppress the temperature rise of the sub-CPU 92.

Therefore, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the presentation control board box 420 is attached to the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2, the cover main body surface opposite the opening formed in the cover member 421 for the presentation control board box when looking at the gaming machine 1 from the rear has a plurality of ventilation holes (ventilation holes) 421c that are through holes formed in the area excluding the rectangular sticker attachment area 421b on the left side where a colored opaque sticker is attached and the area where the air-cooling fan accommodating section 421a is formed. In this embodiment, by rotating the fan of the air-cooled fan 172 at high speed, as described above, the air inside the presentation control board box 420 is forced to flow through the ventilation opening 421aa and be expelled outside the presentation control board box 420 (to the outside air) (i.e., the air inside the presentation control board box 420 is forced to flow through the ventilation opening 421aa and be expelled to the rear (rearward direction) of the gaming machine 1), thereby air-cooling the heat sink 92a and cooling the sub-CPU 92. However, by rotating the air-cooled fan 172 at high speed, air can be taken in from outside (outside air) of the effect control board box 420 through (passing through) the ventilation opening 421aa (i.e., air can be taken in from outside (outside air) of the effect control board box 420 through (passing through) the ventilation opening 421aa by a flow of air sucked in toward the front (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1), and the air can be forcibly expelled to the outside (outside air) of the effect control board box 420 through (passing through) the multiple air vents (vent holes) 421c which are through-holes (i.e., air from inside the effect control board box 420 can be forcibly expelled toward the rear (rear direction) of the gaming machine 1 through (passing through) the multiple air vents (vent holes) 421c which are through-holes), thereby air-cooling the heat sink 92a and cooling the sub-CPU 92.

The colored, opaque sticker attached to sticker attachment area 421b has a black QR code (registered trademark) printed on a white background. This QR code (registered trademark) contains, for example, coded information related to the sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board, and coded information related to the image control board 100. Of course, this QR code (registered trademark) may also contain coded information related to the sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board.

The sub-control board 90 and image control board 100, which will be described in detail later, are boards on which SMD (short for Surface Mount Device) type electronic components are mounted, with leads soldered to the mounting surface without being inserted into through holes.

Because SMD-type electronic components are miniaturized, the lead spacing (terminal spacing) is shorter than that of DIP (short for Dual Inline Package)-type electronic components. For this reason, if iron powder or accumulated dust on the downward sloping rail of tank rail 405 falls through cutout 405a, the falling iron powder or dust may enter performance control board box 420 and come into contact with SMD-type electronic components, causing a short circuit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the effect control board box 420 is attached to the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2, the upper surface of the effect control board box cover member 421 does not have any slits like the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450, as described above. When the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, the effect control board box 420 is positioned below the tank rail 405 attached to the inner frame 52. Therefore, even if iron powder or accumulated dust that has fallen onto the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 falls through the cutout portion 405a formed in the tank rail 405 due to the vibrations of the rolling gaming balls or the vibrations caused by the operation of movable bodies such as the gaming board 2, the iron powder or dust can be received by the upper surface of the effect control board box 420, preventing the iron powder or dust from entering the effect control board box 420.

In addition, iron powder and dust that fall through the cutout portion 405a and cannot be received on the top side of the presentation control board box 420 are spread from the air-cooled fan accommodating portion 421a of the presentation control board box 420 to the rear area of the gaming machine 1 by the wind blown out from the air-cooled fan 172 inside the presentation control board box 420, thereby preventing iron powder and dust from entering the presentation control board box 420. In this embodiment, as described above, the fan of the air-cooled fan 172 rotates at high speed, and as a result, the air inside the presentation control board box 420 is forced to pass through the ventilation opening 421aa and be expelled outside the presentation control board box 420 (to the outside air) (i.e., the air inside the presentation control board box 420 is forced to pass through the ventilation opening 421aa and be expelled to the rear (rearward direction) of the gaming machine 1), causing fallen iron powder and dust to spread from the air-cooled fan accommodating section 421a of the presentation control board box 420 to the area around the rear (rearward direction) of the gaming machine 1, thereby preventing iron powder and dust from entering the presentation control board box 420. Instead, by rotating the air-cooled fan 172 at high speed, air is taken in from outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the ventilation opening 421aa (that is, air is taken in from outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the ventilation opening 421aa by the air flow that is sucked toward the front (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1), and the air is forcibly taken in from outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the plurality of ventilation holes (ventilation holes) 421c that are through-holes. The flow of air expelled to the effect control board box 420 (that is, the flow of air in the effect control board box 420 is forcibly expelled to the rear (rear direction) of the gaming machine 1 through the plurality of vent holes (vent holes) 421c that are through-holes) may cause fallen iron powder and dust to spread from the effect control board box cover member 421 of the effect control board box 420 to the periphery behind (rear direction) of the gaming machine 1, thereby preventing the iron powder and dust from entering the effect control board box 420. This is because the high-speed rotation of the air-cooled fan 172 causes air to be sucked from outside (outside air) of the effect control board box 420 through (passes) the ventilation openings 421aa toward the front (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, so that even if fallen iron powder and dust are made to flow toward the front (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, most of the fallen iron powder and dust will collide with the fan of the air-cooled fan 172 and be thrown away to the rear (rear direction) of the gaming machine 1. This prevents iron powder and dust from entering the effect control board box 420. Even if the falling iron powder or dust does not collide with the air-cooling fan 172 and is not thrown backward (rearward) from the gaming machine 1, it will adhere to the heat sink 92a (even if iron powder or dust falls from the heat sink 92a, it will be received by the underside of the effect control board box cover member 421 of the effect control board box 420). Therefore, it will not adhere to the image control board 100 or the sub-control board 90, which is the effect control board, housed within the effect control board box 420.

The sub-control board 90 and image control board 100 have multiple through-holes that are not filled with solder. This will be explained in more detail later. The top surface of the effect control board box cover member 421 does not have any slits like the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450. This prevents dust from entering the effect control board box 420 from above, even if there is dust floating around inside the amusement island. This means that there is no need to fill the multiple through-holes in the sub-control board 90 and image control board 100 with solder, reducing the amount of solder used and contributing to lower manufacturing costs for the sub-control board 90 and image control board 100.

[Gaming control board box placement]
When the game board 2 is mounted on the inner frame 52 and the presentation control board box 420 is attached to the image display device 7 of the game board 2, a horizontally long box-shaped game control board box 430 is attached to the rear side of the game board 2, which is positioned below the presentation control board box 420 when viewing the game machine 1 from the rear, and which covers part of the lower side of the cover member that protects the housing of the image display device 7 from below.

The gaming control board box 430 is composed of a gaming control board box cover member 431 with an opening and a gaming control board box base member 432 that covers the opening of the gaming control board box cover member 431, and houses the main control board 80, which is a gaming control board. The gaming control board box cover member 431 and the gaming control board box base member 432 are both made of a colorless, transparent synthetic resin. This makes it possible to check for any unauthorized tampering with the main control board 80 through the gaming control board box cover member 431 and the gaming control board box base member 432, even when the main control board 80 is housed in the gaming control board box 430. The gaming control board box 430 is attached to the rear of the gaming board 2 so that the top surface of the gaming control board box cover member 431 is horizontal.

The surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 80 on which various electronic components such as the game control microcomputer 81, which is a game control microprocessor (MPU: Micro Processor Unit), are mounted can be seen through the game control board box cover member 431, whether the game control board box 430 is attached to the game board 2 or removed from the game board 2. On the other hand, the surface (non-mounting surface) on the main control board 80 opposite the surface on which the various electronic components are mounted, on which the various electronic components are not mounted, can be seen through the game control board box base member 432 by removing the game control board box 430 from the game board 2.

The various connectors and RAM clear switch 161 mounted on the underside of the mounting surface of the main control board 80 are not covered by the game control board box cover member 431 and are exposed from the game control board box cover member 431.

When the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the gaming control board box 430 is attached to the gaming board 2, the top, right, bottom, and left side of the gaming control board box cover member 431 do not have any slits like the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450. Furthermore, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the gaming control board box 430 is attached to the gaming board 2, the cover body surface opposite the opening formed in the gaming control board box cover member 431 when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear does not have any ventilation holes (vent holes) or elongated holes (long holes) like the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450.

As mentioned above, this is a countermeasure against cheaters who insert thin illicit tools such as wire from the front side of the gaming machine 1 between the front frame 53 and the inner frame 52, or between the inner frame 52 and the outer frame 51. Even if a cheater inserts a thin illicit tool such as wire from the front side of the gaming machine 1 between the front frame 53 and the inner frame 52, or between the inner frame 52 and the outer frame 51, the illicit tool can be deflected by abutting against the top, right, bottom, or left side of the gaming control board box cover member 431. Even if the illicit tool changes direction and heads toward the cover body surface, it can be deflected by abutting against the cover body surface, thereby preventing the illicit tool from coming into contact with the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board inside the gaming control board box cover member 431. This allows cheating tools to cause an electrical malfunction in the main control board 80, which is an important board that controls the progress of the game, and has a significant impact on the lottery results, preventing cheaters from obtaining game balls illegally.

When the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the gaming control board box 430 is mounted on the gaming board 2, the cover body surface opposite the opening formed in the gaming control board box cover member 431 when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear is formed with a rectangular first sticker affixing area 431b near the bottom left where a colorless, transparent first sticker is affixed, and a rectangular second sticker affixing area 431e near the top right, a different area from the first sticker affixing area 431b, where a colored, opaque second sticker is affixed.

The colorless and transparent first seal attached to the first seal attachment area 431b has, for example, a rating indication, company name, precautions, product name, etc. printed in white paint. For example, the rating indication could be "Voltage AC 24V ± 2V," "Fuse 15A," the company name could be "XXXXX Co., Ltd.", the precautions could be "Caution: Do not open the case. Turn off the power before inserting or removing the connector," and the product name could be "PXX ABC-DE."

The content of the rating display printed on the colorless and transparent first seal affixed to the first seal affixing area 431b formed on the game control board box cover member 431 of the game control board box 430 shown on the game board 2 side is the same as the content of the rating display printed on the colorless and transparent first seal affixed to the first seal affixing area 431b formed on the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450 that houses the power supply board 162 shown on the inner frame side.

The colored, opaque second sticker attached to the second sticker attachment area 431e is a QR code (registered trademark) printed in black on a white background, and contains, for example, coded information related to the main control board 80, which is the game control board.

As mentioned above, the gaming island, where multiple gaming machines 1 are lined up back to back, is sealed off, and heat builds up due to the operation of each gaming machine, the heat from the gaming balls being polished by the island equipment, and the heat from the gaming balls rubbing against each other as they roll around the gaming island. As a result, the temperature inside the gaming island is higher than the room temperature inside the arcade. For this reason, the various components located behind the gaming machines 1 are in a harsh thermal environment.

In this embodiment, the space inside the game control board box 430 is made large by ensuring a long distance between the game control board box cover member 431 and the game control board box 430 when the game board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52. This allows the main control board 80, which is the game control board, to operate stably even when affected by heat such as the heat from the operation of each gaming machine, the heat from gaming balls being polished on the island equipment, and the heat from gaming balls rubbing against each other as they roll within the gaming island.

Even if a cheater inserts a thin cheating tool such as a wire, the cheating tool's direction of travel can be changed by abutting against the top, right, bottom, or left side of the game control board box cover member 431. Even if the cheating tool changes direction and heads toward the cover body surface, multiple air vents (vent holes) that are through-holes may be formed in safe areas, excluding the first seal affixing area 431b and the second seal affixing area 431e, where it is not expected to come into contact with the cover body surface. In this way, air heated inside the game control board box 430 by the heat generated by the operation of the main control board 80, which is the game control board, can escape to the outside of the game control board box 430 via the multiple air vents (vent holes).

When the gaming board 2 is mounted on the inner frame 52 and the gaming control board box 430 is attached to the gaming board 2, as described above, the top, right side, bottom, and left side of the gaming control board box cover member 431 do not have any slits like the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450. Furthermore, as described above, iron powder and accumulated dust that have fallen onto the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 may fall through (or pass) the cutout portion 405a formed in the tank rail 405 due to vibrations from the rolling gaming balls and vibrations caused by the operation of movable bodies such as the gaming board 2. In other words, even if iron powder or accumulated dust on the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 falls through the cutout 405a, because there are no slits on the top surface of the game control board box cover member 431, it can be received by the top surface of the game control board box cover member 431, preventing the falling iron powder or dust from entering the game control board box 430.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island, which is equipped with various devices. When the gaming island is powered on, some of the devices move within the gaming island, creating an environment in which dust and dirt (dust) are floating around. Even if dust flies around within the gaming island, the gaming control board box cover member 431 does not have slits on its top, right, bottom, or left side. Furthermore, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the gaming control board box 430 is attached to the gaming board 2, the cover body surface opposite the opening formed in the gaming control board box cover member 431, as viewed from the rear of the gaming machine 1, does not have any ventilation holes or elongated holes like those in the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450. This prevents dust from entering the gaming island into the gaming control board box 430.

The main control board 80, which will be described in detail later, is a board on which DIP (short for Dual Inline Package) type electronic components and lead-type electronic components, whose lead wires are inserted into through holes and soldered, are mounted.

Of the effect control board box 420 and the game control board box 430 attached to the gaming board 2, the colorless and transparent first sticker attached to the first sticker attachment area 431b formed on the game control board box cover member 431 of the game control board box 430 has a rating indication (e.g., "Voltage AC 24V ± 2V," "Fuse 15A") printed on it. This allows the rating required for safe operation of the gaming machine 1 to be known at a glance, among the effect control board box 420 and the game control board box 430 attached to the gaming board 2.

The main control board 80 has multiple through-holes formed therein, and multiple through-holes are filled with solder. By filling the through-holes with solder, dust is prevented from accumulating within the through-holes, and moisture from accumulating in the accumulated dust prevents corrosion of the inner walls of the through-holes, thereby minimizing damage to the through-holes. This point will be explained in more detail later.

[Arrangement of tank rails, performance control board box, and power board box]
Next, we will explain the relative positions of the tank rail 405 attached to the rear side of the inner frame 52, the performance control board box 420 attached to the rear side of the game board 2 when the game board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, and the power supply board box 450 attached to the rear side of the inner frame 52.

As described above, the tank rail 405 is positioned below the ball tank 400 when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear, and is attached to the rear of the inner frame 52 with a downward slope from left to right. A number of horizontally elongated cutouts 405a are formed on the lower front side of the tank rail 405 (the rear side when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the front). Although the tank rail 405 is positioned below the ball tank 400, it is positioned above the inner frame 52.

As described above, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the effect control board box 420 is attached to the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2, the effect control board box 420 is positioned below the tank rail 405 attached to the inner frame 52 when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear.

As described above, when the gaming board 2 is mounted on the inner frame 52 and attached to the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2, the power supply board box 450 is positioned below the gaming board 2 and prize ball payout device 120, and is positioned below the inner frame 52, when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear.

When the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, when the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the rear, the tank rail 405, performance control board box 420, and power supply board box 450 are arranged from the top to the bottom of the inner frame 52.

The game control board box 430 is attached to the rear of the game board 2 below the presentation control board box 420, and the payout control board box 440 is located behind the inner frame 52 below the game board 2, aligned left-to-right with the power supply board box 450 (so that the top surface of the payout control board box cover member 441 of the payout control board box 440 and the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450 are flush (on the same plane)). Therefore, when the game board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear, the tank rail 405, presentation control board box 420, game control board box 430, payout control board box 440, and power supply board box 450 are arranged from the top to the bottom of the inner frame 52.

When the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the effect control board box 420 is attached to the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2, the upper surface of the effect control board box cover member 421 does not have any slits like the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450, as described above. When the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, the effect control board box 420 is positioned below the tank rail 405 attached to the inner frame 52. Therefore, even if iron powder or accumulated dust falls onto the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 due to vibrations from the rolling gaming ball or vibrations caused by the operation of movable bodies such as the gaming board 2 and falls through the cutout portion 405a formed in the tank rail 405, the iron powder or dust is received by the upper surface of the effect control board box 420, preventing the iron powder or dust from entering the effect control board box 420.

In addition, iron powder and dust that fall through the cutout portion 405a and cannot be received on the top side of the presentation control board box 420 are spread from the air-cooled fan accommodating portion 421a of the presentation control board box 420 to the rear area of the gaming machine 1 by the wind blown out from the air-cooled fan 172 inside the presentation control board box 420, thereby preventing iron powder and dust from entering the presentation control board box 420. In this embodiment, as described above, the fan of the air-cooled fan 172 rotates at high speed, and as a result, the air inside the presentation control board box 420 is forced to be expelled outside the presentation control board box 420 (to the outside air) through the ventilation opening 421aa (i.e., the air inside the presentation control board box 420 is forced to be expelled to the rear (rearward) of the gaming machine 1 through the ventilation opening 421aa), causing fallen iron powder and dust to spread from the air-cooled fan accommodating section 421a of the presentation control board box 420 to the area around the rear (rearward) of the gaming machine 1, thereby preventing iron powder and dust from entering the presentation control board box 420. Instead, by rotating the air-cooled fan 172 at high speed, air is taken in from outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the ventilation opening 421aa (that is, air is taken in from outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the ventilation opening 421aa by the air flow that is sucked toward the front (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1), and the air is forcibly taken in from outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the plurality of ventilation holes (ventilation holes) 421c that are through-holes. The flow of air expelled to the effect control board box 420 (that is, the flow of air in the effect control board box 420 is forcibly expelled to the rear (rear direction) of the gaming machine 1 via (passing through) the plurality of vent holes (vent holes) 421c which are through-holes)) may cause fallen iron powder and dust to spread from the effect control board box cover member 421 of the effect control board box 420 to the periphery behind (rear direction) of the gaming machine 1, thereby preventing the iron powder and dust from entering the effect control board box 420. This is because the high-speed rotation of the air-cooled fan 172 causes air to be sucked from outside (outside air) of the effect control board box 420 towards the front of the gaming machine 1 via (passing through) the ventilation openings 421aa, so that even if fallen iron powder and dust are made to flow towards the front (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, most of the fallen iron powder and dust will collide with the fan of the air-cooled fan 172 and be thrown towards the rear (rear direction) of the gaming machine 1. This prevents iron powder and dust from entering the effect control board box 420. Even if the falling iron powder or dust does not collide with the air-cooling fan 172 and is not thrown backward (rearward) from the gaming machine 1, it will adhere to the heat sink 92a (even if iron powder or dust falls from the heat sink 92a, it will be received by the underside of the effect control board box cover member 421 of the effect control board box 420). Therefore, it will not adhere to the image control board 100 or the sub-control board 90, which is the effect control board, housed within the effect control board box 420.

Furthermore, the air inside the presentation control board box 420 is blown out from the air-cooled fan 172, and the wind spreads from the air-cooled fan accommodating section 421a of the presentation control board box 420 to the rear periphery of the gaming machine 1, thereby preventing iron powder and dust from entering the power supply board box 450 through (passing through) the slit 451a formed on the top side of the power supply board box cover member 451. In this embodiment, as described above, the air-cooled fan 172 rotates at high speed, and as a result, the air inside the presentation control board box 420 is forcibly expelled (through) the ventilation hole 421aa to the outside of the presentation control board box 420 (to the outside air) (i.e., the air inside the presentation control board box 420 is forcibly expelled (through) the ventilation hole 421aa to the rear (rearward direction) of the gaming machine 1), causing fallen iron powder and dust to spread from the air-cooled fan accommodating section 421a of the presentation control board box 420 to the surrounding area behind (rearward direction) of the gaming machine 1, thereby preventing iron powder and dust from entering the power supply board box 450 through (through) the slit 451a formed on the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451. Instead, by rotating the air-cooled fan 172 at high speed, air is taken in from outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the ventilation opening 421aa (that is, air is taken in from outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the ventilation opening 421aa by the flow of air that is sucked in towards the front (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1), and the air is forcibly expelled to the outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the plurality of ventilation holes (ventilation holes) 421c that are through-holes (that is, Due to the air flow in which the air inside the output control board box 420 is forcibly expelled to the rear (rear direction) of the gaming machine 1 via (passing through) the multiple ventilation holes (vent holes) 421c, which are through-holes, the fallen iron powder and dust spreads from the effect control board box cover member 421 of the effect control board box 420 to the surrounding area to the rear (rear direction) of the gaming machine 1, thereby preventing the entry of iron powder and dust into the power supply board box 450 via (passing through) the slits 451a formed on the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island, which is equipped with various devices. When the gaming island is powered on, some of the devices move within the gaming island, creating an environment in which dust and dirt (dust) are floating around. In this embodiment, even if dust is floating around within the gaming island, it is caught on the top side of the effect control board box 420, preventing the dust from entering the effect control board box 420. Furthermore, the air blown out of the effect control board box 420 by the air from the air-cooling fan 172 blows the dust from the air-cooling fan housing portion 421a of the effect control board box 420 to the area around the rear of the gaming machine 1, preventing the dust from entering the effect control board box 420. Furthermore, the dust can be prevented from entering the power supply board box 450 through the slit 451a formed on the top side of the power supply board box cover member 451. In this embodiment, as described above, the air flow of the air cooling fan 172 causes the air inside the presentation control board box 420 to be forcibly expelled (through) the ventilation opening 421aa to the outside of the presentation control board box 420 (to the outside air) (i.e., the air inside the presentation control board box 420 to be forcibly expelled (through) the ventilation opening 421aa to the rear (rearward direction) of the gaming machine 1), which causes fallen iron powder and dust to spread from the air cooling fan accommodating section 421a of the presentation control board box 420 to the area around the rear of the gaming machine 1, thereby preventing dust from entering the presentation control board box 420 and also preventing dust from entering the power supply board box 450 through the slit 451a formed on the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451. Instead, by rotating the air-cooled fan 172 at high speed, air is taken in from outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the ventilation opening 421aa (that is, air is taken in from outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the ventilation opening 421aa by the flow of air that is sucked in towards the front (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1), and the air is forcibly expelled to the outside (outside air) of the performance control board box 420 via (passing through) the plurality of ventilation holes (ventilation holes) 421c that are through-holes (that is, the air inside the performance control board box 420 Due to the air flow in which air is forcibly expelled to the rear (rear direction) of the gaming machine 1 through (passing through) the multiple ventilation holes (vent holes) 421c which are through-holes, the fallen iron powder and dust spreads from the cover member 421 for the performance control board box 420 to the surrounding area at the rear of the gaming machine 1, thereby preventing dust from entering the performance control board box 420, and it is also possible to prevent dust from entering the power supply board box 450 through (passing through) the slit 451a formed on the top surface side of the cover member 451 for the power supply board box. This is because, when the air-cooled fan 172 rotates at high speed, air is sucked in from outside (outside air) of the effect control board box 420 through the ventilation opening 421aa toward the front (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, so even if fallen iron powder and dust are blown toward the front (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, most of the fallen iron powder and dust will collide with the fan of the air-cooled fan 172 and be blown away toward the rear (rear direction) of the gaming machine 1. This makes it possible to prevent iron powder and dust from entering the effect control board box 420. Even if the falling iron powder or dust does not collide with the air-cooled fan 172 and is not blown backward (rearward) from the gaming machine 1, it will still adhere to the heat sink 92a (even if iron powder or dust falls from the heat sink 92a, it will be received by the underside of the performance control board box cover member 421 of the performance control board box 420), and will not adhere to the image control board 100 or the sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board, housed within the performance control board box 420 in the first place.

The power supply board 165, which will be described in detail later, is a mixed-mount board that combines DIP (short for Dual Inline Package) type electronic components and lead-type electronic components, whose lead wires are inserted into through-holes and soldered, with SMD (short for Surface Mount Device) type electronic components, whose leads are soldered to the mounting surface without being inserted into through-holes.

Because SMD-type electronic components are miniaturized, the lead spacing (terminal spacing) is shorter than that of DIP-type electronic components. Therefore, if iron powder or accumulated dust on the downward-sloping rail of the tank rail 405 falls through the cutout 405a, the falling iron powder or dust may enter the power supply board box 450 through the slit 451a formed on the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451 and come into contact with the SMD-type electronic components, potentially causing a short circuit, so measures are required.

In this embodiment, the air blown out from the air-cooled fan 172 inside the effect control board box 420 causes falling iron powder and dust to spread from the air-cooled fan housing 421a of the effect control board box 420 to the rear of the gaming machine 1, thereby preventing the iron powder and dust from entering the power supply board box 450 through the slit 451a formed on the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451. This prevents iron powder and accumulated dust on the downward sloping rail of the tank rail 405 from coming into contact with SMD-type electronic components, preventing short circuits.

Iron powder and accumulated dust that have fallen onto the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 may fall through the cutouts 405a formed in the tank rail 405 due to the vibrations of rolling game balls and the vibrations caused by the operation of moving objects such as the game board 2. The game island is also in an environment where dust and dirt are floating around due to moving equipment and other factors within the game island. Iron powder and dust that have fallen through the cutouts 405a, as well as dust and dirt floating around within the game island, may enter the power supply board box 450 through the multiple slits 451a formed on the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450 and adhere to the power supply board 12. When iron powder and dust adhere to and accumulate on the power supply board 162 through (passing through) the slits 451a, electrical malfunctions caused by the accumulated dust can occur on the power supply board 162 (for example, in addition to short circuits, if dust accumulates in a through-hole, moisture can collect in the accumulated dust and corrode the inner wall of the through-hole, causing an electrical disconnection), which can result in the gaming machine 1 being unable to operate.

In this embodiment, the air inside the performance control board box 420 blown out by the air-cooling fan 172 blows away any iron powder or dust that falls onto the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450 toward the rear of the gaming machine 1, preventing the iron powder or dust from entering the power supply board box 450 through the slits 451a formed on the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451. This makes it possible to suppress electrical malfunctions in the power supply board 162 caused by accumulated iron powder and dust.

[Board box sealing mechanism]
Here, we will briefly explain the sealing mechanisms of board boxes such as the game control board box 430, the payout control board box 440, the performance control board box 420, and the power supply board box 450.

As described above, the gaming control board box 430 is composed of a gaming control board box cover member 431 having an opening, and a gaming control board box base member 432 that closes the opening of the gaming control board box cover member 431. The gaming control board box 430 is provided with a sealing mechanism composed of a sealing protrusion formed on the gaming control board box cover member 431 and a sealing protrusion formed on the gaming control board box base member 432. In order to make the mounting surface (the surface on which the game control microcomputer 81 is mounted) of the main control board 80, which is the game control board, visible through (or through) the game control board box cover member 431, the main control board 80 is housed and attached in the game control board box cover member 431 with the mounting surface (the surface on which the game control microcomputer 81 is mounted) of the main control board 80, which is the game control board, facing from the opening of the game control board box cover member 431 to the internal space of the game control board box cover member 431, and then the opening of the game control board box cover member 431 is closed with the game control board box base member 432 to align the game control board box cover member 431 and the game control board box base member 432. This aligns the sealing protrusion formed on the game control board box cover member 431 with the sealing protrusion formed on the game control board box base member 432. By passing a one-way screw, which serves as a sealing screw, from the sealing protrusion formed on the game control board box cover member 431 to the sealing protrusion formed on the game control board box base member 432 and then crimping, the game control board box cover member 431 and the game control board box base member 432 can be joined together to seal the game control board box 430.

By destroying the sealing mechanism using a cutting tool such as nippers, the joined state between the gaming control board box cover member 431 and the gaming control board box base member 432 can be released. In other words, if the gaming control board box 430 is opened, the sealing mechanism is destroyed, leaving traces of opening on the gaming control board box 430. By destroying the sealing mechanism, the joined state between the gaming control board box cover member 431 and the gaming control board box base member 432 can be released, and after removing the gaming control board box base member 432 from the gaming control board box cover member 431, the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, can be removed from the gaming control board box cover member 431. Multiple such sealing mechanisms are provided on the gaming control board box 430.

As described above, the dispensing control board box 440 is composed of a dispensing control board box cover member 441 having an opening, and a dispensing control board box base member 442 that covers the opening of the dispensing control board box cover member 441. The dispensing control board box 440 is provided with a sealing mechanism composed of a sealing protrusion formed on the dispensing control board box cover member 441 and a sealing protrusion formed on the dispensing control board box base member 442. In order to make the mounting surface of the dispensing control board 110 (the surface on which the dispensing control microcomputer 109 is mounted) visible through the cover member 441 for the dispensing control board box, the dispensing control board 110 is housed and attached in the cover member 441 for the dispensing control board box with the mounting surface of the dispensing control board 110 (the surface on which the dispensing control microcomputer 109 is mounted) facing from the opening of the cover member 441 to the internal space of the cover member 441 for the dispensing control board box, and then the opening of the cover member 441 for the dispensing control board box is closed with the base member 442 for the dispensing control board box to align the cover member 441 for the dispensing control board box and the base member 442 for the dispensing control board box. This aligns the sealing protrusion formed on the cover member 441 for the dispensing control board box with the sealing protrusion formed on the base member 442 for the dispensing control board box, and by passing a one-way screw, which serves as a sealing screw, from the sealing protrusion formed on the cover member 441 for the dispensing control board box to the sealing protrusion formed on the base member 442 for the dispensing control board box and then crimping it, the cover member 441 for the dispensing control board box and the base member 442 for the dispensing control board box can be joined to seal the dispensing control board box 440.

By destroying the sealing mechanism using a cutting tool such as nippers, the joined state between the dispensing control board box cover member 441 and the dispensing control board box base member 442 can be released. In other words, when the dispensing control board box 440 is opened, the sealing mechanism is destroyed, leaving traces of opening on the dispensing control board box 440. By destroying the sealing mechanism, the joined state between the dispensing control board box cover member 441 and the dispensing control board box base member 442 can be released, and the dispensing control board box base member 442 can be removed from the dispensing control board box cover member 441, and then the dispensing control board 110 can be removed from the dispensing control board box cover member 441. Multiple such sealing mechanisms are provided on the dispensing control board box 440.

As described above, the performance control board box 420 is composed of a performance control board box cover member 421 with an opening, and a performance control board box base member 422 that closes the opening of the performance control board box cover member 421. The performance control board box 420 is provided with a sealing mechanism composed of a sealing protrusion formed on the performance control board box cover member 421 and a sealing protrusion formed on the performance control board box base member 422. The MPU mounting surfaces of the image control board 100 and the sub-control board 90, which is a performance control board, (the surface on which the image control microcomputer 101 is mounted in the image control board 100, and the surface on which the performance control microcomputer 91 is mounted in the sub-control board 90) are visible through (passing) the performance control board box cover member 421, and the MPU mounting surfaces of the image control board 100 and the sub-control board 90, which is a performance control board, (the surface on which the image control microcomputer 101 is mounted in the image control board 100, and the surface on which the performance control microcomputer 91 is mounted in the sub-control board 90) are visible through (passing) the performance control board box cover member 421. The image control board 100 and the sub-control board 90, which is a performance control board, are housed and attached in the cover member 421 for the performance control board box with the side on which the image control microcomputer 101 is mounted in the image control board 100 and the side on which the performance control microcomputer 91 is mounted in the sub-control board 90 facing each other, and then the opening of the cover member 421 for the performance control board box is closed with the base member 422 for the performance control board box to align the cover member 421 for the performance control board box and the base member 422 for the performance control board box. This aligns the sealing protrusion formed on the cover member 421 for the performance control board box with the sealing protrusion formed on the base member 422 for the performance control board box, and by passing a one-way screw, which serves as a sealing screw, from the sealing protrusion formed on the cover member 421 for the performance control board box to the sealing protrusion formed on the base member 422 for the performance control board box and then crimping, the cover member 421 for the performance control board box and the base member 422 for the performance control board box are joined, making it possible to seal the performance control board box 420.

By destroying the sealing mechanism using a cutting tool such as nippers, the connection between the performance control board box cover member 421 and the performance control board box base member 422 can be released. In other words, if the performance control board box 420 is opened, the sealing mechanism is destroyed, leaving traces of the opening on the performance control board box 420. By destroying the sealing mechanism, the connection between the performance control board box cover member 421 and the performance control board box base member 422 can be released, and the performance control board box base member 422 can be removed from the performance control board box cover member 421. After that, the image control board 100 and the sub-control board 90, which is a performance control board, can be removed from the performance control board box cover member 421. Only one such sealing mechanism is provided in the performance control board box 420. Note that multiple sealing mechanisms may be provided in the performance control board box 420. Additionally, while the image control board 100 and the sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board, were previously designed to be attached to the internal space of the performance control board box cover member 421, they may instead be attached to the performance control board box base member 422. In this case, after the image control board 100 and the sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board, are attached to the performance control board box base member 422, the opening of the performance control board box cover member 421 is closed with the performance control board box base member 422 to align the performance control board box cover member 421 and the performance control board box base member 422.

As described above, the power supply board box 450 is composed of a power supply board box cover member 451 having an opening, and a power supply board box base member 452 that covers the opening of the power supply board box cover member 451. However, the power supply board box 450 does not have the sealing mechanism provided in the game control board box 430, payout control board box 440, and performance control board box 420. In other words, the power supply board 162 is mounted in the power supply board box cover member 451 with its mounting surface (the surface on which various electronic components are mounted) facing toward the internal space of the power supply board box cover member 451 through the opening of the power supply board box cover member 451 so that the mounting surface of the power supply board 162 (the surface on which various electronic components are mounted) can be seen through the power supply board box cover member 451. The opening of the power supply board box cover member 451 is then closed with the power supply board box base member 452 to align the power supply board box cover member 451 and the power supply board box base member 452. Then, screws are threaded from the performance control board box base member 422 to the performance control board box cover member 421, joining the power supply board box cover member 451 and the power supply board box base member 452.

This is because the power supply board 162 is equipped with a glass tube fuse, but does not have a sealing mechanism so that if an overcurrent flows and the glass tube fuse blows, it can be replaced with a new one.

As mentioned above, the power supply board box 450 does not have a sealing mechanism. Therefore, simply by loosening the screws, the power supply board box base member 452 can be removed from the power supply board box cover member 451, and then the power supply board 162 can be removed from the power supply board box cover member 451. The power supply board box 450 may also be provided with a sealing mechanism identical to the sealing mechanisms provided on the game control board box 430, payout control board box 440, and performance control board box 420. While the power supply board 162 was previously attached to the internal space of the power supply board box cover member 451, it may instead be attached to the power supply board box base member 452. In this case, after attaching the power supply board 162 to the power supply board box base member 452, the opening of the power supply board box cover member 451 is blocked with the power supply board box base member 452 to align the power supply board box cover member 451 and the power supply board box base member 452.

Thus, the game control board box 430, payout control board box 440, and presentation control board box 420 are equipped with sealing mechanisms, while the power supply board box 450 is not. The sealing mechanisms are designed to leave evidence of opening on the board box when they are destroyed if the board box is opened. As mentioned above, the rear of the gaming machine 1 is subject to vibrations from rolling game balls and vibrations from the operation of moving objects such as the gaming board 2, which can cause iron powder and accumulated dust that have fallen onto the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 to fall through the cutout 405a formed in the tank rail 405. Furthermore, the gaming machine is in an environment where dust and dirt (dirt) are stirred up within the gaming island by moving equipment and other components. However, even in such an environment, the sealing mechanism leaves evidence of opening on the board box, and the sealing mechanism cannot be destroyed every time the board is cleaned. For this reason, even if iron powder or dust gets into the game control board box 430, payout control board box 440, or presentation control board box 420, it is difficult to clean the various boards, and it is important to prevent iron powder and dust from getting into the game control board box 430, payout control board box 440, and presentation control board box 420. This is because if electrical malfunctions caused by iron powder or dust occur in the game control board box 430, payout control board box 440, or presentation control board box 420 (for example, in addition to short circuits, if dust accumulates in a through-hole, moisture may collect in the accumulated dust and corrode the inner wall of the through-hole, causing an electrical disconnection), the game machine 1 cannot be operated.

As mentioned above, the power supply board 162 is an important board that generates and supplies the various DC power supplies required for the gaming machine 1 from the 24V AC power supplied from the gaming island, and generating various DC power supplies generates heat. Therefore, in this embodiment, the power supply board box 450 has multiple rectangular slits 451a that are long in the front-to-rear direction and arranged in a row in the left-to-right direction at a predetermined interval (e.g., 15 mm) on the upper and lower sides of the power supply board box cover member 451 so that the air inside the power supply board box 450 can escape to the air outside the power supply board box 450. The power supply board 162 is also equipped with a glass tube fuse, and although it does not have the sealing mechanism provided in the game control board box 430, payout control board box 440, and performance control board box 420 so that it can be replaced with a new glass tube fuse if an overcurrent flows and the glass tube fuse blows, it is important to prevent iron powder and dust from entering the power supply board box 450 through the multiple slits 451a formed on the top surface of the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450. This is because if an electrical malfunction caused by iron powder or dust occurs in the power supply board 162 (for example, in addition to short circuits, if dust accumulates in a through-hole, moisture may collect in the accumulated dust and corrode the inner wall of the through-hole, causing an electrical disconnection), the gaming machine 1 may not be able to operate.

The following provides a detailed explanation of the technical concepts behind the various components placed on the rear side of the inner frame and the various components placed on the rear side of the game board attached to the inner frame.

[Technical philosophy 1]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
A power supply board box (450) that houses a power supply board (162) attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board;
a game control board box (430) attached to the rear side of the game board and accommodating a game control board (80) on which a game control microprocessor (81) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted;
a presentation control board box (420) that is attached to the rear side of the game board at a position different from the game control board box and that houses a presentation control board (90) on which a presentation control microprocessor (91) capable of controlling the progress of presentations based on commands from the game control board is implemented;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
The performance control board box is
A first cover member (421);
a first base member (422) that closes the opening of the first cover member;
It consists of
An air-cooling fan (172) is attached to the first cover member to circulate air in the performance control board box in a front-to-rear direction when the performance control board box is attached to the rear side of the game board,
The power supply board box includes:
A second cover member (451);
a second base member (452) that closes the opening of the second cover member;
It consists of
When the power supply board box is attached to the rear side of the inner frame, a plurality of slits (451 a) are formed on the upper surface of the second cover member and arranged in a row at predetermined intervals,
The air in the performance control board box that is blown in the front-to-back direction by the air-cooling fan blows dust falling toward the upper side of the power supply board box in the front-to-back direction of the gaming machine, thereby preventing the dust from entering the power supply board box through the multiple slits.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed that have multiple slits in components to dissipate heat from the control device (for example, JP 2023-124739 A). However, dust floating around in the game island can enter the power supply board box through the slits and adhere to the power supply board, causing electrical malfunctions. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 1 above, the air inside the performance control board box, blown out by the air-cooling fan, blows dust that falls to the top of the power supply board box toward the rear of the gaming machine, preventing the dust from entering the power supply board box through the slits, thereby suppressing electrical malfunctions caused by dust in the power supply board.

[Technical philosophy 2]
A heat sink (92a) for dissipating heat from the performance control microprocessor is attached to the upper surface of the performance control microprocessor in close contact with the upper surface via grease.
An air-cooled fan (172) is attached to the first cover member at a position corresponding to the heat sink when the performance control board is housed in the performance control board box, and the air inside the performance control board box is expelled to the outside air by the air-cooled fan, which cools the heat sink and cools the performance control microprocessor.

In the past, gaming machines have been proposed that have multiple slits in components to dissipate heat from the control device (for example, JP 2023-124739 A). However, in addition to the problem of the control device generating heat, dust floating around in the game island could enter the power supply board box through the slits and adhere to the power supply board, causing electrical malfunctions. In contrast, Technical Concept 2 above allows the air-cooled fan to simultaneously cool the performance control microprocessor and prevent dust from entering the power supply board box.

[Technical philosophy 3]
Of the game control board box and the performance control board box attached to the rear side of the game board, a sticker including a rating display is affixed only to the game control board box,
Of the payout control board box and the power supply board box, which are attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board, only the power supply board box has a sticker including the rating display affixed to it.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed that provide noise countermeasures by connecting the control board to the grounding part connected to the power supply, thereby preventing the effects of noise from reaching the control board (for example, JP 2017-221609 A). However, even if the location of the power supply is known, it is difficult to know where the ratings for safe operation of the gaming machine are displayed. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 3 above, a sticker indicating the rating is affixed to one of the board boxes attached to the gaming board, and a sticker indicating the rating is affixed to one of the board boxes attached to the inner frame, so that the ratings for safe operation of the gaming machine can be determined at a glance by looking at the board box attached to the gaming board or the inner frame.

[Technical philosophy 4]
When the performance control board box is attached to the rear side of the game board, no slit is formed on the upper surface of the first cover member,
A plurality of through holes are formed in the performance control board, and the plurality of through holes are not filled with solder,
A plurality of through holes are formed in the power supply substrate, and the plurality of through holes are further filled with solder.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed that have multiple slits in components to dissipate heat from the control device (for example, JP 2023-124739 A). However, when dust accumulates in the multiple through-holes formed in the control device's board, moisture accumulates in the accumulated dust, corroding the inner walls of the through-holes. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 4 above, by filling the through-holes with solder, dust is prevented from accumulating in the through-holes, and moisture accumulation in the accumulated dust is prevented from corroding the inner walls of the through-holes, thereby suppressing damage to the through-holes. Furthermore, because there are no slits at all on the upper side of the effect control board box, even if dust is floating around inside the game island, it cannot enter the effect control board box from above. This eliminates the need to fill the multiple through-holes formed in the effect control board with solder, reducing the amount of solder used and contributing to reducing the production costs of the effect control board.

[Routing of various wiring]
Next, the routing of the various wires will be explained with reference to Figure 83. The various connectors of the power supply board 162 are mounted and arranged above the mounting surface of the power supply board 162. The various connectors of the payout control board 110 are mounted and arranged above the mounting surface of the payout control board 110. The various connectors of the sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board, are mounted and arranged below the MPU mounting surface of the sub-control board 90. The various connectors of the main control board 80, which is the game control board, are mounted and arranged below the mounting surface of the main control board 80.

As described above, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2 is attached, the power supply board box 450 that houses the power supply board 162 is positioned below the gaming board 2 and the prize ball payout device 120, and is positioned below the inner frame 52, when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the payout control board box 440 that houses the payout control board 110 is attached to the image display device 7 of the gaming board 2, the payout control board box 440 is located below the gaming board 2 when viewed from the rear of the gaming machine 1, and is located to the left of the power supply board box 450, and is located below the inner frame 52 in a line with the power supply board box 450.

As described above, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the gaming control board box 430 is attached to the rear of the gaming board 2, it is positioned above the payout control board box 440 and power supply board box 450, which are attached in a row on the lower side of the inner frame 52, when viewed from the rear of the gaming machine 1.

When the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, as viewed from the rear of the gaming machine 1, the first harness 460, which is the first electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, and the sub-control board 90, which is the presentation control board, is routed along multiple consecutive surfaces, namely the bottom, left side, and top side, of the left side, top, right side, and bottom side of the gaming control board box cover member 431 of the gaming control board box 430.

In addition, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, when the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the rear, a second harness 461, which is a second electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, and the payout control board 110, is routed along one of the left side, top, right side, and bottom sides of the gaming control board box cover member 431 of the gaming control board box 430, namely the bottom side.

When the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear, the gaming control microprocessor, the gaming control microcomputer 81, is located in the upper right corner of the center of the surface (mounting surface) on which various electronic components such as the gaming control microcomputer 81 are mounted.

In addition, when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear, the payout control microprocessor, the payout control microcomputer 109, is located in the lower left center of the surface (mounting surface) on which various electronic components such as the payout control microcomputer 109 are mounted.

As a result, the game control microcomputer 81 is mounted on the game control board so that it is positioned away from the first harness 460, which is the first electrical wiring, and the second harness 461, which is the second electrical wiring, and is also positioned away from the power supply board 162. The payout control microcomputer 109 is mounted on the payout control board 110 so that it is positioned away from the first harness 460, which is the first electrical wiring, and the second harness 461, which is the second electrical wiring, and is also positioned away from the power supply board 162.

It is possible to prevent noise from the first electrical wiring, the first harness 460, and the second electrical wiring, the second harness 461, from entering the game control microprocessor, the game control microcomputer 81, and the payout control microprocessor, the payout control microprocessor 109, and it is possible to prevent noise from the power supply board 162 from entering the game control microprocessor, the game control microprocessor 81, and the payout control microprocessor, the payout control microprocessor 109, thereby contributing to the prevention of malfunctions caused by noise in the game control microprocessor, the game control microprocessor 81, and the payout control microprocessor, the payout control microprocessor 109.

As described above, the ball guide unit 410 is attached to the rear of the inner frame 52, from the upper right to the center right when viewed from the rear of the gaming machine 1, and receives gaming balls from the tank rail 405 and guides them to the prize ball payout device 120 located downstream. The prize ball payout device 120 is attached to the rear of the inner frame 52, from the center right to the lower right when viewed from the rear of the gaming machine 1, and pays out gaming balls toward the upper tray 61 of the front frame 53. In this way, the prize ball payout device 120 is attached to the rear of the inner frame 52, on the closed side (i.e., the left side when viewed from the front (front) of the gaming machine 1), which is opposite the open side where the inner frame 52 and outer frame 51 are open.

As described above, the first harness 460, which is the first electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 80, which is the game control board, and the sub-control board 90, which is the presentation control board, is routed along multiple consecutive surfaces, namely the bottom, left side, and top side, of the left side, top, right side, and bottom side of the game control board box cover member 431 of the game control board box 430.

In this way, the first harness 460, which is the first electrical wiring, is not routed along the right side of the game control board box 430, which is closer to the prize ball payout device 120. Although game balls are stored in the prize ball payout device 120, the game balls become charged as they are polished on the game island, and the prize ball payout device 120 may become a source of noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. By not routing the first harness 460, which is the first electrical wiring, along the right side of the game control board box 430, which is closer to the prize ball payout device 120, it is possible to prevent noise due to electrostatic discharge from entering the first harness 460, which contributes to suppressing malfunctions of the game control microprocessor, the game control microcomputer 81, due to the effects of noise due to electrostatic discharge.

In addition, the first harness 461, which is the second electrical wiring, is not routed along the right side of the game control board box 430, which is closer to the prize ball payout device 120. Although game balls are stored in the prize ball payout device 120, the game balls become charged as they are polished on the game island, and the prize ball payout device 120 may become a source of noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. By not routing the second harness 461, which is the second electrical wiring, along the right side of the game control board box 430, which is closer to the prize ball payout device 120, it is possible to prevent noise due to electrostatic discharge from entering the second harness 461, which contributes to suppressing malfunctions of the payout control microprocessor, the payout control microcomputer 109, which is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge.

In this embodiment, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, when the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the rear, the first harness 460, which is the first electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, and the sub control board 90, which is the presentation control board, is routed along multiple consecutive surfaces, namely the bottom, left side and top side, of the left side, top, right side and bottom side of the gaming control board box cover member 431 of the gaming control board box 430. However, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, when looking at the gaming machine 1 from the rear, the connector of the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, may be located near the left side (i.e., located to the left of the mounting surface of the main control board 80), among the left side, top, right side and bottom sides of the cover member 431 for the gaming control board box of the gaming control board box 430, and the first harness 460, which is the first electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, and the sub-control board 90, which is the presentation control board, may be routed along the left side, which is one side, or the first harness 460, which is the first electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, and the sub-control board 90, which is the presentation control board, may be routed along consecutive sides, namely the left side and top. Even with this configuration, by not routing the first electrical wiring, the first harness 460, along the right side of the game control board box 430 closer to the prize ball payout device 120, it is possible to prevent noise caused by electrostatic discharge from entering the first electrical wiring, the first harness 460, and this helps to prevent malfunction of the game control microprocessor, the game control microcomputer 81, due to the effects of noise caused by electrostatic discharge.

In addition, in the embodiment, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, when the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the rear, the second harness 461, which is a second electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, and the payout control board 110, is routed along one of the left side, top, right side and bottom sides of the gaming control board box cover member 431 of the gaming control board box 430, namely the bottom side. However, when the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, when looking at the gaming machine 1 from the rear, the connector of the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, may be positioned near the top surface (i.e., positioned above the mounting surface of the main control board 80) among the left side, top, right side and bottom surfaces of the cover member 431 for the gaming control board box of the gaming control board box 430, and the second harness 461, which is the second electrical wiring that electrically connects the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, and the payout control board 110, may be routed along multiple continuous surfaces, namely the top surface, left side surface and bottom surface. Even with this configuration, by not routing the first harness 461, which is the second electrical wiring, along the right side of the game control board box 430, which is closer to the prize ball payout device 120, it is possible to prevent noise caused by electrostatic discharge from entering the first harness 461, which is the second electrical wiring. This can help to prevent malfunctions of the game control microcomputer 81, which is the game control microprocessor, due to the effects of noise caused by electrostatic discharge, and can also help to prevent malfunctions of the payout control microprocessor, payout control microcomputer 109.

The technical concepts behind the routing of various types of wiring are explained in detail below.

[Technical philosophy 1]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
A power supply board box (450) that houses a power supply board (162) attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board;
a game control board box (430) attached to the rear side of the game board and accommodating a game control board (80) on which a game control microprocessor (81) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted;
a presentation control board box (420) that is attached to the rear side of the game board at a position different from the game control board box and that houses a presentation control board (90) on which a presentation control microprocessor (91) capable of controlling the progress of presentations based on commands from the game control board is implemented;
A payout control board box (440) is attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board at a position different from the power supply board box, and houses a payout control board (110) on which a payout control microprocessor (109) that controls the payout of game balls based on commands from the game control board is implemented;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
A first electrical wiring (first harness 460) electrically connecting the game control board and the performance control board is routed along one or a continuous surface of the left side, upper surface, right side, and lower surface of the game control board box,
A second electrical wiring (second harness 461) electrically connecting the game control board and the payout control board is routed along one or a continuous surface of the left side, upper surface, right side, and lower surface of the game control board box,
The game control microprocessor is mounted on the game control board so as to be disposed at a position spaced apart from the first electrical wiring and the second electrical wiring, and at a position spaced apart from the power supply board;
The dispensing control microprocessor is disposed at a position spaced apart from the first electrical wiring and the second electrical wiring, and is mounted on the dispensing control board so as to be disposed at a position spaced apart from the power supply board.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Gaming machines have been proposed in the past that implement noise countermeasures by connecting the grounding part connected to the power supply to the control board to prevent the effects of noise from reaching the control board (for example, JP 2017-221609 A). However, there is still room for improvement in noise countermeasure technology. In contrast, Technical Concept 1 above can prevent noise from the first electrical wiring and second electrical wiring from invading the game control microprocessor and payout control microprocessor, and can also prevent noise from the power supply board from invading the game control microprocessor and payout control microprocessor, thereby contributing to suppressing malfunctions of the game control microprocessor and payout control microprocessor due to the effects of noise.

[Technical philosophy 2]
A payout device (120) for paying out game balls controlled by a payout control microprocessor is attached to the rear side of the inner frame on the closed side, which is opposite to the side where the inner frame and the outer frame are opened,
The first electrical wiring is not routed along the surface of the game control board box closer to the payout device.

In the past, gaming machines have been proposed that implement noise countermeasures by connecting the control board to an earthing point connected to the power supply, thereby preventing the effects of noise on the control board (for example, JP 2017-221609 A). However, there is still room for improvement in noise countermeasure technology. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 2 above, although gaming balls are stored in the payout device, the gaming balls become charged by being polished on the gaming islands, and the payout device can become a source of noise due to electrostatic discharge from the gaming balls. By not routing the first electrical wiring along the surface of the gaming control board box closer to the payout device, it is possible to prevent noise caused by electrostatic discharge from entering the first electrical wiring, contributing to the prevention of malfunctions of the gaming control microprocessor.

[Boards housed in various board boxes]
Next, the boards housed in each board box will be explained. First, the main control board 80 housed in the game control board box 430 will be explained, followed by the sub-control board 90 and image control board 100 housed in the performance control board box 420, the power supply board 162 housed in the power supply board box 450, and the payout control board 110 housed in the payout control board box 440.

When the gaming board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, as described above, when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the rear, the tank rail 405, performance control board box 420, game control board box 430, payout control board box 440, and power supply board box 450 are arranged from the top to the bottom of the inner frame 52.

[Main control board housed in the game control board box]
First, the main control board 80 housed in the game control board box 430 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 84 to 87. Figure 84 is a schematic diagram (A) of the layout of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board, and a diagram (B) showing the non-mounting surface (solder side) of the main control board. Figure 85 is a schematic diagram of the plan view, cross-section, and bottom view of various through-holes formed in the main control board. Figure 86 is a schematic diagram showing a continuation of Figure 85. Figure 87 is an enlarged view of region A in Figure 84. Note that Figures 84 and 87 omit the wiring pattern and some of the various through-holes for clarity. Also, for clarity, Figures 85 and 86 exaggerate the thickness of the board and the various through-holes compared to the size of the electronic components, and in Figure 86, some of the solder is cut out in the plan view of the through-holes for clarity.

Here, when the gaming control board box 430 is attached to the rear of the gaming board 2 and the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the rear, the front surface of the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board housed in the gaming control board box 430, is the mounting surface 80m on which various electronic components are mounted, as shown in Figure 84(A), while the rear surface, which is the surface opposite the front surface of the main control board 80, is the non-mounting surface 80u on which various electronic components are not mounted and is the soldering surface, as shown in Figure 84(B). The various electronic components are arranged on the mounting surface 80m and non-mounting surface 80u so that they are parallel or perpendicular to the top and bottom edges of the main control board 80. The following explanation will mainly refer to Figures 84(A) and (B).

The mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80 is formed by bonding copper foil, which serves as a conductor layer, to the front surface of the insulating base material 80a, forming a mounting surface-side copper foil 80mc on which a circuit pattern is formed. Green solder resist, which serves as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 80m, is applied to the mounting surface 80m to form the mounting surface-side solder resist 80ms.

The conductor layer on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80 is formed with a mounting surface wiring pattern 80mp and a mounting surface ground 80mg as circuit patterns. Furthermore, although not shown, the conductor layer also includes an area electrically isolated from the area where the mounting surface wiring pattern 80mp and the mounting surface ground 80mg are formed, but not electrically connected to the mounting surface wiring pattern 80mp and the mounting surface ground 80mg. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction at the bottom edge of the mounting surface 80m, the product number of the main control board 80 is formed with mounting surface copper foil 80mc and coated with green mounting surface solder resist 80ms. Because the product number of the main control board 80 is formed with mounting surface copper foil 80mc, like the mounting surface wiring pattern 80mp and the mounting surface ground 80mg, the product number of the main control board 80 is inconspicuous, but can still be visually confirmed. In addition to the product number of the main control board 80, the name of the manufacturer may be printed on the conductor layer on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80.

Ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, therefore, the entire area of the mounting surface 80m, excluding the mounting surface wiring pattern 80mp that electrically connects various signal lines, which is a wide area that is not electrically short-circuited with the mounting surface wiring pattern 80mp, is designated as a mounting surface solid ground 80mg. By widening the ground (GND) using this mounting surface solid ground 80mg, it is possible to reduce impedance.

Although not shown, figures and letters indicating the layout, mounting orientation, and numbers of electronic components are silk-screened and painted in white paint on the front surface of the mounting surface solder resist 80ms. Silk-screen printing can be done by screen printing or inkjet printing. In this embodiment, since there is no need to print detailed figures and letters on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80, screen printing is used as the silk-screen printing method, thereby shortening the printing time. Note that if inkjet printing is used for silk-screen printing, the printing time will be longer than with screen printing.

The non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80 is formed by bonding copper foil, which serves as a conductor layer, to the rear surface of the insulating base material 80a, forming a non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc, on which a circuit pattern is formed. A green solder resist, which serves as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 80u, is applied to the non-mounting surface 80u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 80us.

The conductor layer on the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80 is formed with a non-mounting surface wiring pattern 80up and a non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug as circuit patterns. Furthermore, although not shown, the conductor layer also includes an area electrically isolated from the area where the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 80up and the non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug are formed, but not electrically connected to the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 80up and the non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction on the top edge of the non-mounting surface 80u, the product number of the main control board 80 is formed using non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc, and a green non-mounting surface solder resist 80us is applied. The part number of the main control board 80 is formed in the non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc, just like the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 80up and the non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug, so although the part number of the main control board 80 is not noticeable, it can still be visually confirmed.

In addition, although not shown, the conductor layer includes an area electrically isolated from the area where the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 80up and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug are formed, and is not electrically connected to the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 80up and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction at the bottom edge of the non-mounting surface 80u, the manufacturer's name is written in non-mounting surface side copper foil 80uc and coated with green non-mounting surface side solder resist 80us. Because the manufacturer's name is written in non-mounting surface side copper foil 80uc, just like the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 80up and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug, the manufacturer's name is inconspicuous, but can still be visually confirmed.

As mentioned above, ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, therefore, the entire area of the non-mounting surface 80u, excluding the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 80up that electrically connects various signal lines, which is a wide area that is not electrically short-circuited with the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 80up, is designated as the non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug, and by widening the ground (GND) using this non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug, it is possible to reduce impedance.

Note that the non-mounting surface 80u is a solder surface, and therefore, unlike the mounting surface 80m, it does not have any graphics or letters silk-screened on it indicating the placement, mounting orientation, or component numbers of the electronic components.

On the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80, various ICs are mounted as DIP (abbreviation for Dual Inline Package) type electronic components, including a game control microcomputer 81, which is a game control microprocessor (MPU), and lead-type electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors, capacitors, resistor arrays, resistors, diodes, transistors, and various connectors are mounted.

The main control board 80 has electronic component through holes 80ta (indicated by a circle in the figure) through which the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components and lead wires of various lead-type electronic components are inserted, wiring pattern through holes 80tb (indicated by a circle in the figure) that electrically connect the mounting surface side wiring pattern 80mp formed on the mounting surface 80m and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 80up formed on the non-mounting surface 80u, and a mounting surface side solid ground 80mg formed on the mounting surface 80m and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 80up formed on the non-mounting surface 80u. There are multiple ground through holes 80tc (indicated by a circle in the diagram) that electrically connect the non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug to the printed circuit board, thermal land through holes 80td (indicated by a circle in the diagram) through which the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components are inserted to electrically connect them to ground (GND), and multiple non-through holes 80te (indicated by a circle with an x mark in the diagram) that are used to secure various connectors and as mounting holes for the main control board 80.

The ground through holes 80tc are arranged along the top, right, bottom, and left sides of the main control board 80, and are also arranged in multiple locations in areas where electronic components are not placed and where the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg and non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug are formed, with the holes being arranged in a grid pattern as much as possible. When a grid pattern is not possible, two ground through holes 80tc are arranged as a pair, and when a pair is not possible, a single ground through hole 80tc is arranged, and the holes are arranged over a wide area of the main control board 80. Furthermore, the ground through holes 80tc are filled with solder.

Note that some of the ground through-holes 80tc on the top left side of the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80 and some of the ground through-holes 80tc on the bottom right side (indicated by a ◎ with a cross in the figure) are not filled with solder. This may be because they interfere with the main control board 80 when it is fixed during the manufacturing process, making soldering impossible, or because they are not intentionally soldered for inspection during the inspection process.

In this embodiment, of the multiple ground through holes 80tc formed on the main control board 80, the number of ground through holes 80tc that are filled with solder is greater than the number of ground through holes 80tc that are not filled with solder. Therefore, of the multiple ground through holes 80tc formed on the main control board 80, the ratio of ground through holes 80tc that are filled with solder is higher than the ratio of ground through holes 80tc that are not filled with solder. Of course, all ground through holes 80tc may be filled with solder. Even in this case, the ratio of ground through holes 80tc that are filled with solder is still higher than the ratio of ground through holes 80tc that are not filled with solder.

In addition to the ground through-hole 80tc, the electronic component through-hole 80ta, the wiring pattern through-hole 80tb, and the thermal land through-hole 80td are filled with solder. The non-through-hole 80te is used to secure various connectors and as a mounting hole for the main control board 80, so it is not soldered in the first place.

Even if dust is floating around inside the game island, the electronic component through-holes 80ta, wiring pattern through-holes 80tb, ground through-holes 80tc, and thermal land through-holes 80td on the main control board 80, which is a game control board that is an important board that controls the progress of the game, are filled with solder. This prevents dust from accumulating in the electronic component through-holes 80ta, wiring pattern through-holes 80tb, ground through-holes 80tc, and thermal land through-holes 80td.

When dust accumulates in the electronic component through-holes 80ta, wiring pattern through-holes 80tb, ground through-holes 80tc, and thermal land through-holes 80td, moisture may accumulate in the accumulated dust, corroding the inner walls of the electronic component through-holes 80ta, wiring pattern through-holes 80tb, ground through-holes 80tc, and thermal land through-holes 80td and causing electrical disconnections. Therefore, in this embodiment, the electronic component through-holes 80ta, wiring pattern through-holes 80tb, ground through-holes 80tc, and thermal land through-holes 80td are filled with solder, preventing dust from accumulating in the electronic component through-holes 80ta, wiring pattern through-holes 80tb, ground through-holes 80tc, and thermal land through-holes 80td and reducing damage to the through-holes. This helps prevent electrical malfunctions caused by accumulated dust on the main control board 80, which is the game control board.

The thermal land through holes 80td are intended for inserting lead wires of electronic components that are connected to ground (GND). For this reason, the number of thermal land through holes 80td is fewer than the number of ground through holes 80tc. In other words, on the main control board 80, the ratio of ground through holes 80tc to thermal land through holes 80td is higher. Of course, on the main control board 80, the number of ground through holes 80tc that are filled with solder is greater than the number of thermal land through holes 80td that are filled with solder, and the ratio of ground through holes 80tc that are filled with solder is higher than the number of thermal land through holes 80td that are filled with solder.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of wiring pattern through holes 80tb is fewer than the number of ground through holes 80tc. In other words, on the main control board 80, the ratio of ground through holes 80tc to wiring pattern through holes 80tb is higher. Of course, on the main control board 80, the number of ground through holes 80tc to be filled with solder is greater than the number of wiring pattern through holes 80tb to be filled with solder, and the ratio of ground through holes 80tc to be filled with solder is higher than the ratio of wiring pattern through holes 80tb to be filled with solder.

On the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80, circular mounting surface lands 80mr made of mounting surface copper foil 80mc are formed around the electronic component through holes 80ta, and circular mounting surface lands 80mr made of mounting surface copper foil 80mc are formed around the wiring pattern through holes 80tb, whereas no lands made of mounting surface copper foil 80mc are formed around the non-through holes 80te. Note that "lands" refer to copper foil areas for soldering.

In addition, on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80, circular mounting surface lands 80mr are formed from mounting surface copper foil 80mc around the thermal land through holes 80td, but cuts are made in these mounting surface lands 80mr to provide clearance between the mounting surface ground 80mg and the mounting surface land 80mr. This reduces the area of the mounting surface land 80mr around the thermal land through holes 80td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the mounting surface land 80mr to the mounting surface ground 80mg, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

On the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80, circular non-mounting surface lands 80ur made of non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc are formed around the electronic component through-holes 80ta, and circular non-mounting surface lands 80ur made of non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc are formed around the wiring pattern through-holes 80tb, whereas no lands made of non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc are formed around the non-through-holes 80te.

In addition, on the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80, circular non-mounting surface lands 80ur are formed from non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc around the thermal land through holes 80td, but cuts are made in these non-mounting surface lands 80ur to provide clearance between the non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug and the non-mounting surface lands 80ur. This reduces the area of the non-mounting surface lands 80ur around the thermal land through holes 80td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the non-mounting surface lands 80ur to the non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

The ground through hole 80tc electrically connects the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg formed on the mounting surface 80m with the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug formed on the non-mounting surface 80u. Therefore, on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80, the periphery of the ground through hole 80tc is the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg formed from mounting surface side copper foil 80mc, and a circular area where the mounting surface side solder resist 80ms is not applied is formed around the ground through hole 80tc to form a land-like shape. On the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80, the periphery of the ground through hole 80tc is the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug formed from non-mounting surface side copper foil 80uc, and a circular area where the non-mounting surface side solder resist 80us is not applied is formed around the ground through hole 80tc to form a land-like shape.

As mentioned above, ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, the mounting surface 80m includes a region excluding the mounting surface wiring pattern 80mp that electrically connects various signal lines. The entire wide area that is not electrically shorted to the mounting surface wiring pattern 80mp is designated as a mounting surface solid ground 80mg, and the ground (GND) is widened by this mounting surface solid ground 80mg. The non-mounting surface 80u includes a region excluding the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 80up that electrically connects various signal lines. The entire wide area that is not electrically shorted to the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 80up is designated as a non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug, and the ground (GND) is widened by this mounting surface solid ground 80mg.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg formed on the mounting surface 80m and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug formed on the non-mounting surface 80u are electrically connected by the ground through hole 80tc, thereby further reducing impedance and strengthening the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg formed on the mounting surface 80m and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug formed on the non-mounting surface 80u are electrically connected by ground through holes 80tc, thereby strengthening the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug. Furthermore, the number of thermal land through holes 80td is fewer than the number of ground through holes 80tc, and the ratio of ground through holes 80tc to thermal land through holes 80td is higher. This stabilizes the potential that serves as the reference for the operation of electronic components with lead wires connected to ground (GND), helping to prevent malfunction of electronic components.

The game control microcomputer 81, which is a game control microprocessor (MPU: Micro Processor Unit) that controls the progress of the game, is a DIP-type electronic component and is located to the upper right of the center point where a center line, which is a straight line running vertically through the centers of the top and bottom sides of the main control board 80, which is the game control board, intersects with a center line, which is a straight line running horizontally through the centers of the left and right sides.

A region 81a in which a QR code (registered trademark) is affixed is formed on the surface of the game control microcomputer 81 opposite the surface facing the mounting surface 80m. The QR code (registered trademark) is formed in this region 81a, for example, using a laser marker. Of course, it may also be printed using inkjet printing. The QR code (registered trademark) in region 81a contains, for example, coded information related to the game control microcomputer 81.

In addition, to the upper right of the game control microcomputer 81, although no IC is actually mounted on the mounting surface 80m, there is an SMD (Surface Mount Device) mounting area (area A enclosed in a rectangular shape by a two-dot chain line in the figure) where SMD-type electronic components are mounted.

In other words, the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80, which is the game control board, can be configured to accommodate a mixture of DIP (short for Dual Inline Package) type electronic components and lead-type electronic components, whose lead wires are inserted into through-holes and soldered, and SMD type electronic components, whose leads are soldered to the mounting surface without being inserted into through-holes.

This means that when testing the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board at a specified facility, an inspection connector is required to monitor various signals, and electronic components around the inspection connector (for example, an SMD-type resistor array and an SMD-type capacitor) are also required. However, these electronic components are completely unnecessary for the gaming machine 1 installed in an amusement facility. In other words, although the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, is a mixed-load board, in the actual gaming machine 1 installed in an amusement facility, the inspection connector, which is an SMD-type electronic component, and the SMD-type electronic components around the inspection connector are not mounted on the mounting surface 80m, and the board is instead mounted with DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components whose lead wires are inserted into through-holes and soldered.

On the main control board 80, lead wires for DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components are inserted from the mounting surface 80m through the electronic component through-holes 80ta and thermal land through-holes 80td, protruding from the non-mounting surface 80u. By soldering them on this non-mounting surface 80u, the electronic component through-holes 80ta and thermal land through-holes 80td are filled with solder. This allows DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components to be fixed to the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80.

[Various through holes formed on the main control board]
Here, various through holes formed in the main control board 80, which is the game control board, will be described mainly with reference to Figures 85 and 86. First, through holes for electronic components will be described, followed by through holes for wiring patterns, ground through holes, through holes for thermal lands, and non-through holes.

[Through holes for electronic components]
First, the electronic component through-hole 80ta will be described. As described above, the electronic component through-hole 80ta is used to insert the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components, including the game control microcomputer 81, which is a game control microprocessor (MPU: Micro Processor Unit), as well as the lead wires of various lead-type electronic components. Here, we will explain how the lead wires of resistors, which are various lead-type electronic components, are inserted into the electronic component through-hole 80ta and soldered to be fixed.

As shown in Figure 85(A), the electronic component through-holes 80ta are formed by forming through-holes in the base material 80a of the main control board 80 and copper-plating the through-holes to provide conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects and establishes continuity between the circular mounting surface side lands 80mr formed by removing copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 80mc on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80 and the circular non-mounting surface side lands 80ur formed by removing copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 80uc on the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80 via the electronic component through-holes 80ta.

The mounting surface side land 80mr is formed in a shape that provides a clearance between it and the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg. The non-mounting surface side land 80ur is formed in a shape that provides a clearance between it and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug.

The non-mounting surface side lands 80ur and non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 80up are electrically connected and conductive to the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 80up formed by removing the copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 80uc on the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 80mc, green solder resist, which acts as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 80m, is applied to the mounting surface 80m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 80ms on the mounting surface 80m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 80ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 80u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 80u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 80us on the non-mounting surface 80u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the layout of electronic components, the mounting orientation of electronic components, the layout of electronic component numbers, the mounting orientation of electronic components, and the electronic component numbers is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 80us.

In this embodiment, the lead wires of the resistor, a lead-type electronic component, are inserted from the mounting surface 80m through the electronic component through-holes 80ta, protruding from the non-mounting surface 80u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 80u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface land 80ur through the gap (space) between the resistor's lead wire and the electronic component through-hole 80ta to the mounting surface land 80mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface land 80ur, filling the gap (space) between the resistor's lead wire and the electronic component through-hole 80ta, and allowing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface land 80mr. This results in the resistor's lead wires being sandwiched between the solder in the vertical direction in the figure. By soldering the other lead wires of the resistor, the resistor, a lead-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80.

Here, a resistor has been described as an example of a lead-type electronic component. However, similar to the resistor leads described above, the lead wires of the game control microcomputer 81, which is a DIP-type electronic component known as a game control microprocessor (MPU), are inserted from the mounting surface 80m into the electronic component through-holes 80ta, protruding from the non-mounting surface 80u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 80u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface land 80ur through the gap (space) between the lead wires of the game control microcomputer 81 and the electronic component through-holes 80ta to the mounting surface land 80mr, thereby causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface land 80ur, filling the gap (space) between the lead wires of the game control microcomputer 81 and the electronic component through-holes 80ta, and allowing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface land 80mr. This results in the lead wires of the game control microcomputer 81 being sandwiched vertically with solder. By soldering the other lead wires of the game control microcomputer 81, the game control microcomputer 81, which is a DIP-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80.

[Through holes for wiring patterns]
Next, the wiring pattern through holes 80tb will be described. As described above, the wiring pattern through holes 80tb electrically connect the mounting surface side wiring pattern 80mp formed on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80 and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 80up formed on the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80.

As shown in Figure 85(B), the wiring pattern through holes 80tb are formed by forming through holes in the base material 80a of the main control board 80 and copper plating the through holes to impart conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects and provides conductivity between the circular mounting surface side land 80mr formed by removing copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 80mc on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80 and the circular non-mounting surface side land 80ur formed by removing copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 80uc on the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80 via the wiring pattern through holes 80tb.

The mounting surface side lands 80mr and mounting surface side wiring patterns 80mp are formed in a shape that provides a clearance between them and the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg. The non-mounting surface side lands 80ur and non-mounting surface side wiring patterns 80up are formed in a shape that provides a clearance between them and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug.

The mounting surface side land 80mr is electrically connected and conductive to the mounting surface side wiring pattern 80mp formed by removing the copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 80mc on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80. The non-mounting surface side land 80ur is electrically connected and conductive to the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 80up formed by removing the copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 80uc on the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 80mc, green solder resist, which acts as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 80m, is applied to the mounting surface 80m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 80ms on the mounting surface 80m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 80ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 80u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 80u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 80us on the non-mounting surface 80u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the layout of electronic components, the mounting orientation of electronic components, the layout of electronic component numbers, the mounting orientation of electronic components, and the electronic component numbers is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 80us.

In this embodiment, the wiring pattern through-holes 80tb are soldered on the non-mounting surface 80u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface lands 80ur through the wiring pattern through-holes 80tb to the mounting surface lands 80mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface lands 80ur, filling the wiring pattern through-holes 80tb with solder, and causing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface lands 80mr. As a result, the solder filled in the wiring pattern through-holes 80tb is restricted from moving in the vertical direction in the figure, preventing it from falling out of the wiring pattern through-holes 80tb.

[Ground through hole]
Next, the ground through hole 80tc will be described. As described above, the ground through hole 80tc electrically connects the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg formed on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80 and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug formed on the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80.

As shown in Figure 85(C), the ground through hole 80tc is formed by forming a through hole in the base material 80a of the main control board 80 and copper plating the through hole to make it conductive. This copper plating electrically connects the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg formed on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80 and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 80ug formed on the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80 via the ground through hole 80tc, creating a conductive state.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 80mc, green solder resist, which acts as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 80m, is applied to the mounting surface 80m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 80ms on the mounting surface 80m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 80ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 80u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 80u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 80us on the non-mounting surface 80u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 80us.

In this embodiment, the ground through hole 80tc is soldered on the non-mounting surface 80u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface land 80ur through the ground through hole 80tc to the mounting surface land 80mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface land 80ur, filling the ground through hole 80tc with solder, and causing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface land 80mr. As a result, the solder filled in the ground through hole 80tc is restricted from moving in the vertical direction in the figure, preventing it from falling out of the ground through hole 80tc.

[Through hole for thermal land]
Next, the thermal land through hole 80td will be described. As described above, the thermal land through hole 80td is inserted to electrically connect the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components and lead wires of various lead-type electronic components to ground (GND). Here, we will explain how the lead wires (ground (GND) connection terminals) of ICs as various DIP-type electronic components are inserted into the thermal land through hole 80td and soldered to be fixed.

As shown in Figure 86 (D), the electronic component through-holes 80ta are formed by forming through-holes in the base material 80a of the main control board 80 and copper-plating the through-holes to provide conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects and establishes continuity between the circular mounting surface side lands 80mr formed by removing copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 80mc on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80 and the circular non-mounting surface side lands 80ur formed by removing copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 80uc on the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80 via the electronic component through-holes 80ta.

Although a circular mounting surface side land 80mr is formed around the thermal land through hole 80td using mounting surface side copper foil 80mc, a cut is made in this mounting surface side land 80mr to provide clearance between the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg and the mounting surface side land 80mr. This reduces the area of the mounting surface side land 80mr around the thermal land through hole 80td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the mounting surface side land 80mr to the mounting surface side solid ground 80mg, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

In addition, on the non-mounting surface 80u of the main control board 80, circular non-mounting surface lands 80ur are formed from non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc around the thermal land through holes 80td, but cuts are made in these non-mounting surface lands 80ur to provide clearance between the non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug and the non-mounting surface lands 80ur. This reduces the area of the non-mounting surface lands 80ur around the thermal land through holes 80td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the non-mounting surface lands 80ur to the non-mounting surface solid ground 80ug, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 80mc, green solder resist, which acts as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 80m, is applied to the mounting surface 80m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 80ms on the mounting surface 80m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 80ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 80u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 80u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 80us on the non-mounting surface 80u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 80us.

In this embodiment, the lead wires (ground (GND) connection terminals) of an IC, a DIP-type electronic component, are inserted from the mounting surface 80m through the thermal land through-holes 80td, protruding from the non-mounting surface 80u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 80u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface lands 80ur through the gaps (spaces) between the IC lead wires (ground (GND) connection terminals) and the thermal land through-holes 80td to the mounting surface lands 80mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface lands 80ur, filling the gaps (spaces) between the IC lead wires (ground (GND) connection terminals) and the thermal land through-holes 80td, and allowing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface lands 80mr. As a result, the IC lead wires (ground (GND) connection terminals) are sandwiched between the solder in the vertical direction in the figure. By soldering the other lead wires of the IC, the IC, which is a DIP-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80.

Here, an IC has been described as an example of a DIP-type electronic component, but for example, the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the game control microcomputer 81, which is a game control microprocessor (MPU), which is a DIP-type electronic component, is also inserted from the mounting surface 80m into the thermal land through hole 80td, protruding from the non-mounting surface 80u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 80u, just like the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the IC mentioned above. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface land 80ur through the gap (space) between the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the game control microcomputer 81 and the thermal land through-hole 80td to the mounting surface land 80mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface land 80ur, filling the gap (space) between the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the game control microcomputer 81 and the thermal land through-hole 80td with solder, and allowing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface land 80mr. As a result, the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the game control microcomputer 81 is sandwiched between the solder in the vertical direction. By soldering the other lead wires of the game control microcomputer 81, the game control microcomputer 81, a DIP-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80.

[Non-through hole]
Next, the non-through holes 80te will be described. As described above, the non-through holes 80te are used to secure various connectors and as mounting holes for the main control board 80. Cylindrical protrusions provided on the connectors for positioning purposes are inserted into the non-through holes 80te used to secure various connectors. Cylindrical mounting bosses formed on the game control board box cover member 431 are inserted into the non-through holes 80te used as mounting holes for the main control board 80. When the cylindrical mounting bosses formed on the game control board box cover member 431 are inserted and secured with screws, the main control board 80 is housed within the internal space of the game control board box cover member 431, and the opening of the game control board box cover member 431 is blocked by the game control board box base member 432.

As shown in Figure 86 (E), the non-through holes 80te are formed by forming through holes in the base material 80a of the main control board 80, and the through holes are not copper-plated. In other words, because the base material 80a is an insulator, the non-through holes 80te are electrically insulated from the circuit pattern formed on the mounting surface copper foil 80mc and the circuit pattern formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 80mc, green solder resist, which acts as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 80m, is applied to the mounting surface 80m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 80ms on the mounting surface 80m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 80ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 80uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 80u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 80u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 80us on the non-mounting surface 80u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the layout of electronic components, the mounting orientation of electronic components, the layout of electronic component numbers, the mounting orientation of electronic components, and the electronic component numbers is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 80us.

[Processing of various pads for SMD-type electronic components]
Here, referring to Figure 87, we will explain the SMD (abbreviation for Surface Mount Device) mounting area, which is formed on the upper right of the game control microcomputer 81 and does not actually have an IC mounted on it, but has SMD type electronic components mounted on it.

Testing the main control board 80, which is a gaming control board at a specified facility, requires an inspection connector to monitor various signals, as well as peripheral electronic components for the inspection connector (e.g., SMD-type resistor arrays, SMD-type capacitors). The inspection connector and peripheral electronic components required for this test are surface-mount SMD-type electronic components. As shown in Figure 87, the inspection connector is placed on the corresponding surface-mount connector pad 80mh on the mounting surface, and is soldered to and fixed to the mounting surface 80m. The peripheral electronic components for the inspection connector are placed on the corresponding surface-mount pads 80mi on the mounting surface, and are soldered to and fixed to the mounting surface 80m. Furthermore, the mounting surface side surface mount connector pad 80mh has a mounting surface side silkscreen print 80mk silkscreened in white paint, which displays information such as figures and letters indicating the arrangement of the inspection connector, the mounting orientation of the inspection connector, and the number of the inspection connector. The mounting surface side surface mount pad 80mi has a mounting surface side silkscreen print 80mk silkscreened in white paint, which displays information such as figures and letters indicating the arrangement of the electronic components around the inspection connector, the mounting orientation of the electronic components around the inspection connector, and the numbers of the electronic components around the inspection connector.

However, these electronic components are completely unnecessary for gaming machines 1 installed in amusement parlors. In other words, although the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, is a mixed-load board, in actual gaming machines 1 installed in amusement parlors, the inspection connector, which is an SMD-type electronic component, and the SMD-type electronic components surrounding the inspection connector are not mounted on the mounting surface 80m, and the board is instead mounted with DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components whose lead wires are inserted into through holes and soldered.

In this embodiment, therefore, corrosion prevention treatment is performed on the mounting surface side surface mount connector pads 80mh and the mounting surface side surface mount pads 80mi. The corrosion prevention treatment involves applying molten solder to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pads 80mh and the mounting surface side surface mount pads 80mi, and then blowing off any excess solder. Other corrosion prevention treatments include water-soluble preflux, electroless plating, and electrolytic plating, and a combination of these (for example, a combination of water-soluble preflux and electroless plating) may also be performed.

By applying corrosion prevention treatment to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pads 80mh and mounting surface side surface mount pads 80mi, damage to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pads 80mh and mounting surface side surface mount pads 80mi due to dust and moisture can be reduced.

Note that when the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, is tested at a designated institution, the inspection connector, which is an SMD-type electronic component, and the SMD-type electronic components surrounding the inspection connector are mounted on the mounting surface 80m. However, after the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, is tested at a designated institution and deemed to be compliant, there is no need for external output from the inspection connector in the actual gaming machine 1 installed in the gaming facility. However, it would be time-consuming to modify the program so that processing to output externally from the inspection connector is not performed.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in the actual gaming machine 1 installed in the gaming parlor, the inspection connector and the SMD-type electronic components around the inspection connector are not mounted on the mounting surface 80m. In other words, regardless of whether the inspection connector is soldered to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pad 80mh, which is an electronic component pad, the gaming control microcomputer 81, which is the gaming control microprocessor (MPU), outputs a predetermined signal to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pad 80mh via the mounting surface side wiring pattern 80mp formed on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80, which is the gaming control board, or the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 80up formed on the non-mounting surface 80u (which may also be via the wiring pattern through hole 80tb).

The electronic components soldered to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pads 80mh, which are electronic component pads, are limited to inspection connectors that output specified signals. Therefore, even if the circuit of the mounting surface side surface mount connector pads 80mh, which are electronic component pads of the inspection connector, is tampered with, it is difficult to input any unauthorized signals into the game control microcomputer 81, which is the game control microprocessor (MPU). This does not affect the outcome of the game, and there is no need to modify the game control program depending on whether the inspection connector is soldered to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pads 80mh, which are electronic component pads.

[Sub-control board and image control board housed in the performance control board box]
Next, the sub-control board 90 and image control board 100 housed in the performance control board box 420 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 88 to 92. Figure 88 is a schematic diagram (A) of the layout of various electronic components mounted on the MPU-mounted surfaces of the sub-control board and image control board, and a diagram (B) showing the non-MPU-mounted surfaces of the sub-control board and image control board. Figure 89 is a schematic diagram of the plan view, cross-section, and bottom view of various through-holes formed in the sub-control board and image control board. Figure 90 is a schematic diagram showing a continuation of Figure 89. Figure 91 is an enlarged view of area B in Figure 88, and Figure 92 is an enlarged view of area C in Figure 88. Note that for clarity, Figures 88, 91, and 92 omit the wiring pattern and some of the various through-holes. Also, for clarity, Figures 89 and 90 exaggerate the thickness of the board and the various through-holes compared to the size of the electronic components. Here, we first describe the sub-control board, followed by the image control board.

[Sub-control board]
First, the sub-control board 90, which is the presentation control board, will be described. Here, when the presentation control board box 420 is attached to the rear of the gaming board 2 and the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the rear, the front surface of the sub-control board 90, which is the presentation control board housed in the presentation control board box 420, is an MPU mounting surface 90m on which various electronic components including a presentation control microprocessor (MPU: Micro Processor Unit) presentation control microcomputer 91 (sub-CPU 92, sub-ROM 93, sub-RAM 94) are mounted, as shown in Figure 88(A), while the rear surface, which is the surface opposite the front surface of the sub-control board 90, is an MPU non-mounting surface 90u on which the presentation control microprocessor (MPU) presentation control microcomputer 91 is not mounted and various other electronic components are mounted, as shown in Figure 88(B). Although various electronic components are arranged on the MPU mounting surface 90m and the non-MPU mounting surface 90u so as to be parallel or perpendicular to the upper and lower edges of the sub-control board 90, certain electronic components (resistors and capacitors) on the non-MPU mounting surface 90u are arranged at a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees) with respect to the upper and lower edges. The following description will be made mainly with reference to Figures 88(A) and (B).

The MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90 has copper foil 90mc, which serves as a conductor layer, bonded to the front surface of the insulating base material 90a, forming a circuit pattern on the copper foil. Green solder resist, which serves as an insulating layer to protect the MPU mounting surface 90m, is applied to the MPU mounting surface 90m to form MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms.

The conductor layer on the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90 is formed with circuit patterns, including an MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 90mp and an MPU mounting surface solid ground 90mg. Furthermore, although not shown, the conductor layer also includes an area electrically isolated from the area where the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 90mp and the MPU mounting surface solid ground 90mg are formed, but not electrically connected to the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 90mp and the MPU mounting surface solid ground 90mg. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction at the bottom edge of the MPU mounting surface 90m, the product number of the sub-control board 90 is formed using MPU mounting surface copper foil 90mc, and green MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms is applied. The part number of the sub-control board 90 is formed in the MPU mounting surface copper foil 90mc, just like the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 90mp and the MPU mounting surface solid ground 90mg, so although the part number of the sub-control board 90 is not noticeable, it can still be visually confirmed. In addition to the part number of the sub-control board 90, the name of the manufacturer may also be formed on the conductor layer on the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90.

Ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, therefore, the entire area of the MPU mounting surface 90m, excluding the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 90mp that electrically connects various signal lines, which is a wide area that is not electrically shorted to the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 90mp, is designated as the MPU mounting surface solid ground 90mg. By widening the ground (GND) using this MPU mounting surface solid ground 90mg, it is possible to reduce impedance.

Although not shown, figures and letters indicating the layout, mounting orientation, and numbers of electronic components are silk-screened and painted in white paint on the front surface of the solder resist 90ms on the MPU mounting surface. Silk-screen printing can be done by screen printing or inkjet printing. In this embodiment, since there is no need to print detailed figures and letters on the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90, screen printing is used for silk-screen printing, thereby shortening the printing time. Note that if inkjet printing is used for silk-screen printing, the printing time will be longer than with screen printing.

The non-MPU mounting surface 90u of the sub-control board 90 is formed by bonding copper foil, which serves as a conductor layer, to the rear surface of the insulating base material 90a, forming a circuit pattern on the copper foil, forming the non-MPU mounting surface copper foil 90uc. Green solder resist, which serves as an insulating layer to protect the non-MPU mounting surface 90u, is applied to the non-MPU mounting surface 90u, forming the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 90us.

The conductor layer on the non-MPU surface 90u of the sub-control board 90 is formed with circuit patterns including a non-MPU surface wiring pattern 90up and a non-MPU surface ground 90ug. Also, although not shown, the conductor layer includes an area electrically isolated from the area where the non-MPU surface wiring pattern 90up and the non-MPU surface ground 90ug are formed, but not electrically connected to the non-MPU surface wiring pattern 90up and the non-MPU surface ground 90ug. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction at the bottom edge of the non-MPU surface 90u, the product number of the sub-control board 90 is formed using non-MPU surface copper foil 90uc, and a green non-MPU surface solder resist 90us is applied. The part number of the sub-control board 90 is formed in the non-MPU surface copper foil 90uc, just like the non-MPU surface wiring pattern 90up and the non-MPU surface ground 90ug, so although the part number of the sub-control board 90 is not noticeable, it can still be visually confirmed. In addition to the part number of the sub-control board 90, the name of the manufacturer may also be formed on the conductor layer on the non-MPU surface 90u of the sub-control board 90.

As mentioned above, ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, therefore, the entire area of the non-MPU mounting surface 90u, excluding the non-MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 90up that electrically connects various signal lines, which is a wide area that is not electrically shorted to the non-MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 90up, is designated as the non-MPU mounting surface solid ground 90ug, and by widening the ground (GND) using this non-MPU mounting surface solid ground 90ug, it is possible to reduce impedance.

Note that, like the MPU mounting surface 90m, various electronic components are mounted on the non-MPU mounting surface 90u. Therefore, although not shown, figures and letters indicating the layout, mounting orientation, and numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint on the front surface of the solder resist 90us on the non-MPU mounting surface. Silk-screen printing can be done by screen printing or inkjet printing. In this embodiment, since there is no need to print detailed figures or letters on the non-MPU mounting surface 90u of the sub-control board 90, screen printing is used for the silk-screen printing, thereby shortening the printing time. Note that if inkjet printing is used for the silk-screen printing, the printing time will be longer than with screen printing.

The MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90 is equipped with SMD (Surface Mount Device) type electronic components, including a performance control microcomputer 91, which is a performance control microprocessor (MPU), various ICs, electrolytic capacitors, capacitors, resistors, diodes, chip fuses, batteries, various connectors, etc.

The sub-control board 90 has wiring pattern through holes 90tb (indicated by a cross mark with a ◎ symbol in the figure) that electrically connect the MPU mounting surface side wiring pattern 90mp formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m and the MPU non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 90up formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u, test pad through holes 90tf (indicated by a ● symbol in the figure) that are contacted by test probes when checking electrical signals, and an MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg and an MPU non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 90up formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m. There are multiple ground through holes 90tc (indicated by a cross with a ◎ symbol in the figure) that electrically connect the solid ground 90ug on the non-MPU surface formed on the U non-mounting surface 90u, through holes 90tg (indicated by a cross with a ◎ symbol in the figure) near the thermal pads that electrically connect the leads of various SMD-type electronic components to ground (GND), and non-through holes 90te (indicated by a circle with an × symbol in the figure) that are used to secure various connectors and as mounting holes for the sub-control board 90.

The ground through holes 90tc are arranged along the top, right, bottom, and left sides of the sub-control board 90, and multiple ground through holes 90tc are also arranged in areas where no electronic components are located, including the areas where the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug are formed, with the holes being arranged in a grid pattern as much as possible. When a grid pattern is not possible, two ground through holes 90tc are arranged as a pair, and when a pair is not possible, a single ground through hole 90tc is arranged, and the holes are arranged over a wide area of the sub-control board 90. Furthermore, the ground through holes 90tc are not filled with solder.

In addition to the ground through-hole 90tc, the wiring pattern through-hole 90tb and the through-hole 90tg near the thermal pad are not filled with solder. The non-through-hole 90te is used to secure various connectors and as a mounting hole for the sub-control board 90, so it is not soldered in the first place.

In contrast, the test pad through holes 90tf are filled with solder because they are contacted by test probes when checking electrical signals. This prevents damage to the test pad through holes 90tf and allows the test probes to make good electrical connections with the test pad through holes 90tf (or more accurately, the lands surrounding the test pad through holes 90tf) via the solder.

The through holes 90tg near the thermal pads are located near the thermal pads where the leads of SMD-type electronic components are connected to ground (GND). Therefore, the number of through holes 90tg near the thermal pads is fewer than the number of ground through holes 90tc. In other words, on the sub-control board 90, the ratio of ground through holes 90tc is higher than the ratio of through holes 90tg near the thermal pads.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of wiring pattern through holes 90tb is fewer than the number of ground through holes 90tc. In other words, on the sub-control board 90, the ratio of ground through holes 90tc to wiring pattern through holes 90tb is higher. Of course, on the sub-control board 90, the number of ground through holes 90tc to be filled with solder is greater than the number of wiring pattern through holes 90tb to be filled with solder, and the ratio of ground through holes 90tc to be filled with solder is higher than the ratio of wiring pattern through holes 90tb to be filled with solder.

In addition, in this embodiment, the positions of the test pad through holes 90tf and letters indicating that they are test pads (e.g., "TP") are silk-screened in white paint as a test pad area 90uk on the non-MPU mounting surface 90u. The positions of the test pad through holes 90tf are easily visible because they are surrounded by a line by the test pad area 90uk. Note that if one or more of the multiple ground through holes 90tc are used as test pads that come into contact with testing probes, their positions and letters indicating that they are test pads (e.g., "TP") may be silk-screened in white paint as a test pad area 90uk.

On the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90, circular MPU mounting surface lands 90mr are formed around the wiring pattern through holes 90tb using MPU mounting surface copper foil 90mc, while no lands made of MPU mounting surface copper foil 90mc are formed around the non-through holes 90te. Note that "lands" refer to copper foil areas for soldering.

In addition, a thermal pad is formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90, to which the leads of SMD-type electronic components are connected to ground (GND). This thermal pad is shaped so that cuts are made in the MPU mounting surface copper foil 90mc around the pad, creating clearance between the pad and the MPU mounting surface solid ground 90mg. This makes it difficult for heat to be transferred from the thermal pad to the MPU mounting surface solid ground 90mg, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

On the non-MPU mounting surface 90u of the sub-control board 90, circular non-MPU mounting surface lands 90ur are formed around the wiring pattern through holes 90tb using non-MPU mounting surface copper foil 90uc, while no lands made of non-MPU mounting surface copper foil 90uc are formed around the non-through holes 90te.

The ground through hole 90tc electrically connects the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m with the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u. Therefore, on the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90, the periphery of the ground through hole 90tc is the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg formed from the MPU mounting surface side copper foil 90mc, and a circular area where the MPU mounting surface side solder resist 90ms is not applied is formed around the ground through hole 90tc to form a land-like shape. On the non-MPU mounting surface 90u of the sub-control board 90, the periphery of the ground through hole 90tc is the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug formed from the MPU non-mounting surface side copper foil 90uc, and a circular area where the MPU non-mounting surface side solder resist 90us is not applied is formed around the ground through hole 90tc to form a land-like shape.

As mentioned above, ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, the entire area of the MPU mounting surface 90m, excluding the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 90mp that electrically connects various signal lines, is designated as an MPU mounting surface solid ground 90mg, which serves as ground (GND) for the entire wide area that is not electrically shorted to the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 90mp. This MPU mounting surface solid ground 90mg widens the ground (GND). The entire area of the MPU non-mounting surface 90u, excluding the MPU non-mounting surface wiring pattern 90up that electrically connects various signal lines, is designated as an MPU non-mounting surface solid ground 90ug, which serves as ground (GND) for the entire wide area that is not electrically shorted to the MPU non-mounting surface wiring pattern 90up. This MPU mounting surface solid ground 90mg widens the ground (GND).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u are electrically connected by ground through holes 90tc, thereby further reducing impedance and strengthening the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u are electrically connected by ground through holes 90tc, thereby strengthening the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug. Furthermore, because the through holes 90tg near the thermal pad are located near the thermal pad to which the leads of SMD-type electronic components are connected to ground (GND), the number of through holes 90tg near the thermal pad is fewer than the number of ground through holes 90tc, and the proportion of ground through holes 90tc is higher than the proportion of through holes 90tg near the thermal pad. This stabilizes the electrical potential that serves as the reference for the operation of electronic components with leads connected to ground (GND), helping to prevent malfunction of electronic components.

The sub-CPU 92 of the performance control microcomputer 91, which is the performance control microprocessor (MPU) that controls the progression of the performance, is an SMD-type electronic component and is located to the right of the center point where the center line, a vertical line passing through the centers of the top and bottom sides of the sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board, intersects with the center line, a horizontal line passing through the centers of the left and right sides. The sub-CPU 92 is attached to the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90, with the heat sink 92a described above applied with a highly thermally conductive grease (i.e., via the grease) on the side opposite the surface facing the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90. The heat sink 92a absorbs heat from the sub-CPU 92 and dissipates it into the outside air, cooling the sub-CPU 92. As described above, the heat sink 92a is air-cooled by the air-cooling fan 172 attached to the air-cooling fan housing 421a of the performance control board box cover member 421.

Furthermore, to the upper left of the sub-CPU 92, an SMD mounting area (area B enclosed in a rectangular shape by a two-dot chain line in the figure) is formed where various electronic components are mounted, although no electronic components are actually mounted on the MPU mounting surface 90m. Furthermore, an area 90q for attaching a QR code (registered trademark) is formed in the area on the upper left of the MPU mounting surface 90m (the area to the left of the SMD mounting area). The QR code (registered trademark) is printed in black on a white background in this area 90q. Of course, a QR code (registered trademark) sticker printed in black on a white background may also be affixed. The QR code (registered trademark) is, for example, a coded version of various information related to the sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board.

In addition, a chip fuse, which is an SMD-type electronic component, is mounted to the lower left of the sub-CPU 92, and a mounting prohibition area (area C enclosed in a rectangular shape by a two-dot chain line in the figure) is formed around the chip fuse where mounting of electronic components is prohibited.

Various pads corresponding to the leads of various SMD-type electronic components are formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90. The leads of the various SMD-type electronic components are placed on the various pads and soldered to the MPU mounting surface 90m. This allows the various SMD-type electronic components to be fixed to the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90.

Various pads corresponding to the leads of various SMD-type electronic components are formed on the non-MPU mounting surface 90u of the sub-control board 90. The leads of the various SMD-type electronic components are placed on the various pads and soldered on the non-MPU mounting surface 90u. This allows the various SMD-type electronic components to be fixed to the non-MPU mounting surface 90u of the sub-control board 90.

[Image control board]
Next, the image control board 100 will be described. Here, when the effect control board box 420 is attached to the rear side of the gaming board 2 and the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the rear, the front surface of the image control board 100 housed in the effect control board box 420 is an MPU mounting surface 100m on which various electronic components including an image control microcomputer 101 (CPU 102, ROM 103, RAM 104), which is an image control microprocessor (MPU: Micro Processor Unit), are mounted, as shown in Figure 88(A), whereas the rear surface, which is the surface opposite to the front surface of the image control board 100, is an MPU non-mounting surface 100u on which the image control microcomputer 101, which is an image control microprocessor (MPU), is not mounted and on which various other electronic components are mounted, as shown in Figure 88(B). Although various electronic components are arranged on the MPU mounting surface 100m and the non-MPU mounting surface 100u so as to be parallel or perpendicular to the upper and lower sides of the liquid crystal control board 100, certain electronic components (resistors and capacitors) on the non-MPU mounting surface 100u are arranged at a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees) with respect to the upper and lower sides. The following explanation will be made mainly with reference to Figures 88(A) and (B).

The MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100 has copper foil 100mc, which serves as a conductor layer, bonded to the front surface of the insulating base material 100a, forming a circuit pattern on the copper foil. Green solder resist, which serves as an insulating layer to protect the MPU mounting surface 100m, is applied to the MPU mounting surface 100m, forming MPU mounting surface solder resist 100ms.

The conductor layer on the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100 is formed with circuit patterns including an MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 100mp and an MPU mounting surface solid ground 100mg. Furthermore, although not shown, the conductor layer also includes an area electrically isolated from the area where the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 100mp and the MPU mounting surface solid ground 100mg are formed, but not electrically connected to the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 100mp and the MPU mounting surface solid ground 100mg. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction at the bottom edge of the MPU mounting surface 100m, the product number of the image control board 100 is formed using MPU mounting surface copper foil 100mc, and a green MPU mounting surface solder resist 100ms is applied. The product number of the image control board 100 is formed in the MPU mounting surface copper foil 100mc, just like the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 100mp and the MPU mounting surface solid ground 100mg, so although the product number of the image control board 100 is not noticeable, it can still be visually confirmed. In addition to the product number of the image control board 100, the name of the manufacturer may also be formed on the conductor layer on the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100.

Ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, therefore, the entire area of the MPU mounting surface 100m, excluding the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 100mp that electrically connects various signal lines, which is a wide area that is not electrically shorted to the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 100mp, is designated as the MPU mounting surface solid ground 100mg. By widening the ground (GND) using this MPU mounting surface solid ground 100mg, it is possible to reduce impedance.

Although not shown, figures and letters indicating the layout, mounting orientation, and numbers of electronic components are silk-screened and painted in white paint on the front surface of the MPU mounting surface solder resist 100ms. Silk-screen printing can be done by screen printing or inkjet printing. In this embodiment, since there is no need to print detailed figures and letters on the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100, screen printing is used for silk-screen printing, thereby shortening the printing time. Note that if inkjet printing is used for silk-screen printing, the printing time will be longer than with screen printing.

On the non-MPU mounting surface 100u of the image control board 100, copper foil serving as a conductor layer is adhered to the rear surface of the insulating base material 100a, forming a non-MPU mounting surface copper foil 100uc, on which a circuit pattern is formed. Green solder resist serving as an insulating layer to protect the non-MPU mounting surface 100u is applied to the non-MPU mounting surface 100u, forming the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 100us.

The conductor layer on the non-MPU surface 100u of the image control board 100 is formed with circuit patterns including a non-MPU surface wiring pattern 100up and a non-MPU surface solid ground 100ug. Also, although not shown, the conductor layer includes an area electrically isolated from the area where the non-MPU surface wiring pattern 100up and the non-MPU surface solid ground 100ug are formed, but not electrically connected to the non-MPU surface wiring pattern 100up and the non-MPU surface solid ground 100ug. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction at the bottom edge of the non-MPU surface 100u, the product number of the image control board 100 is formed using non-MPU surface copper foil 100uc, and green non-MPU surface solder resist 100us is applied. The product number of the image control board 100 is formed in the non-MPU surface copper foil 100uc, just like the non-MPU surface wiring pattern 100up and the non-MPU surface solid ground 100ug, so although the product number of the image control board 100 is not noticeable, it can still be visually confirmed. In addition to the product number of the image control board 100, the name of the manufacturer may also be formed on the conductor layer on the non-MPU surface 100u of the image control board 100.

As mentioned above, ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, therefore, the entire area of the non-MPU mounting surface 100u, excluding the non-MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 100up that electrically connects various signal lines, which is a wide area that is not electrically shorted to the non-MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 100up, is designated as the non-MPU mounting surface solid ground 100ug, and by widening the ground (GND) using this non-MPU mounting surface solid ground 100ug, it is possible to reduce impedance.

Note that, like the MPU mounting surface 100m, various electronic components are mounted on the non-MPU mounting surface 100u. Therefore, although not shown, figures and letters indicating the layout, mounting orientation, and numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened and painted in white paint on the front surface of the solder resist 100us on the non-MPU mounting surface. Silk-screen printing can be done by screen printing or inkjet printing. In this embodiment, since there is no need to print detailed figures or letters on the non-MPU mounting surface 100u of the image control board 100, screen printing is used for the silk-screen printing, thereby shortening the printing time. Note that if inkjet printing is used for silk-screen printing, the printing time will be longer than with screen printing.

On the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100, various SMD (Surface Mount Device) type electronic components, including the image control microcomputer 101, which is an image control microprocessor (MPU), as well as various ICs, electrolytic capacitors, capacitors, resistors, diodes, various connectors, etc., are mounted.

The image control board 100 has wiring pattern through holes 100tb (indicated by a cross mark with a ◎ symbol in the figure) that electrically connect the MPU mounting surface side wiring pattern 100mp formed on the MPU mounting surface 100m and the MPU non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 100up formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 100u, test pad through holes 100tf (indicated by a ● symbol in the figure) that are contacted by inspection probes when checking electrical signals, and an MPU mounting surface side solid ground 100mg formed on the MPU mounting surface 100m. There are multiple ground through holes 100tc (indicated by a cross with a ◎ symbol in the figure) that electrically connect to the non-MPU surface-side solid ground 100ug formed on the non-MPU surface 100u, through holes 100tg (indicated by a cross with a ◎ symbol in the figure) near the thermal pads that electrically connect the leads of various SMD-type electronic components to ground (GND), and non-through holes 100te (indicated by a circle with an × symbol in the figure) that are used to secure various connectors and as mounting holes for the image control board 100.

The ground through holes 100tc are arranged along the top, right, bottom, and left sides of the image control board 100, and multiple ground through holes 100tc are also arranged in areas where no electronic components are located, where the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 100mg and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 100ug are formed, and are arranged in a grid pattern as much as possible. When a grid pattern is not possible, two ground through holes 100tc are arranged as a pair, and when a pair is not possible, a single ground through hole 100tc is arranged, and they are arranged over a wide area of the image control board 100. Furthermore, the ground through holes 100tc are not filled with solder.

In addition to the ground through-hole 100tc, the wiring pattern through-hole 100tb and the through-hole 100tg near the thermal pad are not filled with solder. The non-through-hole 100te is intended for fixing various connectors and as a mounting hole for the image control board 100, and is therefore not soldered in the first place.

In contrast, the test pad through holes 100tf are filled with solder because they are contacted by test probes when checking electrical signals. This prevents damage to the test pad through holes 100tf and allows the test probes to make good electrical connections with the test pad through holes 100tf (or more accurately, the lands surrounding the test pad through holes 100tf) via the solder.

The through holes 100tg near the thermal pad are located near the thermal pad where the leads of SMD-type electronic components are connected to ground (GND). Therefore, the number of through holes 100tg near the thermal pad is fewer than the number of ground through holes 100tc. In other words, on the image control board 100, the ratio of ground through holes 100tc is higher than the ratio of through holes 100tg near the thermal pad.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of wiring pattern through holes 100tb is fewer than the number of ground through holes 100tc. In other words, on the image control board 100, the ratio of ground through holes 100tc to wiring pattern through holes 100tb is higher. Of course, on the image control board 100, the number of ground through holes 100tc to be filled with solder is greater than the number of wiring pattern through holes 100tb to be filled with solder, and the ratio of ground through holes 100tc to be filled with solder is higher than the ratio of wiring pattern through holes 100tb to be filled with solder.

In addition, in this embodiment, the positions of the test pad through holes 100tf and letters indicating that they are test pads (e.g., "TP") are silk-screened in white paint as a test pad area 100uk on the non-MPU mounting surface 100u. The positions of the test pad through holes 100tf are easily visible because they are surrounded by a line by the test pad area 100uk. Note that if one or more of the multiple ground through holes 100tc are used as test pads that come into contact with testing probes, their positions and letters indicating that they are test pads (e.g., "TP") may be silk-screened in white paint as a test pad area 100uk.

On the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100, circular MPU mounting surface lands 100mr are formed around the wiring pattern through holes 100tb using MPU mounting surface copper foil 100mc, while no lands made of MPU mounting surface copper foil 100mc are formed around the non-through holes 100te. Note that "lands" refer to copper foil areas for soldering.

In addition, a thermal pad is formed on the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100, to which the leads of SMD-type electronic components are connected to ground (GND). This thermal pad is shaped so that cuts are made in the MPU mounting surface copper foil 100mc around the pad, creating clearance between the pad and the MPU mounting surface solid ground 100mg. This makes it difficult for heat to be transferred from the thermal pad to the MPU mounting surface solid ground 100mg, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

On the non-MPU mounting surface 100u of the image control board 100, circular non-MPU mounting surface lands 100ur are formed around the wiring pattern through holes 100tb using non-MPU mounting surface copper foil 100uc, while no lands made of non-MPU mounting surface copper foil 100uc are formed around the non-through holes 100te.

The ground through hole 100tc electrically connects the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 100mg formed on the MPU mounting surface 100m with the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 100ug formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 100u. Therefore, on the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100, the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 100mg is formed from the MPU mounting surface side copper foil 100mc around the ground through hole 100tc, and a circular area where the MPU mounting surface side solder resist 100ms is not applied is formed around the ground through hole 100tc to form a land-like shape. On the non-MPU mounting surface 100u of the image control board 100, the area surrounding the ground through-hole 100tc is a non-MPU mounting surface solid ground 100ug formed from non-MPU mounting surface copper foil 100uc, and a circular area where the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 100us is not applied is formed around the ground through-hole 100tc to form a land-like shape.

As mentioned above, ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, the entire area of the MPU mounting surface 100m, excluding the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 100mp that electrically connects various signal lines, which is a wide area that is not electrically shorted to the MPU mounting surface wiring pattern 100mp, is designated as the MPU mounting surface solid ground 100mg, and the ground (GND) is widened by this MPU mounting surface solid ground 100mg. The entire area of the MPU non-mounting surface 100u, excluding the MPU non-mounting surface wiring pattern 100up that electrically connects various signal lines, is designated as the MPU non-mounting surface solid ground 100ug, and the entire area of the MPU non-mounting surface 100u, excluding the MPU non-mounting surface wiring pattern 100up, which is a wide area that is not electrically shorted to the MPU non-mounting surface wiring pattern 100up, is designated as the MPU non-mounting surface solid ground 100ug, and the ground (GND) is widened by this MPU mounting surface solid ground 100mg.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 100mg formed on the MPU mounting surface 100m and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 100ug formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 100u are electrically connected by the ground through hole 100tc, thereby further reducing impedance and strengthening the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 100mg and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 100ug.

As such, in this embodiment, the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 100mg formed on the MPU mounting surface 100m and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 100ug formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 100u are electrically connected by ground through holes 100tc, strengthening the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 100mg and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 100ug. Furthermore, because the through holes 100tg near the thermal pad are located near the thermal pad to which the leads of SMD-type electronic components are connected to ground (GND), the number of through holes 100tg near the thermal pad is fewer than the number of ground through holes 100tc, and the proportion of ground through holes 100tc is higher than the proportion of through holes 100tg near the thermal pad. This stabilizes the electrical potential that serves as the reference for electronic component operation for electronic components with leads connected to ground (GND), helping to prevent malfunction of electronic components.

The CPU 102 of the image control microcomputer 101, which is an image control microprocessor (MPU), is an SMD-type electronic component and is located approximately at the center of the image control board 100, where a center line, which is a vertical line passing through the centers of the top and bottom sides, intersects with a center line, which is a horizontal line passing through the centers of the left and right sides. In this embodiment, the CPU 102 is not attached to the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100; a heat sink is applied to the surface opposite the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100, with a highly thermally conductive grease applied (i.e., via the grease). Furthermore, the heat sink is not air-cooled by an air-cooling fan. However, the CPU 102 may be attached to the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100 with a heat sink tightly attached to the surface opposite the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100 with grease with high thermal conductivity applied (i.e., via the grease), or the heat sink may be air-cooled by an air-cooling fan.

Incidentally, an area 100q for attaching a QR code (registered trademark) is formed on the upper right side of the MPU mounting surface 100m. The QR code (registered trademark) is printed in black on a white background in this area 100q. Of course, a sticker with the QR code (registered trademark) printed in black on a white background may also be attached. The QR code (registered trademark), for example, is a coded version of various information related to the image control board 100.

Various pads corresponding to the leads of various SMD-type electronic components are formed on the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100. The leads of the various SMD-type electronic components are placed on the various pads and soldered on the MPU mounting surface 100m. In this way, various SMD-type electronic components are fixed to the MPU mounting surface 100m of the image control board 100.

Various pads corresponding to the leads of various SMD-type electronic components are formed on the non-MPU mounting surface 100u of the image control board 100. The leads of the various SMD-type electronic components are placed on the various pads and soldered on the non-MPU mounting surface 100u. In this way, various SMD-type electronic components are fixed to the non-MPU mounting surface 100u of the image control board 100.

[Various through holes formed on the sub-control board and image control board]
Here, the various through holes formed in the sub-control board 90 and the image control board 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 89 and 90. First, the through holes for wiring patterns will be described, followed by the through holes for test pads, ground through holes, through holes near thermal land pads, and non-through holes. Note that the various through holes formed in the sub-control board 90 and the various through holes formed in the image control board 100 have the same structure, so here, the various through holes formed in the sub-control board 90 will be described. The various through holes formed in the image control board 100 that correspond to the various through holes formed in the sub-control board 90 are indicated by symbols in parentheses following the symbols used in the description of the various through holes formed in the sub-control board 90.

[Through holes for wiring patterns]
First, the wiring pattern through hole 90tb (100tb) will be described. As described above, the wiring pattern through hole 90tb (100tb) electrically connects the MPU mounting surface side wiring pattern 90mp (100mp) formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) of the sub-control board 90 (100), which is the performance control board, to the MPU non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 90up (100up) formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u (100u) of the sub-control board 90 (100).

As shown in Figure 89(A), the wiring pattern through holes 90tb (100tb) are formed by forming through holes in the base material 90a (100a) of the sub-control board 90 (100), and copper plating the through holes to provide conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects and provides continuity between the circular MPU mounting surface land 90mr (100mr) formed by removing copper foil from the MPU mounting surface copper foil 90mc (100mc) on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) of the sub-control board 90 (100) and the circular MPU non-mounting surface land 90ur (100ur) formed by removing copper foil from the MPU non-mounting surface copper foil 90uc (100uc) on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u (100u) of the sub-control board 90 (100) via the wiring pattern through holes 90tb (100tb).

The MPU mounting surface side lands 90mr (100mr) and MPU mounting surface side wiring patterns 90mp (100mp) are formed with a clearance between them and the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg (100mg). The MPU non-mounting surface side lands 90ur (100ur) and MPU non-mounting surface side wiring patterns 90up (100up) are formed with a clearance between them and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug (100ug).

The MPU mounting surface side land 90mr (100mr) is electrically connected and conductive to the MPU mounting surface side wiring pattern 90mp (100mp) formed by removing the copper foil from the MPU mounting surface side copper foil 90mc (100mc) on the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90 (100). The MPU non-mounting surface side land 90ur (100ur) is electrically connected and conductive to the MPU non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 90up (100up) formed by removing the copper foil from the MPU non-mounting surface side copper foil 90uc (100uc) on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u (100u) of the sub-control board 90 (100).

After the circuit pattern is formed on the copper foil 90mc (100mc) on the MPU mounting surface, a green solder resist is applied to the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) as an insulating layer to protect the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m), forming the MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms (100ms) on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m). Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms (100ms).

After a circuit pattern is formed on the copper foil 90uc (100uc) on the non-MPU mounting surface, a green solder resist is applied to the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u) as an insulating layer to protect the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u), forming the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 90us (100us) on the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u). If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 90us (100us).

In this embodiment, the wiring pattern through-holes 90tb (100tb) are not soldered. As a result, the wiring pattern through-holes 90tb (100tb) are not filled with solder.

[Through holes for test pads]
Next, the test pad through holes 90tf (100tf) will be described. As described above, the test pad through holes 90tf (100tf) are contacted by the inspection probes when checking electrical signals. The test pad through holes 90tf (100tf) electrically connect the MPU mounting surface side wiring pattern 90mp (100mp) formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) of the sub-control board 90 (100), which is the performance control board, to the MPU non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 90up (100up) formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u (100u) of the sub-control board 90 (100).

As shown in Figure 89(B), the test pad through holes 90tf (100tf) are formed by forming through holes in the base material 90a (100a) of the sub-control board 90 (100) and copper plating the through holes to provide conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects and establishes continuity between the circular MPU mounting surface land 90mr (100mr) formed by removing copper foil from the MPU mounting surface copper foil 90mc (100mc) on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) of the sub-control board 90 (100) and the circular MPU non-mounting surface land 90ur (100ur) formed by removing copper foil from the MPU non-mounting surface copper foil 90uc (100uc) on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u (100u) of the sub-control board 90 (100) via the test pad through holes 90tf (100tf).

The MPU mounting surface side lands 90mr (100mr) and MPU mounting surface side wiring patterns 90mp (100mp) are formed with a clearance between them and the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg (100mg). The MPU non-mounting surface side lands 90ur (100ur) and MPU non-mounting surface side wiring patterns 90up (100up) are formed with a clearance between them and the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug (100ug).

The MPU mounting surface side land 90mr (100mr) is electrically connected and conductive to the MPU mounting surface side wiring pattern 90mp (100mp) formed by removing the copper foil from the MPU mounting surface side copper foil 90mc (100mc) on the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90 (100). The MPU non-mounting surface side land 90ur (100ur) is electrically connected and conductive to the MPU non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 90up (100up) formed by removing the copper foil from the MPU non-mounting surface side copper foil 90uc (100uc) on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u (100u) of the sub-control board 90 (100).

After the circuit pattern is formed on the copper foil 90mc (100mc) on the MPU mounting surface, a green solder resist is applied to the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) as an insulating layer to protect the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m), forming the MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms (100ms) on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m). Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms (100ms).

After a circuit pattern is formed on the copper foil 90uc (100uc) on the non-MPU mounting surface, a green solder resist is applied to the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u) as an insulating layer to protect the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u), forming the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 90us (100us) on the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u). If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 90us (100us).

In this embodiment, the test pad through-holes 90tf (100tf) are soldered on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) and the MPU non-mounting surface 90u (100u). This soldering allows solder to flow to the non-MPU mounting surface lands 90ur (100ur), the test pad through-holes 90tf (100tf), and the MPU mounting surface lands 90mr (100mr), resulting in solder being applied to the non-MPU mounting surface lands 90ur (100ur), the test pad through-holes 90tf (100tf) being filled with solder, and the MPU mounting surface lands 90mr (100mr) being applied with solder. As a result, the solder embedded in the test pad through-hole 90tf (100tf) is restricted from moving in the vertical direction in the figure, preventing it from falling out of the test pad through-hole 90tf (100tf).

[Ground through hole]
Next, the ground through hole 90tc (100tc) will be described. As described above, the ground through hole 90tc (100tc) electrically connects the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg (100mg) formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) of the sub-control board 90 (100) to the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug (100ug) formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u (100u) of the sub-control board 90 (100).

As shown in Figure 89 (C), the ground through holes 90tc (100tc) are formed by forming through holes in the base material 90a (100a) of the sub-control board 90 (100) and copper plating the through holes to make them conductive. This copper plating electrically connects the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg (100mg) formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) of the sub-control board 90 (100) to the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug (100ug) formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u (100u) of the sub-control board 90 (100) via the ground through holes 90tc (100tc), creating a conductive state.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the copper foil 90mc (100mc) on the MPU mounting surface, a green solder resist is applied to the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) as an insulating layer to protect the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m), forming the MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms (100ms) on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m). Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms (100ms).

After a circuit pattern is formed on the copper foil 90uc (100uc) on the non-MPU mounting surface, a green solder resist is applied to the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u) as an insulating layer to protect the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u), forming the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 90us (100us) on the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u). If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 90us (100us).

In this embodiment, the ground through holes 90tc (100tc) are soldered on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) and the MPU non-mounting surface 90u (100u). This soldering allows the solder to flow to the non-MPU mounting surface lands 90ur (100ur), the ground through holes 90tc (100tc), and the MPU mounting surface lands 90mr (100mr), resulting in the solder being applied to the non-MPU mounting surface lands 90ur (100ur), the ground through holes 90tc (100tc) being filled with solder, and the solder being applied to the MPU mounting surface lands 90mr (100mr). As a result, the solder embedded in the ground through-hole 90tc (100tc) is restricted from moving in the vertical direction in the figure, preventing it from falling out of the ground through-hole 90tc (100tc).

[Through hole near the thermal pad]
Next, the through-hole 90tg (100tg) near the thermal pad will be described. As described above, the through-hole 90tg (100tg) near the thermal pad is disposed near the thermal pad to electrically connect the leads of various SMD-type electronic components to the ground (GND). Here, we will explain how the leads (ground (GND) connection terminals) of ICs as various SMD-type electronic components are placed on the thermal pad and soldered to fix them.

As shown in Figure 90(D), the through-holes 90tg (100tg) near the thermal pads are formed in the base material 90a (100a) of the sub-control board 90 (100) by copper plating the through-holes to provide conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects the MPU mounting surface side solid ground 90mg (100mg) formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) of the sub-control board 90 (100) to the MPU non-mounting surface side solid ground 90ug (100ug) formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u (100u) of the sub-control board 90 (100) via the ground through-holes 90tc (100tc), providing electrical continuity.

The thermal pad is shaped so that a cut is made around the pad in 90mc (100mc) of copper foil on the MPU mounting surface, creating clearance between the pad and the 90mg (100mg) solid ground on the MPU mounting surface. This makes it difficult for heat to be transferred from the thermal pad to the 90mg (100mg) solid ground on the MPU mounting surface, suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the copper foil 90mc (100mc) on the MPU mounting surface, a green solder resist is applied to the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) as an insulating layer to protect the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m), forming the MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms (100ms) on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m). Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms (100ms).

After a circuit pattern is formed on the copper foil 90uc (100uc) on the non-MPU mounting surface, a green solder resist is applied to the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u) as an insulating layer to protect the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u), forming the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 90us (100us) on the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u). If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 90us (100us).

Here, an IC has been described as an example of an SMD-type electronic component, but for example, the leads (ground (GND) connection terminals) of the sub-CPU 92 (102) of the sub-control microcomputer 91 (101), which is a performance control microprocessor (MPU) that is also an SMD-type electronic component, are also soldered to a thermal pad and fixed to the MPU mounting surface 90m (100M) of the sub-control board 90 (100), just like the leads (ground (GND) connection terminals) of the IC mentioned above.

[Non-through-hole]
Next, the non-through holes 90te (100te) will be described. As described above, the non-through holes 90te (100te) are used to secure various connectors and as mounting holes for the sub-control board 90 (100). The non-through holes 90te (100te) for securing various connectors are fitted with cylindrical protrusions provided on the connectors for positioning. The non-through holes 90te (100te) for mounting the sub-control board 90 (100) are fitted with cylindrical mounting bosses formed on the performance control board box cover member 421. When the cylindrical mounting bosses formed on the performance control board box cover member 421 are inserted and secured with screws, the sub-control board 90 and the image control board 1000 are housed within the internal space of the performance control board box cover member 421, and the opening of the performance control board box cover member 421 is blocked by the performance control board box base member 422.

As shown in Figure 90(E), the non-through holes 90te (100te) are formed by forming through holes in the base material 90a (100a) of the sub-control board 90 (100), and the through holes are not copper-plated. In other words, because the base material 90a (100a) of the non-through holes 90te (100te) is an insulator, the circuit pattern formed on the copper foil 90mc (100mc) on the MPU mounting surface is electrically isolated from the circuit pattern formed on the copper foil 90uc (100uc) on the non-MPU mounting surface.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the copper foil 90mc (100mc) on the MPU mounting surface, a green solder resist is applied to the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m) as an insulating layer to protect the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m), forming the MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms (100ms) on the MPU mounting surface 90m (100m). Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the MPU mounting surface solder resist 90ms (100ms).

After a circuit pattern is formed on the copper foil 90uc (100uc) on the non-MPU mounting surface, a green solder resist is applied to the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u) as an insulating layer to protect the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u), forming the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 90us (100us) on the non-MPU mounting surface 90u (100u). If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-MPU mounting surface solder resist 90us (100us).

When the game board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52 and the effect control board box 420 is attached to the image display device 7 of the game board 2, the upper surface of the effect control board box cover member 421 does not have any slits like the power supply board box cover member 451 of the power supply board box 450, as described above. When the game board 2 is attached to the inner frame 52, the effect control board box 420 is positioned below the tank rail 405 attached to the inner frame 52. Therefore, even if iron powder or accumulated dust falls onto the downwardly sloping rail of the tank rail 405 due to vibrations from the rolling game balls or vibrations caused by the operation of movable bodies such as the game board 2 and falls through the cutout portion 405a formed in the tank rail 405, the iron powder or dust is caught on the upper surface of the effect control board box 420, preventing the iron powder or dust from entering the effect control board box 420.

In addition, iron powder and dust that fall through the cutout portion 405a and cannot be received by the top side of the effect control board box 420 are spread from the air-cooled fan housing portion 421a of the effect control board box 420 to the rear area of the gaming machine 1 by the wind blown out from the air-cooled fan 172 inside the effect control board box 420, thereby preventing iron powder and dust from entering the effect control board box 420.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island, which is equipped with various devices. When the power is turned on to the gaming island, some of the devices move within the gaming island, creating an environment in which dust and dirt (dust) are floating around. In this embodiment, even if dust is floating around within the gaming island, it is caught on the top side of the effect control board box 420, preventing the dust from entering the effect control board box 420. Furthermore, the air blown out of the effect control board box 420 by the air from the air-cooled fan 172 causes the dust to spread from the air-cooled fan housing portion 421a of the effect control board box 420 to the area behind the gaming machine 1, preventing the dust from entering the effect control board box 420.

If dust accumulates in a through-hole, moisture may collect in the accumulated dust, corroding the inner wall of the through-hole and causing an electrical disconnection. Therefore, by filling the through-hole with solder, dust will no longer accumulate inside the through-hole, preventing damage to the through-hole. However, this embodiment is also designed to prevent dust from entering the performance control board box 420. This eliminates the need to fill the wiring pattern through-holes 90tb (100tb), ground through-holes 90tc (100tc), and through-holes 90tg (100tg) near the thermal pads formed on the sub-control board 90 (image control board 100) with solder, reducing the amount of solder used and contributing to reduced manufacturing costs for the performance control board 90 and image control board 100.

[Processing of various pads for SMD-type electronic components]
Here, various electronic components are not actually mounted on the MPU mounting surface 90m formed on the upper left of the sub-CPU 92 of the performance control microcomputer 91, which is a performance control microprocessor (MPU). However, the SMD (abbreviation for Surface Mount Device) type electronic components are mounted on the MPU mounting surface 90m, and this will be described with reference to FIG. 91.

The sub-CPU 92 outputs various signals as the performance progresses. When developing a performance control program, a monitor connector is required to monitor these signals. The monitor connector required when developing a performance control program is a surface-mounted SMD electronic component. As shown in Figure 91, the monitor connector is placed on the mounting surface side surface-mount connector pad 90mh that corresponds to the monitor connector, and is soldered to the MPU mounting surface 90m and fixed to the MPU mounting surface 90m. In addition, the mounting surface side surface-mount connector pad 90mh has a mounting surface side silkscreen print section 90mk silkscreened in white paint, which displays information such as figures and characters indicating the placement of the monitor connector, the mounting orientation of the monitor connector, and the monitor connector number.

However, this electronic component is completely unnecessary for the gaming machine 1 installed in an amusement parlor. In other words, the sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board, is a board in which the SMD-type electronic component of the monitor connector, which is an SMD-type electronic component, is not mounted on the MPU mounting surface 90m in the actual gaming machine 1 installed in an amusement parlor.

In this embodiment, therefore, corrosion prevention treatment is performed on the mounting surface side surface mount connector pads 90mh. The corrosion prevention treatment involves applying molten solder to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pads 90mh and then blowing off any excess solder. Other corrosion prevention treatments include water-soluble preflux, electroless plating, and electrolytic plating, and a combination of these (for example, a combination of water-soluble preflux and electroless plating) may also be performed.

By applying corrosion prevention treatment to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pads 90mh, damage to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pads 90mh due to dust and moisture can be reduced.

While the performance control program is being developed, a monitor connector, which is an SMD-type electronic component, is mounted on the MPU mounting surface 90m. However, once development of the performance control program is complete, the actual gaming machine 1 installed in the gaming center will not need to output data externally from the monitor connector. However, it would be time-consuming to modify the performance control program so that it does not process data externally from the monitor connector.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in the actual gaming machine 1 installed in the gaming parlor, the monitor connector is not mounted on the MPU mounting surface 90m. In other words, regardless of whether the monitor connector is soldered to the mounting surface side surface-mount connector pad 90mh, which is an electronic component pad, the performance control microcomputer 91, which is the performance control microprocessor (MPU), outputs a specified signal to the mounting surface side surface-mount connector pad 90mh via the MPU mounting surface side wiring pattern 90mp formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m of the sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board, and the MPU non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 90up formed on the MPU non-mounting surface 90u.

The electronic components soldered to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pad 90mh, which is an electronic component pad, are limited to monitor connectors that output specific signals. Therefore, even if the circuit of the mounting surface side surface mount connector pad 90mh, which is an electronic component pad of the monitor connector, is tampered with, it is difficult to input any unauthorized signals to the sub-CPU 92 of the performance control microcomputer 91, which is the performance control microprocessor (MPU). This does not affect the outcome of the game, and there is no need to modify the performance control program depending on whether the monitor connector is soldered to the mounting surface side surface mount connector pad 90mh, which is an electronic component pad.

[Prohibited mounting area]
Here, with reference to Figure 92, we will explain the prohibited mounting area, which is formed to the lower left of the sub-CPU 92 of the performance control microcomputer 91, which is a performance control microprocessor (MPU), and in which mounting of various electronic components is prohibited around the chip fuse mounted on the MPU mounting surface 90m.

To the lower left of the sub-CPU 92 of the performance control microcomputer 91, which is a performance control microprocessor (MPU), and on the lower left side of the sub-control board 90, as shown in Figure 92, a mounting prohibited area 90mz where mounting of various electronic components is prohibited is formed on the MPU mounting surface 90m.

The prohibited mounting area 90mz is formed between the upper edges of connectors CN1 and CN2, which are arranged below the sub-control board 90 and aligned in a row along the bottom edge of the sub-control board 90, and the lower edge of a square terminal board that serves as the base for two electrolytic capacitors C1 and C2, which are SMD-type electronic components aligned in a row in the left-right direction parallel to the bottom edge of the sub-control board 90. Connector CN1 is a connector that receives power.

The prohibited mounting area 90mz has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, with its horizontal dimension (horizontal length) measuring from the left edge of connector CN1 to the left edge of connector CN2, which is located immediately to the right of connector CN1, and its vertical dimension (vertical length) measuring from the upper edge of connector CN1 to the bottom edge of the square terminal board that serves as the base for the two electrolytic capacitors C1 and C2 located above. The horizontal dimension (horizontal length) is larger than the vertical dimension (vertical length) of connector CN1, and is approximately 4.5 times the length of one side of the square terminal board that serves as the base for the two electrolytic capacitors C1 and C2. The vertical dimension (vertical length) is larger than the vertical dimension (vertical length) of connector CN1, and is approximately 1.3 times the length of one side of the square terminal board that serves as the base for the two electrolytic capacitors C1 and C2.

In the no-mounting area 90mz, the chip fuse 90mza is positioned below the two electrolytic capacitors C1 and C2. This allows dust to be received by the two electrolytic capacitors C1 and C2 positioned above the chip fuse 90mza, preventing dust from accumulating on the chip fuse 90mza.

Unlike fuse holders (holders for attaching glass tube fuses), which are lead-type electronic components, chip fuse 90mza is an SMD-type electronic component that is surface-mounted on MPU mounting surface 90m. Even if a large current flows through sub-control board 90, which is the performance control board, chip fuse 90mza generates heat and the fuse membrane inside chip fuse 90mza melts, preventing damage to performance control microcomputer 91, which is a critical electronic component and performance control microprocessor (MPU). This allows performance control microcomputer 91, which is a critical electronic component and performance control microprocessor (MPU), to be reused. If an overcurrent flows through chip fuse 90mza, chip fuse 90mza will generate heat and melt the fuse membrane inside chip fuse 90mza, potentially affecting electronic components around chip fuse 90mza.

In this embodiment, therefore, a no-mounting area 90mz is provided around the chip fuse 90mza, where no electronic components are placed. This prevents other electronic components placed around the no-mounting area 90mz from melting due to the heat generated by an overcurrent flowing through the chip fuse 90mza.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the chip fuse 90mza is positioned in the no-mounting area 90mz so that it is below the two electrolytic capacitors C1 and C2. This means that even if dust falls, it can be caught by the two electrolytic capacitors C1 and C2 positioned above the chip fuse 90mza. Even if an overcurrent flows through the chip fuse 90mza and generates heat, this heat will not cause the dust caught by the two electrolytic capacitors C1 and C2 to ignite.

[Power supply board housed in power supply board box]
Next, the power supply board 162 housed in the power supply board box 450 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 93 to 95. Figure 93 shows (A) a schematic diagram of the layout of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface of the power supply board, and (B) a diagram showing the non-mounting surface (solder side) of the power supply board. Figure 94 shows a plan view, cross-sectional view, and bottom view of various through-holes formed in the power supply board. Figure 95 is a schematic diagram showing a continuation of Figure 94. Note that Figure 93 omits some of the wiring patterns and various through-holes for clarity. Also, in Figures 94 and 95, the thickness of the board and the various through-holes are enlarged compared to the size of the electronic components for clarity.

Here, when the power supply board box 450 is attached to the rear of the inner frame 52 and the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the rear, the front surface of the power supply board 162 housed in the power supply board box 450 is the mounting surface 162m on which various electronic components are mounted, as shown in Figure 93(A), while the rear surface, opposite the front surface of the power supply board 162, is the non-mounting surface 162u on which various electronic components are not mounted and is the soldering surface, as shown in Figure 93(B). The various electronic components are arranged on the mounting surface 162m and the non-mounting surface 162u so that they are parallel or perpendicular to the top and bottom edges of the power supply board 162. The following explanation will primarily refer to Figures 93(A) and (B).

The mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 is formed by bonding copper foil, which serves as a conductor layer, to the front surface of the insulating base material 162a, forming a mounting surface-side copper foil 162mc, on which a circuit pattern is formed. Green solder resist, which serves as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 162m, is applied to the mounting surface 162m, forming the mounting surface-side solder resist 162ms.

The conductor layer on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 has a mounting surface wiring pattern 162mp and a mounting surface solid ground 162mg formed as circuit patterns. Furthermore, although not shown, the conductor layer also has an area electrically isolated from the area where the mounting surface wiring pattern 162mp and the mounting surface solid ground 162mg are formed, but not electrically connected to the mounting surface wiring pattern 162mp and the mounting surface solid ground 162mg. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction at the bottom edge of the mounting surface 162m, the product number of the power supply board 162 is formed using mounting surface copper foil 162mc, and a green mounting surface solder resist 162ms is applied. The part number of the power supply board 162 is formed in the mounting surface copper foil 162mc, just like the mounting surface wiring pattern 162mp and the mounting surface ground 162mg, so although the part number of the power supply board 162 is not noticeable, it can still be visually confirmed. In addition to the part number of the power supply board 162, the name of the manufacturer may also be formed on the conductor layer on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162.

Ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, therefore, the entire area of the mounting surface 162m, excluding the mounting surface side wiring pattern 162mp that electrically connects various signal lines, which is a wide area that is not electrically short-circuited with the mounting surface side wiring pattern 162mp, is designated as a mounting surface side solid ground 162mg, and this mounting surface side solid ground 162mg widens the ground (GND), thereby reducing impedance.

Although not shown, figures and letters indicating the arrangement of electronic components, the mounting orientation of electronic components, and the numbers of electronic components are silk-screened and painted in white paint on the front surface of the mounting surface solder resist 162ms. Silk-screen printing can be done by screen printing or inkjet printing. In this embodiment, since there is no need to print detailed figures or letters on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162, screen printing is used as the silk-screen printing method, thereby shortening the printing time. Note that if inkjet printing is used for silk-screen printing, the printing time will be longer than with screen printing.

The non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162 is formed by bonding copper foil, which serves as a conductor layer, to the rear surface of the insulating base material 162a, forming a non-mounting surface side copper foil 162uc, on which a circuit pattern is formed. A green solder resist, which serves as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 162u, is applied to the non-mounting surface 162u to form the non-mounting surface side solder resist 162us.

Circuit patterns, such as a non-mounting surface wiring pattern 162up and a non-mounting surface solid ground 162ug, are formed on the conductor layer on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162. Furthermore, although not shown, the conductor layer also includes an area electrically isolated from the area where the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 162up and the non-mounting surface solid ground 162ug are formed, but not electrically connected to the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 162up and the non-mounting surface solid ground 162ug. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction on the top edge of the non-mounting surface 162u, the product number of the power supply board 162 is formed using non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc, and a green non-mounting surface solder resist 162us is applied. The part number of the power supply board 162 is formed from the non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc, just like the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 162up and the non-mounting surface solid ground 162ug, so although the part number of the power supply board 162 is not noticeable, it can still be visually confirmed.

In addition, although not shown, the conductor layer includes an area electrically isolated from the area where the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 162up and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug are formed, and which is not electrically connected to the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 162up and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction at the bottom edge of the non-mounting surface 162u, the manufacturer's name is written in non-mounting surface side copper foil 162uc and a green non-mounting surface side solder resist 162us is applied. Because the manufacturer's name is written in non-mounting surface side copper foil 162uc, just like the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 162up and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug, the manufacturer's name is inconspicuous, but can still be visually confirmed.

As mentioned above, ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, therefore, the entire area of the non-mounting surface 162u, excluding the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 162up that electrically connects various signal lines, which is a wide area that is not electrically short-circuited with the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 162up, is designated as the non-mounting surface solid ground 162ug, and by widening the ground (GND) using this non-mounting surface solid ground 162ug, it is possible to reduce impedance.

Note that the non-mounting surface 162u is a solder surface, and therefore, unlike the mounting surface 162m, it does not have any graphics or letters silk-screened on it indicating the placement, mounting orientation, or component numbers of the electronic components.

The mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 is a mixed-mount board that combines DIP (short for Dual Inline Package) type electronic components and lead-type electronic components, whose lead wires are inserted into through-holes and soldered, with SMD (short for Surface Mount Device) type electronic components, whose leads are soldered on the mounting surface without being inserted into through-holes.

Mounted on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 is a power supply IC as a DIP-type electronic component, and mounted on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 are lead-type electronic components such as a coil, electrolytic capacitor, capacitor, fuse holder (holder for attaching a glass tube fuse), relay, various connectors, and power switch 163. Also mounted on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 are SMD-type electronic components such as various ICs, electrolytic capacitors, resistors, and capacitors.

The power supply board 162 has electronic component through holes 162ta (indicated by a circle in the figure) through which the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components and lead wires of various lead-type electronic components are inserted, wiring pattern through holes 162tb (indicated by a circle in the figure) that electrically connect the mounting surface side wiring pattern 162mp formed on the mounting surface 162m and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 162up formed on the non-mounting surface 162u, and a mounting surface side solid ground 162mg formed on the mounting surface 162m and the non-mounting surface 162u. There are multiple ground through holes 162tc (indicated by a circle in the figure) that electrically connect the solid ground 162ug on the non-mounting surface, thermal land through holes 162td (indicated by a circle in the figure) through which the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components are inserted to electrically connect them to ground (GND), and non-through holes 162te (indicated by a circle with an x mark in the figure) for fixing various connectors and as mounting holes for the power supply board 162.

The ground through holes 162tc are arranged along the top, right, bottom, and left sides of the power supply board 162, and multiple ground through holes 162tc are also arranged in areas where electronic components are not placed and where the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg and non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug are formed, with the holes being arranged in a grid pattern as much as possible. When a grid pattern is not possible, two ground through holes 162tc are arranged as a pair, and when a pair is not possible, a single ground through hole 162tc is arranged, and the holes are arranged over a wide area of the power supply board 162. Furthermore, the ground through holes 162tc are filled with solder.

Note that some of the ground through-holes 162tc on the left side of the top edge and some of the ground through-holes 162tc on the right side of the bottom edge of the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 (indicated by a cross mark with a ◎ symbol in the figure) are not filled with solder. This may be because they interfere with the power supply board 162 when it is fixed during the manufacturing process and cannot be soldered, or because they are not soldered intentionally for inspection purposes during the inspection process.

In this embodiment, of the multiple ground through holes 162tc formed on the power supply substrate 162, the number of ground through holes 162tc that are filled with solder is greater than the number of ground through holes 162tc that are not filled with solder. Therefore, of the multiple ground through holes 162tc formed on the power supply substrate 162, the ratio of ground through holes 162tc that are filled with solder is higher than the ratio of ground through holes 162tc that are not filled with solder. Of course, all ground through holes 162tc may be filled with solder. Even in this case, the fact remains that of the multiple ground through holes 162tc formed on the power supply substrate 162, the ratio of ground through holes 162tc that are filled with solder is higher than the ratio of ground through holes 162tc that are not filled with solder.

In addition to the ground through-hole 162tc, the electronic component through-hole 162ta, the wiring pattern through-hole 162tb, and the thermal land through-hole 162td are filled with solder. The non-through-hole 162te is intended for fixing various connectors and as a mounting hole for the power supply board 162, and is therefore not soldered in the first place.

Even if dust is floating around inside the game island, the electronic component through-holes 162ta, wiring pattern through-holes 162tb, ground through-holes 162tc, and thermal land through-holes 162td on the power supply board 162, an important board that supplies power, are filled with solder. This prevents dust from accumulating in the electronic component through-holes 162ta, wiring pattern through-holes 162tb, ground through-holes 162tc, and thermal land through-holes 162td.

If dust accumulates in the electronic component through-holes 162ta, wiring pattern through-holes 162tb, ground through-holes 162tc, and thermal land through-holes 162td, moisture may accumulate in the accumulated dust, corroding the inner walls of the electronic component through-holes 162ta, wiring pattern through-holes 162tb, ground through-holes 162tc, and thermal land through-holes 162td and causing electrical disconnections. Therefore, in this embodiment, the electronic component through-holes 162ta, wiring pattern through-holes 162tb, ground through-holes 162tc, and thermal land through-holes 162td are filled with solder, preventing dust from accumulating in the electronic component through-holes 162ta, wiring pattern through-holes 162tb, ground through-holes 162tc, and thermal land through-holes 162td and reducing damage to the through-holes. This helps prevent electrical problems caused by accumulated dust on the power supply board 162.

The thermal land through holes 162td are intended for insertion of lead wires of electronic components that are connected to ground (GND). For this reason, the number of thermal land through holes 162td is fewer than the number of ground through holes 162tc. In other words, on the power supply board 162, the ratio of ground through holes 162tc to thermal land through holes 162td is higher. Of course, on the power supply board 162, the number of ground through holes 162tc that are filled with solder is greater than the number of thermal land through holes 162td that are filled with solder, and the ratio of ground through holes 162tc that are filled with solder is higher than the ratio of thermal land through holes 162td that are filled with solder.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of wiring pattern through holes 162tb is fewer than the number of ground through holes 162tc. In other words, on the power supply board 162, the ratio of ground through holes 162tc to wiring pattern through holes 162tb is higher. Of course, on the power supply board 162, the number of ground through holes 162tc to be filled with solder is greater than the number of wiring pattern through holes 162tb to be filled with solder, and the ratio of ground through holes 162tc to be filled with solder is higher than the ratio of wiring pattern through holes 162tb to be filled with solder.

On the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162, circular mounting surface lands 162mr made of mounting surface copper foil 162mc are formed around the electronic component through holes 162ta, and circular mounting surface lands 162mr made of mounting surface copper foil 162mc are formed around the wiring pattern through holes 162tb, whereas no lands made of mounting surface copper foil 162mc are formed around the non-through holes 162te. Note that "land" refers to the copper foil area for soldering.

In addition, on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162, circular mounting surface lands 162mr are formed from mounting surface copper foil 162mc around the thermal land through holes 162td, but cuts are made in these non-mounting surface lands 162mr to provide clearance between the mounting surface ground 162mg and the mounting surface land 162mr. This reduces the area of the mounting surface land 162mr around the thermal land through holes 162td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the mounting surface land 162mr to the mounting surface ground 162mg, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

On the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162, circular non-mounting surface lands 162ur made of non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc are formed around the electronic component through-holes 162ta, and circular non-mounting surface lands 162ur made of non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc are formed around the wiring pattern through-holes 162tb, while no lands made of non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc are formed around the non-through-holes 162te.

In addition, on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162, circular non-mounting surface lands 162ur are formed from non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc around the thermal land through holes 162td, but cuts are made in these non-mounting surface lands 162ur to provide clearance between the non-mounting surface solid ground 162ug and the non-mounting surface lands 162ur. This reduces the area of the non-mounting surface lands 162ur around the thermal land through holes 162td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the non-mounting surface lands 162ur to the non-mounting surface solid ground 162ug, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

The ground through hole 162tc electrically connects the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg formed on the mounting surface 162m with the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug formed on the non-mounting surface 162u. Therefore, on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162, the periphery of the ground through hole 162tc is the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg formed from the mounting surface side copper foil 162mc, and a circular area where the mounting surface side solder resist 162ms is not applied is formed around the ground through hole 162tc to form a land-like shape. On the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162, the periphery of the ground through hole 162tc is the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug formed from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 162uc, and a circular area where the non-mounting surface side solder resist 162us is not applied is formed around the ground through hole 162tc to form a land-like shape.

As mentioned above, ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, the mounting surface 162m includes a region excluding the mounting surface wiring pattern 162mp that electrically connects various signal lines. The entire wide area that is not electrically shorted to the mounting surface wiring pattern 162mp is designated as a mounting surface solid ground 162mg, and the ground (GND) is widened by this mounting surface solid ground 162mg. The non-mounting surface 162u includes a region excluding the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 162up that electrically connects various signal lines. The entire wide area that is not electrically shorted to the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 162up is designated as a non-mounting surface solid ground 162ug, and the ground (GND) is widened by this mounting surface solid ground 162mg.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg formed on the mounting surface 162m and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug formed on the non-mounting surface 162u are electrically connected by the ground through hole 162tc, thereby further reducing impedance and strengthening the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg formed on the mounting surface 162m and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug formed on the non-mounting surface 162u are electrically connected by ground through holes 162tc, thereby strengthening the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug. Furthermore, the number of thermal land through holes 162td is fewer than the number of ground through holes 162tc, and the ratio of ground through holes 162tc to thermal land through holes 162td is higher. This stabilizes the potential that serves as the reference for the operation of electronic components with lead wires connected to ground (GND), helping to prevent malfunction of electronic components.

A large heat sink 163mp1 is attached to the power supply IC, which generates the various DC power supplies required for gaming machine 1 from the 24V AC power supplied from the gaming island. The power supply IC is a DIP-type electronic component, and is located to the right of the center point where the center line, which is a straight line running vertically through the centers of the top and bottom sides of power supply board 162, intersects with the center line, which is a straight line running horizontally through the centers of the left and right sides.

Below the power supply IC, to which a large heat sink 163mp1 is attached, are lead-type electronic components arranged parallel to the bottom edge of the power supply board 162: a horizontally long capacitor 163mp2, a horizontally long relay 163mp3, and a glass tube fuse 163mp5 attached to a horizontally long fuse holder 163mp6. Furthermore, between the capacitor 163mp2 and the glass tube fuse 163mp5, to the left of the relay 163mp3, are two lead-type electronic components: electrolytic capacitors 163mp4.

In this way, above the glass tube fuse 163mp5 are arranged the power supply IC with a large heat sink 163mp1 attached, the capacitor 163mp2, the relay 163mp3, and two electrolytic capacitors 163mp4, which are all lead-type electronic components. In other words, the area above the glass tube fuse 163mp5 is covered by the power supply IC with a large heat sink 163mp1 attached, the capacitor 163mp2, the relay 163mp3, and two electrolytic capacitors 163mp4, which are all lead-type electronic components. Also, above the glass tube fuse 163mp5 are arranged the power supply IC with a large heat sink 163mp1 attached, the relay 163mp3, and other large electronic components.

This eliminates the need to protect the glass tube fuse 163mp5 with a dedicated component to prevent dust from coming into contact with it. The large electronic components mounted on the power supply board 162, such as the power supply IC with a large heat sink 163mp1 attached, the relay 163mp3, the capacitor 163mp2, and the two electrolytic capacitors 163mp4, prevent dust from coming into contact with the fuse, and prevent dust from adhering to and accumulating on the glass tube fuse 163mp5. This maintains the visibility of the glass tube fuse 163mp5, making it easier to determine whether the glass tube fuse 163mp5 has blown.

On the power supply board 162, lead wires for DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components are inserted from the mounting surface 162m through the electronic component through holes 162ta and thermal land through holes 162td, protruding from the non-mounting surface 162u. By soldering on this non-mounting surface 162u, the electronic component through holes 162ta and thermal land through holes 162td are filled with solder. This allows DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components to be fixed to the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162.

Various pads corresponding to the leads of various SMD-type electronic components are formed on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162. The leads of the various SMD-type electronic components are placed on the various pads and soldered on the mounting surface 162m. In this way, various SMD-type electronic components are fixed to the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162.

[Various through holes formed in the power supply board]
Here, various through holes formed in the power supply board 162 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 94 and 95. First, through holes for electronic components will be described, followed by through holes for wiring patterns, ground through holes, through holes for thermal lands, and non-through holes.

[Through holes for electronic components]
First, the electronic component through-hole 162ta will be described. As described above, the electronic component through-hole 162ta is used to insert the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components, including a power supply IC equipped with a large heat sink 163mp1, and the lead wires of various lead-type electronic components. Here, we will describe how the lead wires of a capacitor, which is an example of a lead-type electronic component, are inserted into the electronic component through-hole 162ta and soldered to be fixed.

As shown in Figure 94(A), the electronic component through-holes 162ta are formed by forming through-holes in the base material 162a of the power supply board 162 and copper plating the through-holes to provide conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects and establishes continuity between the circular mounting surface side lands 162mr formed by removing copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 162mc on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 and the circular non-mounting surface side lands 162ur formed by removing copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 162uc on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162.

The mounting surface side land 162mr is formed in a shape that provides a clearance between it and the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg. The non-mounting surface side land 162ur is formed in a shape that provides a clearance between it and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug.

The non-mounting surface side land 162ur and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 162up are electrically connected and conductive to the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 162up formed by removing the copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 162uc on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 162mc, a green solder resist is applied to the mounting surface 162m as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 162m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 162ms on the mounting surface 162m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 162ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 162u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 162u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 162us on the non-mounting surface 162u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 162us.

In this embodiment, the lead wires of the capacitor, a lead-type electronic component, are inserted from the mounting surface 162m into the electronic component through-holes 162ta, protruding from the non-mounting surface 162u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 162u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface lands 162ur through the gaps (spaces) between the capacitor lead wires and the electronic component through-holes 162ta to the mounting surface lands 162mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface lands 162ur, filling the gaps (spaces) between the capacitor lead wires and the electronic component through-holes 162ta, and allowing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface lands 162mr. This results in the capacitor lead wires being sandwiched between the solder in the vertical direction in the figure. By soldering the other lead wires of the capacitor, the capacitor, a lead-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162.

While a capacitor has been described here as an example of a lead-type electronic component, the lead wires of a power supply IC, a DIP-type electronic component with a large heat sink 163mp1 attached, can also be inserted from the mounting surface 162m through the electronic component through-holes 162ta, protruding from the non-mounting surface 162u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 162u, similar to the lead wires of the capacitor described above. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface land 162ur through the gap (space) between the power supply IC's lead wire and the electronic component through-hole 162ta to the mounting surface land 162mr, thereby depositing the solder on the non-mounting surface land 162ur, filling the gap (space) between the power supply IC's lead wire and the electronic component through-hole 162ta, and depositing the solder on the mounting surface land 162mr. This results in the power supply IC's lead wires being sandwiched between the solder in both the vertical and horizontal directions. By soldering the other lead wires of the power supply IC, the power supply IC, which is a DIP-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162.

[Through holes for wiring patterns]
Next, the wiring pattern through holes 162tb will be described. As described above, the wiring pattern through holes 162tb electrically connect the mounting surface side wiring pattern 162mp formed on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 162up formed on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162.

As shown in Figure 94 (B), the wiring pattern through holes 162tb are formed by forming through holes in the base material 162a of the power supply board 162 and copper plating the through holes to impart conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects and provides conductivity between the circular mounting surface side land 162mr formed by removing copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 162mc on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 and the circular non-mounting surface side land 162ur formed by removing copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 162uc on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162.

The mounting surface side land 162mr and the mounting surface side wiring pattern 162mp are formed in a shape that provides a clearance between them and the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg. The non-mounting surface side land 162ur and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 162up are formed in a shape that provides a clearance between them and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug.

The mounting surface side land 162mr is electrically connected and conductive to the mounting surface side wiring pattern 162mp formed by removing the copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 162mc on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162. The non-mounting surface side land 162ur is electrically connected and conductive to the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 162up formed by removing the copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 162uc on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 162mc, a green solder resist is applied to the mounting surface 162m as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 162m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 162ms on the mounting surface 162m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 162ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 162u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 162u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 162us on the non-mounting surface 162u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 162us.

In this embodiment, the wiring pattern through-holes 162tb are soldered on the non-mounting surface 162u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface lands 162ur through the wiring pattern through-holes 162tb to the mounting surface lands 162mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface lands 162ur, filling the wiring pattern through-holes 162tb with solder, and causing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface lands 162mr. As a result, the solder filled in the wiring pattern through-holes 162tb is restricted from moving in the vertical direction in the figure, preventing it from falling out of the wiring pattern through-holes 162tb.

[Ground through hole]
Next, the ground through hole 162tc will be described. As described above, the ground through hole 162tc electrically connects the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg formed on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug formed on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162.

As shown in Figure 94(C), the ground through hole 162tc is formed by forming a through hole in the base material 162a of the power supply board 162 and copper plating the through hole to make it conductive. This copper plating electrically connects and establishes continuity between the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg formed on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug formed on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162 via the ground through hole 162tc.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 162mc, a green solder resist is applied to the mounting surface 162m as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 162m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 162ms on the mounting surface 162m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 162ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 162u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 162u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 162us on the non-mounting surface 162u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 162us.

In this embodiment, the ground through-hole 162tc is soldered on the non-mounting surface 162u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface land 162ur through the ground through-hole 162tc to the mounting surface land 162mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface land 162ur, filling the ground through-hole 162tc with solder, and causing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface land 162mr. As a result, the solder filled in the ground through-hole 162tc is restricted from moving in the vertical direction in the figure, preventing it from falling out of the ground through-hole 162tc.

[Through hole for thermal land]
Next, the thermal land through hole 162td will be described. As described above, the thermal land through hole 162td is used for inserting the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components and lead wires of various lead-type electronic components to the ground (GND) so as to electrically connect them to the ground (GND). Here, we will describe how the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of an electrolytic capacitor, which is an example of a lead-type electronic component, is inserted into the thermal land through hole 162td and soldered to be fixed.

As shown in Figure 95(D), the electronic component through-holes 162ta are formed by forming through-holes in the base material 162a of the power supply board 162 and copper-plating the through-holes to provide conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects and establishes continuity between the circular mounting surface side lands 162mr formed by removing copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 162mc on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 and the circular non-mounting surface side lands 162ur formed by removing copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 162uc on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162.

Although a circular mounting surface side land 162mr is formed around the thermal land through hole 162td using mounting surface side copper foil 162mc, a cut is made in this non-mounting surface side land 162mr to provide clearance between the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg and the mounting surface side land 162mr. This reduces the area of the mounting surface side land 162mr around the thermal land through hole 162td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the mounting surface side land 162mr to the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

In addition, on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162, circular non-mounting surface lands 162ur are formed from non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc around the thermal land through holes 162td, but cuts are made in these non-mounting surface lands 162ur to provide clearance between the non-mounting surface solid ground 162ug and the non-mounting surface lands 162ur. This reduces the area of the non-mounting surface lands 162ur around the thermal land through holes 162td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the non-mounting surface lands 162ur to the non-mounting surface solid ground 162ug, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 162mc, a green solder resist is applied to the mounting surface 162m as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 162m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 162ms on the mounting surface 162m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 162ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 162u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 162u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 162us on the non-mounting surface 162u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 162us.

In this embodiment, the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the electrolytic capacitor, a lead-type electronic component, is inserted from the mounting surface 162m through the thermal land through-hole 162td, protruding from the non-mounting surface 162u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 162u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface land 162ur through the gap (space) between the IC lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) and the thermal land through-hole 162td to the mounting surface land 162mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface land 162ur, filling the gap (space) between the electrolytic capacitor lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) and the thermal land through-hole 162td, and allowing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface land 162mr. As a result, the lead wires (ground (GND) connection terminals) of the electrolytic capacitor are sandwiched with solder in the vertical direction in the figure. By soldering the other lead wires of the electrolytic capacitor, the electrolytic capacitor, which is a lead-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162.

Here, an electrolytic capacitor has been described as an example of a lead-type electronic component, but for example, the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of a power supply creation IC to which a large heat sink 163mp1, which is a DIP-type electronic component, is attached is also inserted from the mounting surface 162m into the thermal land through hole 162td, protruding from the non-mounting surface 162u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 162u, just like the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the electrolytic capacitor described above. This soldering allows the solder to flow from the non-mounting surface land 162ur through the gap (space) between the power supply IC's lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) and the thermal land through-hole 162td to the mounting surface land 162mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface land 162ur, filling the gap (space) between the power supply IC's lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) and the thermal land through-hole 162td with solder, and allowing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface land 162mr. As a result, the power supply IC's lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) is sandwiched between the solder in the vertical direction. By soldering the other lead wires of the power supply IC, the power supply IC, a DIP-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162.

[Non-through-hole]
Next, the non-through holes 162te will be described. As described above, the non-through holes 162te are used to secure various connectors and as mounting holes for the power supply board 162. Cylindrical protrusions provided on the connectors for positioning are inserted into the non-through holes 162te used to secure various connectors. Cylindrical mounting bosses formed on the power supply board box cover member 451 are inserted into the non-through holes 162te used as mounting holes for the power supply board 162. When the cylindrical mounting bosses formed on the power supply board box cover member 451 are inserted and fixed with screws, the power supply board 162 is housed within the internal space of the power supply board box cover member 451, and the opening of the power supply board box cover member 451 is blocked by the power supply board box base member 452.

As shown in Figure 95(E), the non-through holes 162te are formed by forming through holes in the base material 162a of the power supply board 162, and the through holes are not copper-plated. In other words, because the base material 162a is an insulator, the non-through holes 162te are electrically insulated from the circuit pattern formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 162mc and the circuit pattern formed on the non-mounting surface side copper foil 162uc.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 162mc, a green solder resist is applied to the mounting surface 162m as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 162m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 162ms on the mounting surface 162m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 162ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 162uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 162u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 162u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 162us on the non-mounting surface 162u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the electronic component placement, electronic component mounting orientation, electronic component number placement, electronic component mounting orientation, and electronic component number is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 162us.

In this embodiment, as described above, the ground through hole 162tc electrically connects the mounting surface side solid ground 162mg formed on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board 162 with the non-mounting surface side solid ground 162ug formed on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162. In order to supply various power sources from the power supply board 162 to various boards, the wiring width of the mounting surface side wiring pattern 162mp for power supply formed on the mounting surface 162m of the power supply board and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 162up for power supply formed on the non-mounting surface 162u of the power supply board 162 are made large, allowing a large current to flow through the mounting surface side wiring pattern 162mp for power supply and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 162up for power supply. For this reason, the mounting surface wiring pattern 162mp for signal transmission and the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 162up for signal transmission are different, with the mounting surface wiring pattern 162mp being a wide power supply wiring pattern and the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 162up being a wide power supply wiring pattern. The wide power supply mounting surface wiring pattern 162mp and the wide power supply non-mounting surface wiring pattern 162up are electrically connected by multiple wiring pattern through holes 162tb to minimize impedance.

[Dispensing control board housed in dispensing control board box]
Next, the dispensing control board 110 housed in the dispensing control board box 440 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 96 to 98. Figure 96 shows a schematic diagram (A) of the layout of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface of the dispensing control board, and a diagram (B) showing the non-mounting surface (solder side) of the dispensing control board. Figure 97 shows a plan view, cross-sectional view, and bottom view of various through-holes formed in the dispensing control board. Figure 98 is a schematic diagram showing a continuation of Figure 97. Note that Figure 96 omits the wiring pattern and some of the various through-holes for clarity. Also, in Figures 97 and 98, the thickness of the board and the various through-holes are enlarged compared to the size of the electronic components for clarity, and in Figure 98, some of the solder is cut out in the plan view of the through-holes for easier viewing.

Here, when the payout control board box 440 is attached to the rear of the inner frame 52 and the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the rear, the front surface of the payout control board 110 housed in the payout control board box 440 is the mounting surface 110m on which various electronic components are mounted, as shown in Figure 96(A), while the rear surface, opposite the front surface of the payout control board 110, is the non-mounting surface 110u on which various electronic components are not mounted and is the soldering surface, as shown in Figure 96(B). The various electronic components are arranged on the mounting surface 110m and the non-mounting surface 110u so that they are parallel or perpendicular to the top and bottom edges of the payout control board 110. The following explanation will primarily refer to Figures 96(A) and (B).

The mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110 is formed by bonding copper foil, which serves as a conductor layer, to the front surface of the insulating base material 110a, forming a mounting surface side copper foil 110mc, on which a circuit pattern is formed, and by applying green solder resist, which serves as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 110m, to the mounting surface 110m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms.

The conductor layer on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110 has a mounting surface wiring pattern 110mp and a mounting surface solid ground 110mg formed as circuit patterns. Also, although not shown, the conductor layer has an area electrically isolated from the area where the mounting surface wiring pattern 110mp and the mounting surface solid ground 110mg are formed, but not electrically connected to the mounting surface wiring pattern 110mp and the mounting surface solid ground 110mg. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction at the bottom edge of the mounting surface 110m, the product number of the dispensing control board 110 is formed using mounting surface copper foil 110mc, and a green mounting surface solder resist 110ms is applied. The product number of the dispensing control board 110 is formed on the mounting surface copper foil 110mc, just like the mounting surface wiring pattern 110mp and the mounting surface solid ground 110mg, so although the product number of the dispensing control board 110 is not noticeable, it can still be visually confirmed. In addition to the product number of the dispensing control board 1100, the manufacturer's name may also be formed on the conductor layer on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110.

Ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, therefore, the entire area of the mounting surface 110m, excluding the mounting surface side wiring pattern 110mp that electrically connects various signal lines, which is a wide area that is not electrically short-circuited with the mounting surface side wiring pattern 110mp, is designated as the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg, and by widening the ground (GND) using this mounting surface side solid ground 110mg, it is possible to reduce impedance.

Although not shown, figures and letters indicating the arrangement of electronic components, the mounting orientation of electronic components, and the numbers of electronic components are silk-screened and painted in white paint on the front surface of the mounting surface solder resist 110ms. Silk-screen printing can be done by screen printing or inkjet printing. In this embodiment, since there is no need to print detailed figures or letters on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110, screen printing is used as the silk-screen printing method, thereby shortening the printing time. Note that if inkjet printing is used for silk-screen printing, the printing time will be longer than with screen printing.

The non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110 is formed by bonding copper foil, which serves as a conductor layer, to the rear surface of the insulating base material 110a, to form a non-mounting surface side copper foil 110uc, on which a circuit pattern is formed, and by applying green solder resist, which serves as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 110u, to the non-mounting surface 110u to form a non-mounting surface side solder resist 110us.

The conductor layer on the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110 has a non-mounting surface wiring pattern 110up and a non-mounting surface solid ground 110ug formed as circuit patterns. Furthermore, although not shown, the conductor layer also has an area electrically isolated from the area where the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 110up and the non-mounting surface solid ground 110ug are formed, but not electrically connected to the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 110up and the non-mounting surface solid ground 110ug. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction on the top edge of the non-mounting surface 110u, the product number of the dispensing control board 110 is formed using non-mounting surface copper foil 110uc, and a green non-mounting surface solder resist 110us is applied. The product number of the dispensing control board 110 is formed from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 110uc, just like the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 110up and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug, so although the product number of the dispensing control board 110 is not noticeable, it can still be visually confirmed.

In addition, although not shown, the conductor layer includes an area electrically isolated from the area where the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 110up and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug are formed, and which is not electrically connected to the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 110up and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug. For example, in a rectangular area elongated in the left-right direction at the bottom edge of the non-mounting surface 110u, the manufacturer's name is written in non-mounting surface side copper foil 110uc and a green non-mounting surface side solder resist 110us is applied. Because the manufacturer's name is written in non-mounting surface side copper foil 110uc, just like the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 110up and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug, the manufacturer's name is inconspicuous, but can still be visually confirmed.

As mentioned above, ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, therefore, the entire area of the non-mounting surface 110u, excluding the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 110up that electrically connects various signal lines, which is a wide area that is not electrically short-circuited with the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 110up, is designated as the non-mounting surface solid ground 110ug, and by widening the ground (GND) using this non-mounting surface solid ground 110ug, it is possible to reduce impedance.

Note that the non-mounting surface 110u is a solder surface, and therefore, unlike the mounting surface 110m, it does not have any silkscreen printing of any figures or letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, or numbers of electronic components.

The mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110 is equipped with various ICs, including a dispensing control microcomputer 109, which is a dispensing control microprocessor (MPU), as DIP (Dual Inline Package) type electronic components, and lead-type electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors, capacitors, resistor arrays, resistors, diodes, and various connectors.

The dispensing control board 110 has electronic component through holes 110ta (indicated by a circle in the figure) through which the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components and lead wires of various lead-type electronic components are inserted, wiring pattern through holes 110tb (indicated by a circle in the figure) that electrically connect the mounting surface side wiring pattern 110mp formed on the mounting surface 110m and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 110up formed on the non-mounting surface 110u, and a mounting surface side solid ground 110mg formed on the mounting surface 110m and the non-mounting surface 110u. There are multiple ground through holes 110tc (indicated by a circle in the diagram) that electrically connect the solid ground 110ug on the non-mounting surface, thermal land through holes 110td (indicated by a circle in the diagram) through which the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components are inserted to electrically connect them to ground (GND), and non-through holes 110te (indicated by a circle with an x mark in the diagram) for fixing various connectors and as mounting holes for the dispensing control board 110.

The ground through holes 110tc are arranged along the top, right, bottom, and left sides of the dispensing control board 110, and are also arranged in multiple locations in areas where electronic components are not placed and where the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug are formed, with the holes arranged in a grid pattern as much as possible. When a grid pattern is not possible, two ground through holes 110tc are arranged as a pair, and when a pair is not possible, a single ground through hole 110tc is arranged, and the holes are arranged over a wide area of the dispensing control board 110. Furthermore, the ground through holes 110tc are filled with solder.

In addition, some of the ground through holes 110tc on the left side of the top edge and some of the ground through holes 110tc on the right side of the bottom edge of the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110 (in the figure, the symbol is a ◎ with a cross mark attached) are not filled with solder. This can be because they interfere with soldering when fixing the dispensing control board 110 during the manufacturing process of the dispensing control board 110, or because they are not soldered intentionally for inspection during the inspection process.

In this embodiment, of the multiple ground through holes 110tc formed on the dispensing control board 110, the number of ground through holes 110tc filled with solder is greater than the number of ground through holes 110tc that are not filled with solder. Therefore, of the multiple ground through holes 110tc formed on the dispensing control board 110, the ratio of ground through holes 110tc that are filled with solder is higher than the ratio of ground through holes 110tc that are not filled with solder. Of course, all ground through holes 110tc may be filled with solder. Even in this case, the fact remains that of the multiple ground through holes 110tc formed on the dispensing control board 110, the ratio of ground through holes 110tc that are filled with solder is higher than the ratio of ground through holes 110tc that are not filled with solder.

In addition to the ground through-hole 110tc, the electronic component through-hole 110ta, the wiring pattern through-hole 110tb, and the thermal land through-hole 110td are filled with solder. The non-through-hole 110te is used to secure various connectors and as a mounting hole for the dispensing control board 110, so it is not soldered in the first place.

Even if dust is floating around inside the game island, the electronic component through-holes 110ta, wiring pattern through-holes 110tb, ground through-holes 110tc, and thermal land through-holes 110td on the payout control board 110, which is an important board that controls the payout of the prize ball payout device 120, are filled with solder. This prevents dust from accumulating in the electronic component through-holes 110ta, wiring pattern through-holes 110tb, ground through-holes 110tc, and thermal land through-holes 110td.

If dust accumulates in the electronic component through-hole 110ta, the wiring pattern through-hole 110tb, the ground through-hole 110tc, and the thermal land through-hole 110td, moisture may accumulate in the accumulated dust, corroding the inner walls of the electronic component through-hole 110ta, the wiring pattern through-hole 110tb, the ground through-hole 110tc, and the thermal land through-hole 110td and causing electrical disconnections. Therefore, in this embodiment, the electronic component through-hole 110ta, the wiring pattern through-hole 110tb, the ground through-hole 110tc, and the thermal land through-hole 110td are filled with solder, preventing dust from accumulating in the electronic component through-hole 110ta, the wiring pattern through-hole 110tb, the ground through-hole 110tc, and the thermal land through-hole 110td and reducing damage to the through-holes. This helps prevent electrical problems caused by accumulated dust on the dispensing control board 110.

The thermal land through holes 110td are intended for inserting lead wires of electronic components that are connected to ground (GND). For this reason, the number of thermal land through holes 110td is fewer than the number of ground through holes 110tc. In other words, on the dispensing control board 110, the ratio of ground through holes 110tc is higher than the ratio of thermal land through holes 110td. Of course, on the dispensing control board 110, the number of ground through holes 110tc that are filled with solder is greater than the number of thermal land through holes 110td that are filled with solder, and the ratio of ground through holes 110tc that are filled with solder is higher than the ratio of thermal land through holes 110td that are filled with solder.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of wiring pattern through holes 110tb is fewer than the number of ground through holes 110tc. In other words, in the dispensing control board 110, the ratio of ground through holes 110tc to wiring pattern through holes 110tb is higher. Of course, in the dispensing control board 110, the number of ground through holes 110tc to be filled with solder is greater than the number of wiring pattern through holes 110tb to be filled with solder, and the ratio of ground through holes 110tc to be filled with solder is higher than the ratio of wiring pattern through holes 110tb to be filled with solder.

On the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110, circular mounting surface lands 110mr made of mounting surface copper foil 110mc are formed around the electronic component through holes 110ta, and circular mounting surface lands 110mr made of mounting surface copper foil 110mc are formed around the wiring pattern through holes 110tb, whereas no lands made of mounting surface copper foil 110mc are formed around the non-through holes 110te. Note that "land" refers to the copper foil area for soldering.

In addition, on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110, circular mounting surface lands 110mr are formed from mounting surface copper foil 110mc around the thermal land through holes 110td, but cuts are made in this mounting surface land 110mr to provide clearance between the mounting surface ground 110mg and the mounting surface land 110mr. This reduces the area of the mounting surface land 110mr around the thermal land through holes 110td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the mounting surface land 110mr to the mounting surface ground 110mg, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

On the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110, circular non-mounting surface lands 110ur made of non-mounting surface copper foil 110uc are formed around the electronic component through-holes 110ta, and circular non-mounting surface lands 110ur made of non-mounting surface copper foil 110uc are formed around the wiring pattern through-holes 110tb, whereas no lands made of non-mounting surface copper foil 110uc are formed around the non-through-holes 110te.

In addition, on the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110, circular non-mounting surface lands 110ur are formed around the thermal land through holes 110td using non-mounting surface copper foil 110uc, but cuts are made in this non-mounting surface land 110ur to create a clearance between the non-mounting surface solid ground 110ug and the non-mounting surface land 110ur. This reduces the area of the non-mounting surface land 110ur around the thermal land through holes 110td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the non-mounting surface land 110ur to the non-mounting surface solid ground 110ug, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

The ground through hole 110tc electrically connects the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg formed on the mounting surface 110m with the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug formed on the non-mounting surface 110u. Therefore, on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110, the periphery of the ground through hole 110tc is the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg formed from the mounting surface side copper foil 110mc, and a circular area where the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms is not applied is formed around the ground through hole 110tc to form a land-like shape. On the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110, the periphery of the ground through hole 110tc is the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug formed from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 110uc, and a circular area where the non-mounting surface side solder resist 110us is not applied is formed around the ground through hole 110tc to form a land-like shape.

As mentioned above, ground (GND) is the reference potential for signals and power supplies, and if the impedance of the ground (GND) is high, a potential difference will occur, causing noise even if the ground (GND) is the same. For this reason, it is necessary to make the impedance of the ground (GND) as small as possible.

In this embodiment, the mounting surface 110m includes a region excluding the mounting surface wiring pattern 110mp that electrically connects various signal lines. The entire wide area that is not electrically shorted to the mounting surface wiring pattern 110mp is designated as a mounting surface solid ground 110mg, and the ground (GND) is widened by this mounting surface solid ground 110mg. The non-mounting surface 110u includes a region excluding the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 110up that electrically connects various signal lines. The entire wide area that is not electrically shorted to the non-mounting surface wiring pattern 110up is designated as a non-mounting surface solid ground 110ug, and the ground (GND) is widened by this mounting surface solid ground 110mg.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg formed on the mounting surface 110m and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug formed on the non-mounting surface 110u are electrically connected by the ground through hole 110tc, thereby further reducing impedance and strengthening the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug.

In this way, in this embodiment, the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg formed on the mounting surface 110m and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug formed on the non-mounting surface 110u are electrically connected by ground through holes 110tc, thereby strengthening the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug. Furthermore, the number of thermal land through holes 110td is fewer than the number of ground through holes 110tc, and the proportion of ground through holes 110tc is higher than the proportion of thermal land through holes 110td. This stabilizes the potential that serves as the reference for the operation of electronic components with lead wires connected to ground (GND), helping to prevent malfunction of electronic components.

The payout control microcomputer 109, which is a payout control microprocessor (MPU: Micro Processor Unit) that controls the payout of the prize ball payout device 120, is a DIP-type electronic component and is located to the lower left of the center point, which is the point where the center line, which is a straight line running vertically through the centers of the top and bottom sides of the payout control board 110, intersects with the center line, which is a straight line running horizontally through the centers of the left and right sides.

A region 109a in which a QR code (registered trademark) is affixed is formed on the surface of the dispensing control microcomputer 109 opposite the surface facing the mounting surface 110m. The QR code (registered trademark) is formed in this region 109a, for example, using a laser marker. Of course, it may also be printed using inkjet printing. The QR code (registered trademark) in region 109a is, for example, a coded version of various information related to the dispensing control microcomputer 109.

On the dispensing control board 110, lead wires for DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components are inserted from the mounting surface 110m through the electronic component through holes 110ta and thermal land through holes 110td, protruding from the non-mounting surface 110u. By soldering on this non-mounting surface 110u, the electronic component through holes 110ta and thermal land through holes 110td are filled with solder. This allows DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components to be fixed to the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110.

[Various through holes formed on the dispensing control board]
Here, the various through holes formed in the dispensing control board 110 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 97 and 98. First, the through holes for electronic components will be described, followed by the through holes for wiring patterns, ground through holes, through holes for thermal lands, and non-through holes.

[Through holes for electronic components]
First, the electronic component through-hole 110ta will be described. As described above, the electronic component through-hole 110ta is used to insert the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components, including the dispensing control microcomputer 109, which is a dispensing control microprocessor (MPU: Micro Processor Unit), as well as the lead wires of various lead-type electronic components. Here, we will describe how the lead wires of a capacitor, which is one of the lead-type electronic components, are inserted into the electronic component through-hole 110ta and soldered to be fixed.

As shown in Figure 97 (A), the electronic component through-holes 110ta are formed by forming through-holes in the base material 110a of the dispensing control board 110 and copper-plating the through-holes to provide conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects and provides conductivity between the circular mounting surface side land 110mr, formed by removing the copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 110mc on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110, and the circular non-mounting surface side land 110ur, formed by removing the copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 110uc on the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110, via the electronic component through-holes 110ta.

The mounting surface side land 110mr is formed in a shape that provides a clearance between it and the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg. The non-mounting surface side land 110ur is formed in a shape that provides a clearance between it and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug.

The non-mounting surface side land 110ur and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 110up are electrically connected and conductive to the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 110up formed by removing the copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 110uc on the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 110mc, a green solder resist that acts as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 110m is applied to the mounting surface 110m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms on the mounting surface 110m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 110uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 110u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 110u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 110us on the non-mounting surface 110u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the layout of electronic components, the mounting orientation of electronic components, the layout of electronic component numbers, the mounting orientation of electronic components, and the electronic component numbers is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 110us.

In this embodiment, the lead wires of the capacitor, a lead-type electronic component, are inserted from the mounting surface 110m through the electronic component through-holes 110ta, protruding from the non-mounting surface 110u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 110u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface land 110ur through the gap (space) between the capacitor's lead wire and the electronic component through-hole 110ta to the mounting surface land 110mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface land 110ur, filling the gap (space) between the capacitor's lead wire and the electronic component through-hole 110ta, and allowing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface land 110mr. This results in the capacitor's lead wires being sandwiched between the solder in the vertical direction in the figure. By soldering the other lead wires of the capacitor, the capacitor, a lead-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110.

Here, a capacitor has been described as an example of a lead-type electronic component. However, similar to the capacitor leads described above, the lead wires of the dispensing control microcomputer 109, which is a DIP-type electronic component known as a dispensing control microprocessor (MPU), are inserted from the mounting surface 110m into the electronic component through-holes 110ta, protruding from the non-mounting surface 110u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 110u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface land 110ur through the gap (space) between the lead wires of the dispensing control microcomputer 109 and the electronic component through-holes 110ta to the mounting surface land 110mr, thereby depositing the solder on the non-mounting surface land 110ur, filling the gap (space) between the lead wires of the dispensing control microcomputer 109 and the electronic component through-holes 110ta, and depositing the solder on the mounting surface land 110mr. This results in the lead wires of the dispensing control microcomputer 109 being sandwiched vertically with solder. By soldering the other lead wires of the dispensing control microcomputer 109, the dispensing control microcomputer 109, which is a DIP-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110.

[Through holes for wiring patterns]
Next, the wiring pattern through hole 110tb will be described. As described above, the wiring pattern through hole 110tb electrically connects the mounting surface side wiring pattern 110mp formed on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110 and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 110up formed on the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110.

As shown in Figure 97 (B), the wiring pattern through-holes 110tb are formed by forming through-holes in the base material 110a of the dispensing control board 110 and copper-plating the through-holes to provide conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects and conducts between the circular mounting surface side land 110mr, formed by removing copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 110mc on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110, and the circular non-mounting surface side land 110ur, formed by removing copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 110uc on the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 1100, via the wiring pattern through-holes 110tb.

The mounting surface side land 110mr and the mounting surface side wiring pattern 110mp are formed in a shape that provides a clearance between them and the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg. The non-mounting surface side land 110ur and the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 110up are formed in a shape that provides a clearance between them and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug.

The mounting surface side land 110mr is electrically connected and conductive to the mounting surface side wiring pattern 110mp formed by removing the copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 110mc on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110. The non-mounting surface side land 110ur is electrically connected and conductive to the non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 110up formed by removing the copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 110uc on the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 110mc, a green solder resist that acts as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 110m is applied to the mounting surface 110m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms on the mounting surface 110m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 110uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 110u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 110u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 110us on the non-mounting surface 110u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the layout of electronic components, the mounting orientation of electronic components, the layout of electronic component numbers, the mounting orientation of electronic components, and the electronic component numbers is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 110us.

In this embodiment, the wiring pattern through-holes 110tb are soldered on the non-mounting surface 110u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface lands 110ur through the wiring pattern through-holes 110tb to the mounting surface lands 110mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface lands 110ur, filling the wiring pattern through-holes 110tb with solder, and causing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface lands 110mr. As a result, the solder filled in the wiring pattern through-holes 110tb is restricted from moving in the vertical direction in the figure, preventing it from falling out of the wiring pattern through-holes 110tb.

[Ground through hole]
Next, the ground through hole 110tc will be described. As described above, the ground through hole 110tc electrically connects the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg formed on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110 with the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug formed on the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110.

As shown in Figure 97 (C), the ground through hole 110tc is formed by forming a through hole in the base material 110a of the dispensing control board 110 and copper plating the through hole to make it conductive. This copper plating electrically connects the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg formed on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110 and the non-mounting surface side solid ground 110ug formed on the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110 via the ground through hole 110tc, creating a conductive state.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 110mc, a green solder resist that acts as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 110m is applied to the mounting surface 110m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms on the mounting surface 110m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 110uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 110u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 110u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 110us on the non-mounting surface 110u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the layout of electronic components, the mounting orientation of electronic components, the layout of electronic component numbers, the mounting orientation of electronic components, and the electronic component numbers is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 110us.

In this embodiment, the ground through hole 110tc is soldered on the non-mounting surface 110u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface land 110ur through the ground through hole 110tc to the mounting surface land 110mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface land 110ur, filling the ground through hole 110tc with solder, and causing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface land 110mr. As a result, the solder filled in the ground through hole 110tc is restricted from moving in the vertical direction in the figure, preventing it from falling out of the ground through hole 110tc.

[Through hole for thermal land]
Next, the thermal land through hole 110td will be described. As described above, the thermal land through hole 110td is inserted to electrically connect the lead wires of various DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components to ground (GND). Here, we will explain how the lead wires (ground (GND) connection terminals) of ICs as various DIP-type electronic components are inserted into the thermal land through hole 110td and soldered to be fixed.

As shown in Figure 98 (D), the electronic component through-holes 110ta are formed by forming through-holes in the base material 110a of the dispensing control board 110 and copper-plating the through-holes to provide conductivity. This copper plating electrically connects and provides conductivity between the circular mounting surface side land 110mr, formed by removing copper foil from the mounting surface side copper foil 110mc on the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110, and the circular non-mounting surface side land 110ur, formed by removing copper foil from the non-mounting surface side copper foil 110uc on the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110, via the electronic component through-holes 110ta.

Although a circular mounting surface side land 110mr is formed around the thermal land through hole 110td using mounting surface side copper foil 110mc, a cut is made in this mounting surface side land 110mr to provide clearance between the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg and the mounting surface side land 110mr. This reduces the area of the mounting surface side land 110mr around the thermal land through hole 110td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the mounting surface side land 110mr to the mounting surface side solid ground 110mg, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier for the solder to melt.

In addition, on the non-mounting surface 110u of the dispensing control board 110, circular non-mounting surface lands 110ur are formed around the thermal land through holes 110td using non-mounting surface copper foil 110uc, but cuts are made in this non-mounting surface land 110ur to create a clearance between the non-mounting surface solid ground 110ug and the non-mounting surface land 110ur. This reduces the area of the non-mounting surface land 110ur around the thermal land through holes 110td, making it more difficult for heat to be transferred from the non-mounting surface land 110ur to the non-mounting surface solid ground 110ug, thereby suppressing temperature drops during soldering and making it easier to melt the solder.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 110mc, a green solder resist that acts as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 110m is applied to the mounting surface 110m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms on the mounting surface 110m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 110uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 110u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 110u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 110us on the non-mounting surface 110u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the layout of electronic components, the mounting orientation of electronic components, the layout of electronic component numbers, the mounting orientation of electronic components, and the electronic component numbers is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 110us.

In this embodiment, the lead wires (ground (GND) connection terminals) of an IC, a DIP-type electronic component, are inserted from the mounting surface 110m through the thermal land through-holes 110td, protruding from the non-mounting surface 110u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 110u. This soldering allows solder to flow from the non-mounting surface lands 110ur through the gaps (spaces) between the IC lead wires (ground (GND) connection terminals) and the thermal land through-holes 110td to the mounting surface lands 110mr, causing the solder to be applied to the non-mounting surface lands 110ur, filling the gaps (spaces) between the IC lead wires (ground (GND) connection terminals) and the thermal land through-holes 110td, and allowing the solder to be applied to the mounting surface lands 110mr. This results in the IC's lead wires (ground (GND) connection terminals) being clamped with solder in the vertical direction in the figure. By soldering the other IC lead wires as well, the IC, which is a DIP-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110.

Here, an IC has been described as an example of a DIP-type electronic component, but for example, the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the dispensing control microcomputer 109, which is a dispensing control microprocessor (MPU), which is also a DIP-type electronic component, is inserted from the mounting surface 110m into the thermal land through hole 110td, protruding from the non-mounting surface 110u, and soldered to the non-mounting surface 110u, just like the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the IC mentioned above. This soldering allows the solder to flow from the non-mounting surface side land 110ur through the gap (space) between the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the dispensing control microcomputer 109 and the thermal land through hole 110td to the mounting surface side land 110mr, causing the solder to be placed on the non-mounting surface side land 110ur, filling the gap (space) between the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the dispensing control microcomputer 109 and the thermal land through hole 110td with solder, and causing the solder to be placed on the mounting surface side land 110mr. As a result, the lead wire (ground (GND) connection terminal) of the dispensing control microcomputer 109 is sandwiched between the solder in the vertical direction. By soldering the other lead wires of the dispensing control microcomputer 109, the dispensing control microcomputer 109, which is a DIP-type electronic component, is fixed to the mounting surface 110m of the dispensing control board 110.

[Non-through hole]
Next, the non-through holes 110te will be described. As described above, the non-through holes 110te are used to secure various connectors and as mounting holes for the dispensing control board 110. The non-through holes 110te, which are used to secure various connectors, have cylindrical protrusions inserted therethrough that are provided on the connectors for positioning purposes. The non-through holes 110te, which are used as mounting holes for the dispensing control board 110, have cylindrical mounting bosses inserted therethrough that are formed on the dispensing control board box cover member 441. When the cylindrical mounting bosses formed on the dispensing control board box cover member 441 are inserted and secured with screws, the dispensing control board 110 is housed within the internal space of the dispensing control board box cover member 441, and the opening of the dispensing control board box cover member 441 is blocked by the dispensing control board box base member 442.

As shown in Figure 98 (E), the non-through holes 110te are formed by forming through holes in the base material 110a of the dispensing control board 110, and the through holes are not copper-plated. In other words, because the base material 110a is an insulator, the non-through holes 110te are electrically insulated from the circuit pattern formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 110mc and the circuit pattern formed on the non-mounting surface side copper foil 110uc.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the mounting surface side copper foil 110mc, a green solder resist that acts as an insulating layer to protect the mounting surface 110m is applied to the mounting surface 110m, forming the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms on the mounting surface 110m. Then, figures and letters indicating the placement, mounting orientation, and component numbers of the electronic components are silk-screened in white paint onto the mounting surface side solder resist 110ms.

After the circuit pattern is formed on the non-mounting surface copper foil 110uc, a green solder resist is applied to the non-mounting surface 110u as an insulating layer to protect the non-mounting surface 110u, forming the non-mounting surface solder resist 110us on the non-mounting surface 110u. If specific information other than the above-mentioned information such as the layout of electronic components, the mounting orientation of electronic components, the layout of electronic component numbers, the mounting orientation of electronic components, and the electronic component numbers is to be displayed, the specific information is silk-screened in white paint on the non-mounting surface solder resist 110us.

The technical concepts behind various through-holes are explained in detail below.

[Technical philosophy 1]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
A power supply board box (450) that houses a power supply board (162) attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board;
a game control board box (430) attached to the rear side of the game board and accommodating a game control board (80) on which a game control microprocessor (81) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted;
a presentation control board box (420) that is attached to the rear side of the game board at a position different from the game control board box and that houses a presentation control board (90) that has a presentation control microprocessor (91) that can control the progress of presentations based on commands from the game control board;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
The game control board includes:
A first electronic component mounting surface (mounting surface 80m) on which various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are mounted;
a first electronic component non-mounting surface (non-mounting surface 80u) on the opposite side of the first electronic component mounting surface, on which various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are not mounted;
A plurality of first electronic component through holes (electronic component through holes 80ta) through which lead wires of various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are inserted;
a solid ground on the first electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground of 80 mg on the mounting surface side);
a solid ground on the first electronic component non-mounting surface (solid ground 80ug on the non-mounting surface);
a plurality of first ground through holes (ground through holes 80tc) that electrically connect the solid ground of the first electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the first electronic component non-mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the game control board, lead wires of various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are inserted from the first electronic component mounting surface into the first electronic component through holes and protrude from the first electronic component non-mounting surface, and soldered to the first electronic component non-mounting surface, and a higher proportion of the plurality of first ground through holes are filled with solder than those that are not filled with solder,
The power supply board includes:
a second electronic component mounting surface (mounting surface 162m) on which various electronic components are mounted;
a second electronic component non-mounting surface (non-mounting surface 162u) on the opposite side of the second electronic component mounting surface, on which various electronic components are not mounted;
a plurality of second electronic component through holes (electronic component through holes 162ta) through which lead wires of various electronic components are inserted;
a solid ground on the second electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground on the mounting surface side: 162 mg);
a solid ground on the second electronic component non-mounting surface (solid ground 162ug on the non-mounting surface);
a plurality of second ground through holes (ground through holes 162tc) that electrically connect the solid ground of the second electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the second electronic component non-mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the power supply board, lead wires of various electronic components are inserted from the second electronic component mounting surface into the second electronic component through holes and protrude from the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and are soldered on the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and a higher proportion of the second ground through holes are filled with solder than those that are not filled with solder,
The performance control board includes:
A third electronic component mounting surface (MPU mounting surface 90m) on which a plurality of electronic component pads on which various electronic components including the performance control microprocessor are mounted are formed;
A fourth electronic component mounting surface (MPU non-mounting surface 90u) is a surface opposite to the third electronic component mounting surface, and has a plurality of electronic component pads on which various electronic components not including the performance control microprocessor are mounted.
a solid ground on the third electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground of 90 mg on the MPU mounting surface side);
a solid ground on the fourth electronic component mounting surface (solid ground 90ug on the non-MPU mounting surface side);
a plurality of third ground through holes (ground through holes 90tc) electrically connecting the solid ground of the third electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the fourth electronic component mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the performance control board, various electronic components including the performance control microprocessor are soldered on the third electronic component mounting surface while being placed on electronic component pads, and various electronic components not including the performance control microprocessor are soldered on the fourth electronic component mounting surface while being placed on electronic component pads, and among the plurality of third ground through holes, the proportion of those that are not filled with solder is higher than the proportion of those that are filled with solder.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Gaming machines have been proposed in the past that have multiple slits in components to dissipate heat from the control device (for example, JP 2023-124739 A). However, dust floating around within the gaming island can enter the various board boxes through the slits and adhere to the boards housed in the various board boxes, causing electrical malfunctions. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 1 above, even if dust is floating around within the gaming island, by at least filling with solder the multiple first ground through holes on the gaming control board, which is an important board that controls the progress of the game, and filling with solder the multiple second ground through holes on the power supply board, which is an important board that supplies power, it is possible to prevent dust from accumulating in the multiple first ground through holes and multiple second ground through holes. This makes it possible to suppress electrical malfunctions caused by accumulated dust in the gaming control board and power supply board.

[Technical philosophy 2]
The game control board box is disposed below the performance control board box on the rear side of the game board,
A payout control board box (440) is disposed at the rear side of the inner frame, and is attached below the game board at a position different from the power supply board box. The payout control board box (440) houses a payout control board (110) equipped with a payout control microprocessor (109) that controls the payout of game balls based on commands from the game control board.
The dispensing substrate includes:
A fifth electronic component mounting surface (mounting surface 110m) on which various electronic components including the dispensing control microprocessor are mounted;
A third electronic component non-mounting surface (non-mounting surface 110u) on the opposite side of the electronic component mounting surface and on which the dispensing control microprocessor is not mounted;
a plurality of third electronic component through holes (electronic component through holes 110ta) through which lead wires of various electronic components are inserted;
A solid ground on the fifth electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground on the mounting surface side of 100 mg),
a solid ground on the surface on which a third electronic component is not mounted (solid ground 100ug on the surface on which the third electronic component is not mounted);
a plurality of fourth ground through holes (ground through holes 110tc) electrically connecting the solid ground of the fifth electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the third electronic component non-mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the dispensing control board, the lead wires of various electronic components including the dispensing control microprocessor are inserted from the fifth electronic component mounting surface into the third electronic component through holes and protrude from the third electronic component non-mounting surface, and are soldered on the third electronic component non-mounting surface, and of the multiple fourth ground through holes, the proportion filled with solder is higher than the proportion not filled with solder.

Gaming machines have been proposed in the past that have multiple slits in components to dissipate heat from the control device (for example, JP 2023-124739 A). However, dust floating around within the gaming island can enter the various board boxes through the slits and adhere to the boards housed in the various board boxes, causing electrical malfunctions. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 2 above, by placing the performance control board on the top row of the performance control board, game control board, payout control board, and power supply board, it is less likely to be hit by flying dust, and dust can be prevented from accumulating in the multiple second ground through holes in the performance control board. Furthermore, even if flying dust does land on the payout control board, dust can be prevented from accumulating in the multiple fourth ground through holes in the payout control board because the multiple fourth ground through holes are filled with solder.

[Technical philosophy 3]
The first electronic component mounting surface of the game control board is formed with a plurality of electronic component pads (mounting surface side surface mounting connector pads 80mh, mounting surface side surface mounting pads 80mi) that can mount a connector (inspection connector), which is a surface mount type (SMD type) electronic component that does not have lead wires, and electronic components that constitute the peripheral circuit of the connector (electronic components around the inspection connector), but no surface mount type electronic components are mounted and the surfaces of the plurality of electronic component pads are treated to prevent corrosion.

Gaming machines have been proposed in the past that have multiple slits in components to dissipate heat from the control device (for example, JP 2023-124739 A). However, if there are unmounted electronic components on a board such as the control device, the pads to which the electronic components are to be soldered are left exposed, resulting in corrosion and damage to the pads. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 3 above, the main control board 80, which serves as the gaming control board, is a mixed board configured to be able to mount DIP-type electronic components, lead-type electronic components with lead wires, and surface-mount SMD-type electronic components without lead wires. However, if all DIP-type electronic components and lead-type electronic components are mounted on the main control board 80, which serves as the gaming control board, and no surface-mount SMD-type electronic components are mounted, the surfaces of the electronic component pads are treated to prevent corrosion, thereby preventing damage to the electronic component pads due to dust and moisture.

[Technical philosophy 4]
The game control microprocessor outputs a predetermined signal to the electronic component pad via a wiring pattern formed on the game control board (a mounting surface side wiring pattern 80mp formed on the mounting surface 80m of the main control board 80, which is the game control board, or a non-mounting surface side wiring pattern 80up formed on the non-mounting surface 80u (which may also be via a wiring pattern through hole 80tb)), regardless of whether the connector is soldered to the electronic component pad.

Gaming machines have previously been proposed that have multiple slits in components to dissipate heat from the control device (for example, JP 2023-124739 A). However, if there are electronic components not mounted on the board of the control device, it was necessary to modify the program so that output to the not-mounted electronic components is not transmitted. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 4 above, the electronic components soldered to the electronic component pads are limited to connectors that output specific signals. Therefore, even if the circuit of the connector's electronic component pads is tampered with, it is difficult to input any unauthorized signals into the game control microprocessor. This does not affect the outcome of the game, and there is no need to modify the game control program depending on whether or not the connector is soldered to the electronic component pad.

[Technical philosophy 5]
With the power supply board box attached to the rear side of the inner frame, a lead-type fuse holder (163mp6) is soldered to the power supply board, and electronic components (a power supply creation IC with a large heat sink 163mp1 attached, a capacitor 163mp2, a relay 163mp3, and two electrolytic capacitors 163mp4) are placed above the fuse (glass tube fuse 163mp5) fixed in the fuse holder.

In the past, gaming machines have been proposed that have multiple slits in components to dissipate heat from the control device (for example, JP 2023-124739 A). However, if dust floating around in the gaming island enters the power supply board box through the slits and adheres to the fuse, it can be difficult to determine whether the fuse has blown. In contrast, Technical Concept 5 above eliminates the need to protect the fuse with a dedicated component to prevent dust from coming into contact with the fuse. Electronic components mounted on the power supply board prevent dust from coming into contact with the fuse, and dust from adhering to and accumulating on the fuse can be prevented. This maintains the visibility of the fuse, making it easier to determine whether it has blown.

[Technical philosophy 6]
When the performance control board box is attached to the rear side of the game board, a surface-mounted (SMD) type chip fuse (90mza) that is not fixed by the fuse holder is soldered to the performance control board, and an area (prohibited mounting area 90mz) where electronic components are not placed is formed around the chip fuse.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed that have multiple slits in components to dissipate heat from the control device (for example, JP 2023-124739 A). However, if a large current flows through the control device, important electronic components are damaged and cannot be reused. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 6 above, a surface-mounted chip fuse is mounted on the performance control board. Even if a large current flows through the performance control board, the chip fuse generates heat, melting the fuse membrane inside the chip fuse, preventing damage to the performance control microprocessor, a critical electronic component. This allows the performance control microprocessor, a critical electronic component, to be reused. If an overcurrent flows through the chip fuse, the chip fuse generates heat, melting the fuse membrane inside the chip fuse, which could affect electronic components around the chip fuse. Therefore, by not placing electronic components around the chip fuse, even if an overcurrent flows through the chip fuse and generates heat, it is possible to prevent electronic components from melting due to the heat.

[Technical philosophy 7]
The electrical substrate includes:
A plurality of thermal through holes (162td) through which lead wires connected to ground among the lead wires of various electronic components are inserted.
is further formed,
the thermal through-hole electrically connects the solid ground of the second electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the second electronic component non-mounting surface,
In the power supply board, the lead wires of the various electronic components that are connected to ground are inserted from the second electronic component mounting surface into the thermal through holes and protrude from the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and are soldered to the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and the ratio of the multiple second ground through holes to the multiple thermal through holes is higher.

In the past, gaming machines have been proposed that prevent noise from affecting the control board by connecting the earth part connected to the power supply to the control board (for example, JP 2017-221609 A). However, there is still room for improvement in technology for further strengthening the ground and stabilizing the potential that serves as the reference for the operation of electronic components. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 7 above, by having a higher ratio of second ground through holes than thermal through holes, it is possible to stabilize the reference potential for the operation of electronic components for electronic components with lead wires connected to ground (GND).

[Technical philosophy 8]
As described above, the following configurations are possible for a gaming machine in which the through holes in the gaming control board 80 are filled with solder.
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
In at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate, the through holes are filled with a metal member to form a non-through hole.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Traditionally, through-holes in game control boards have not been filled with solder. In this case, there is a risk of problems such as dust accumulating inside the through-holes or the inner walls of the through-holes corroding due to moisture. In contrast, by filling the through-holes in game control boards with solder, dust accumulation and corrosion can be prevented, making problems less likely to occur and allowing players to play smoothly, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Warp section structure]
Figure 99 is a front right perspective view enlarging part F in Figure 72. The structure of the warp section 12 will be described with reference to Figure 99.

The warp section 12 is located on the lower left of the center decorative body 10 and has an entrance section 12a through which game balls flow and an exit section 12b through which game balls flow. It is a structure that allows game balls that flow in through the entrance section 12a to flow out from the exit section 12b onto the stage section 11. The stage section 11 has a shape that can guide game balls rolling on the top surface of the stage section 11 toward the first starting hole 20, so that game balls that enter the warp section 12 have a higher probability of entering the first starting hole 20.

Here, as shown in Figure 99, the warp section 12 has a structure including a tunnel section 12c between the entrance section 12a and the exit section 12b. The tunnel section 12c has a first bend 12ca and a second bend 12cb.

The section of tunnel 12c between entrance 12a and first bend 12ca is arranged along the play area 3A, with entrance 12a located higher than first bend 12ca. Therefore, between entrance 12a and first bend 12ca, game balls flow downward from entrance 12a toward first bend 12ca, roughly on the same plane as play area 3A.

The section of tunnel section 12c between first bend 12ca and second bend 12cb is structured so that it extends from first bend 12ca to second bend 12cb toward the rear side of the gaming machine 1 (the back side as seen by the player), with first bend 12ca located higher than second bend 12cb. Therefore, between first bend 12ca and second bend 12cb, gaming balls flow from first bend 12ca toward the rear side of the gaming machine 1 (the back side as seen by the player) and down to second bend 12cb.

The section of tunnel 12c between second bend 12cb and exit 12b is arranged along left play area 3A, with second bend 12cb located higher than exit 12b. Therefore, between second bend 12cb and exit 12b, the game ball flows downward from second bend 12cb toward exit 12b on a surface that is roughly parallel to the plane of left play area 3A and closer to the rear of the gaming machine 1 than the plane of left play area 3A.

The first bent portion 12ca and the second bent portion 12cb may be curved, for example, rather than bent. While the tunnel portion 12c is configured to have, from top to bottom, the entrance portion 12a, the first bent portion 12ca, the second bent portion 12cb, and the exit portion 12b, this is not a limitation. For example, the first bent portion 12ca and the second bent portion 12cb may be horizontally adjacent. The tunnel portion 12c does not necessarily have to be a tunnel, as long as its structure reduces the possibility of collision with other game balls deflected by obstacles such as the obstacle nails 45 provided in the left game area 3A. For example, a gap may be provided.

By configuring the warp section 12 as described above, game balls flowing out of the warp section 12 move generally parallel to the plane of the left play area 3A and on a plane closer to the rear of the gaming machine 1 than the plane of the left play area 3A. Therefore, game balls moving through the stage 11 can move generally parallel to the plane of the left play area 3A and on a plane closer to the rear of the gaming machine 1 than the plane of the left play area 3A. This reduces the likelihood of a game ball colliding with another game ball deflected by an obstacle peg 45 or the like provided in the left play area 3A and falling from the stage 11 without entering the first starting hole 20. This reduces the likelihood of the player feeling disappointed and increases the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by having the game balls flowing out of the warp section 12 move roughly parallel to the plane of the left game area 3A and on a plane closer to the rear of the game machine 1 than the plane of the left game area 3A, the structure of the stage 11 is simplified, and game balls that fall from the stage 11 into the first starting hole 20 without winning can be reduced, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by configuring the warp section 12 as described above, the warp section 12 has a tunnel structure from the entrance section 12a to the exit section 12b. As a result, a game ball that enters the warp section 12 from the entrance section 12a will not move to a position where it cannot exit onto the stage 11 due to collisions with other game balls repelled by obstacle nails 45 installed in the left game area 3A, until it exits onto the stage 11 from the exit section 12b. This makes it possible to have a very high probability of game balls that enter the warp section 12 from the entrance section 12a exit onto the stage 11, reducing the likelihood of players feeling disappointed when a game ball that enters the warp section 12 from the entrance section 12a does not exit onto the stage 11, and making the game more enjoyable.

The technical concept behind the provision of the warp section will be described in detail below.
The following configurations are possible for gaming machines equipped with a warp section having the above-described structure.
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
The special flow path is
A tunnel section (12c) is provided to prevent the game balls from flowing into other flow paths,
The flow path of the tunnel section is provided so as to be on the rear side of the play area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Technical philosophy 1]
In conventional gaming machines, the path structure that guides game balls that have flowed down the game area to the stage is not tunnel-shaped, and because it collides with other game balls flowing down the game area, it is sometimes not possible to guide the game ball to the stage, which can disappoint the player.In contrast, in gaming machines equipped with the warp section path as described above, the warp section has a tunnel-shaped structure, making it possible to guide the game ball to the stage without interference from other game balls, which can prevent player disappointment and increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Technical philosophy 2]
In addition, in conventional gaming machines, the passageway that guides game balls that have flowed down the game area to the stage is designed so that the surface on which the game balls flow down the passageway is flush with the game area. In this case, the stage structure becomes complex in order to make the balls enter the center hole from the stage, and there is a possibility that more game balls will fall from the stage without entering the center hole. In contrast, in gaming machines equipped with the above-mentioned warp section passageway, the tunnel section flow path is located behind the game area, which simplifies the stage structure and prevents game balls from falling from the stage without entering the center hole, thereby reducing the possibility of player disappointment and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Configuration of gaming machine frame 50]
The configuration of the gaming machine frame 50 will be described with reference to Figure 100. Figure 100 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the gaming machine frame 50. As described above, the gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) 51 that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame 51. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit that is disposed in front of the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52.

As shown in Figure 100, the inner frame 52 is attached to the left end of the outer frame 51 by a member that can be opened and closed like a door, such as a hinge. The outer frame 51 is a part that secures the gaming machine 1 itself to the outside. Therefore, by securing the inner frame 52 to the outer frame 51 as described above, even when the gaming machine 1 is secured to the outside, it is possible to turn on the power to the gaming machine 1 and perform operations such as maintenance on the main control board 80 and sub-control board 90 located on the back side of the inner frame 52.

As shown in Figure 100, the front frame 53 is attached to the left end of the inner frame 52 by a member that can be opened and closed like a door, such as a hinge. In addition, a glass unit 57 is provided to cover the opening 54 of the front frame. This glass unit 57 is provided for the purposes of preventing game balls from flying out toward the player from the play area 3 and preventing players from touching game balls flowing down the play area 3, thereby preventing illegal play. By fixing the front frame 53 to the inner frame 52 as described above, if a ball jam occurs in the play area 3 during play, it can be addressed by opening and closing only the front frame 53, allowing staff at the pachinko parlor where the gaming machine 1 is in operation to respond quickly.

The upper left area of the inner frame 52 shown in Figure 100 will be referred to as the H area, the upper right area as the I area, the lower left area as the J area, and the lower right area as the K area. The upper left area of the back surface of the front frame 53 (as viewed from the back) will be referred to as the L area.

[Read code]
The reading code provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described using Figures 101 to 103. Figure 101 is an enlarged and simplified front view of areas H and I in Figure 100. Figure 102 is an enlarged and simplified front view of areas J and K in Figure 100. Figure 103 is a simplified view of the top and right side of cover member 431 and the right side of cover member 441.

The gaming machine 1 is equipped with readable codes on all its components that can read information. Examples of such readable codes include QR Codes (registered trademark). In the following, all readable codes on the gaming machine 1 are assumed to be QR Codes (registered trademark), but this is not a limitation and they may also be one-dimensional barcodes such as CODE39. Furthermore, among the readable codes on the gaming machine 1, the information that can be obtained by reading the readable codes described below is assumed to be information that does not need to be obtained by the player, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine 1. In contrast, readable codes that can read information that the player may prefer to obtain, such as information about the specifications of the gaming machine 1 (such as the probability of a jackpot in the Special Chart 1 lottery or the probability of initiating a time-saving game mode after a jackpot game) or information about data from past games played on the gaming machine 1, are preferably displayed in a location that is easily readable by the player, such as on the front side (player side) of the front frame 53 of the gaming machine 1 or on the display screen 7a.

First, we will explain the read code displayed in inner frame 53. Inner frame 53 displays multiple read codes, and the following explains four of them. Note that it is not necessary for at least one of the four read codes described below to be included.

First, as shown in the upper diagram of Figure 101, a read code QRU1, which is a QR code (registered trademark), is displayed in the upper left corner of the inner frame 52 (area H in Figure 100). This display may be a sticker or the like with the read code QRU1 printed on it, or the read code QRU1 may be printed on a component that makes up the inner frame 52. This read code QRU1 is displayed in a position that is not visible to the player when the front frame 53 is closed and the machine is ready to play. As mentioned above, the information that can be obtained by reading the read code QRU1 is information that does not need to be obtained by the player, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the read code QRU1 is displayed in an orientation that allows it to be read from the front side of the gaming machine 1 (the player's side).

Next, as shown in the lower diagram of Figure 101, a read code QRU2, which is a QR code (registered trademark), is displayed in the upper right corner of the inner frame 52 (area I in Figure 100). This display may be a sticker or the like with the read code QRU2 printed on it, or the read code QRU2 may be printed on a component that makes up the inner frame 52. This read code QRU2 is displayed in a position that is not visible to the player when the front frame 53 is closed and the machine is ready to play. As mentioned above, the information that can be obtained by reading the read code QRU2 is information that does not need to be obtained by the player, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the read code QRU2 is displayed in an orientation that allows it to be read from the front side (player side) of the gaming machine 1.

Next, as shown in the upper diagram of Figure 102, a read code QRU3, which is a QR code (registered trademark), is displayed in the lower left corner of the inner frame 52 (area J in Figure 100). This display may be a sticker or the like with the read code QRU3 printed on it, or the read code QRU3 may be printed on a component that makes up the inner frame 52. This read code QRU3 is displayed in a position that is not visible to the player when the front frame 53 is closed and the machine is ready to play. As mentioned above, the information that can be obtained by reading the read code QRU3 is information that does not need to be obtained by the player, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the read code QRU3 is displayed in an orientation that allows it to be read from the front side (player side) of the gaming machine 1.

Next, as shown in the lower diagram of Figure 102, a read code QRU4, which is a QR code (registered trademark), is displayed in the lower left corner of the inner frame 52 (area K in Figure 100). This display may be a sticker or the like with the read code QRU4 printed on it, or the read code QRU4 may be printed on a component that makes up the inner frame 52. This read code QRU4 is displayed in a position that is not visible to the player when the front frame 53 is closed and the machine is ready to play. As mentioned above, the information that can be obtained by reading the read code QRU4 is information that does not need to be obtained by the player, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the read code QRU4 is displayed in an orientation that allows it to be read from the front side (player side) of the gaming machine 1.

Next, we will explain the read codes displayed on the game control board box 430 and the payout control board box 440, both of which are located on the back side of the gaming machine 1 (opposite the player side). Multiple read codes are displayed on the game control board box 430 and the payout control board box 440, and three of these will be explained below. Note that it is not necessary to have at least one of the three read codes described below, and other read codes may also be included. Read codes may also be displayed on the presentation control board box 420 and the power supply board box 450. Read codes may also be displayed on the boards provided on each board box.

First, we will explain the read code displayed on the gaming control board box 430, as shown in the upper and lower left diagrams of Figure 103. In the gaming control board box 430, the read code QRT is displayed on the top surface of the cover member 431, and the read code QRS1 is displayed on the right side of the cover member 431. These displays may be made by attaching a sticker or the like with the read code QRT or read code QRS1 printed on it, or the read code QRT or read code QRS1 may be printed on the cover member 431. In addition, the read code may be displayed on other components included in the gaming control board box 430 (for example, the gaming control board 80 or components that make up the gaming control board 80). The read codes QRT and QRS1 displayed on the gaming control board box 430 are both displayed in a position that is not visible to the player when the front frame 53 is closed and the gaming machine is ready to play, and as described above, the information that can be obtained by reading the read codes QRT and QRS1 is information that does not need to be obtained by the player, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the read code QRT is displayed in an orientation that allows it to be read from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (the side opposite the player), and the read code QRS1 is displayed in an orientation that allows it to be read from the right side of the gaming machine 1 (as viewed from the player).

Next, we will explain the read code displayed on the payout control board box 440, as shown in the lower right diagram of Figure 103. In the payout control board box 440, the read code QRS2 is displayed on the right side of the cover member 441. This display may be a sticker or the like with the read code QRS2 printed on it, or the read code QRS2 may be printed on the cover member 441. The read code may also be displayed on other components of the payout control board box 440 (e.g., the payout control board 110 or components that constitute the payout control board 110). The read code QRS2 displayed on the payout control board box 440 is displayed in a position that is not visible to the player when the front frame 53 is closed and the machine is ready to play. As described above, the information that can be obtained by reading the read code QRS2 is information that does not need to be obtained by the player, such as information about the components that constitute the gaming machine 1. Additionally, the reading code QRS2 is displayed in an orientation that allows it to be read from the right side of the gaming machine 1 (as viewed from the player's side).

As described above, the read codes displayed on the inner frame 52 and on components (such as the game control board box 430 and payout control board box 440) located on the back side (opposite the player side) of the gaming machine 1 are all displayed in positions that are not easily readable by the player, and the information that can be obtained by reading them is information that the player does not need to obtain, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine 1. This increases the likelihood that players will enjoy playing without expending unnecessary effort obtaining information that they do not need. Furthermore, read codes that can read information that players may prefer to obtain are displayed in positions that are easily readable by the player, such as on the front side (player side) of the front frame 53 of the gaming machine 1 or on the display screen 7a, allowing players to easily obtain the information and increasing the likelihood that they will enjoy playing.

Furthermore, by reading at least one of the read codes displayed on the inner frame 52 and on components (such as the gaming control board box 430 and payout control board box 440) located on the back side (opposite the player side) of the gaming machine 1, it is possible to obtain information necessary during the manufacturing and assembly process of the gaming machine 1, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the read codes displayed on the inner frame 52 are displayed in an orientation that allows them to be read from the front side (player side) of the gaming machine 1, while the read codes displayed on the gaming control board box 430 and payout control board box 440 are displayed so that they can be read from the right side of the gaming machine 1 (as seen from the player side) or the back side (opposite the player side) of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, since the read codes can be read from any direction, workers can easily obtain information during the manufacturing and assembly process, which increases the likelihood that manufacturing and assembly work will proceed smoothly.

The technical concept behind the provision of the above-mentioned read code will be described in detail below.
[Technical philosophy 1, 2]
The following configurations are possible for gaming machines equipped with the above-described read code.
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
The gaming machine displays a first read code (QRU1 to 4) that can be read from a first direction, a second read code (QRT) that can be read from a second direction different from the first direction, and a third read code (QRS1, 2) that can be read from a third direction different from the first direction and the second direction,
At least one of the first read codes is displayed in the inner frame and is difficult for a player to see,
At least one of the second read codes is displayed on the game control unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In conventional gaming machines, the read code was displayed in a position where it could be read by the player, even if the information that could be obtained by reading it was information that the player did not need to obtain, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine. In this case, the player would have to spend time obtaining unnecessary information, which was likely to interfere with smooth gameplay. In contrast, in a gaming machine that displays read codes in a position where they cannot be read by the player, even if the information that can be obtained by reading it is information that the player does not need to obtain, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine, the player is more likely to be able to play smoothly without having to spend time obtaining unnecessary information, which can improve the enjoyment of the game (Technical Concept 1).

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, readable codes, which can be read to obtain information needed during the manufacturing and assembly process, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine, are displayed so that they can be read in a uniform direction. This can make it difficult for workers to obtain information during the manufacturing and assembly process, increasing the likelihood of delays in manufacturing and assembly work. In contrast, in gaming machines where readable codes displayed in the inner frame are displayed in an orientation that allows them to be read from the front of the machine (the player's side), and readable codes displayed on the gaming control board box and payout control board box are displayed so that they can be read from the right side of the machine (as seen from the player's side) or the back side of the machine (the side opposite the player's side), workers can easily read readable codes that can be read to obtain information needed during the manufacturing and assembly process, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine, allowing work to be carried out more smoothly (Technical Concept 2).

[Large diameter screw]
The large diameter screw 79 used to fasten a specific member when provided in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figure 104. Figure 104 is an enlarged and simplified front view of area L in Figure DA2.

The front frame 53 is equipped with a handle 60, sub-display screens 64 (right sub-display screen 64R, left sub-display screen 64L, and top sub-display screen 64U), frame lamps 66, a select button 68, an audio button 55, a brightness button 56, and a speaker 67. The front frame 53 is also equipped with actuators for operating these components, sensors for detecting their operation, and wiring for connecting these components to a control unit (e.g., a microcomputer). However, because the front frame 53 is frequently opened and closed when a problem such as ball jamming occurs in the play area 3, there is a possibility that the above-mentioned components and wiring may be damaged. To prevent this, a covering member 96 is provided on the back side of the front frame 53. As shown in Figure 104, large-diameter screws 79 are used to secure the covering member 96 to the front frame 53. Specifically, the covering member 96 is provided on the back side of the upper part of the front frame, near the location where the speaker 67 and other components are attached.

Next, we will explain the large diameter screw 79. The large diameter screw 79 is called a large diameter screw 79 because the diameter of its head, not its threaded portion, is large. In addition, the head of the large diameter screw 79 has a groove to prevent slipping. Therefore, the large diameter screw 79 can be attached and removed by turning it with a Phillips screwdriver, and can also be attached and removed by hand.

By using this large-diameter screw 79 to secure the covering member 96 to the front frame 53, if any trouble occurs with a game-related component attached to the front frame 53, such as the speaker 67, the covering member 96 can be easily removed, allowing for quick troubleshooting. It also makes it easy to replace or perform maintenance on components attached to the front frame 53.

The technical concept behind the large diameter screw described above will be described in detail below.
[Technical philosophy 1]
The following configurations are possible for gaming machines equipped with the large diameter screws described above.
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
The predetermined fixing member is different from the part for attaching the game board to the inner frame, and can release the attachment of the specific component to the front frame without using a tool.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In conventional gaming machines, screws that require operation with a screwdriver are used to secure parts located on the front frame and other components. In this case, when removing the screws due to component failure or maintenance, it can be difficult to do so smoothly, and if a problem occurs during play, the player may be unable to play for an extended period of time. In contrast, when using large-diameter screws that can be attached and removed by hand as described above, quick operation is possible in the event of component failure or maintenance, and even if a problem occurs during play, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to play for an extended period of time, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Initial Operation of Lamp 66]
105, the initial operation of the lamp 66 will be described. As described above, the initial operation is an operation for checking whether or not each component constituting the gaming machine 1 (such as the display screen 7a and the movable parts 14 and 15) operates normally when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started. That is, the initial operation of the lamp 66 is an operation for checking whether or not the lamp 66 can emit light normally.

Figure 105 is a diagram illustrating the lamp 66 light emission pattern determination table LT. The performance control microcomputer 91 refers to this lamp 66 light emission pattern determination table LT to determine the light emission pattern of the lamp 66 and sends a signal to the lamp 66 to emit light according to the selected light emission pattern. As shown in Figure 105, in the initial operation when RAM is cleared, light emission pattern LPS1 is selected as the light emission pattern of the lamp 66. Also, in the initial operation when RAM is not cleared (simply powered on), light emission pattern LPS2 is selected as the light emission pattern of the lamp 66. When a demo screen is displayed, light emission pattern LPD is selected as the light emission pattern of the lamp 66. Also, when a variable performance is being performed, one of light emission patterns LP1 to LP26 is selected as the light emission pattern of the lamp 66 by referring to the light emission pattern random number, or a random number related to one of the performances, and the core performance pattern. Furthermore, when a winning game is being played, either light emission pattern LP27 or LP28 is selected as the light emission pattern for lamp 66 depending on the light emission pattern random number or a random number related to one of the effects.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the gaming machine 1 may refer to the lamp 66 light emission pattern determination table LTA shown in FIG. 106 instead of the lamp 66 light emission pattern determination table LT shown in FIG. 105 to determine the light emission pattern of the lamp 66 and send a signal to the lamp 66 to emit light according to the selected light emission pattern. The lamp 66 light emission pattern determination table LTA shown in FIG. 106 is configured so that the light emission pattern selected in the initial operation when RAM has not been cleared (simply powered on) and the light emission pattern selected when a demo screen is displayed are both light emission pattern LPS2A.

[Difference between the light emission pattern during the initial operation of the lamp 66 and the light emission pattern during the performance]
As described above, when the light emission pattern of the lamp 66 is determined by referring to the light emission pattern determination table LT for the lamp 66, the light emission pattern of the lamp 66 in the initial operation of the lamp 66 is configured to be different from the light emission pattern of the lamp 66 during normal play. This prevents the player from mistaking the initial operation of the lamp 66 for a variable effect or a winning game effect, and allows the player to proceed with the game without misunderstanding.

In addition, by configuring the lighting pattern of the lamp 66 when the RAM has been cleared to be different from the lighting pattern of the lamp 66 when the RAM has not been cleared (when the power is simply turned on), when the gaming machine 1 is turned on, staff at the gaming machine parlor where the gaming machine 1 is in operation can determine whether the RAM has been cleared and easily grasp the situation.

When the lamp 66 light emission pattern determination table LTA shown in Figure 106 is referenced to determine the lamp 66 light emission pattern, the light emission pattern selected for the initial operation when RAM has not been cleared (simply powered on) and the light emission pattern selected when a demo screen is displayed are both configured to be light emission pattern LPS2A. This eliminates the change in the light emission mode of the lamp 66 when the demo screen is displayed after power has been turned on without RAM being cleared, making it possible to produce a seamless light emission effect and reducing the possibility of the player misunderstanding the light emission effect.

The light emission pattern of the lamp 66 may be the same as the light emission pattern of the lamp 66 when RAM clearing has been performed and when RAM clearing has not been performed (when the power is simply turned on). In this case, the player will be unable to tell whether RAM clearing has been performed or not, which will create anticipation for the game when RAM clearing has not been performed, and will increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the lighting pattern of the lamp 66 may be the same for the initial operation of the lamp 66 when a RAM clear has been performed, the initial operation of the lamp 66 when a RAM clear has not been performed (when the power is simply turned on), and the lighting pattern selected when a demo screen is displayed. In this case, regardless of whether a RAM clear has been performed or not, there will be no change in the lighting state of the lamp 66 when the demo screen is displayed after the power is turned on, making it possible to provide a more seamless lighting effect, further reducing the possibility that a player will misunderstand the lighting effect.

In addition, as long as the light emission pattern of the lamp 66 is configured so that the light emission pattern for the initial operation of the lamp 66 is different from the light emission pattern when a variable effect is being performed and when a winning game is being played, the light emission patterns are not limited to those shown in the lamp 66 light emission pattern determination tables LT and LTA in Figures 105 and 106.

At least a lamp 66 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "frame lamp 66") is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the front frame 52. When power is restored, the gaming machine 1 can be powered on by pressing the power switch 163 without pressing the RAM clear switch 161, or by pressing the power switch 163 while pressing the RAM clear switch 161. In the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, power will be restored in the same state as when the gaming machine 1 is powered on by pressing the power switch 163. In this way, when power is restored, if the gaming machine 1 is turned on by pressing the power switch 163 without pressing the RAM clear switch 161, the light emission pattern LPS2 in the initial operation of the lamp 66 light emission pattern determination table TL and the light emission pattern LPS2A in the initial operation of the lamp 66 light emission pattern determination table TLA become the light emission modes for when power is restored, and if the gaming machine 1 is turned on by pressing the power switch 163 while pressing the RAM clear switch 161, the light emission pattern LPS1 in the initial operation of the lamp 66 light emission pattern determination table TL and the light emission pattern LPS1 in the initial operation of the lamp 66 light emission pattern determination table TLA become the light emission modes for when power is restored. The light-emitting modes of the frame lamp 66 include at least light-emitting patterns LPS1 and LPS2 in the initial operation of the lamp 66 light-emitting pattern determination table TL and light-emitting patterns LPS1 and LPS2A in the initial operation of the lamp 66 light-emitting pattern determination table TLA, which are light-emitting modes for when power is restored if no malfunction of the gaming machine occurs when power is restored, and light-emitting patterns LP1 to LP28 in the variable effects and winning games of the lamp 66 light-emitting pattern determination table TL and light-emitting patterns LP1 to LP28 in the variable effects and winning games of the lamp 66 light-emitting pattern determination table TLA, which are multiple types of light-emitting modes for when a performance is performed, and the light-emitting mode for when power is restored and the multiple types of light-emitting modes for when a performance is performed are different light-emitting modes. In other words, when a performance is started after power is restored to the gaming machine 1, the light-emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 does not become the light-emitting mode for when power is restored, but becomes one of the multiple types of light-emitting modes for when a performance is performed. As a result, if the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 does not return to the power restoration mode when power is restored, there is a possibility that a malfunction has occurred in the gaming machine 1 when power is restored, so whether or not the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 returns to the power restoration mode when power is restored can contribute to the early detection of malfunctions in the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, even if fraudulent activity is committed by turning the power off and on to the gaming machine 1 through some fraudulent means, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 will return to the power restoration mode when power is restored, thereby notifying hall staff or other attendants of the presence of the gaming machine 1 while power is being restored, thereby contributing to the early detection of fraudulent activity.

In this embodiment, the frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, as described above. The right frame lamp is a diagonally shaped light-emitting element located between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the right sub-display screen 64R, and the left frame lamp is a diagonally shaped light-emitting element located between the upper sub-display screen 64U and the left sub-display screen 64L. The frame lamp 66 may be configured such that the entire left edge of the front of the left sub-display screen 64L is a left lamp, the entire upper edge of the front of the upper sub-display screen 64U is an upper lamp, and the entire right edge of the front of the right sub-display screen 64R is a right lamp. Even with this configuration, if the frame lamp 66 does not change to a power recovery light-emitting mode upon power restoration, a malfunction may have occurred in the gaming machine 1. Therefore, whether or not the frame lamp 66 changes to a power restoration light-emitting mode upon power restoration can contribute to early detection of malfunctions in the gaming machine 1. Furthermore, even if someone commits fraud by turning the power off and on to the gaming machine 1 through some fraudulent means, the frame lamp 66 will change to a power restoration light emission mode when power is restored, thereby notifying hall staff and other attendants of the presence of the gaming machine 1 while power is being restored, thereby contributing to the early detection of fraudulent activity.

The technical concept behind the difference between the light emission pattern during the initial operation of the lamp 66 and the light emission pattern during the performance will be described in detail below.
[Technical philosophy 1, 2]
The following configuration is conceivable as a gaming machine in which the light emission pattern during the initial operation of the lamp as described above is different from the light emission pattern during the performance.
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
The performance control unit
In the initial light emission, the lamp is illuminated in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode in the variable performance that notifies the result of the special drawing lottery and the winning game performance that is performed after the result of the special drawing lottery is a winning.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Conventionally, the lighting pattern of the lamps on a gaming machine immediately after the machine is first powered on is the same as, or very similar to, the lighting pattern of the lamps used during variable effects and effects during winning games. In this case, there is a possibility that a player may mistakenly believe that a winning opportunity has arrived, even though it was immediately after the machine was first powered on. In contrast, with a gaming machine in which the lighting pattern of the lamps during initial operation is different from the lighting pattern during effects, a player can easily determine whether the lamp is lighting up due to their own play or the lamp lighting up immediately after the machine is first powered on. This increases the likelihood that the player will be able to play without suffering any disadvantages, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game (Technical Concept 1).

Furthermore, in the past, the lighting pattern of the lamps on a gaming machine during initial operation after a RAM clear was performed was the same as the lighting pattern of the lamps on the gaming machine during initial operation when a RAM clear was not performed. In this case, staff at the gaming machine parlor where the gaming machine was in operation could not confirm whether a RAM clear had been performed, and could not smoothly perform the operation to power on the gaming machine. In contrast, with a gaming machine where the lighting pattern of the lamps on the gaming machine during initial operation after a RAM clear is different from the lighting pattern of the lamps on the gaming machine during initial operation when a RAM clear is not performed, staff at the gaming machine parlor where the gaming machine is in operation can immediately recognize whether a RAM clear has been performed and can smoothly perform the operation to power on the gaming machine (Technical Concept 2).

[Technical philosophy 3]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
On the front side of the front frame,
Frame lamp (66) in place
At least one
The light emission mode of the frame lamp is as follows:
A light-emitting mode for when power is restored that is emitted when no malfunction of the gaming machine occurs when power is restored (light-emitting patterns LPS1 and LPS2 in the initial operation of the light-emitting pattern determination table TL of the lamp 66, and light-emitting patterns LPS1 and LPS2A in the initial operation of the light-emitting pattern determination table TLA of the lamp 66);
A plurality of types of light-emitting modes for effects that are emitted during effects (light-emitting patterns LP1 to LP28 in the variable effects of the lamp 66 light-emitting pattern determination table TL and in the winning game, and light-emitting patterns LP1 to LP28 in the variable effects of the lamp 66 light-emitting pattern determination table TLA and in the winning game),
There is at least
The light-emitting mode for power recovery and the plurality of types of light-emitting modes for performance are different light-emitting modes,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Gaming machines with decorative lamps on the front frame have been proposed in the past (for example, JP 2017-051742 A). However, the lighting pattern of the decorative lamp could not be used to indicate whether a malfunction had occurred in the gaming machine when power was restored. In contrast, according to Technical Concept 3 above, if the lighting pattern of the decorative lamp does not change to the power restoration lighting pattern when power is restored, there is a possibility that a malfunction had occurred in the gaming machine when power was restored. Therefore, whether the lighting pattern of the decorative lamp changes to the power restoration lighting pattern when power was restored can contribute to the early detection of malfunctions in the gaming machine.

[Effect of Initial Operation of Lamp 66]
In the past, the initial operation of the lamp LED was to light up a variable effect pattern. Therefore, when a player saw the light up pattern of the variable effect, they could mistakenly believe that a highly anticipated effect was being performed, which caused players to feel uncomfortable.

In this embodiment, the initial operation of the lamp LED is to light up in a different pattern from the lighting pattern of the variable effects, which does not mislead the player into thinking that a highly anticipated effect is being performed, and does not cause the player any discomfort. As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

[Rail structure]
Figure 107 is an enlarged front view of part G in Figure 72, and a cross-sectional view taken along line gg in the front view. The structure of the rail portion 4 will be described with reference to Figure 107.

The rail portion 4 is a curved, plate-like member located at the left end of the play area 3 of the game board 2. It is launched by operating the handle 60 and guides game balls that pass through the launch path 4C between the rail portion 4 and the third wall portion 273 toward the top of the play area 3. Furthermore, the rail portion 4 is made of a metal material such as aluminum, rather than the resin used for the play area 3 of the game board 2. This allows the rail portion 4 to have the durability and toughness necessary to guide game balls traveling at extremely high speeds along the launch path 4C immediately after being launched from the launch device 112 toward the top of the play area 3. This reduces the likelihood of game play being interrupted by damage to the rail portion 4, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

Here, as shown in the upper diagram of Figure 107, the rail portion 4 is positioned along the left end of the play area 3, i.e., the boundary between the left play area 3A and the inner frame 52. However, rather than being in contact with the inner frame 52, it is positioned so that a gap 4A is provided between it and the inner frame 52.

By positioning the rail section 4 so that there is a gap 4A between it and the inner frame 52, there is space for the rail section 4 to elastically deform when a gaming ball passing through the launching passage 4C collides with it. This reduces the risk of plastic deformation such as dents occurring in the area of the rail section 4 that collides with a gaming ball passing through the launching passage 4C, or damage such as fracture of the rail section 4 itself, which could hinder the guidance of a gaming ball passing through the launching passage 4C upward into the playing area 3.

In addition, when a gaming ball passing through the launch passage 4C hits the rail section 4, the rail section 4 bends, absorbing the energy of the collision and making it possible to reduce the impact noise. This reduces the noise generated when the gaming ball is launched, reducing the likelihood of it interfering with the sound effects output from the speaker 67 of the gaming machine 1 and making the game more enjoyable.

[Rail plate]
Next, the plate portion 78 provided in association with the rail portion 4 will be described with reference to Figure 107. As shown in the upper diagram of Figure 107, the plate portion 78 is intended to cover the glass unit 57 side of the launch passage 4C formed by the rail portion 4, the third wall portion 273, and the front surface 2aa of the game board 2a. The plate portion 78 is made of a transparent resin material.

If the launch path 4C were formed by the rail portion 4, the third wall portion 273, the front surface 2aa of the gaming board 2a, and the glass unit 57, as in conventional gaming machines, a gaming ball traveling at an extremely high speed along the launch path 4C immediately after being launched from the launch device 112 would collide with the glass unit 57, producing a loud impact sound, which would likely interfere with the sound effects output from the speaker 67 of the gaming machine 1. There was also a high possibility that the glass unit 57 would be damaged.

On the other hand, when a plate portion 78 is provided and the launch path 4C is formed by the rail portion 4, the third wall portion 273, the front surface 2aa of the gaming board 2a, and the plate portion 78 instead of the glass unit 57, as shown in the lower diagram of Figure 107, all of the walls of the launch path 4C excluding the rail portion 4 (the third wall portion 273, the front surface 2aa of the gaming board 2a, and the plate portion 78) are made of resin. This makes it possible to suppress the impact sound and reduce the possibility of damage when a gaming ball collides with the launch path 4C immediately after being launched from the launching device 112 and traveling at an extremely high speed. This has the effect of allowing the player to concentrate on the presentation, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The plate portion 78 may be integral with the third wall portion 273 of the gaming board 2a. The plate portion 78 may also be configured to cover the entire launch passage 4C. In this case, by attaching a light-emitting member to the plate 78, it may be possible to create a light-emitting effect when the gaming ball is launched.

The structure of the rail portion and the technical concept of the plate portion as described above will be described in detail below.
The following configurations are possible for gaming machines equipped with the rail structure and plate portion described above.
[Technical philosophy 1, 2]
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
The rail portion is
The gap (4A) is provided along the boundary surface between the game board and the inner frame, and between the boundary surface and the gap (4A),
A plate-like member made of metal and having a curved portion,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Technical philosophy 1]
Conventionally, the rail section, which guides a launched game ball into the play area, has been positioned so that it abuts the boundary between the game board and the inner frame. In this case, the impact of the game ball immediately after launch creates a loud noise that can interfere with the sound of the performance, and the guiding section is easily broken. In contrast, the rail section structure and the gaming machine equipped with Play 78 can reduce the sound when the game ball hits the rail section, suppressing the generation of noise that interferes with the sound of the performance and improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by providing a gap, the rail section has room to flex, which absorbs impact and makes it less likely to break. This reduces the likelihood that rail maintenance or malfunction will interfere with the game, improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Technical philosophy 2]
In addition, conventionally, the rails that guide the launched game balls into the play area have been made of resin parts, similar to game boards, and the flow path formed by the rails has been straight or curved. In this case, when a game ball traveling at high speed hits the rails immediately after being launched, it generates a loud noise that can interfere with the sound effects, and the guiding part is easily broken. In contrast, by constructing the rails from curved metal plate-like members, the impact angle with the game ball is reduced, and the rails themselves flex to absorb impact, making them less likely to break. This reduces the likelihood that rail maintenance or malfunctions will interfere with play, improving the enjoyment of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can achieve the following aspects.
[Aspect 1]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
Unit parts (a center unit 210, a prize winning slot unit 230, a reinforcement unit 250, a transparent cover unit 260) attached to the front side of the game board;
a launching device (112) attached to the inner frame below the game board and capable of launching game balls toward the game area;
A power supply board box (450) that houses a power supply board (162) attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board;
a game control board box (430) attached to the rear side of the game board and accommodating a game control board (80) on which a game control microprocessor (81) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted;
a presentation control board box (420) that is attached to the rear side of the game board at a position different from the game control board box and that houses a presentation control board (90) on which a presentation control microprocessor (91) capable of controlling the progress of presentations based on commands from the game control board is implemented;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
The game area includes:
A left side game area (3A) in which game balls can flow down the left side of the game area when viewed from the front of the game machine;
A right-side gaming area (3B) in which gaming balls can flow down the right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine;
a first protrusion (218) that prevents game balls launched by the launching device when the launch strength of the game balls does not reach a certain strength (a launch strength that exceeds the second protrusion (219)) from flowing down to the right game area and allows the game balls to flow down to the left game area;
a second protrusion (219) that prevents a game ball from flowing down to the right-side game area and allows the game ball to flow down to the left-side game area when the game ball is not blocked by the first protrusion when the game ball is launched by the launching device with a launch strength that does not reach the certain strength;
is established,
When the launching strength of the game ball by the launching device reaches the certain strength, the game ball is launched and flows down to the right game area without being blocked by the first protrusion and the second protrusion,
The performance control board box is
A first cover member (a cover member 421 for the performance control board box),
A first base member (a base member 422 for the performance control board box) that closes the opening of the first cover member;
It consists of
An air-cooling fan (172) is attached to the first cover member to circulate air in the performance control board box in a front-to-rear direction when the performance control board box is attached to the rear side of the game board,
The power supply board box includes:
A second cover member (power supply board box cover member 451),
a second base member (power supply board box base member 452) that closes the opening of the second cover member;
It consists of
When the power supply board box is attached to the rear side of the inner frame, a plurality of slits (451 a) are formed on the upper surface of the second cover member and arranged in a row at predetermined intervals,
The air in the performance control board box that is blown in the front-to-back direction by the air-cooling fan blows dust falling toward the upper side of the power supply board box in the front-to-back direction of the gaming machine, thereby preventing the dust from entering the power supply board box through the multiple slits,
The unit part includes:
A downstream surface (220c, 223c, 232c, 241c, 258c, 268c) on which the game ball can flow down;
An inclined portion (220a, 223a, 232a, 241a, 258a, 268a) connecting the flow-down surface and the play area;
through holes (220b, 223b, 232b, 233b, 241b, 258b, 268b) for inserting screws (screws 201) at predetermined positions on the flow-down surface;
is formed,
The unit part is fixed to the game board by inserting the screw from the front side of the flow-down surface into the through hole and screwing it to the front side of the game board, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down surface can come into contact with the head (NH) of the screw.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Gaming machines that suppress malfunctions are known in the past (see, for example, JP 2023-128131 A). In these gaming machines, for example, malfunctions in random number values are suppressed and appropriate random number values are updated. However, there are various types of malfunctions in gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in suppressing malfunctions in gaming machines. In contrast, this invention prevents dust from entering the power supply board box through multiple slits, thereby suppressing electrical malfunctions caused by accumulated dust in the power supply board. It also weakens the impact of game balls at the connection between the flow-down surface of the unit unit and the playing area of the gaming board, suppressing malfunctions such as damage or cracks to the flow-down surface of the unit unit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress malfunctions in gaming machines.

[Aspect 2]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
A unit portion (center unit 210) attached to the front side of the game board;
A power supply board box (450) that houses a power supply board (162) attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board;
a game control board box (430) attached to the rear side of the game board and accommodating a game control board (80) on which a game control microprocessor (81) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted;
a presentation control board box (420) that is attached to the rear side of the game board at a position different from the game control board box and that houses a presentation control board (90) that has a presentation control microprocessor (91) that can control the progress of presentations based on commands from the game control board;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
On the front side of the front frame,
Frame lamp (66) in place
At least one
The light emission mode of the frame lamp is as follows:
A light-emitting mode for when power is restored that is emitted when no malfunction of the gaming machine occurs when power is restored (light-emitting patterns LPS1 and LPS2 in the initial operation of the light-emitting pattern determination table TL of the lamp 66, and light-emitting patterns LPS1 and LPS2A in the initial operation of the light-emitting pattern determination table TLA of the lamp 66);
A plurality of types of light-emitting modes for effects that are emitted during effects (light-emitting patterns LP1 to LP28 in the variable effects of the lamp 66 light-emitting pattern determination table TL and in the winning game, and light-emitting patterns LP1 to LP28 in the variable effects of the lamp 66 light-emitting pattern determination table TLA and in the winning game),
There is at least
The light-emitting mode for power recovery and the plurality of types of light-emitting modes for performance are different light-emitting modes,
The game control board includes:
A first electronic component mounting surface (mounting surface 80m) on which various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are mounted;
a first electronic component non-mounting surface (non-mounting surface 80u) on the opposite side of the first electronic component mounting surface, on which various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are not mounted;
A plurality of first electronic component through holes (electronic component through holes 80ta) through which lead wires of various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are inserted;
a solid ground on the first electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground of 80 mg on the mounting surface side);
a solid ground on the first electronic component non-mounting surface (solid ground 80ug on the non-mounting surface);
a plurality of first ground through holes (ground through holes 80tc) that electrically connect the solid ground of the first electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the first electronic component non-mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the game control board, lead wires of various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are inserted from the first electronic component mounting surface into the first electronic component through holes and protrude from the first electronic component non-mounting surface, and soldered to the first electronic component non-mounting surface, and a higher proportion of the plurality of first ground through holes are filled with solder than those that are not filled with solder,
The power supply board includes:
a second electronic component mounting surface (mounting surface 162m) on which various electronic components are mounted;
a second electronic component non-mounting surface (non-mounting surface 162u) on the opposite side of the second electronic component mounting surface, on which various electronic components are not mounted;
a plurality of second electronic component through holes (electronic component through holes 162ta) through which lead wires of various electronic components are inserted;
a solid ground on the second electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground on the mounting surface side: 162 mg);
a solid ground on the second electronic component non-mounting surface (solid ground 162ug on the non-mounting surface);
a plurality of second ground through holes (ground through holes 162tc) that electrically connect the solid ground of the second electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the second electronic component non-mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the power supply board, lead wires of various electronic components are inserted from the second electronic component mounting surface into the second electronic component through holes and protrude from the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and are soldered on the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and a higher proportion of the second ground through holes are filled with solder than those that are not filled with solder,
The performance control board includes:
A third electronic component mounting surface (MPU mounting surface 90m) on which a plurality of electronic component pads on which various electronic components including the performance control microprocessor are mounted are formed;
A fourth electronic component mounting surface (MPU non-mounting surface 90u) is a surface opposite to the third electronic component mounting surface, and has a plurality of electronic component pads on which various electronic components not including the performance control microprocessor are mounted.
a solid ground on the third electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground of 90 mg on the MPU mounting surface side);
a solid ground on the fourth electronic component mounting surface (solid ground 90ug on the non-MPU mounting surface side);
a plurality of third ground through holes (ground through holes 90tc) electrically connecting the solid ground of the third electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the fourth electronic component mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the performance control board, various electronic components including the performance control microprocessor are soldered on the third electronic component mounting surface while being placed on electronic component pads, and various electronic components not including the performance control microprocessor are soldered on the fourth electronic component mounting surface while being placed on electronic component pads, and a higher proportion of the third ground through holes are not filled with solder than are filled with solder,
The unit part includes:
A downstream surface (220c, 223c, 232c, 241c, 258c, 268c) on which the game ball can flow down;
An inclined portion (220a, 223a, 232a, 241a, 258a, 268a) connecting the flow-down surface and the play area;
through holes (220b, 223b, 232b, 233b, 241b, 258b, 268b) for inserting screws (screws 201) at predetermined positions on the flow-down surface;
is formed,
The screw is inserted into the through hole from the front side of the flow-down surface and screwed to the front side of the game board, so that the unit part is fixed to the game board, and the game ball flowing down the flow-down surface can come into contact with the head (NH) of the screw.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Gaming machines that suppress malfunctions are known in the past (see, for example, JP 2023-128131 A). In these gaming machines, for example, malfunctions in random number values are suppressed and appropriate random number values are updated. However, there are various types of malfunctions in gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in suppressing malfunctions in gaming machines. In contrast, the present invention can prevent dust from accumulating in the multiple first ground through holes and multiple second ground through holes, thereby suppressing electrical malfunctions caused by accumulated dust in the gaming control board and power supply board. It also weakens the impact of gaming balls at the connection between the flow-down surface of the unit unit and the playing area of the gaming board, suppressing malfunctions such as damage and cracks to the flow-down surface of the unit unit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress malfunctions in gaming machines.

[Aspect 3]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
A power supply board box (450) that houses a power supply board (162) attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board;
a game control board box (430) attached to the rear side of the game board and accommodating a game control board (80) on which a game control microprocessor (81) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted;
a presentation control board box (420) that is attached to the rear side of the game board at a position different from the game control board box and that houses a presentation control board (90) that has a presentation control microprocessor (91) that can control the progress of presentations based on commands from the game control board;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
The game board has:
a display means (image display device 7) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A movable body (first movable device 14, second movable device 15) that can reciprocate from a retracted position to a predetermined position in front of the display means;
is established,
The performance control microprocessor
a first return operation control means (a movable part origin return process in step S4355 and a movable part initial operation process in step S4360) for checking the operation of the movable part when the movable part is waiting at the retracted position upon power restoration, or when the movable part is not waiting at the retracted position upon power restoration and a return operation is performed to return the movable part to the retracted position, causing the movable part to wait at the retracted position;
A second return operation control means (a movable role object origin return process in step S4355 and a movable role object initial operation process in step S4360) that executes a return operation to return the movable body to the retracted position when the movable body is not in standby at the retracted position even though the movable body has not been operated after power is restored, but does not check the operation of the movable body;
is at least feasible,
The performance control board box is
A first cover member (a cover member 421 for the performance control board box),
A first base member (a base member 422 for the performance control board box) that closes the opening of the first cover member;
It consists of
An air-cooling fan (172) is attached to the first cover member to flow air in the front and rear directions in the performance control board box when the performance control board box is attached to the rear side of the game board,
The power supply board box includes:
A second cover member (power supply board box cover member 451),
a second base member (power supply board box base member 452) that closes the opening of the second cover member;
It consists of
When the power supply board box is attached to the rear side of the inner frame, a plurality of slits (451 a) are formed on the upper surface of the second cover member and arranged in a row at predetermined intervals,
The air in the performance control board box that is blown in the front-to-back direction by the air-cooling fan blows dust that falls toward the upper side of the power supply board box in the front-to-back direction of the gaming machine, thereby preventing the dust from entering the power supply board box through the multiple slits,
The game board further has through holes (2ac) formed as pilot holes at positions where the obstacle nails (45) are to be planted.
The through hole has
a first color region (MCR);
a region of a second color (UCR) different from the first color;
There is,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Gaming machines that suppress malfunctions are known (see, for example, JP 2023-128131 A). In these gaming machines, for example, malfunctions in random numbers are suppressed and appropriate random numbers are updated. However, there are various types of malfunctions in gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in suppressing malfunctions in gaming machines. In contrast, this invention prevents dust from entering the power supply board box through multiple slits, thereby suppressing electrical malfunctions in the power supply board caused by accumulated dust. It is also possible to determine whether an obstructing nail is fixed in the through hole using the first color area and the second color area in the through hole, and suppress malfunctions such as a situation where, when an obstructing nail becomes dislodged, gaming balls tend to flow down toward a specific area, resulting in a high rate of balls landing in the starting hole. Therefore, it is possible to suppress malfunctions in gaming machines.

[Aspect 4]
An outer frame (51) fixed to the game island;
a front frame (53) attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and having an opening (54);
an inner frame (52) that is attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable and that is attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
a game board (2) that is detachably attached to the inner frame and that forms a game area (3) that is visible through the opening;
Unit parts (a center unit 210, a prize winning slot unit 230, a reinforcement unit 250, a transparent cover unit 260) attached to the front side of the game board;
A power supply board box (450) that houses a power supply board (162) attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board;
a game control board box (430) attached to the rear side of the game board and accommodating a game control board (80) on which a game control microprocessor (81) for controlling the progress of the game is mounted;
a presentation control board box (420) that is attached to the rear side of the game board at a position different from the game control board box and that houses a presentation control board (90) on which a presentation control microprocessor (91) capable of controlling the progress of presentations based on commands from the game control board is implemented;
A gaming machine (1) comprising:
The game control board includes:
A first electronic component mounting surface (mounting surface 80m) on which various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are mounted;
a first electronic component non-mounting surface (non-mounting surface 80u) on the opposite side of the first electronic component mounting surface, on which various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are not mounted;
A plurality of first electronic component through holes (electronic component through holes 80ta) through which lead wires of various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are inserted;
a solid ground on the first electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground of 80 mg on the mounting surface side);
a solid ground on the first electronic component non-mounting surface (solid ground 80ug on the non-mounting surface);
a plurality of first ground through holes (ground through holes 80tc) that electrically connect the solid ground of the first electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the first electronic component non-mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the game control board, lead wires of various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are inserted from the first electronic component mounting surface into the first electronic component through holes and protrude from the first electronic component non-mounting surface, and soldered to the first electronic component non-mounting surface, and a higher proportion of the plurality of first ground through holes are filled with solder than those that are not filled with solder,
The power supply board includes:
a second electronic component mounting surface (mounting surface 162m) on which various electronic components are mounted;
a second electronic component non-mounting surface (non-mounting surface 162u) on the opposite side of the second electronic component mounting surface, on which various electronic components are not mounted;
a plurality of second electronic component through holes (electronic component through holes 162ta) through which lead wires of various electronic components are inserted;
a solid ground on the second electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground on the mounting surface side: 162 mg);
a solid ground on the second electronic component non-mounting surface (solid ground 162ug on the non-mounting surface);
a plurality of second ground through holes (ground through holes 162tc) that electrically connect the solid ground of the second electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the second electronic component non-mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the power supply board, lead wires of various electronic components are inserted from the second electronic component mounting surface into the second electronic component through holes and protrude from the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and are soldered on the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and a higher proportion of the second ground through holes are filled with solder than those that are not filled with solder,
The performance control board includes:
A third electronic component mounting surface (MPU mounting surface 90m) on which a plurality of electronic component pads on which various electronic components including the performance control microprocessor are mounted are formed;
A fourth electronic component mounting surface (MPU non-mounting surface 90u) is a surface opposite to the third electronic component mounting surface, and has a plurality of electronic component pads on which various electronic components not including the performance control microprocessor are mounted.
a solid ground on the third electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground of 90 mg on the MPU mounting surface side);
a solid ground on the fourth electronic component mounting surface (a solid ground 90ug on the MPU non-mounting surface side);
a plurality of third ground through holes (ground through holes 90tc) electrically connecting the solid ground of the third electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the fourth electronic component mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the performance control board, various electronic components including the performance control microprocessor are soldered on the third electronic component mounting surface while being placed on electronic component pads, and various electronic components not including the performance control microprocessor are soldered on the fourth electronic component mounting surface while being placed on electronic component pads, and a higher proportion of the third ground through holes are not filled with solder than are filled with solder,
In the game board, a nail through hole (through hole 2ac) is formed as a pilot hole at a position where the obstacle nail (45) is to be planted,
The nail through holes include:
a first color region (MCR);
a region of a second color (UCR) different from the first color;
There are
The game board further has a through hole (2ad) for mounting the unit part,
The unit part includes:
a protrusion (protrusion 202) protruding rearward from the rear side of the unit portion at a position corresponding to the mounting through hole;
screw through holes (223b, 232b, 233b, 241b, 257b, 258b, 267b, 268b) arranged near the protrusion and through which a screw (screw 201) is inserted;
is formed,
The unit part is fixed to the game board by inserting the protrusion part into the mounting through hole, and inserting the screw from the front side of the unit part into the screw through hole and screwing it to the front side of the game board.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Gaming machines that suppress malfunctions are known (see, for example, JP 2023-128131 A). In these gaming machines, for example, malfunctions in random numbers are suppressed to update appropriate random numbers. However, there are various types of malfunctions in gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in suppressing malfunctions. In contrast, the present invention prevents dust from accumulating in multiple first ground through-holes and multiple second ground through-holes, thereby suppressing electrical malfunctions in the gaming control board and power supply board caused by accumulated dust. It is possible to determine whether an obstructing nail is fixed in the through-hole using the first color area and the second color area in the nail through-hole, suppressing malfunctions such as a situation where a dislodged nail causes gaming balls to flow toward a specific area, resulting in a high rate of balls entering the starting hole. Furthermore, by positioning the unit unit in the correct position at the front of the gaming board, the unit unit is not fixed to the gaming board in an awkward position, preventing undue force from being applied to the unit unit, thereby suppressing malfunctions in the unit unit. This helps prevent malfunctions in gaming machines.

[Aspect 5]
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
The rail portion is
The gap (4A) is provided along the boundary surface between the game board and the inner frame, and between the boundary surface and the gap (4A).
A plate-like member made of metal and having a curved portion,
The game area includes a first guide path (212, 213) that guides game balls to the first game area, and a second guide path (214, 215) that guides game balls to the second game area,
In a region where the first guideway and the second guideway branch off, a first convex portion (218) and a second convex portion (219) are provided.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Conventionally, the portion that guides a launched gaming ball into the play area is positioned so that it contacts the boundary between the gaming board and the inner frame. In this case, the impact of the launched gaming ball creates a loud noise that can interfere with the sound of the performance, making the guiding portion fragile. In contrast, the gaming machine described above, which has a rail structure and plate portion as described in [Rail Structure] and [Rail Plate], can reduce the sound when a gaming ball impacts the rail portion, suppressing the generation of noise that interferes with the sound of the performance and improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, the curved rail portion, made of metal, reduces the impact angle with the gaming ball and absorbs impact by bending, making it less likely to break. This reduces the likelihood that rail maintenance or malfunctions will interfere with play, improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, with a gaming machine equipped with a rail 4 structure and plate section, a plate made of resin material, instead of a glass unit, forms the path through which the gaming ball passes, which reduces breakage and reduces the likelihood that maintenance or malfunctions will interfere with play, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the past, even in a game state where left-handed hitting was recommended, if the strength of the game ball launched by operating the handle exceeded a predetermined strength, the intended left-handed hit could result in a right-handed hit. In contrast, in the gaming machine described above, by providing two protrusions (stepped portions) on the top of the center unit, only game balls launched with a launch strength that exceeds the two stepped portions will reach the right-hand game area (a right-handed hit). This prevents game balls from accidentally reaching the right-hand game area even in a game state where left-handed hitting is recommended, prevents players from losing game balls, and increases the enjoyment of the game.

[Aspect 6]
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
In the initial light emission, the lamp is illuminated in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode in the variable performance that notifies the result of the special drawing lottery and the winning game performance that is performed after the result of the special drawing lottery is a winning,
If the first movable part is stopped at a position different from the first origin position when power supply is started, the first movable part is moved to the first origin position, and then the initial operation is performed;
The demo image displays a static decorative pattern,
On the display screen,
After the initial display, the demo image can be displayed;
The content of the decorative pattern displayed in a stopped state in the demo image displayed after the initial display differs between when power supply is started in a state where the first operation unit is operated and when power supply is started in a state where the first operation unit is not operated.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the past, the lighting pattern of the lamps on a gaming machine immediately after the machine was first powered on was the same as, or very similar to, the lighting pattern of the lamps used during variable effects and winning game effects. In this case, there was a possibility that a player might mistakenly believe that a winning opportunity had arrived, even though it had only just been powered on. In contrast, with the gaming machine described above, the player can easily determine whether the lighting pattern of the lamps during initial operation is different from the lighting pattern during the effects, and whether the lighting is due to their own play, or the lighting of the lamps immediately after the machine was first powered on. This increases the likelihood that the player will be able to play without suffering any disadvantages, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the past, if a movable device was in a position other than its home position when power was first applied to a gaming machine, the initial operation of that movable device would not be performed, or it would perform its initial operation from the position where it was stopped. In this case, it was possible that the movable device would interfere with the initial operation of other movable devices and be damaged, or that the correct initial operation could not be performed, making it impossible to detect a malfunction. In contrast, in gaming machines like the one described above, the movable device performs its initial operation after returning to its home position, so that the correct initial operation is performed without interfering with the initial operation of other movable devices and being damaged, leading to the prevention of malfunctions and early detection.

In addition, conventionally, the decorative symbols displayed in demo images were completely random, regardless of circumstances such as when the RAM was cleared or when power was restored after a power outage. In such cases, staff at the gaming machine parlor where the gaming machine was in operation could not confirm whether the RAM had been cleared, and could not smoothly perform the operation to power on the gaming machine. In contrast, with gaming machines in which the decorative symbols displayed in demo images differ between when the RAM is cleared and when power is restored after a power outage, staff at the gaming machine parlor can immediately recognize whether the RAM has been cleared and can smoothly perform the operation to power on the gaming machine.

[Aspect 7]
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
The predetermined fixing member is different from the part for attaching the game board to the inner frame, and can release the attachment of the specific component to the front frame without using a tool,
The special flow path is
A tunnel section (12c) is provided to prevent the game balls from flowing into other flow paths,
The flow path of the tunnel section is provided on the rear side of the play area,
The game area has a first area formed by at least one of a first wall portion, a second wall portion, and a game nail, and in which a game ball can stay;
When the front frame is closed, a closed space for confining the game balls is formed by at least one of the first wall portion (262), the second wall portion (263), and the game nails (45) that form the first area, and the transparent plate, so that the game balls that have stopped in the first area do not flow into the game ball flow path.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In conventional gaming machines, screws that require operation with a screwdriver are used to secure parts located on the front frame and other components. In this case, when removing the screws due to component failure or maintenance, it can be difficult to do so smoothly, and if a problem occurs during play, the player may be unable to play for an extended period of time. In contrast, gaming machines such as those described above use large-diameter screws that can be attached and removed by hand, allowing for quick operation in the event of component failure or maintenance. This prevents the player from being unable to play for an extended period of time even if a problem occurs during play, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the path structure provided in conventional gaming machines to guide game balls that have flowed down the game area to the stage is not tunnel-shaped, and collisions with other game balls flowing down the game area can prevent them from being guided to the stage, disappointing the player. In contrast, the warp section of the gaming machine described above has a tunnel-shaped structure, making it possible to guide game balls to the stage without interference from other game balls, thereby reducing player disappointment and increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by positioning the tunnel section's flow path behind the game area, the stage structure can be simplified, and game balls are prevented from falling from the stage without hitting the center hole, reducing the possibility of player disappointment and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the passageway in conventional gaming machines that guides gaming balls that have flowed down the play area to the stage is designed so that the surface on which the gaming balls flow down the passageway is flush with the play area. In this case, the stage structure becomes complex as the balls are forced to enter the center hole from the stage, and there is a possibility that more gaming balls will fall from the stage without entering the center hole. In contrast, in gaming machines equipped with the warp section passageway described above, the tunnel section's flow path is located behind the play area, simplifying the stage structure and preventing gaming balls from falling from the stage without entering the center hole, reducing the possibility of player disappointment and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the past, if a malfunction occurred during play and the front frame 53 was released, a game ball flowing down the play area 3 would accidentally move into the stopping space. If the front frame 53 were then closed, the game ball that moved into this stopping space could enter the flow path of the play area 3, hindering the flow of other game balls and causing a disadvantage to the player. In contrast, in the gaming machine described above, the stopping space is an enclosed space, so game balls that move into the stopping space cannot enter the flow path of the play area 3, reducing the possibility of the player being disadvantaged and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Aspect 8]
A gaming machine comprising an outer frame (51) forming the outer shell of the gaming machine, an inner frame (52) located inside the outer frame, a front frame (53) provided on the outer frame, a gaming board (2) attached to the inner frame, a gaming control unit (81) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a first board, a performance control unit (91) provided on the back of the gaming board and having a second board, and a first operation unit (161),
The front frame is
An opening (54) is provided, and a transparent plate (57) is attached to the opening;
a second operating unit (60) operable by a player and different from the first operating unit;
a speaker (67) for outputting sound;
A specific component (96) among the components including the transparent plate and the speaker is attached using a predetermined fixing member (79);
The game board is
a display screen (7a) on which the image to be displayed is controlled by the performance control unit and which can display a demo image when a game is not being played;
a game area (3) in which game nails (45) are provided and game balls flow down;
a launching unit (112) that launches game balls into the game area by operating the second operating unit;
a rail portion (4) for guiding the game balls launched from the launch portion to the game area;
An entrance (20) where the entrance of a game ball triggers a special drawing lottery;
A special flow path (12) that is a flow path for game balls that flow down the game area and easily enter the ball entrance;
A lamp (66) whose light emission mode is controlled by the performance control unit;
a first movable prop (14) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a first origin position and a first performance position;
and a second movable prop (15) that is operated by the performance control unit and is movable between a second origin position and a second performance position,
The gaming area includes:
The facility comprises a first play area (3A) and a second play area (3B),
The performance control unit
After the power supply is started, an initial operation for operating the first movable part and the second movable part, an initial display for displaying an image on the display screen, and an initial light emission for illuminating the lamp can be performed;
The gaming machine displays a first read code (QRU1 to 4) that can be read from a first direction, a second read code (QRT) that can be read from a second direction different from the first direction, and a third read code (QRS1, 2) that can be read from a third direction different from the first direction and the second direction,
At least one of the first read codes is displayed in the inner frame and is difficult for a player to see,
At least one of the second read codes is displayed on the game control unit,
In at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate, the through holes are filled with a metal member to form a non-through hole.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In conventional gaming machines, the read code was displayed in a position where it could be read by the player, even if the information that could be obtained by reading it was information that the player did not need to obtain, such as information about the parts that make up the gaming machine. In this case, the player would have to waste time obtaining unnecessary information, which was likely to hinder smooth gameplay. In contrast, in the gaming machine described above, read codes that contain information that the player does not need to obtain, such as information about the parts that make up the gaming machine, are displayed in a position where they cannot be read by the player. This increases the player's chances of smooth gameplay without having to waste time obtaining unnecessary information, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in conventional gaming machines, readable codes that can be read to obtain information needed during the manufacturing and assembly process, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine, are displayed so that they can be read in a uniform direction. In this case, it is possible that workers may not be able to easily obtain the information during the manufacturing and assembly process, increasing the likelihood of delays in manufacturing and assembly work. In contrast, readable codes displayed in the inner frame are displayed in an orientation that allows them to be read from the front side of the gaming machine (the player side), and readable codes displayed on the gaming control board box and payout control board box are displayed so that they can be read from the right side of the gaming machine (as seen from the player side) or the back side of the gaming machine (the side opposite the player side). This allows workers to easily read readable codes that can be read to obtain information needed during the manufacturing and assembly process, such as information about the components that make up the gaming machine, allowing work to be carried out smoothly.

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, the through-holes in the game control boards were not filled with solder. This could lead to problems such as dust accumulating inside the through-holes or the inner walls of the through-holes corroding due to moisture. In contrast, in gaming machines like the one described above, the through-holes in the game control boards are filled with solder, preventing dust accumulation and corrosion, making problems less likely to occur and allowing players to play smoothly, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Aspect 9]
A first movable part (first movable part 14) that can be operated;
A second movable accessory (second movable accessory 15) that can be operated;
A control means (performance control microcomputer 91) for controlling the first movable role and the second movable role;
A gaming machine equipped with a detection sensor (first movable device 14 detection sensor 14a) that detects whether the first movable device is at the origin position,
The control means controls the gaming machine to:
When the first error state (disconnection error state) occurs, a first error notification (displaying a disconnection error display DS) is executed;
In the second error state (door open error state), a second error notification (displaying the door open error display TK) is executed,
In the third error state (magnetic error state), a third error notification (displaying a text image TJE of "magnetic error") is executed,
The control means
If the first error state is resolved while the first error notification is being executed, the first error notification is terminated when the first error state is resolved (see the time chart of FIG. 70(A) );
If the second error state is resolved while the second error notification is being executed, the second error notification is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second error state was resolved (see the time chart of FIG. 70(C) ).
When the third error notification is being executed, even if the third error state is resolved, the third error notification is not terminated until the power is turned off (see the time chart of FIG. 70(E)).
After the power is restored to the gaming machine,
The control means starts the initial operation of the second movable part after completing the initial operation of the first movable part (FIG. 63).
If the detection sensor does not detect that the first movable part is at the origin position, the control means performs an operation (FIG. 61) to return the first movable part to the origin position, and then performs the initial operation of the first movable part.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Previously, when there were multiple movable parts and the movable parts collided with each other, the initial movements of each movable part were performed while they were colliding. Or, the initial movements of the movable parts that collided were not performed at all. In this case, many games were played with malfunctioning movable parts, compromising the game's playability.

In this embodiment, there are multiple movable parts, and if the movable parts collide with each other, they perform their initial actions in order, so all of the movable parts can perform their initial actions without colliding. This reduces the number of times players play with malfunctioning movable parts, which increases the fun factor.

Previously, the initial movement of a movable device began from the position of the movable device when the initial movement was to be performed. As a result, the starting position of the initial movement could differ, resulting in a different initial movement. It was difficult to find a defective movable device, and players ended up playing with a defective movable device, which impaired the game's playability.

In this embodiment, before the initial action is performed, the initial action is moved to the origin position, so the starting position of the initial action is always the origin position, and the initial action is the same every time. This makes it easier to determine whether the movable part is normal, allows for the replacement of defective movable parts, and reduces the need to play with defective movable parts. As a result, the game can be more entertaining.

Previously, once the error state was resolved, the error notification would immediately disappear, making cheating difficult to detect. This made cheating easier to perpetrate.

In this embodiment, for some errors, the error notification continues even after the error state is cleared, making it easier to detect cheating. This makes cheating more difficult to detect. Furthermore, for other errors, the error notification is made in line with the error state as in the past, and no more error notification is made than necessary, so as not to impair the gameplay. As a result, the game's enjoyment can be enhanced.

[Aspect 10]
a display means (display screen 7a) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
Light-emitting means (board lamp 5 and frame lamp 66) capable of emitting light in a plurality of colors;
a first sound output means (left speaker 67a) capable of outputting a plurality of types of sounds;
a second sound output means (right speaker 67b) capable of outputting a plurality of types of sounds;
A movable member (first movable element 14) that can be operated;
a fixed member (warp portion 12) having a transparent portion;
a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 91) that controls the display means, the light emitting means, the first sound output means, the second sound output means, and the movable member;
A gaming machine equipped with a gaming control means (a gaming control microcomputer 81) that controls the gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern (left decorative pattern 8L, center decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R),
When the gaming machine is powered on,
The game control means may clear specific information about the game state stored in the game control means (clear RAM) or may not clear the specific information (restore power after power failure),
The performance control means
The movable member performs a predetermined initial operation (FIGS. 63(A) to (E)),
If the specific information is cleared,
The display means displays the decorative symbols in different numbers (left decorative symbol 8L "1", middle decorative symbol 8C "2", right decorative symbol 8R "3") than the numbers (left decorative symbol 8L "7", middle decorative symbol 8C "8", right decorative symbol 8R "9") that would be displayed if the specific information is not cleared,
The first light-emitting means emits a predetermined initial light (FIG. 64(A)),
The first sound output means outputs a predetermined initial sound (FIG. 71(B1)),
The second sound output means outputs a predetermined initial sound (FIG. 71(B2)),
When the movable member is at the original position,
A specific portion of the movable member (the upper portion 141 of the first movable device) overlaps with the display means as seen by the player,
A specific part of the movable member can be seen through the transparent part (warp part 12) of the fixed member.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Previously, the outcome of decorative symbols when the power was turned on was not fixed. The outcome of each decorative symbol was set by the value of RAM when the power was turned on. As a result, it was not possible to tell whether the state was after the power was turned on and play had begun, or before the power was turned on and play had begun. It was not possible to select a gaming machine that had been turned on and no one was playing.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbol number displayed when the power is turned on is fixed. This allows the player to see the state before the power is turned on and no one is playing, and select a gaming machine that has been turned on but no one is playing. This increases the player's interest.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbol roll when the RAM is cleared is different from the decorative symbol roll when the power is restored. This allows you to tell whether the game has been played after the RAM has been cleared or after the power has been restored, and you can select a gaming machine after the RAM has been cleared or a gaming machine after the power has been restored. This increases the player's interest.

Previously, the operation of moving parts, lamp LEDs, speakers, etc. was not checked. As a result, even if there was a malfunction with these, players continued playing without noticing. When there was a malfunction, the presentation was impaired and the gameplay was compromised.

In this embodiment, the operation of movable parts, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. can be checked, and any malfunctioning movable parts can be replaced, reducing the need to play with malfunctioning movable parts. As a result, the game can be more entertaining.

Previously, gaming machines did not use transparent components. As a result, when components overlapped, players could not see the components at the back, and it was not possible to create effects using those components. This limited the area in which effects could be created.

In this embodiment, some of the components are transparent, allowing the player to see the components behind those components. This expands the range of possible effects and increases the game's appeal.

[Aspect 11]
A movable movable accessory (first movable accessory 14),
A first control means (performance control microcomputer 91) for controlling the movable role object;
a solenoid (first large prize opening solenoid 33) for opening and closing the openable prize opening;
A gaming machine comprising a second control means (a gaming control microcomputer 81) for controlling the solenoid,
The first control means controls the gaming machine to:
In the first error state (disconnection error state), a first error notification (displaying a disconnection error display DS) is executed;
In the second error state (door open error state), a second error notification (displaying the door open error display TK) is executed,
In the third error state (magnetic error state), a third error notification (displaying a text image TJE of "magnetic error") is executed,
The first control means
If the first error state is resolved while the first error notification is being executed, the first error notification is terminated when the first error state is resolved (see the time chart of FIG. 70(A) );
If the second error state is resolved while the second error notification is being executed, the second error notification is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second error state was resolved (see the time chart of FIG. 70(C) ).
When the third error notification is being executed, even if the third error state is resolved, the third error notification is not terminated until the power is turned off (see the time chart of FIG. 70(E)).
After the power is turned on, if the movable part is not at the origin position, an origin movement operation is performed to attempt to move the movable part to the origin position (FIG. 70(A)),
If the movable object cannot be moved to the origin position even after the origin movement operation is performed, a re-origin movement operation is performed within a predetermined time (FIG. 65(D)),
If the movable part cannot be moved to the origin position even after repeating the re-origin movement operation a predetermined number of times, the movable part is not operated until a predetermined timing (FIG. 65(E)),
If the movable role object is not at the origin position at the predetermined timing (a predetermined time has elapsed since the transition to the customer waiting state), the movable role object is moved to the origin (FIG. 65(F)),
The second control means causes a current to flow through the solenoid to operate a part of the solenoid, and causes the solenoid to open and close the winning opening (FIG. 79).
The operation of a part of the solenoid is visible from outside the gaming machine (FIG. 79).
A gaming machine characterized by:

Previously, there was no set number of retry attempts, and if a malfunction occurred that prevented a movable device from moving to the origin area, the retry attempt would continue until the power was turned off. In this case, the retry attempt would interfere with play, reducing the game's enjoyment.

In this embodiment, a number of retry operations is set, and even if a malfunction occurs in which the movable device cannot move to the origin area, the movable device is stopped after a predetermined number of retry operations. Even if a malfunction occurs in which the movable device cannot move to the origin area, the retry operation does not interfere with the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Previously, once the error state was resolved, the error notification would immediately disappear, making cheating difficult to detect. This made cheating easier to perpetrate.

In this embodiment, for some errors, the error notification continues even after the error state is cleared, making it easier to detect cheating. This makes cheating more difficult to detect. Furthermore, for other errors, the error notification is made in line with the error state as in the past, and no more error notification is made than necessary, so as not to impair the gameplay. As a result, the game's enjoyment can be enhanced.

Previously, the game board 2 was made of an opaque material, so the components that open and close the electric chute 22 could not be seen from the game board 2 side of the gaming machine 1. As a result, if there was a problem with the component that opens and closes the electric chute 22 and the electric chute 22 could not be opened or closed, it could go unnoticed. If the electric chute 22 did not open, the ball could not be placed in the second starting hole 21, which interfered with gameplay.

In this embodiment, the game board 2 is made of a transparent material, and the member that opens and closes the electric chute 22 can be seen from the game board 2 side of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, if there is a visible defect in the member that opens and closes the electric chute 22, the electric chute 22 can be replaced and the ball can be placed in the second starting hole 21. This allows the player to play with greater peace of mind, which in turn increases the player's interest.

[Aspect 12]
a display means (display screen 7a) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
An operable movable part (first movable part 14);
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (board lamp 5 and frame lamp 66);
a first sound output means (left speaker 67a) capable of outputting a plurality of types of sounds;
a second sound output means (right speaker 67b) capable of outputting a plurality of types of sounds;
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 91) that controls the display means, the movable props, the light emitting means, the first sound output means, and the second sound output means;
A gaming machine equipped with a game control means (performance control microcomputer 91) that controls the game state,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is turned on, the gaming control means may clear specific information related to the gaming state stored in the gaming control means (clear RAM),
The performance control means
If the specific information is cleared,
The predetermined initial operation of the movable part is performed (FIG. 63 (A) to (E)),
The light emitting means emits a predetermined initial light (FIG. 64(A)),
The first sound output means outputs a predetermined initial sound (FIG. 71(B1)),
The second sound output means outputs a predetermined initial sound (FIG. 71(B2)),
When the initial operation is being performed, even if fluctuations start, the initial operation is not stopped but is continued (FIG. 66).
The light emitting pattern to be performed as the initial light emission is not performed from the end of the initial light emission until the power of the gaming machine is turned off (FIGS. 105 and 106).
A gaming machine characterized by:

Previously, the operation of moving parts, lamp LEDs, speakers, etc. was not checked. As a result, even if there was a malfunction with these, players continued playing without noticing. When there was a malfunction, the presentation was impaired and the gameplay was compromised.

In this embodiment, the operation of movable parts, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. can be checked, and any malfunctioning movable parts can be replaced, reducing the need to play with malfunctioning movable parts. As a result, the game can be more entertaining.

Previously, when a variable effect involving the movement of a movable device was being performed while the initial movement of the movable device was being performed, the initial movement of the movable device was stopped and the movable device was made to perform the movement associated with the variable effect from that position. As a result, an action that would not normally be performed could sometimes be performed, and this action could be thought of as a premium effect. Even though the movement was a losing variation, it was thought to be a premium effect, and the gameplay was impaired.

In this embodiment, even if a variable effect involving the movement of a movable device is performed while the initial movement of the movable device is being performed, the initial movement continues, preventing it from being perceived as a premium effect. As a result, interest can be increased.

Previously, the initial operation of the lamp LED was to illuminate a variable effect. As a result, players could mistakenly believe that a highly anticipated effect was occurring when they saw the variable effect illumination pattern. This caused players an unpleasant experience.

In this embodiment, the initial operation of the lamp LED is to light up in a different pattern from the lighting pattern of the variable effects, which does not mislead the player into thinking that a highly anticipated effect is being performed, and does not cause the player any discomfort. As a result, the player's interest can be increased.

[Aspect 13]
A gaming machine (1),
An outer frame (51) that forms an outer shell;
an inner frame (52) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame;
A game board (2) attached to the inner frame to form a game area (3, transparent panel 2a);
a front frame attached to the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame in an openable and closable manner, and having an opening formed therein into which a glass unit (57) is fitted so as to make the playing area of the game board visible;
a launching device (112) for launching game balls into the game area;
an image display unit (7) for displaying an image;
a game control unit (81) for executing game control;
A performance control unit (91) that executes performance control based on a command from the game control unit;
a unit portion (210) attached to the play area;
Equipped with
The unit part comprises:
When viewed from the front, a first rail portion (212) is arranged in the upper left of the game area and can guide game balls to a left game area (3A) on the left side of the game area;
A first step portion (218) that is disposed continuously to the right of the first rail portion when viewed from the front and restricts the movement of the game ball from left to right along the first rail portion;
When viewed from the front, a second rail portion (213) is arranged continuously to the right of the first step portion and can guide the game ball to the left game area;
A second step portion (219) that is arranged continuously to the right of the second rail portion when viewed from the front and restricts the movement of the game ball from left to right along the second rail portion;
a third rail portion (214) that is disposed continuously to the right of the second step portion when viewed from the front, and that guides the game ball that is launched by the launching device and has passed over the second step portion to a right game area (3B) on the right side of the game area;
a fourth rail portion (215) arranged continuously with the third rail portion and having a larger inclination angle than the third rail portion;
Mounting portions (220, 223) for screwing into the play area;
through holes (220b, 223b) provided in the mounting portion and through which screws are inserted;
a protrusion (202) provided on the mounting portion, protruding in a direction in which the screw is inserted near the through hole, and inserted into the corresponding through hole (2ad);
and
The performance control unit
In the case of the first error state (S6601: YES, S6605: YES), the first error notification is executed (S6602, S6606).
If the second error state occurs (S6405: YES), a second error notification is executed (S6407).
If the third error state occurs (S6609: YES, S6613: YES), a third error notification is executed (S6610, S6614).
If the first error state is resolved while the first error notification is being executed (S6603: YES, S6607: YES), the first error notification is terminated at the point in time when the first error state is resolved (S6604, S6608).
If the second error state is resolved while the second error notification is being executed (S6402: NO), the second error notification is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second error state was resolved (S6404).
If the third error state is resolved while the third error notification is being executed, the third error notification is not terminated until the supply of power is cut off.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Previously, when the launch strength of a game ball became high enough, the game ball would mistakenly reach the right-side right play area 3B, even when the game was in a play state where hitting from the left was recommended. According to the above-described embodiment, only game balls launched with a launch strength that exceeds the second step portion reach the right play area 3B, thereby preventing the game ball from mistakenly reaching the right-side right play area 3B, even when the game was in a play state where hitting from the left was recommended, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, the unit part has at least an attachment part for screwing into the play area, a through hole provided in the attachment part and through which the screw is inserted, and a protrusion provided in the attachment part that protrudes near the through hole in the direction in which the screw is inserted and is inserted into the corresponding through hole. As a result, when screwing the unit part, the protrusion is inserted into the through hole in the play area (transparent panel), making it easy to position the unit part.

Furthermore, the presentation control unit executes a first error notification in the first error state, a second error notification in the second error state, and a third error notification in the third error state. If the first error state is resolved while the first error notification is being executed, the presentation control unit terminates the first error notification at the time the first error state is resolved. If the second error state is resolved while the second error notification is being executed, the presentation control unit terminates the second error notification a predetermined time after the second error state is resolved. If the third error state is resolved while the third error notification is being executed, the presentation control unit does not terminate the third error notification until the power supply is cut off. This enables error notifications at the appropriate time, enabling fair play and increasing the enjoyment of the game. For example, if a player intentionally hits a game ball into the right play area on the right side despite a play state in which hitting left is recommended, an appropriate error notification will be issued, enabling fair play and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Aspect 14]
A gaming machine (1),
An outer frame (51) that forms an outer shell;
an inner frame (52) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame;
A game board (2) attached to the inner frame to form a game area (3, transparent panel 2a);
a front frame attached to the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame in an openable and closable manner, and having an opening formed therein into which a glass unit (57) is fitted so as to make the playing area of the game board visible;
a launching device (112) for launching game balls into the game area;
an image display unit (7) for displaying an image;
a game control unit (81) for executing game control;
A performance control unit (91) that executes performance control based on a command from the game control unit;
a unit portion (250) attached to the play area;
Equipped with
The unit part comprises:
A plate-shaped base (251a),
A first wall portion (256) provided to protrude forward from the base portion so as to form a flow path for game balls in the game area;
a second wall portion (252, 253, 254, 255) provided separately from the first wall portion so as to protrude forward from the base portion;
A stopping space forming section (251a, 252 to 256) that forms a stopping space in which game balls can stop by at least one of the first wall section, the second wall section, and obstacle nails driven into the game area;
a mounting portion (258) for threadedly attaching to the play area;
a through hole (258b) provided in the mounting portion and through which a screw is inserted;
and
The stopping space forming section forms a space for confining the game balls together with the glass unit of the front frame so that the game balls stopped in the stopping space do not move from the stopping space to a flow path of the game balls when the front frame is closed,
The front surface of the mounting part is a flow surface (258c) of the game balls, and the space in front of the mounting part is a flow path for the game balls. When the unit part is screwed into the game area by the screw, the game balls passing through the flow path can come into contact with the head of the screw.
The performance control unit
In the case of the first error state (S6601: YES, S6605: YES), the first error notification is executed (S6602, S6606).
If the second error state occurs (S6405: YES), a second error notification is executed (S6407).
If the third error state occurs (S6609: YES, S6613: YES), a third error notification is executed (S6610, S6614).
If the first error state is resolved while the first error notification is being executed (S6603: YES, S6607: YES), the first error notification is terminated at the point in time when the first error state is resolved (S6604, S6608).
If the second error state is resolved while the second error notification is being executed (S6402: NO), the second error notification is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second error state was resolved (S6404).
If the third error state is resolved while the third error notification is being executed, the third error notification is not terminated until the supply of power is cut off.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the past, when the front frame 53 was opened due to a ball jam or other reason, a game ball that had fallen from the play area 3 would hit the back of a store employee's hand and enter the parking space. If the front frame 53 were closed without allowing the game ball to enter the parking space, the game ball would remain in the parking space. Even in this case, the glass unit 57 attached to the front frame 53 covers the parking space from the front side of the reinforcement unit 250, so the game ball is trapped in the parking space, preventing it from entering the flow path and interfering with game balls flowing down the flow path. As a result, fair play can be achieved.

The unit unit has at least an attachment section for screwing into the play area and a through-hole provided in the attachment section through which the screw is inserted. The front surface of the attachment section serves as the flow surface for game balls, and the space in front of the attachment section serves as the flow path for game balls. When the unit unit is screwed into the play area with the screw, game balls passing through the flow path can come into contact with the head of the screw. This reduces the number of obstacle nails and eliminates the need to drive them in. Friction with the screw heads can also slow the movement speed of the game balls and cause them to move irregularly, resulting in more random and fair play.

Furthermore, the presentation control unit executes a first error notification in the first error state, executes a second error notification in the second error state, and executes a third error notification in the third error state. If the first error state is resolved while the first error notification is being executed, the presentation control unit terminates the first error notification at the time the first error state is resolved. If the second error state is resolved while the second error notification is being executed, the presentation control unit terminates the second error notification a predetermined time after the second error state is resolved. If the third error state is resolved while the third error notification is being executed, the presentation control unit does not terminate the third error notification until the power supply is cut off. This enables error notifications to be issued at the appropriate time, ensuring fair gameplay.

[Aspect 15]
A gaming machine (1),
An outer frame (51) that forms an outer shell;
an inner frame (52) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame;
A game board (2) attached to the inner frame to form a game area (3, transparent panel 2a);
a front frame attached to the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame in an openable and closable manner, and having an opening formed therein into which a glass unit (57) is fitted so as to make the playing area of the game board visible;
a launching device (112) for launching game balls into the game area;
an image display unit (7) for displaying an image;
a game control unit (81) for executing game control;
A performance control unit (91) that executes performance control based on a command from the game control unit;
a unit portion (230) attached to the play area;
Equipped with
The unit part comprises:
General prize slots (27) and
An outlet (16),
A contact portion (234) that contacts a game ball flowing down at an upstream portion of the unit portion when the game area is viewed from the front, and suppresses the moving speed of the game ball;
a mounting portion (232) for screwing onto the play area;
a through hole (232b) provided in the mounting portion and through which the screw (201) is inserted;
and
Further provided is a display unit (D) that displays the general winning slot and the out slot in a distinguishable manner,
The front surface of the mounting part is a flow surface (232c) of the game balls, and the space in front of the mounting part is a flow path for the game balls. When the unit part is screwed into the game area by the screw, the game balls passing through the flow path can come into contact with the head of the screw.
The performance control unit
When the power supply is started in the first operation procedure (S6003: YES), the image display unit displays a display to be displayed during the recovery of the gaming machine, and then displays a decorative symbol with a predetermined first number roll (S6004, S6005).
When the power supply is started by the second operation procedure (S6021: YES), the image display unit displays a display that is displayed during the recovery of the gaming machine, and then displays a decorative symbol with the first number rolled, or displays a decorative symbol with a second number rolled that is different from the predetermined first number rolled (S6202, S6203).
A gaming machine characterized by:

In the past, even when a general winning opening was provided, it was difficult to win, which could reduce interest in the game. In contrast, according to the above-mentioned aspect, the unit unit has at least a general winning opening, an outlet, and an abutment section upstream of the unit unit when the game area is viewed from the front, where a game ball contacts the game ball flowing downstream and slows down the game ball's movement speed, and further includes a display section that displays a clear distinction between the general winning opening and the outlet. As a result, the abutment section slows down the game ball's movement speed, making it relatively easy for the game ball to win a general winning opening. Furthermore, since the outlet 16 is provided and the display section makes it possible to distinguish between the general winning opening and the outlet, players are curious to see which one the ball will land in, which increases interest in the game.

The unit unit also has at least an attachment section for screwing into the play area and a through-hole in the attachment section through which the screw is inserted. The front surface of the attachment section serves as the flow surface for game balls, and the space in front of the attachment section serves as the flow path for game balls. When the unit unit is screwed into the play area with the screw, game balls passing through the flow path can come into contact with the head of the screw. This reduces the number of obstacle nails and eliminates the need to drive them in. Friction with the screw heads also reduces the game ball's movement speed and can impart irregular movement to the game ball, contributing to increased enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the above aspect, when the power supply is started in the first operation procedure, the effect control unit displays on the image display unit the display to be displayed while the gaming machine is being restored, and then displays the decorative symbol with a predetermined first number roll; and when the power supply is started in the second operation procedure, the effect control unit displays on the image display unit the display to be displayed while the gaming machine is being restored, and then displays the decorative symbol with the first number roll, or displays the decorative symbol with a predetermined second number roll that is different from the first number roll.

Therefore, by displaying the first result whether power supply is started by the first operation procedure or the second operation procedure, it becomes difficult to tell which operation procedure started the power supply. This increases the fun of guessing which operation procedure started the power supply, making the game more interesting.

On the other hand, if the first number is displayed when power supply is started in the first operating procedure, and the second number is displayed when power supply is started in the second operating procedure, it becomes easier to understand which operating procedure started the power supply. This makes it easier to select a gaming machine and increases the enjoyment of playing.

[Aspect 16]
A gaming machine (1),
An outer frame (51) that forms an outer shell;
an inner frame (52) attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame;
A game board (2) attached to the inner frame to form a game area (3, transparent panel 2a);
a front frame attached to the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame in an openable and closable manner, and having an opening formed therein into which a glass unit (57) is fitted so as to make the playing area of the game board visible;
a launching device (112) for launching game balls into the game area;
an image display unit (7) for displaying an image;
a game control unit (81) for executing game control;
A performance control unit (91) that executes performance control based on a command from the game control unit;
a unit portion (260) attached to the play area;
Equipped with
The unit part comprises:
a cover part (261) for covering from the front side a ball entry opening (30) which changes between a difficult ball entry state and an easy ball entry state by a solenoid (33);
Mounting portions (267, 268) for screwing into the play area;
through holes (267b, 268b) provided in the mounting portion and through which the screws (201) are inserted;
a protrusion (202) provided on the mounting portion, protruding in a direction in which the screw is inserted near the through hole, and inserted into the corresponding through hole (2ad);
and
The cover portion (261) is configured so that the operation of a part of the solenoid can be seen through a transparent portion (T) formed in the cover portion,
The performance control unit
When the power supply is started in the first operation procedure (S6003: YES), the image display unit displays a display to be displayed during the recovery of the gaming machine, and then displays a decorative symbol with a predetermined first number roll (S6004, S6005).
When the power supply is started by the second operation procedure (S6021: YES), the image display unit displays a display to be displayed during recovery of the gaming machine, and then displays a decorative symbol with the first number rolled, or displays a decorative symbol with a second number rolled that is different from the predetermined first number rolled (S6202, S6203).
A gaming machine characterized by:

Conventionally, solenoids are located behind the panel and are not visible. This makes it difficult to detect malfunctions (such as breakdowns) in the solenoid, resulting in losses for players. According to this aspect, the operation of part of the solenoid is visible through a transparent portion formed in the cover of the unit, making it easier to detect malfunctions (such as breakdowns), preventing players from suffering losses and ensuring fair play. Furthermore, the unit has a protrusion that protrudes in the direction in which a screw is inserted near the through-hole on the back of the mounting part and is inserted into the corresponding through-hole, making it easy to position the unit.

Furthermore, according to the above aspect, when the power supply is started in the first operation procedure, the effect control unit displays on the image display unit the display to be displayed while the gaming machine is being restored, and then displays the decorative symbol with a predetermined first number roll; and when the power supply is started in the second operation procedure, the effect control unit displays on the image display unit the display to be displayed while the gaming machine is being restored, and then displays the decorative symbol with the first number roll, or displays the decorative symbol with a predetermined second number roll that is different from the first number roll.

Therefore, by displaying the first result whether power supply is started using the first operating procedure or the second operating procedure, it becomes difficult to tell which operating procedure started the power supply. This makes it impossible for the player to tell which operating procedure started the power supply, ensuring fair play.

On the other hand, if the first number is displayed when power supply is started using the first operating procedure, and the second number is displayed when power supply is started using the second operating procedure, it becomes easier to understand which operating procedure started the power supply. This makes it easier for the hall to understand which operating procedure started the power supply, leading to more appropriate hall operations and fair gaming.

[Other Modifications]
The various display effects described above may not include some of the effects, or may include effects other than those described above.

In the above embodiment, the gaming machine 1 has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a mahjong ball gaming machine. If the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium can be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation units operated by the player are equipped with the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68, but are not limited to these; the operation units operated by the player may also be levers, triggers, etc. Also, in the display effects of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effects may be executed using a button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display effects may be executed using an image representing the sword member 65, or the display effects may be executed using an image representing a lever or trigger.

The gaming machine 1 in the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but this is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured to execute various effects using the display devices (main display screen 7a, sub-display screen 64, etc.). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form a single display effect. In other words, two or more of the above-described multiple effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined.
Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 is equipped with a sub-display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), and the display effects performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub-display screen 64, or the display effects performed on the sub-display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

This aspect has been described above based on embodiments and modifications, but the above-described embodiments are intended to facilitate understanding of this aspect and are not intended to limit this aspect. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit or the scope of the claims, and equivalents thereof are also included in this aspect.

1... Gaming machine 3... Play area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Hold image (hold icon)
9C...Relevant hold image (hold icon)
14... First movable device 15... Second movable device 17... Large prize opening start port 20... First start port (first ball entrance port)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
64... Sub-display screen 69... Movable frame accessory 66... Frame lamp 81... Game control microcomputer 91... Performance control microcomputer 101... Image control microcomputer

Claims (1)

An outer frame fixed to the game island;
a front frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and having an opening;
an inner frame attached to the front frame so as to be openable and closable, and attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board that is detachably attached to the inner frame and has a game area that is visible through the opening;
A unit portion attached to the front side of the game board;
A power supply board box that houses a rectangular power supply board attached to the rear side of the inner frame below the game board;
A game control board box is attached to the rear side of the game board and houses a rectangular game control board on which a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game is mounted;
A performance control board box is attached to the rear side of the game board at a position different from the game control board box, and houses a performance control board on which a performance control microprocessor capable of controlling the progress of performance based on commands from the game control board is implemented;
A gaming machine comprising:
On the front side of the front frame,
At least a frame lamp is provided at a predetermined position,
The light emission mode of the frame lamp is as follows:
A light-emitting mode for when power is restored that is illuminated when no malfunction occurs in the gaming machine when power is restored;
A plurality of types of light-emitting modes for performance that are emitted during performance;
There is at least
The light-emitting mode for power restoration and the plurality of types of light-emitting modes for performance are different light-emitting modes,
The game control board includes:
a first electronic component mounting surface on which various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are mounted;
a first electronic component non-mounting surface on the opposite side of the first electronic component mounting surface, on which various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are not mounted;
A plurality of first electronic component through holes through which lead wires of various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are inserted;
a solid ground on the first electronic component mounting surface;
a solid ground on the first non-electronic component mounting surface;
a plurality of first ground through holes that electrically connect the solid ground on the first electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground on the first electronic component non-mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the game control board, lead wires of various electronic components including the game control microprocessor are inserted from the first electronic component mounting surface into the first electronic component through holes and protrude from the first electronic component non-mounting surface, and are soldered on the first electronic component non-mounting surface, and among the plurality of first ground through holes, some of the first ground through holes along a specific side of the outer edge of the game control board are not filled with solder, and the proportion of the first ground through holes that are filled with solder is higher than the proportion of the first ground through holes that are not filled with solder,
The power supply board includes:
a second electronic component mounting surface on which various electronic components are mounted;
a second electronic component non-mounting surface on the opposite side of the second electronic component mounting surface, on which no electronic components are mounted;
a plurality of second electronic component through holes through which lead wires of various electronic components are inserted;
a solid ground on the second electronic component mounting surface;
a solid ground on the second non-electronic component mounting surface;
a plurality of second ground through holes electrically connecting the solid ground of the second electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the second electronic component non-mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the power supply board, lead wires of various electronic components are inserted from the second electronic component mounting surface into the second electronic component through holes and protrude from the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and are soldered on the second electronic component non-mounting surface, and among the plurality of second ground through holes, some of the second ground through holes along a specific side of the outer edge of the power supply board are not filled with solder, and the proportion of the second ground through holes that are filled with solder is higher than the proportion of the second ground through holes that are not filled with solder,
The performance control board includes:
A third electronic component mounting surface on which a plurality of electronic component pads on which various electronic components including the performance control microprocessor are mounted are formed;
A fourth electronic component mounting surface is a surface opposite to the third electronic component mounting surface, and has a plurality of electronic component pads formed thereon on which various electronic components not including the performance control microprocessor are mounted;
a solid ground on the third electronic component mounting surface;
a solid ground on the fourth electronic component mounting surface;
a plurality of third ground through holes electrically connecting the solid ground of the third electronic component mounting surface and the solid ground of the fourth electronic component mounting surface;
is at least formed,
In the performance control board, various electronic components including the performance control microprocessor are soldered on the third electronic component mounting surface while being placed on electronic component pads, and various electronic components not including the performance control microprocessor are soldered on the fourth electronic component mounting surface while being placed on electronic component pads, and a higher proportion of the third ground through holes are not filled with solder than are filled with solder,
The game board has a through hole for attaching the unit part,
The unit part includes:
A flow-down surface through which game balls can flow down and which does not have an entry port through which the game balls can enter ;
An inclined portion connecting the flow-down surface and the play area;
a through hole for inserting a screw at a predetermined position on the downflow surface;
a protrusion disposed near the through hole and protruding rearward from the rear side of the flow-down surface;
is formed,
The through hole and the protrusion are respectively arranged on the upstream side of the downflow surface and the downstream side of the downflow surface,
The protrusions on the upstream side of the downflow surface and the downstream side of the downflow surface are inserted into the corresponding mounting through holes, and the screws are inserted from the front side of the downflow surface into the through holes on the upstream side of the downflow surface and the downstream side of the downflow surface and screwed to the front side of the game board, thereby fixing the unit part to the game board, and game balls flowing down the downflow surface can come into contact with the heads of the screws on the upstream side of the downflow surface and the downstream side of the downflow surface .
A gaming machine characterized by: